Professional Documents
Culture Documents
-^
^,,.,..^.
|>tCrv.
N2.^ '^
,
fr?^
2007
witii
funding from
IVIicrosoft
Corporation
Iittp://www.arcliive.org/details/comparativegramm01boppuoft
COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR
OF THE
SANSKRIT, ZEND,
PROFESSOR
F.
BOPP.
EDWARD
B.
EASTVVICK,
F.R.S., F.S.A.
VOL.
I.
FOURTH EDITION.
Work
of
it
as a Lecture
by
It
at Oxford,
and
other
eminent
scholars have
made
in tlieir researches.
made by
tained,
defects,
I
and
whatever they
may
EDWARD
Hailbybury Collrgk,
Febrvary, 1864
B.
EASTWICK.
PREFACE
TO THB
FIRST EDITION.
HE
cultivated in
Germany,
especially,
of Grimm, Pott, Bopp, and other distinguished Scholars, have given a new
laboui-s
tliis
The
character to
stituted
for
department of literature;
A-ague
the
conjectures
coincidences,
suggested
by
external
and
often
accidental
elementary
principles,
fact
been
made
in
the
generally
or in
the
pages
of
jjeriodical
criticism
yet the
appreciated
in
is
tliis
The
study
of
the
Gemian language
sued;
and the
results
reasonings
which have
led
to
them,
are
withheld
to
and learning
are objects
whom
of cultivated
speech
of the
of interest
and
inquiry.
Translations
infonnation
they would
gla'.ll^
seek
U
for, is
PREFACE.
conveyed, are necessary to bring within their reach
been accumulated
the
illustration
by German
in-
dustry and
erudition,
for
of the history of
human
was
of a
speech.
Fkancis Egerton
translation
some
of
time
since
work which
ture
Comparative
Philology
on
the
Continent
the
In
has
Bopp
of Berlin.
work
class
of affinities
investigated.
Taking
Bopp
witli
has
and
each
Latin, Gothic,
tongues
and
whatever
may
near
be
of
some
of his arguments, he
may
be considered
a
have estabUshed
beyond
reasonable
question
relationship
between
of
the languages
centuries,
of nations
separated
by the
intervention
of physical formation
and
social
institutions,
between
no
the
forms
of
speech
current
among
the
dark-complexioned
of ancient and
suspicion
modem Europe; a
existed
fifty
relationship
of
which
been
satisfactorily
established
Sanskrit language has been carefully studied, and the principles of alphabetical
its
its
As
the Vergleichende
to
is
especially dedicated
a
in
guages, and
Sanskrit
as
exhibits,
the ground-work
it
comparison,
was regarded
most
in-
PKEFAC?E.
the most
m
Engllsli
acceptable of
its
class
to
students:
it
was
subject of translation.
The
execution of the
siderations
work was, however, opposed bj two conextent of the original, and the copiousness
the
A
;
fa-
with
Oriental
Literature,
was reluctant
to
to
of
the
text
required
rather
be represented.
as
was,
perhaps,
over-rated,
is
the
Grammar
and
the
knowledge that
Sanskrit
needed,
examples
and
Zend
speak for
my
work
of contributing, however
Great Britain.
The
difficulty
arising
description.
This,
how-
ever, has
gentleman,
to
of
German
Havinii
Parsees duiing
the period
the
part
to
Germany, where he
him
qualifications enabling
to take a share in
a2
IT
of
the
PREFACE.
\^ergleichen(le
all
tion
Grammatlk.
He
has
accord-
ingly translated
Gramthe
mar, the
rendering
of which was
incompatible with
leisure of the
whom
who has borne a share in its execution, and who has taken warm and liberal interest in its completion. The Vergleicheride Grammatik, originally published in
Parts,
separate
has
not
yet
reached
its
termination.
In
its
Teutonic descendants.
To
these,
the Sclavonic.
He
analogies of the
Celtic
dialects,
general
Grammar.
ficient
The
the
it is
quite suf-
for
parison,
and
quent
investigations.
The
the
first
portions
of
the
present
Grammar
changes,
comprise
the
doctrine
of
euphonic
of
alphabeticiil
comparative
the
inflexions
Substantives
and
Adjectives, and
affinities
of the Cardinal
and
Ordinal
Numerals.
The succeeding
The
is
now
offered
to
stops
Numerals,
but
remainder
and
will
be
With
German,
no8S
o
may
venture to affirm,
acquaintance with
great
scrupuloiis-
although pretending
that
it
very
slender
has
been
it
made with
fidelity
unfrequently
and obscure
H.
Oetoler, 1845.
11.
Wir^ON.
work
tlje
page, comprehending
all
of their relationship,
and an inquiry
One
ideas.
point alone
shall leave
primary
root
i
shall
"
why
the
signifies
" go
why
the
combina-
tion of sounds
I
shall
to
were
the language in
stages of being
ment; yet
in such
be inexplicable,
may
perhaps find
less to offend
them
in
tliis
work than
lead
them
to expect.
signification, and,
tical
with
gramma-
in
fUmily connection.
tu)igues a
new epoch
to
it
its
* Samkrita
signifies
"adorned, completed, perfect "; in respect to lanis thus adapted to denote the entire family or
the elements sam,
compounded of
krita
(nom.
"made," with
VI
PREFACE.
it
grammatical constitution,
so that
it
has
com-
these
two
the
Who
would be brought
accompany,
in
all
pan
the
those perfections
hitlierto
considered
exclusive
property
the
latter,
strife
and
be
adapted
between
by enabling us
ancient
to
The
to
relations
of the
Indian
languages to
their
European kindred
every one
:
be obvious
who
casts a glance at
tance
in part,
we
a comparison with
itself,
from new
stations of observation,
and
to
The
and,
Semitic
languages
are
of
more
compact
they had
little
to
pai-t
down
to succeeding ages
endowed with
(.
at
starting.
The
triconthis
107.),
which distinguishes
The
family bond,
its
more
refined.
The members
of
tliis
PREFACE.
endowments of exceeding
(.
tfi
the
capability
comand
position
and agglutination.
by multipUed
versions
losses,
of the
to
common
to the
family
It is
become
a
fact,
scarcely
recognisable
each other.
at least
Greek
obvious
down
Roman
family,
point of \'iow,
associated with
is
nothmg but
itself,
or with
what
is
of
its
own
contains
much which
from which these forms arose are not foreign to the Greek
and other
sister
languages,
to demonstrate in
my
The
of
close relationship
but
destitute
of
principle
and
critical
now from a century and a half; and that language is so in its Grammar and so clear in its affinities, that had
earlier submitted to a rigorous
perfect
it
been
this treatise
a. M. 1816. A translation of my English revision of " Analytical Comparison of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin and Teutonic Languages," in the "Annals of Oriental Literature," London
Frankfort
(
18-20.)
by Dr. Pacht,
is
to
to
me when
Till
PREFACE.
and, with
it,
of
itself,
of the entire
Germanic
stock, to
the
necessarily
all its
variations,
and by
this
time
For
what
is
with our mother tongue in her oldest and most perfect form
Since the Sanskrit has appeared above our horizon, that element
fact,
however,
in
this
department, f
We
need
"On
It
com-
pleted in 1814 and published in 1818, from which Vater gives an extract
in his
Comparative Tables.
him
sively
sensibly, as
known ; we
more
with
was
in a condition to use it
intelligence.
Under
halts halfway
We
more acutely
and see
Grimm
(. 87.,
We
Hum-
boldt on the indispensable necessity of the Sanskrit for the history and
1.
133).
We may
here borrow,
to
the
vt)
**
Aa
ail
Greek
serves
not for
however, according to A.
perfect Indian
W.
mark, the
far
more
Grammar may,
The
dialect
the oldest and least corrupted must, in the end, present the
most
found rules for the general exposition ol'the race, and thus lead us on to
the reformation, without the entire subversion of the rules hitherto
discovered, of the
more
recoijt
modes of speech."
PREFACE.
IX
of most
prejudice
the variety
many
languages
is
identity
recogis
nised
of discrepancy
learn
excluded.
one
thing,
i.e.
language,
to
describe
confine
its
mechanism and
The
learner
may
be studied
must pass
dependency
into the
To
me
present period,
the process
to the little
many
to
theory
more
tlie
would appear
be no longer
intelli<^ible to
disciples of Zoroaster.
satisfy
p.
Haoren,
I
33) that
am
PeHvi
ti-ans-
conveying
translates.
singular mistakes
French
translation to the
Zend expresiji
the Pehlvi
the oblique
:
interpretations of the
cases,
Zend
to
original.
Almost
as
all
by
degi-ees,
too, ai-e
come
take rank
nominatives
the
numbers,
sometimes mistaken.
Fui-ther,
we fiud forms
PREFACE.
of cases produced
by the
also
by
abstract nouns.*
know, no
* I give the
system of representation
first
to Anquetil
(II.
435):
^c&auCa) ahmdhem,
P.
rouman
(cf. p.
"jV
"moij"
m^jq^m
A. '^bon"
ahubya,
''bonis"
215), P. avaeh,
'^excellent;"
k5^;oaj
^CfeV^uU
est;"
also
"I am,"
"he
is,"
A. "il
Mi>c^^
"mundi"
bis,
"twice,"
^^^j^aj/aJj
baratihyo, ''ferenti-
i^^
tS, ''tui,"
"P.
aj^jw^
zakedj,
smitten" (cf. Sansk. hatas from Aan), P. rnaitouned, "he smites," A. "/ frappe ;" rK>j<iiM^ Jf^^oi^ " te smote," P. maitouneschiie, " the smiting,"
A.
''
frapper ;"
A>/ovsi(
;"
vahad, A.
itdrahm,
guehan
(cf. ^jL.*.),
A.
"Zie
que" P. gdh,
Myxs3
advak, A. " un
homme ;"
;"
aj7a5> nara,
iAjg j/jAuy
v>}
Hk hamat
rumque"
sS,
A. " trois
(ou plusieurs)
fcmmes ;"
^vjj,ii7(3
thiyannij
vahmemcha, "prcEcla-
PREFACE.
Xi
to
which
I advert; while
is
in
interpreted
The
valma vahmen and vahmdi are than the accusative and dative of the base vahma; and that
I
am
first
person of a verb
is
moment. Anquetil, however, in the interlinear version of the beginning of the V. S. attempted by him, gives two other evident datives compounded with the particle
ajpa cha,
"and," as the
first
by '^placere cupio"
''votafacio.
I
One
*ees
could with
ease greatly increase, that the Pehlvi Translator of the said Vocabulary
has,
And
Anquetil expressly
says
(II. 415.):
"
La
a peu de
la
regies
(/).
La forPersan,
let
tlic
mation des
y
it,
est
a peu pres
le
How
stands
Jzeschne made from the Pehlvi more than three centuries before that of
Acquetil.
This question
will,
M.
E. Burnouf,
who
(Nouv. Journ.
in
Commentary on
These pas-
them over-
nature that the inflexionless Pehlvi language could follow the Zend original almost verbatim.
signifies,
"
I call
upon,
magS.,
strong like
Dami
p. 4*23,
genitive
omen, that Neriosengh, or his Pehlvi predecessor, takes the feminine dahmayds as a plural genitive, since this expression is evidently, as Burnouf rightly remarks, only an epithet of dfntois. I abstain from
speaking of the dubious expression ddmois ujjamanahe, and content
mySfcll'
XII
PREFACE.
in question
one
to
any very
late
period.
The
Zend
It
much
was
solution
sister languaore,
;
no longer understood,
The
first
"
On
by V.
d.
Hagen's
translation, deserves
as a first attempt.
to
thank
this
man
we
it
written characters.
Of
three words of
different declensions
inflections,
though
with some sensible deficiencies, and those, too, just in the places
interest,
Zend
a language
we
we
For the
rest, I refer
my
the
also
Zend
in
Annual of
to
Scientific
December 1831,
as
an
cai'lier
work
this
newly
ruction, different
diaciisn*^
Tho second pftswi,-^ by Burnouf, and which is based on Nyvioscngh. sij.r<iifie8, " 1 call upon and maf;nify the stars, the moon, tbi' ijuii, lUc
eternal, sclf-crvatcd lightb!
PREFACE.
ojxjned field.
Xlll
My
edited by
Bumouf in
Grammar
and by Olshausen
in
Hamburgh,
all
parts
for
me
particulars in such a
manner
may
be conducted
on a
known
vered
sister
tongue.
difficulty
and the
and Sanskrit
difficulty
sufficient to deter
many, and
to harass
anyone
have appended
pronun-
ciation, laid
down on
is
given,
it is
the
Roman.
This method
knowledge of the
it
original characters.
As
their
in this
own
I
sakes,
as objects
at giving
and as
aim rather
has been in
my
power
to
to
omit
many
particulars
which
;
contribute
nothing
the
character of the
whole
and
languaore.
By
this process,
and by the
view
I
strict
all
points
mutually explanatory,
have, as
I flatter
or grand
discovery of new
affinities,
XJV
PREFACE,
sisterhoorl.
affi-
was necessary,
;
many
i i
false
appearances of
nity
its
as, for
251, Note
f,
pare
Grimm L
ts
(Jupihus)
of Kvkoi^ (KvKot-cri).
As
of
concerns
treating
the
subject
Germanic
grammar,
it
is
guiding star of the German, and explaining the latter simultaneously with the older languages and the Lithuanian.
of each lecture on the cases, a tabular view
obtained, in
is
At the close
to
is
drawn
by
but injurious,
is
productive of positive
error.
Where
164, the
cf.
.
there
no
:
real
thus,
we
give,
148,
p.
nominatives x^P'^*
137.
The
division
gib- a
would lead us
is
tho
termination, whereas
old d,
In certain instances
it is
extraordi-
* The simple
maxim
laid
dovm
when
6,
ex-
explains, for
grammar and construction of words, and example, how from dags, "day " (theme DAG A), may be de-
{DOG A),
absolutely the
fiom
riijata,
when in Sanskrit rdjata, " argentcua," comes "^argentum," on which more hereafter. Generally speaking,
same
as
is
and with few exceptions, the Indian system of vowels, pure from consonantal
German grammar: on
principally rests
my own my
theory of
I
dittirs materially
earlier defini-
tions
PREFACE.
narilj difficult in languages not
hit
XV
to
on the right
from
true.
divisions,
I
and
tions
ties
his path.
especially in
when
it
it
contributes something of
in its tliree
The
juxta-position of
main periods
my
whole Grammar,
model of
my
Sanskrit
Grammar.
are
Wherever, in
they
the
addition,
explanatory
remarks
part will
necessary,
are
given.
The second
thus
begin with
comthen
Germanic
declensions,
and
1 shall
from these
to the pronoims.
As
must have,
for
inti-
illustrative,
what
will
remaui to
less space,
To
is
my
intention to
may be considered
as a completion
antecedent
tions,
while with
Grimm
it
comparison
with the Greek and Latin vocalism, without a steady reference to the
Sanskrit,
is,
in
my
German more
whole
merely
XVi
this class of
FBEFACE.
words,* and
wliicli will, therefore,
be treated in
It Is
this
point of view
among
in
the pronominal
adjectives.f
likely that a
chasm
to inquiries
of this kind,
press,
may
be shortly
up by a work ready
for the
for by all friends of German and High German Treasury of Graff'. What we may expect from a work founded on a comprehensive
examination of the
foreign, as well as
MS.
treasures
of libraries
national
and
may be
" The
Prepositions."
* I refer the reader preliminarily to my two last treatises (Berlin, Ferd. Diimmler) " On Certain Demonstrative Bases, and their connection with
various Prepositions and Conjunctions," and "
On
nouns on the Formation of Words." Compare, also, C. Gottl, Schmidt's excellent tract " Quaest, Gramm. de Praepositionibus GrsBcis," and tho
review of the same, distinguished by acute observations, by A. Benary,
in the Berlin
If
we
minister
W.
von Humboldt,
"On
tome
in the
"from,")
find
Zend a
perfect
Next we
its
sa-cha, '^isque,"
AJftJAJfeV
which
only a pronoun, in
Zend shape
ha-cha
(^.
53.), often
used as a preposition
itself,
to signify
"out of"
tlie
particle
mm
" Remark.
older a
is
What in
o,
m or o out of the
and
my
to
be ascribed
forms ViVc
be exempted
Editor.
F.
BOPP.
Berlim, 1833.
COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR.
distinguishes the
from these
latter in form.
We
and
^
a,
o,
by a circumflex.
The
to
all
common
r, r,
u,
secondly, a vowel
pecu-
distinguish
is
by
and
it
long
sound by
The
short r (^)
pronounced
i,
and in European
is
the long r
("^
scarcely to
i.
Both
vowels appear to
me
to be of later origin
and r presents
rarer occurr,
itself generally as a
pression of the
rence.
a.
The long
it
(^)
is
of
much
In declension
inflective base
must be lengthened;
^
ar,
almost always
ir,
unoriginal vowel
^^
ir, or,
The
last
writing belongs
more
:
to the
it is
grammarians
;3
an union of an
with
r (t^), or,
when
We
require no representative
it.
In the one,
becomes
v.
(equivalent
with u becomes
6 (equivalent to
is
a long d with a
following
^
In
becomes ^
waise,
syllable,
and with
w,
au, as in the
German words
fix
baum
so that the
however, to
the observation
on the greater
^.
That
is
in
and
last
o a short, in
di
and
du,
a long a
bound
up, I infer
from
this,
and
d pro-
^S(X(
a),
but out
^
t,
di and
'^ du
according to
or
a,
"^
u, gi
short
into
with an ^ i, w of a following word, be contracted, like the 6, but not into $ di and ^ S and ^t du,
d,
this, in
its
my view, is
to be
understood as
initial
if
the long
a,
before
had shortened
example,
dadd
makes neither ^^H(^ daddus, nor ^^^ dadds, but ^5^ dadus. The opinion I have already expressed on
with 7F^
uis
this
;
point
by the Zend
su}<port, also,
in
the place
du.
of the Sanskrit
and
gui
do or
>juli
du
for
^
or
In
of
my
theory, appears
the
fact, that
a conbe-
^"^ 6,
comes ^
di and
^ du
of
^
which
and
6
it is
to be understood, that
a into a long
a,
of the diphthong
^,
becomes
becomes du.
is to
For example,
be understood
mama Hat,
the diphthong
A,
F
6,i.
united
its first
preceding a into
and with
this,
further united
last
element
3.
(0
into
[Compare
$ 688, p. 917.]
Among
o)
is
and
whose sounds,
if
livins:
and
o, if
coming.*
It is
Germanic
dialect,
German
short
e-
For example, /aZfAa, "ich falte,*" "I fold ;" giba, "ich gebe," "I give." In the Zend the Sanskrit ^ a remains usually aj a,
or has changed
rules, into ^
e.
itself,
according to certain
we always find
pvthra-he with
juthre-tyi
and
its
genitive
H5Aj7(j>a)
putra-sya.
^a
becomes
d,
e,
or
of nominal
Greek o answers to the Indian ^ a, except in the vocatives, where an e is substituted. In the Latin, besides
bases the
a, e,
and
6,
u also
is
some adverbial suffixes, to replace the Sanskrit ^ a 4. As in the Greek the short Sanskrit a is oftener replaced
e
by
or o than by a short
;
a,
so the long WT d
is
oftener re-
* Giioim, Vol. i. p. 51)4 with whom I entirely concur in this matter; having locg abaudoued a contrary opinion, which I maintained in 1819 in the Ani;als of Oriental Literature.
b2
4
presented by
;;
itself in places
where the
becomes
termi-
>;,
to be found,
TtdrjfMt
the
dual
nation
to
is
tdm answers to
rrjv,
Twv
^T^T
dm
a
1^
always represented by
Never,
r}
we except pecu-
liarities of dialect,
does either
or
diphthongs
a long d
for
:
or
^,
formed by
or an
ei
^ u
or
following
for the
first,
the
Greek
substitutes
ot
(because
a,
and
and for
elfxi
;
the
last, ev
or ov.
Thus,
becomes
fall,""
^
or
o,
veda, " I
know,"
jft
go,
heifer,"" ^ov-q.
e
From
and
6
it
dropping of the
5.]
or
[G. Ed. p.
may happen
divri,*
that a,
e,
answer
to these
diphthongs
e<aTepof
;
^^
devd, accus.
^^^
f^p)
t^^
deva-s, "
God," edj
/Sot
stands
f,
and
certainly did so at
first,
as is proved
by the transition
long
into the
gd-i.
Latin
5.
bovis, bovi,
"nf^
In Latin
we sometimes
find the
which, however,
may
nant, arising
mentioned word
from the mixture of a and i, as in the aboveUvir, and in the subjunctive amSmus ; cf.
ihmliH kdmayima,
6. If
from hdmaya-ima.
I
we
of the
have discovered, by
is
European texts it and the absence of any sign for the vowel sound it seems advisable, therefore, to is calculated to cause embarrassment expreds "% by ri. Editor.
original has devr^ but, as observed in p. ], in
The
further illustrate
my
treatise
a and
^ d are
t
;
and
leads us, in
manic modification of vowels. In Latin, also, the i may be considered as lighter than a, and generally takes the place of the latter when a root with an origrinal a would otherwise be
burthened with a reduplication of sound. Hence, for example,
abjicio for ahjacio, tetigi for fetagi, I
am
compelled by this
i
in tetigi
was
{.
from
the e
words
modi-
vowel in
German (Grimm,
and must
place
it
in the
same
forms as abjectus
and tubken.
a double alteration,
The Latin radical a, for instance, is subject to when the root is burthened with ante:
it
becomes
i in
open
syllables, but
the vowel
is
attended by a vowel.
Hence we have
tubicen, abjectus, in
insepidxis.
first
on the contrary, inimicus, insipidus, not inemicus, In connection with this stands the transition of the
As us is
the masculine
;
form
we ought
i.
but inermis,
les
imberbis,
er
weight of the
it
of the accent,
;
where
but the
we
find similar
appearances
as. for
ex-
weakened
(See
Germ,
rathsherr.''''
Note
*).
Sanskrit
Grammar
is
vowels.
The w
u with regard to the other original a vowel too decided and full of character to
relief of its
all,
allow^ of its
syllable, in
admit suppression.
Nor
will it retire
from a reduplicated
syllable in cases
i.
where
a allows
itself to
be weakened down to
a,
Thus
in Latin
we
or e
{tetigi, fefelli,
&c.)
:
u may boast
of its pertinacity
it
ter-
have under-
been extin-
No
;
time
and thus
in the
High German,
has, in
many
i.
cases,
declension similar to
8. If, in
we
we
find in
its
Arabic
place in the
is
i,
most dependent case of the Arabic, and one which cannot be separated from the governing word. /, also, is continually
used incases where the grammatical relation a preposition.
is
expressed by
tlie
Compare,
also, in
and under
7
In the
independent indicative.
9.
the
of vowels, are
signs, the
sounds
8.]
[G. Ed. p
also,
The
;"
first,
which we distinguish by
is,
n, is
called
[
and
which
think
is
best represented
French
syllable.
The weakness
it i
of its expression
discernible in the
fact that
influence of an
or w on a following
It
s,
(see Sanskrit
Gram-
mar, R.
101^).
TT r),
has
its
T
it
r,
cU
/,
sibilants,
and
lists
concluding ^ m,
passes into
fol-
lists,
Anu-
w^
n
come
after.
In con-
passes into
Anuswara
from
han^
all
have
* The practice is not unauthorized by rule. A final ^ is convertible to Anuswara before any consonant (Pan. 8. 3. 23 ) and a media T or J? is
;
convertible
8
endeavoured, in
Grammar make no
Colebrooke gives
n,
in
and
calls it
syllable,"
\vhich leads to the error, that each of the nasal characters, even
n,
may
be abbreviated
into Anuswara.
Forster expresses it by the n in the English word plinth; Carey and Yates by the English combination ng; Wilkins by m. All substitute it for the concluding jt^ of grammatical
terminations
Anuswara into i? or tt ,the necessary consequence occurs, that we must write abhavan or abhavang/' I was ;" dantan or dantang,
*
a tooth
;"
Colebrooke, on the
and before
t,
the original
m
;
Anu-
swara
is
due
On
the
Frank write
n, for
The
first,
A.
W. von
Schlegel
Anu-
infinitive
Anuswara
is
must
is
is
Anuswara before any consonant except a semi-vowel or a Such are the rules. In practice, the mutation of the constant that of the medial nasal is more variable, and in ge:
EdiUi.
the variable nasal, which, under certain conditions, passes into the proper
Anuswara
is
still
m at the
Anuswara appears from his mode of printing Sanskrit text, in which he makes no division between a concluding jt m and while he does the commencing vowel of the following word make a division after ^ n, and thereby shews that he admits
;
letters
which
follow.
If,
however, we
m^
-ei
ci^lri
we must
not
also write
riWd'^flii^
inl^
"he
said to her;"
^ of ITW
fain is
original,
and not,
conjec-
The
III. p. 39),
by that
which follows
on laut*
as were the term Naddaut, with the accent appears to me highly improbable. Schlegel's nasalis
it
tion of error
we
willingly concede a
it.
* This seems intended for an explanation, for Lassen bas nothing like I have not found an etymological explanation of the term in any
grammatical commentary; but it may be doubted if the explanation of the text, or that given by Lassen, be correct. Anuswara may indeed be termed sequens sonus ; but by that is to be understood the final or closing
sound of a
final
syllable.
Any
other nasal
is
may be
used as the
initial letter
of
exclusively an
it
''after" sound, or
the legitimate
when
terminal,
10
bility of a concluding
m,but
is
not mutable
itself,
since
it
never
^5^
dans,
f?^ him,
it is
consider the
letter in
mutable
hhijdin,
grammatical terminations,
am, im
&c., appears
from the
ftict
them
If
it
is
of
no importance, as dependent on the caprice of the editor or copyist, we can adduce as a decisive proof of the just
views of the Indian Grammarians in this respect, that when they range the declensions of words in the order of their terminating
in
letters,
the Pronouns
^^^
Mm, when
the turn
ir5nT
comes of the
" quiet,"
labial
together with
lam.
prasdm,
^^
(Laghu-
Kaumudi,
10.
p. 46.)
The deadened
nasal,
follows, appears
and we write
it
it
in the
At the end
of words
stands
example
into n presents
relation tothesemi-vowpls
to
I
consonant of the following word. Again, with regard to its and sibilants, it may be regarded as appropriate
them merely in as far as neither of the other nasals is so considered. Anuswara may be termed a subsidiary or supplemental sound, being prefixed with most propriety to those letters which, not being classed
n this sense
five scries of sounds, have no rightful claim to the comprehended within each respective series Editor.
11
mentioned.
From
kill,"
T
lavpsin-u,
comes
praise
;"
hansydint, "
shall
f^
han.
In
the
m, but the
n, at
has always fallen into Anuswara, without regard to the following letters
tala, p. 70,
Thus we read
T^^, which
is
Sakun-
certainly to be
pronounced, not
[G. Ed. p. 12.]
TT^
bhagavan;
The second
is
mentioned
It
is
named
expresses a breath-
which
and T
of words
in
r.
Tliese
two
letters
{s,
r)
letters
of the guttural
and
it
labial
12.).
We
from
the true
12.
classed in the
Sansknt
and form,
sixth is
formed by
and the
or hard
the semi-vowels,
sibilants
h.
In the
first five
next, the
sonant or
soft,
being completed by
The
Every thin and every medial letter has its corresponding aspirate. The aspirates are pronounced, like their
No
represented
by Anuswara.
Editor.
12
thus, for
example,
-^i^
ih,
or ^;
and
hh,
it
In an etymological point
of view
different organs
thus, TT hhar,
^ dhar,{^
"
dhuma-s,
smoke,"
is,
in Latin, fumu-s.
In Greek,
V?T dhan,
han,
from
"to
kill."
The Gothic
thliuhan
is
;? hh,
r[^
g,
X{^
n.
The
pronounced
like the
German n
w^ords
tural.
sinJcen, enge,
following gut-
is
gutturals
when
it
We
write
is
its
guttural nature
easily
The
find
"
aspirates of
beginning or
i^ ^^^ place
;"
end of words.
of
we
lih
compare ow^,
with nakha,
a nail
Kov^rj,
khan, " to
The
as f, d\ b'."
mark
is, however, unsightly, and appears and doubt. It seems therefore pre-
mode of expressing
is
ph
and
f of the
nasals of
English alj)habet
t
tlie
Editor.
the
manner
in
which that
is
affected
by a succeeding
13
As regards
gh of gJiarma,
another organ
changed the
u into
leicht,
V.
the English
and the
place in the
14.
The second
T^
and includes
We write
it.
J,* K. jh,*
n.
This class
is
an offshoot
to
be considered as a softening of
class
from which
springs.
"voice"
;
(cf.
^t^ v6k
in the instrumental
vukshu.
and locative
^"^
guages we have
next, labials,
affinity
thirdly, the
sounds of
t,
according to pronunis
or d; fourthly,
element in the
I cook," (inf.
Compare
^-^uPh
^wr
chatitr,
tj^
panchan, "five"
Ttevre, iteinre,
Gothic fmf,
rex,
TTSHT
rdjan^
"king," with
rdj,
regis;
rdjata,
"to shine"),
^itji
With regard to the aspirates of this class, the chh,a.s an initial letter in some words, answers to sc, o"k; f^^^m chhind* The original has g &nd g
are
;
in
English
j and
its aspirate.
14
was,
"
"SfniT
As
to the
WS
and
the
German and
is
latter,
as I suspect,
we require no
only
The
third class
is called
together with
its
nasal
developed
tinguish
itself
sounds.
We dis?,
letter, thus,
th,-
c?,
dh, ^^ n.
We
it
>Tt|
let
be
and
"q^JT
first."
tj
for
is
The Indian Grammarians approach the Prakrit nearer than the Sanskrit, when at the beginning of The practice, also, roots they use the same substitution. using Anuswara for which we have condemned (^. 9.), of ? m, at the end of words, is more Prakrit than Sanskrit.
At
number
of roots
at, "
to go."
They are
pronounced by bending back the tongue against the roof of the mouth, by which a hollow sound is expressed, as if from
the head.*
The
its
the limits of
usual laws
it is
* Here, also, it may be doubled il" similar modifications of the dental sounds are not discoverable in languages which do not express them by
separate syinboh..
The
is
the Sanskrit Z.
Editor.
15
;
yet
never
16.
The
the
common d and
W^
t,
t,
together
fA,
common
n.
n,
d,
V
in
dh,
Of
we have
to re-
mark, that
^ th,m
no instance of which we are aware is represented in Greek by 0, but always like the natural t, by t. On the other
at least
hand,
presents
V dh does correspond to 6, which also sometimes re^ d. Thus the imperative ending fv dhi, in Greek
di
;
becomes
f/a<//<dm?,
re
is fiedv
FUtP^
"I
place," t/^/x/;
1.),
(^^
duhitri,
"daughter," dvyarrjp;
;
dudr,
f.
and
dSva, Lithuau.
With regard
to the
'^r
former in the
and future;
oa-reov
cmyo-o)
with
asthi,
with
'wfw
"bone";
with
t,
r^I ?'atha,
in for
example,
vais-t, "
WW
vet-tha.
is
From
nearly
excluded.
17.
is
well known.
Upon
it,
among
$dKpv, SaKpuixa.
^ d often corresponds to the I of cognate European languages; for example, ^^ dip, "to light," dipa, "lamp,"
becomes
AajuTro),
Aa/iTra?;
diha,
"body," Gothic
leik.
On
relation of our
Gothic
lif,
in
zwolf,
Gothic ttalf, to
As
gone
16
labials;
is,
in Gothic, taihun, in
German
from
lif
was
which accom-
my
notice without
The
fact,
proved, as
it is,
With respect
whom?"
to lished
this
to
my Treatise on
its
by Diimmler)
analogy of \/<o?,
and only remark, in addition, that by leiks, I was first led to that of lif to SeKa
my observation,
tfijjh,
The
T^
labial class
b,
bh,
ph
is
among
the most usual words in which it occurs are, tRqS pAa?a, " fruit," -^tf phena, " foam," and the forms which come
phull,
" to burst,
blow, bloom."
The
most frequent of the aspirates. In the Greek and Latin, ^ and / are the letters which most frequently correspond to this
bh belongs, together with
dh, to the
w
>T
" to
bhu,
*'
>T
bh
is
by b
in Latin, especially in
The /
manubrium.
Thus the /
of
fu appears
as b in the
forms
amabam, amabo, which I have recognised as compounds, and which will be hereafter explained. The dative and ablative
termination plural
nasal of this class,
ww
J?
bliyas,
m,
is subject,
17
itself
own
class
it
otherwise governs
letters,
and
may
pass,
manner, into any of the four preceding [G. weakens itself into the softened nasal sound
if
nasals,
and
Ed.
p. 18.]
or ?
nasal.
h,
M
It is,
has also a
full
right to the
name
of a mutable
in editions of find ,
though text otherwise conspicuous for piotected in its original condition by a pause, or by tlie
following letters, written as Anuswara.
19.
The semi-vowels
follow next:
t(
y,x
r,'P^ I,'^ v.
We
distinguish y by the sound of our German J, or the Englisli y in the word year. As the Latin in English has the sound
_;'
of a softened y, so in Prakrit
and
in Greek,
upon
this
Tir yuj,
" to bind,''
and that
is fls,
is
The
Sanskiit
place.
Theme By v we
v.
^^^^^
yuvan,
Lat
juvenis,
belongs to this
German
t^-.
to
and English
"thee,"
The
;
here
(vixi),
victum, spring
from
viv
and
in facio
" I
make
The connection
bc-
demonstrated.
Refer back,
to the occasional
hardening
of the
Digamma
into
(cf.
C. G.
Jahrbuch,
I83i, p. 613.).
The
v or
and these two letters are therefore, as languages, excluded from the end of words
^ y
in the Semitic
[G. Ed, p. 19.]
its
f^
d'v, "
Heaven." forms
nomina.
94.\
18-
from
of a
^ dyS.
is
Nominal bases
subject to
s.
in
y do not
exist.
x.r aX the
is
end
word
many
is
alterations,
and
interchanges,
able with
by favour
s
;
becomes
is
and, on
s be-
comes T r, namely, before vowels and sonant consonants. 20. The semi- vowels, by reason of their tractable and fluent nature, are easily interchanged. For instance, in the more
recent Sanskrit works
also, find in
t r*
I
We
^
v.
often,
for
On
this
interchange
suffix lent
{e.g. opulens),
(see . 116.). in
much,"
in
words
irn^
tdvant, " so
how
I
much.""
On
founded, as
"
we are"
-u-mh, "
to
we
(.
shriek," to
hear"
[G. Ed.
p. 20.]
dhwum,
" to
fall ;"
ttod.
The semi-vowel
also
thus,
v^^
becomes
cdius in Latin,
and
It is scarcely correct to
nor
Menu
Ed.
it is
Grimm
(iii.
p.
far as the
Gothic at
X Dh, according to
old a,
nasal.
$. 16.,
the
Greek ^\ and
t.
to the
9^,
according
High German
may
or of the dropped
19
antara-s,
"the
other," alter;
vad,
"to speak,"
im dhma, "to
also, balbus
blow," answers to
/Saft/Sa/vo).
fiare.
109.)
21.
Compare,
last class
with
The
embraces the
sibilants
and
h:
T([^
s,
\sh,
and ? h. The first sibilant is spoken with a slight aspiIt belongs to ration, and usually written by the English sh*
T(
s,
thp palatal class, and thence supplies the place of the third or
proper
when a hard
"^TJit
palatal
for
instance, TTTST
charati, "
rdmas
^xf^ rdmas
Ramas
X:
;
goes."
In
its
origin,
^s
appears to have
find k
sprung from
and
c regu-
s.
The Gothic
;
substi-
but the
to the
and has in
its
stead a sibilant
compound
kvu)i>,
sz,
pro-
nounced
like sh.
Compare
decern, 5e/ca.
deszimtis,
dasa); cants,
with
a&ru
n.
"tear;"
eqitus {
= ecvits),
Lith. aszica
f.
"mare,"
f.
with
^S(^ a'swa
(nom.
ISC^S^ aswas),
azaka
with
^W{
srlkha "
bough."
The
answers
not
to the
Zend aj^^^2>j3
spenia
i is
al-
Otherwise
[G. Ed.
p.
gi s
falls
21.]
appears to have originated, namely, k. In some roots, however, 5^ s passes into z i ; for instance, ^^ dris', " seeing," and f^iii', "a man of the third caste," form, in the uninflected nominative,
ejr
dri'-,,
fwz
vit.
The second
sibilant,
sh,
is
pronounced
like
our
sch,
or sh in English, and
More usually
the sh
is
Editor.
C 2
20
It often
tt s
;
steps,
according to
and the
TJ
|, x,
in
Greek
Jcsh.
Compare
^f^m
right hand."
Of
the vowels,
i,
u,
averse from Vs, to which a and d alone are inclined. After the
first-named vowels,
passes into ^ sh
As an
initial,
"q
sh
sh,
from the
t^
/i
first
with
a.
r(^
sh.
A word
gins with
six" to which the Lith. szeszi, a f plural nominative, answers most nearly, while other cognate languages indicate an original ordinary s. At the end of a
word, and in the middle before other strong consonants, such
as
most roots passes into nf k, but with some into z t the number six, mentioned above, becomes, in the uninflected nominative, ^7 shat
(,
th,
ti
22.
The
"which, at the
sition,
r,
ah or K Visarga
th.
and
sunus
tarati, "
[G. Ed.
p. 22.]
sunuh',
(est).
^T^T
W^
cluding
can only have arisen in the later period of the language, after its division as in the cognate languages the
lET
concluding
it
Thus, in the
Ttfxoaeop 6 MiXy'^crtop
383-4.) p
everywhere
Ttapayivojxevop
Kvfialve'
endure
21
The Latin
words
when
as plusima, fijerJesum,
meliosem,
mnjosibus, in
evinces
(see
.
its
127,).
The
accusative
Frstus, is
fis I
more
startling, for
here r
is
tlie
original form,
if,
related to the
word of
aj7a5/> urvara,
Tins expression
is
it signifies,
fruitful
^ h belongs
In these places
A:,
it
passes,
7 f
ir
d, oF
or
JT
g.
:
In Greek
we
often find
in the place
of the Sanskrit ? h
" snow," "
xidmi,
compare
^et/xwi',
hiems, with
f^
Iteri,
Aiwa,
rime
;
;"
xalpoi with
^xqifir hrish;*"
[G. Ed.
p. 23.]
gaudeo
yi)v
with
;"
^^
%0es,
with
yesterday
k, c,
o-)(ps
with
T?
vah,
" to transport."
We
also find
for
h: compare
KapSi'a, cor,
Gothic
hairlo,
with
hrid (n.
^^
We
sometimes, but
hardmi, "
take away."
;
The Lithuanian
ex-
hibits
sometimes
sz for h
aham, szirdis f. " heart," for This letter stands hrid. sometimes in Sanskrit for a mutilation of other aspirated
consonants, of which
^^
been supdhi,
pressed
ending f^
we
generally find hi
ff
hi,
and not fv
dhi, as
The
" to take,"
more nearly
German
greifen,
yiri/tan.
22
We
a,
^aj d,
I,
I,
"^ u,
"gt
it,
ri,
ri.
n,
ah'.
CONSONANTS.
Gutturals
Palatals
oF
/fc,
"W kh,
"^ chh,
^ g,
l{ j,
"S
'^
gh,
t
3BJ
n.
"^ ch,
m^jli,
"S
^ n.
n.
f
Linguals
Dentals
Labials
(,
th,
d, J,
6,
I,
dh,
cZ/*,
lit,
"^th,
n.
^ p,
xr y,
x^ph,
^
'i^
bh,
^ m.
Semi- Vowels
Sibilants and Aspirates,
[G. Ed.
p. 24.3
r,
"^ v.
^ s,
sh,
tk s,
h.
^a
is
unexpressed, but
is
or connected with
itself,
is
or the
a, is
expressed by
of these
^
;
t,
are expressed
by
ofi^
f,
and the
first
two
it
is
after, the
ki.
consonant to which
'5 M,
relates
ki,
For
e, t
are placed
as,
if
Im,
For
;
and
^ dU
:
*^
and
6
"^
as,
h^,
% kdi
is
which
as,
ho,
ofit
ti,
^,
tj,
we have
;
>,
j,
i;
and thus
have
sT
maUyn
and for
is
T!^^
for
^ we
^ + n we
have w.
23
The Sanskrit
soft or sonant.
Surd
and in
ing aspirates
the
first
two
letters in
each of the
sibilants.
vowels.
appears to us convenient
and weak; in which the nasals and semi- vowels come under
the denomination of weak
that of the strong:.
no
suflBxes. in
p. '25.1
accommodate themselves to a following strong consonant. 26. With regard to the vowels, it is of consequence
direct the observation to
to
two
of which
called
Guna, or virtue
augmentation.
My
effects of these
vowel alterations
and
it
was
my critical
labours upon
same time
of
its
My
views in
this
from
. 2.,
in which, as
myself,
contradiction to
my
Guna consists
:
in prefixing
short
a,
in both,
how-
24
namely, and
into
^,
melt
with the
^a
of
Guna
into
^;
7 it, ^u,
6.
These
^JT ar;
p. 26.]
ri and '%p become, in virtue of the action of by that of Vriddhi, '^TR dr. As in Greek the
short Sanskrit a
is
frequently replaced by
/
so we
find the
Guna
As
here,
when a
radical
or u
is
^f
prolonged
" to go,"
by
prefixing an
e.
i,
forms, by the
Guna
have
eifjit
in contrast to
we
TTtVlftr
bddlidmi, "I
know;"
so in the
(e<})vyoi'),
comes
ipevyoi.
Grimm's
and u of the
Compare
^vftT
haug,
"I
bent," in
we
same
signification,
singular
plural
^>Tfin?
compare
vait, " I
know," in
we know," with
the
same
signification,
veda (from
f^f^
vidima,
"
root,
We
Guna
I
in yet another
lately dis-
form
in the
Gothic
form which
have but
me
bend," and
its
root
Regarding Greek
ot
as
Guna
of
i,
see
f),
491.
and as to
Gana
in
Old
741., 746.
25
and
of terminations a retro-active
me
indisputable that
[G.Ed.
p.
27.3
correspond to
so that the
to
I,
Guna
Guna
the radical
is,
which has remained in the preterite singuhir, and other tenses, weakened
to
i
;
in the present
so that, for
instance, a/,
ad, " to eat
;"
"he
eat,"
form ^rf^ admi, " I eat.'** 28. The Zend possesses, besides the Sanskrit Guna, which has remained everywhere where it stands in Sanskrit, a
vowel application peculiar to
in
Aj a,
itself,
and which was first observed by M. E. Burnouf.-j* The vowels which admit this addition in the interior, but
not at the end of words, are,
2dly, the
first,
the short j U
4* d.
>
u,
o;
Guna diphthongs
;o ^
and
The two
latter
;o i
occurs, both as
an
initial letter,
appended to
dthre,
it
hence,
"homing' ^^(^jm
"ignC; but
que"
Also where an
is
aStn^ibyd,
from ^ri^H
elehhyas.
The only
It would be difficult to adduce a better instance of the phonetic deficiencies of our English alphabet than this sentence, in
which
am
forced
What
remember
is
pronounced
eet, tlie
other ett ?
The
preterite
"ate"
ia obsolete.
Trarulator.
t N. Jouru.
26
remains without
of
when
it is
a y^
not
j^,
out of
a or
jua d.
We
indeed, ^^^^j/oaj^mj
yaSibij6, "
jj^.m;oaj^^jiu dyafsi,
but
from
^ yw,
find, for
aj
" glory."
Yet we
j^n?^
before
(cf.
tif^ yadi),
The
addition of the
frequent.
^^tWfi^ djas ;
Examples of
it
from
ac-
(<^Ajy^7^^ kerenaot,
cs kri,
cording to the
*'
he spoke," from
^irtiT abrot,
form, instead of
also
find ^^xi^^
^TW^ftTT abravit
(Gramm.
Crit.
r. 352.).
We
mrao n, " I
abrdm, which
of the
first
person.
mere nasal, and not am, the The vowels j i and > w are
aj
much more
question
:
now
in
they refuse
and
if
transferred
ter-
to its middle,
by an adventitious
example,
AjyAJf(3J9
;
wedded
to
an
as
a.
We
say, for
;
^j^j imem,
mithwava,
gairibyd,
also, acas
"this" (accus.),
<^iAiJ/jAjm
The
>
a/
^jw^
iirun6,
"young,"
fiom
TT^iiT
taruna.
4>
T u
is
a is placed before it, as well and in this case at the beginning as before two consonants
(. 32.),
;
replaced by
stands in this respect in the same category as a> ^ iuid [G. Ed. p. 6. Compare ^^aj7 rauch, " light " with
29.J
27
with
^^
ruch
^IviirilM
suchyatdm ;
v'hich I
wf^n
akshipia
(Gram.
29.
339.),
augment
i,
In the Vriddhi modification, the vowels ^ i, ^ with the preceding ^t d into ^ di ; "5 w, "3! it, into
melt
^ du;
^ W, ^
effect
ri,
a,
as also the
diphthongs ^
and
as
by Guna
a+i, liked + 4 makes di; a+d. like d+d, makes du are capable of only one higher modification, and resers'e this one
for cases
step,
Guna
unaltered,
It
may be
summary of
the results
produced by
Guna and
Vriddhi.
Primitive Vowels,
^
^T
a,
"^
d,
Guna
Vriddhi
d,
\ ^ e,
i,
%i,
m,
d,
"31
;/,
^fi
^TN ar, ^Kdr*
^4,
^d'f,
d,
...
Jl di,
^idw, ^idu,
^4,
'k
dU
^6,
...
^ diu
...
Guna
Vriddhi
30.
^T
^TT
ar, dr,
ai,
...
^ du,
left,
We now
and
much
that
was heterogeneoue,
We
first,
Guna
letters are a,
e,
o; the
au ; the two
a and
Editor
W,
in combination
/,
2^
the Zend.
The Sanskrit
;
short
is
^ a has two,
which An-
the
first
aj,
The second
is g,
like
the short
a-
German
a,
as in
apren.
e in the
French
consider this g as the shortest vowel, and write it e. We often find it inserted between two consonants which form a
dadaresa
or "
I
^^ dadarso,
we
e is
r.
"he"
also
saw
^^vaj^I^aj^
dademahi (V.
dadmasi.
S. p. 102), "
give,"
for the
Veda form
^^^
This shortest
^ m,
final y n,
n.
an intermediate vowelless
the older
^a
becomes
e.
thr
^^^^^tv
hent-em,
ter-
mination
m;
tishthhj-am, f^kmishthima).
31. Anquetil entirely refuses to
letter differing but little
admit into
f
e
his alphabet a
from the
like a
it
by
which
Rask teaches us
this
to
pronounce
long Danish
<b.
We find
connection with a following > u, and vowel appears to admit, with the excep[G. Ed. p. 31.]
no vowel but
this c before
it.
We
write
inasmuch as we represent
the
ro,
by
^.
Eu
>c corresponds
ctymo-
29
by
6,
or diphthong formed
^a
nominal bases in
u,
which
prefixing of a short a,
make
6-s,
eus.
Compare, for instance, j^5>9J3a}5> from pasu, "pecus." And yet the Sanskrit 6 does not universally become eu in Zend, but often remains as it is, and
tj^JTO pasos,
specially in cases
where
it
by the
According
to its pronuncia-
tion, >c eu
would appear
(d) is written
to be a diphthong,
and
to
form
German words
The long a
32. Short
jku.
and long
are
short
u,
by
special characters, j
i
i,
>
u,
the pronunciation
short u (>) that of o; while, according to Rask, only dj is pronounced as short o.* This short o frequently holds the
particular,
we have
guj
do
we
yet
find,
more frequent than ao^m gdos, for the Sanscrit ^t^gdus. 33. The Sanskrit diphthong i, formed out of a + ?, is represented by
rs,
is
S.
We
must
^^
is
not
always preserved as
placed by j^
6i,
^ in
is
a preceding ^^
y,
p. 32.]
words.
di (out of d
+ i)
is
always
represented by
di;
6,
either
by
the equivalent
for ^ 6;
which we often
ists
find
o substituted
or by the above-mentioned
a terminating Mi
* But see
.
rule, before
447. Note.
30
For
tlie
Vriddhi diplithong
^ du (out
is
+ u) we
di,
geive-
which there
du.
It
a special character gw
more
>JU5
rarely
>juu
ad,
and the j^ 6i which replaces a> ^, should be pronounced as diphthongs, i.e. as monosyllables.
du,
34.
we
We
The
first
letter of the
itself into
two characters
(3^
;
and
of which
which we represent by
k,
and v; the other, which we write c, precedes especially Compare, for instance, \^ kS, consonants, excepting v.
Au^ kd, J^A}^ kat, (quis, qucB, quid), r^^/^^Aifev hakeret, " once,"
j^j^?M^
karo'di, "
o^t kd,
TETsFrT
other hand,
j^CS^jfeV hidi,
M/(sxsMi(S^ csathra,
"
(from ftf^
<3^
sicli).
c differs
probably
of the
Q k,
which
latter is fenced in
by no strong consonants.
Rask
selects for
it
the character
q,
letter prefers
[G. Ed.
p.
33]
k.
Burnouf considers
tuklimalt^.
He
writes,
Rask
treats as
an aspirate, with
I
on the other hand, the letter jo, which Buruouf has not yet given q.
which, according to Burnoufs just
his reason,
(>i
which
c is
found before
HI
remark, generally confers an aspirate upon a preceding consonant. I consider this reason, however, as insufficient and
;
r,
because, as
we have
before
remarked,
all
them
<^.
expressed by
lar agency, to
would be impossible for ? r, and the other convey aspiration to the preceding hard gut-
letters of simi-
tural if
sounds
yAj^
?3^
kan in Zend.
kh
is
There
represented by
From
;
TS^khara, "ass,"
find, also,
we
find
carem
and we
c
;
the
replaced by
srq sakhdynm
a
or
c3^ c,
have
is
but this
much
^ u is
only repre<S^
;
sented by
5 in
Zend
which
latter
we
shall, till
by
c.
35.
Anquetil ascribes to
;
<S^
the pronunciation kh
and compares
it
to the Spanish x
[G. Ed. p. 34.] ^, and our German ch. Burnouf renders that Sanskrit by the syllable ; and observes c. (1. p. 343) {^ (J
'S"
in
^n sicapna,
and in
" sleep,''
^ sua
W8T
{suus),
We
"sister" (soror); W^(Tm suasdram{sororern); and ^i^/m^ khareno, " splendour," as related to ^T. suar, " heaven," and trt
sur,
"to shine."
that
su-
and
that
^ sua
hva.
much
mw
32
We
render
^o
by
our
fact, that in
modern Persian
corresponds frequently to ^, our ch, than on the circumstance that Rnsk has marked it as aspirated. This modern
Persian
.;.
is
tion, like
an
u; but
its
value in Arabic,
this letter, so
As
it
^ kh is
^ awa,
it
was
before letters,
It
which would
produce an aspiration.
may
beginning of a
35]
^ sw.
It is true that
it
j v
must
original ly
have had
mere employment
of the copyist.
Compare
Ijc.-
khudd,
"God," with swofiatta, "self-given ;" for which, in Zend, we have, under a more regular participial form (see Gramin.
Crit.
r. 608),
^^
Anquetil, or his
of,
"given
it
by yntl^ swayandatfa. The Persian Jc- khudd is, however, as Burnouf correctly assumes, actually related to the Zend
As^AM^A)^ khaddta, so as to have
its
name
it
"created by
itself,"
while in
its
form
one
syllable.
In Sanskrit
existent,"
sn-ayambhit, as
appellations of
often
Brahma and Vishnu. That, however, as has been maintained, our word "God" is really related to
word comes from the root dhA, " to
.
* This
give," see
place," not
to
637.
33
Jtf.
khudd, and that its primal signification has thus been disstill
to doubt.
We
here only
call to
mind
that the
Germanic forms,
Persian.
especially
modern
^
thus
sw, in par-
The pronominal
syllable
^ siva
exhibits itelf in
;"
(so) "
and
witli
(Theme
svesa)
^
:
which a Germanic g or k corresponds to a Sanskrit sw or a Persian ^ left. To return, however, to the [G. Ed. p. 36.]
Persian
khu
= '^
;
siv
compare
(^^kfls.-
^^y-
^^SiS^ kh{w)dndaru
^^
_^^^
{^^J"
before
the
^TH
sivasri,
Gothic svistar;
" heaven.''
r,
in
Zend ^^xi^ hvare, with ;5iT swar, some words ^kh corresponds to a Sanskrit k wliich position the Zend loves an aspiration in
In
;
modern Persian, however, a vowel intrudes between the guttural and the r; thus, ^^Jok]^ khirdm-idan, " to proceed with pomp," corresponds to the Sanskrit "gw kram, " to go,"
"to step;" and
equivalent root
Sanskrit
(Sanskiit
36.
^Jo^
khindan,
" to
aspirated
The Persian ^ kh answers to the krt ^^kh, in the word ji- khar, "ass"
its
^x
khara).
The
guttural n, and
aspirate
-^
"q,
are represented by
^ g and ogh.
The Sanskrit
dismissed the aspiration in Zend; at least aj9j7aj garema, " heat" (depfjLTj and Wdrme), answers to the Sanskrit tt^
gharma
A5ypAj^(3'g7^(? verejt
ghna at
The Zend
; ;
34
fies,
word
same sense
/A>(A>7<3^/g(,i
and proves a connection between the Zendish and Indian mythologies, which, however,
in
now only
exists in affinities of
titles
speech.
of
who, from
[G. Ed.
p.
37.]
nawas, bears
name.
.
We
37.
60.
Of the
cA
(
the tenuis
and the media, namely jj. j ( = "!): the aspirates are wanting, which is not surprising, as they are of
namely ^
=^
),
The
j^jaj7a5^ charaUi,
"
|>/AUGxf(jAj^c7(oi/twar^,
^I^
djas',
^t^
dj6.
It is,
however, to be observed,
that,
sonant J
is
often replaced
by other
letters
and
first,
by j
2:
by b
38.
sli
for instance,
>y^)o
The
peculiar to the
is
row of consonants,
wanting
in the Zend.
We
sounds of
These
are,
(w), (^ th
('^),^ d
/ (/),
more
hereafter.
(^),
The ^tis
which and
we
Qxf
represent by k
in this
position is
r
Before 7
an
th
steps in.
written
^^^
turn,
nom. acAj^au
35
r,
kj/wam
dihri, "
dthrat, " ab
igner &c.
If,
however,
n,
the
thereby de-
[G. Ed.
find, for
p. 38.]
p rived of
A>7(jojjAJ9
its
retro-active power.
We
instance,
vastra, not as/ojjxjIj vasthra, "garment,'* "vest;" but we have As/Ca^^ manthra, " speech," not Aj/p-^^ mantra,
yAj^
man.
At the end
of a word, and,
which
<
("ff
) is
re-
presented by a special
namely, by
r,
Burnouf, write
t,
undotted
possible with
^ or
(a.
Rask
represents
tion.
I
it
by
ih,
am
and
We
jo
should
as well
remember
;
written
as
the
last,
Before consonants, for instance, in the word ^'i^^-'^^'^ tkuesho, the sounding of th would be more precarious than
that of
lant
t,
somewhat partake of a
i
is,
r,
sibi-
sound.
has merely a
f,
breathing of
p.re
as, in Sanskrit, s
(.
and and
at the
rT
end of words,
diluted to Visarga
is,
11.);
and as
t,
in Prakrit,
and
also in Greek,
39. __^ is
the ordinary d ^
and q^ according
to Rask's
The
We
daddmU
p. 39.
]
[G. Ed.
o2
36
" given
if,"
San-
xsi^m^
pMha,
9
The
labial class
this
embraces the
p, ^ f,_i h,
organ
p answers to the Sanskrit tl p, and is transformed into / by the retro-active aspirative power of a following 7 r,
s,
Mi
and
TTjOo)
<2)a5
ij
pra
(pro,
words
and perhaps
5>J^J5
Arerep, "
av^^7^^
kerefs
^jqJau
dphn,
^8^?^85 A-erey;em, or
kehrpem.
In regard to the
power which resides in n of aspirating ap, compare >yA>^ < /77U, "burning," from the root q)aj^ <ap, with the derivative
j^oj/o^^ajqJau^au
p.
dlapayeiti,
"
he
333),
same
ahan and
^T
q)
(Gramm.
itself,
Originally
standing for
6^,
we
iidbhi;
and
wr^
subhadra
"
We come now
p. 40.]
to the semi-vowels,
and must,
in
order
of the
German and
This
; ;
37
by y^ or
j^, and in the middle by the duplication of the u ^^, as in the Old High German we find w expressed. This semi-vowel,
it,
and ^
i,
introduce
menon,
in
its
first
German vowel
modifi-
cation
We
also to the
diphthong
where
it
word.
sing,
middle verb.
For
in-
stance,
;t)/A5y
nare, is frequent;
but
Aj^;oAj/Ajy naraecha,
" hominique,^''
is
an exception.
The
i,
mentioned, an j
as to which
is
placed, are
a,
sud,
>
u,
u,
rJ,
we must
i,
u,
in the case of a
:
succeeding
is
lengthened.
Examples are
;
xi^y(2^^
"
'^"^"
dhya
(r|
madhya)
xs^y^Mi nairyn,
man'
;
"he shines";
j^j^j'^/^^ kerenditi,
"he makes"*;
fourth,"
J^^^m
^^ttt
stu'idhi,
"praise," instead of
;
j^^jj
" the
*
ku (^)
aj^^^^j^^o tuirya,
from
chatur,
with the
'^
cha suppressed
aj7>;aj
Ai^^7j>iyjM dhuirya,
ahura.
With regard
it
to the influence of ^^ j
i
does not
mix up an
from
it
by one conson,
nant
the retro-
active
power of
aisti,
not j^Mjxs
thus .j^jjaj astit y, i, or t, is neutralized stands for " he is " on the other hand we
; ;
have j^^jA>Aii bava'mli, Sansk. H^rfriT bhavanti, " they are/"* Several other consonants also resist simply [G. Ed. p. 41.]
this
power
of attraction
thus
we have
3^
and the
or Jtp
In the
of the obtain
personal
hi,
shi,
syllable.
ner, in the first person plural, jwaj^ mahi, not jwjas^ maihi,
corresponds to the
genitive
a-hS,
bases, in
^^waj
42. ^^ y sometimes also exerts that disturbing influence on a following a5 a or Mi d, which is equivalent to the insertion of a vowel, or of i, and consequently effects their
transmutation
*
into
;o
^*
is
thus
the
bases of nouns in
It is
The expression
of the text
"iiufsert
umlautenden Einfluss."
as,
Whether
the student and the teacher they answer the purpose of a memoria
is
fully justified
by the necessity
and the
power
In our language,
as
it
seems to ns
compounds
by any advantage
them
from
this
in their
German
shape.
Of
Inlaut
we
believe,
The meaning
of the
their distinction
may
lent
best be explained
by the following
p. 10.
'*
"
designate," he says,
is
vowel, which
produced by
tlie
by the term Ablaut, a change of the root Umlaut by the fact that it is not of the vowel of the termination ; for Umlaut is
which that sound becomes more homogeneous with the vowel of the termination; while in the Ablaut, without any recognised external cause, it
makes room
sound
as in
Gothic, nima,
take
'
nam,
'I took.'
say, without
39
of
j^feyA^^MJ
y^-hi, instead
Jf
j^WAj^H) ya-/,i;
ya
Compare
didpaydmi,
j9;o^^ajq)juj^au 6i6.-
^lifiqitlfn
WTHT^ltrftr dfdpnyasi,
^I rimqfcT dldpayati.
In the
ya before 9 m,
therefore,
tui-
according
to
rule,
becomes
^ t;
We
find,
" cjuartumr
from Aj^jrJ^^
rya; and
^^Ti;pj^(^ thrishum.
partem^ ^^t^i>^(^M^
llirishva,
is
" fpiartam
partem^"
from ajj^j/0
A5i:^>7c3A5^ chathrushva.
This appearance
to be thus
understood, that the antecedent semi-vowel, after the suppression of the a, passes into its corresponding vowel, which,
. 64.,
must be a long
aj
one.
The
^^ y*, after
its
influence has
;
transformed
a into
;o e, is
thus
we
find ^nJAsjSAJAj^j*
frddaem^m,
temal cause
;
think
is
produced
Whether,
we
seek for the radical vowel in the present or the preterite, the
change
is
Gana
or
a positive cliange
wlule in Sanskrit
is
which
it
diplithongizes it-
as in Greek,
is
and v with
f,
Xetn-a, (fjevya.
In respect of signification,
likewise, there
Guna and
it
Vriddhi and
Gernianic Ablaut
power
to rest
for
as
conjecture,
upon
it,
express* d
by
this
change.
In Sanskrit,
accompany those
relations."
Note
4,
which Professor B
ipp has
Vocalismns. - Trans.
Cf. p. 963,
N01&
40
would be formed
from
f^
dis.
^ sya
the
appears
everywhere reduced into j^w hS. The semi-vowels ^^ y and V are generally suppressed after preceding conso[G, Ed.
p. 42.]
nants*
gives up
and
w.
thus, also,
imperative
ending
43.
^ swa
its
y is sometimes, for euphony, interposed between two vowels (Gram. Crit. rr. 271. 310. 311.);
In Sanskrit,
y between
>
u,
u,
and a following
S,
amount to a law. Thus the Sanskrit "3^ (from "^and ??, Gram. Crit. r. 55.), becomes,
rnruy^
(^. 63.)
;
bruv^,
in Zend, j^^^^/^9
^ dui, "two,"
form
30.)
(.
vocalization of the
44.
/
r,
vo^:>>^ duyS.
We
with respect to
word an
c e is
always appended to
it;
instance,
^9m^m^
ddtare,
"Creator,"
;
j/A5fev
hvare, "Sun,"
instead
of 7aj^am^ ddtar
is
not introduced
according to sonant
is
48.,
mostly avoided
is
so,
:
vowelless r an e
dadaresa, from
appended
transposed, in
^|t dadarsa, " vidi,'''' " vkHf^ or the r is the same manner as is usual in the Sanskrit for
Crit. r. 34^.)
(Gram.
dthaurun.
syllabic
To
this, also,
ar, at
the
beinto
this syllable
dthra,
" fire,"
stands instead of
liu
see 7-^1.
41
[G. Ed.
p. 43-3
dthar*
The combinations
^^7 ry,
where a vowel
follows,
and the
word before ^
for instance,
fourth";
Aj^^^Ailp vairya,
"strong";
;
urvan,
"soul"
whole"
(?)
(nomina;
tive)
man"
" four
aj^j^o^aj^ harsta,
"ploughed"
but
jto>7<3Aj^ chaihrus,
is
want-
ing, as in
Chinese the
while, nevertheless,
it
exists in the
modern
Semitic origin.
The Sanskrit ^ v has three representatives od*. The two first are so far distin-
va^m,
" we,""
= ^^^
vaynm,
= 'in tava.
assumes,
is
only graphic.
which
I,
<3th, so that
never
find
accompanies an antecedent 6 M.
much
oftener than
cjd*after
Perhaps the law here obtains that the (^dh, which, according to . 39., stands for_^ c? (5) ,is only followed by , while
an original (^dh, corresponding
appears in conjunction with
(sxf.
to a
answers
^fT^ dadivan while the accusative, of frequent occurrence in theVendidad, ^<^iMi^i^Madhuanem, seems to be identical with the Sanski-it ^ qT V<n adhwdnom,
t;
" viam.^
(Vend. Olsh.
p. 18.)
* By Stlimme, the author here evidently means the crude derivative words which serve as Stems or Bases to inflected words, or those in combination with inflectional terminations; thus dthra for dthar, forma
Editor.
637.
42
<3 f/i
oxTm?
w much
or J
y,
in which
position
in tlie
[G. Ed.
Thus we read
jtvsjaicO^
the nominatives
jtojaxOAj^ daiwiH
however,
to
as derived from
dn^a through
the suffix j
i,
seems
me
is it
Or
between i and
instance
plural
;
w only
*'
can be allowed
Another
is,
^AicOA5 aiivyo,
It
springs
q)aj
hhyas,
hy6,
according to
. 41.,
has
introduced an j
>?
hh has weakened
the
Zend
between
for
It
two
J Ts, is the
very
common
is
preposition
joj^Oaj, aiwi,
sometimes substituted.
>?
may
v.
hh appears in the
We
find,
iJjha,
shape
Aii>
aova
(.
28.),
the
S.
think
where j^^o^jqJjj kji^J^aj ^jmmj^ anieshi speniS, can hardly signify any thing
^^m
else
aovS
yamd
f venerans Amschaspanlos'' (non conniventes Sanctos, see Nalus, vv. 25, 26.) Anquetil interprets (T. 3, p. 472.) ovS, by "tons
deux.''*
We
r,
have
still
[G. Ed.
p. 45.]
the
semi-vowel
ojf iv
appears, namely,
before 9
in
is
more appro-
* Compare, in
this respect,
^m
w^^
ab-bhra,
43
this case
the feminine
believe
juLj7axr>j3
in
which
we As
we
^suMra, "shining,"*
with Buruouf,
is
that
iv,
which also
akin to the
Sanskrit
v after consonants.
ad"
as the English f,
and the
letters
9 and
46. I
as the English w.
scribed in
. 41.,
which
from the
where ascribed
to the corresponding
;
vowel
>
u a power of
in virtue of which,
weak
cases (see
129.), after
by the
The
in^
p. 46.]
taruna,
"young,"
is,
or
Mp9>M^ tauruna
(. 28.);
and
[G. Ed.
has,
converted
47.
itself into
>^\l^ v6hu.
to
remark on the
fact,
pecu-
liar to the
commuand we
and
find ourselves
have ascribed a similar influence to jt^ s and t n, compelled to assign the same also to the
sutcrafun, appears in Olshausen, n. 13, with
(. 40.)
Then ne often
270.)
44
labial nasal,
^Tw^ Jagmushi
The
has changed
is
dental medial
free
from
we
find
medial
We
have, on
tlie
The
the
/
and
t\
(mT
w, and
we
find
aspirated
for
instance,
in
Aj^^^q^a
"the second,"
Xi^i^j'^<3 thritya,
"the
third'':
menon,
a
that before
r,
sibilant,
an h
is
or
^^'^^'^^^
kerepem, "the
A5yo'j9 vehrka, or
also,
" wolf,"
(^oR viika.)
The semi-vowel y
thus, As^^wAJwio
j^tji
"through
We come now
to the sibilants.
The
first,
a palatal,
pronounced in Sanskrit with a gentle aspiration, ^, which we express by s in Sanskrit, and t in Zend, is written m in
the latter.
able.
Its
exact pronunciation
as&igns
it
is
scarcely
ascertains.
Anquetil
It
in
its ^r s
thus,
for instance,
dam,
common
itself
to both
languages.
has spread
wider in
Zend than
that
before
several
consonants,
45
^ k,
and
in the
an
y n, as well at
the beginning as in
latter
place,
however, only
au d,
and
-jjj
it
Compare ^ij^juj^jj stdrd, "the stars," with <HKM^ sfdras; j^^ms^m kdomi, "I praise," with wifij sfdumi; j^mm asti, "he is," with ^fw asti; ^'^^jjas " aj^^asjjj skanda^ ahnnm, ossium" with -^aflJil asihi
dental or ordinary s
Jf.
;
" shoulder,"
(?)
juiyjj
We
this cirs,
cumstance that
s J3
yet
it
may have
sh,
to
German
s in
It is further to
be remarked, that
"4
s J3
occurs also
for this pre-
an.
The occasion
nom.
^^
nt
o)
The semi-vowel
;
is
after ja s
^jyju3a)j3
p. 48.]
"gT
spdnem
A5a)a3Aj
" canem,"
vispa,
" all,"
sud.
TBTfTT sicdnam,
is
aj^^^c)j3 spenta,
"
holy,"
From
Greek
the
Zend
ajq)j3xj
is
itttto^,
which
supplies
sibilant
^^
sh,
the
Zend
The
s,
fii-st,
according to
Rask,
is
ordinary
and
Sanskrit dental
and marks
it
this
while j^ has the sound of "^ = shi ^ by a stroke of aspiration. We therefore write
that these
sh.*
Rask observes
;
two
changed in MSS.
* It is
Sh
denotes the
Sanak.
'^.
46
that M5
is
ctj
sh,
(.
sonants
a position of
much
of letters.
qc,
t,
the dentals,
among
c,
nasals principally
n.
At the end
of
s,
but yet
my Sanskrit Gram<S^
s into i^
sh
and
and
r.
MiJ^J>s<:^ paitis,
"Lord,"
drucs,
Mi(S^'>2^
" daemon,"
jj-^^Aii
\i>2^ druj.
On
baruns, "bearing,"
MiAiMi<S^ csvas,
it
word
a terminating Mi
t( g,
^ sh of "^^
superlative suffix
ishtha.
Other examples
krishta.
karsta,
" ploughed,"
for
c^'g
In the
word
oj s,
xsjXi^^xiMi
which
latter
San-
skrit
^nR
sayana
54.)
In the
fem. numeral
t,
since tlie
appear
47
is frfya tisras,
and
is
l?
ac-
becomes
w
sh
h.
The
^,
however,
here
in a position (after
i)
in
^^
conversion of
?r
s into
form
'i'^-w-H?-}^
tisard.
That
it
V^-^'ftO-*^ tisharo,
as
certainly
as
not to be ascribed
a,
for
^ sh
be-
[G. Ed. p. 50 ]
compare
aj^^i^aj^
and ^F^
ei^shu,
*'
in
his^-^
nuishya,
Yet
;
i*y
sh does not
ksh
we
find almost
everywhere in Olshausen's
cs;
and
without variation,
csnihra,
j^^
"king," Sanskiit
t^
"a
man
of the war-
Tlie
j^jA?i^Aj9'iAj;cy(3^ cshnadmayeiti,
reject,
is
we must, on a double
at p. 33, since
ground,
J^9
s here
the following n.
Sanskrit
fish
in
and
appears as j^
For
instance,
^^jTff
" deiter^
becomes
Ajyji^yAs^
oshi,
compounds (Bahuvrihi).
53.
fev
is
ilant
s.
in Zend,
this
letter
possibly because
n,
sw
to
shape
^c kh;
while before
h, (. 49.) it is
p. 51.J
i.
The
48
roots
detected
^T^
spri's,
hd, "they,"
m
^H
^^^^
fnfiff
sd.
sapta.
^'^^P^asi.
iK'g/g^AJW hakereU
jfeVAj
"once,"
ahi, "
thou art,"
" to this,"
.jJiu^^A)
'Sl^
astndi.
^^
swa.
The word
as
is
treated
s,
and replaced hj
I
(. 58.).
54.
word t{T^
it,
sahasra,
has rejected
the sibilant in the last syllable, and taken the shape xil^fM^i
haznnra.
^r^oii
If,
in
the
word
aj^jiv5>'
Sansk.
susjika,
we must remember
s,
answers
to
^
s,
.v.
In
many
is
beginning with
the corresponding
80.)
Thus
believe
f^
siddlia, "
per-
^j^.MjAj^ shdistem;
" deceased,"
(p. 29)
analogy of m^mj7j
.
iristot
from
(3j7j iritli
(see
99.)
Olshausen
notifies
as variations
of ^g^ojjjjuo^o
shdisfim,
shdisiem
^^^mjjmm
shdisHm,
sdistem,
^^^J^Jauj^
^^^Vi^-iJ^iCp
and
^^^ew^-w^l^ shdistem.
sents a difficulty
;
In
all
for,
according to
shaidh;
28.,
f^
shidh would
suffix ta,
(o^as^i)
and
this,
with the
49
shdi&thn.
What
Anquetil
existe
p.
par
purete mhne, quelle est la premiere chose qui plaise a cette terre
{que nous kabitons), et la rende favorable, runs in the original
(Olsh., p. 29,
Bumouf,
p. 137),
-ja3^j3aj 9"g4/A5n?AStt
^m^ms^
"Creator mundorum existentium, pure! primum hujus terrcE perfectum (.bonum?") 55. The nominative pronominal base sya (Graram. Crit. r. 26S), in the Veda dialect, is under the influence of and we see in Rosen's specimen, p. 6, the preceding word
zemo shdistem?
ubi (quid)
this pronoun,
when
it
u,
converted
my Grammar.
;
phenomenon
"
ei,"
in the
is
Zend pronouns
we
find
ajw
which
founded on a
lost Sanskrit
i d
it
<^,
"iut\'^
"
iibi "),
when
roMi gi
ro^ip shS);
at p. 37 of Olshausen
while on the
same page we
[G. Ed.
p. 63.]
"and
read
if
to him.''
if,
we
find a similar
phenomenon,
it
^j^
shdo (thus I
^#ajd("i//e," "iZ&i"): aso^^m^ "^C^ gu^lJO "^ 9-^ J3 '^*Y/ M^^/M^M, Noit zi im z&o shdo yd (text, guu^ ydo) daregha
akarsia (text, Aj^en^^J^As adarsta),
lies
'*
For not
this earth
which
long unploughed/'
56).
An w
vowel
this
and
least,
o,
A,
no exception
or
e.
vowel
is
We
of the
find,
for
jw
hi
and we
find, for
50
thou art,"
jj^ajaocS^avi bacsahi,
" tliou
j^^Mi(^>^ bacsanhi. The termination as, which in Sanskrit only before sonaii t
25.)
consonants (.
its Tf
into
"^ u,
and contracts
6 (compare the
al)
On
ds,
which in Sanskrit
s,
before
in
Zend
o (for
its I
u)
and
I
supported in a conjecture
enounced before
my acquaintance
It
is
precedes the
s
of the
aj^ cha,
the
above mentioned
substantial
is
changed into
together with
these
into
a
d>
representatives of the
its
evaporation
o is also retained,
and the
To
illustrate
this
jtt^
an uninflected nominative,
receives in
^9
the Sanskrit
mdoscha, and ^T^n mdsam, " lunam,"^ ^f^^S^^ mdonhem ; so that in the two last examples the Sanskrit sibilant is represented by a vowel and a consonant.
"
The analogy
;
of mdonhem,
for example, for
lunam,"
is
followed in
all
similar instances
dsdm, "
^nriR
Observations, rule
Grammar,
the
t Burnouf
is
51
<
Two
z,
sibilants
and
like the
p, 55.]
French
and
may
therefore be replaced
by that
Sanskrit
to the
letter.
^h
for the
most
part,
Zend
h.
SAIfSKRIT.
^r^
aham,
"I,**
^^
V^
^nT
he strikes,"
j^^jxif
zainti.
he
carries,'^
j^jaj^a>9 vazaitL
" bears,"
f^
hi,
" for,"
jj
zi.
iiJd^Jihivd, JT^H
"tongue,"
aj>>^j' hizva, (.
5a)
S^-w^
ace. 9c3ttrjA>9
58.
Sometimes _^ z appears
is
skrit "Sfj;
nounced dsch,
pressed (see
.
d sound sup-
53.)-
Thus ^My^
;
from the Sanskrit root '^jush, "to please or gratify." Thirdly, the Zend z represents also the Sanskrit xr g, which is easily accounted for by the relationship between g and j.
The Indian
g6, (accus.
two forms
the
first
the Nouveau Journ. Asiatique, torn. iii. p. 342, speaking of the relation of mdohho to manaitho, withoat noticing the analogies which occur in cases
of repetition, mdosh-cha,
''
is
become o
in consequence
we hare
lately noticed.
e2
62
has given
jk\)>ju5^
way
to the labial
and
fiovs
and
.ucguj^ gdos,
gdus,
p. 56.]
correspond to the
Sanskrit
nom.
is
jfhr gdus.
[G. Ed.
For the
sigriification
Greek
z.
replaced by
The nom.
''^tVi^gdus ;
^j zdo
supposes
gds, for
in the accusative,
^'^^zahm agrees,
in respect
7^1/.
gdm and
is
It is
observable,
many words
it its
own developement,
yuyam,
"
so
y.
"^tht
you,"
(vos),
Sometimes, also, >a zh has becomes ^fJo_j>>*o yuzhem. sprung from the sound of the English^', and corresponds to
the Sanskrit
i^
j,
as in
>yg)o
some
i
prefixes, in
;
the place
of the Sanskrit
nizhbaraiti,
dental
after
and u
thus,
JCO-5Aj^Jojy
"he
carries
out";
^j^(3^^eb>^
dus-matem, "
60.
ill
thought."
still
We
have
till
postponed
indispensable.
We
must
first
respect of n, two main distinctions are established, and that these mainly depend on the circumstance whether n precedes
a vowel or a consonant.
In this
its
manner
and
are so
at the
end of words
We
on the
^g^^AJi^^y^j hushyantcm
53
man";
anya,
"the other."
difference
^ a
is
probable that
,jM,
had a duller and more suppressed sound than the freer y and by reason of this weak and undecided character of its pronunciation, would appear to have applied itself more
easily to every organ of the following letter.
61.
Still
feebler
to
an equivalent
we
conjecture to
which is always involved with aj a, and which seems from its form to have been a fusion of
have been the nasal
AJ
and
y.
We
find
this letter,
first,
h, like
the aspirates
and \f\ for instance, M'^^^mmsCS^ csayanSf ; AjyAU^Asi^w^ zanhyamdna, a part of the middle future of the root yAJ< zaru " to beget," but, as it seems to me, with a passive signifi(3 //}
cation {"qui
nascetur,''^
Vend.
S. pp. 28
yA>9
and
;
103.);
ju^Ca'-gi^
man
>ya"jj^yan/ViM,
"mouth," probably from the Sanskrit ni ^'aj>, "to pray," Secondly, before a . 40., and with the nasal inserted.
terminating 9 m and y w. the Sanskrit termination
We
'^rnr
dm
is
always changed to
^"^i^xi^
g yjyAj ^ojgja)
pddhanahm, "pedmn,^
terp. 58.]
Sans, rn^j^nti^pdddndm
WH
do
y^
aniu*
For the
according to
. 56., is
placed as
s,
the
h, which springs from Zend has two characters, j and jS, to both which
and
64
Anquetil assigns the sound ng.* We write them n, in order to avoid giving the appearance of a </ preceded by a guttural n to this guttural,
which
is
the following
w h.
As
two
letters, ^
comes
always follows a and do ; jS, on the contrary, after i and e, for which the occasion is rare. For
instance, in the relative plural nom. hswji^a*^*^} yenhS, "qui,'"' and in the fem. pron. genitives, as ^oyjSjM ainhdo, " hujus,^^ which often occurs, but as often without j i, and with ^ n.
guki^^ anhdo. What phonetic difference existed between ^ and jS we cannot venture to pronounce. Anijuetil as we have seen, assigns the same pronunciation to each; while Rask
compares
its
j^
n,
and
illustrates
n.
The
it
labial nasal ^
skiit
jt:
sometimes
At
;
spoke "
"
in
a similar
manner
is
the Indian
;
^ mukha,
and not
[G. Ed. p. 59.] much otherwise the Latin mare to the Sanskrit mix. vdri, " water." I consider, also, mullus related to ^t(^ bahula, the
64.
Greek
iroKv^,
concluding
operates in a double
.
manner on
a to f e
a preceding vowel.
and, on the
It
weakens (see
30.) the aj
and u;
tanum,
In
paiti'm,
"the Lord,"
^_)>yA5^
contradiction to
rule
we
find
occurrence,
>x\i
^>jm^m ashdum,
is
" pure."
Here,
however,
^ du, the
last
element of which
Bumouf also
writes the
first
of these ng.
my
'
55
of the
question
;
is
contraction
theme
yAjAJi^A5 ashavan
with an irregular
conversion of the
concluding
65.
n into ^ m.
We
summary
au d
of the
Zend
characters.
Simple Vowels
aj a,
e,
c e
6i
;
i,
41;
>
tififo,
^u
Diphthongs
Gutturals
:
m,
it
jo S,
J^
jam di;
<^ 6,
i'), <Si
^do,
>am du.
c (principally
before consonants),
kh (from
and i^y);
Palatals
:
^g, p
gh.
ch, jj^/
t
Dentals
(before vowels
and
^^ y), f
(before con-
^ th
(before whole
and semi-vowels),^
Labials: <ip,
nasals,
d,
Q^dL
^/
and ao
:
_i
&.
Senu- vowels
j^,
(the
;*o, ^^
y (the two
7,
[G. Ed.
p. 60.]
first initial,
/)' 9>
Sibilants
and h:
z,
French J), ^
Nasals
:
m s, ^ h.
t:;p
sh,
m^
s,
Jo
an (be-
h, (sih,
*/, 9 m,
and
n),
^ n (between
r
),
a or
do,
and
h,
j^
(between j
or
jo i,
and
^ m.
Remark
^Mi
66.
also the
Compounds ew*
treating
and
^en^ for
St.
We
refrain from
specially
of the Greek,
Latin,
The Gothic
which, according to
Grimm,
is
66
from
a has
a,
in
The
ancient
not,
but
in radical
been weakened to
also,
often,
been con-
verted into u.
sibun,
'*
seven," with
^^
damn.
We
down
as a
s
law, that
is
or suppressed
i.
but before
a terminating
appears as
concluding
^a
it
never becomes
68.
i.
German
to
[G. Ed.
unaltered, or
is
weakened
to
o.
e,
or is changed
w = perhaps
According to
is
the
same as
Gothic
(. 66.)
to
^a/
compare, for
W^"^ vnka-sya,
(. 66.),
wolfe-s.
The precedence
cceco,
a into m or o com;
Also
Germany
a semi-vowel to
y, which in Sanskrit (xr y) belongs as the same class as r, the Old High German
or
seems
plural
to prefer
to a; thence
sing.,
plintju,
"caeca,"" as
;
a fem. nom.
The u
I
person present, as
tlie
kipu, "
ascribe to
influence of
compare
also
66.
ki
In
(our
the Old
High German
ye)
inseparable
ija,
preposition
German
Gothic
Sanskrit
sa or
w^
sam,
we
57
come
69,
i.
d,
long
a,
and
this
o,
in cases
a.
Grimm's
first
sing, d is softened to a,
whence
giba, gibo-s
concluding WT 4
shortened to a
been dropped
for
^H dm.
Sometimes,
'/,
also, in
to the Sanskrit
and neuter.
[G. Ed.
In
the Old
6 either
p. 62.]
remains
two
short vowels
ua, or uo
;
while in the
High German, uo prevails Modern High German the two divided vowels
u.
For the Gothic i = ^[\d, the Old, Middle, and Modern High German have preserved the old d,
are contracted into
except in the gen. plural,
70.
For ^
and ^
as
Grimm
is
is
latter,
to
be
considered as long
German
so represented.
as
by a circumflex.
appears mostly as
In the
ei
;
Gothic genitive meina, and the Old and Middle High Ger-
man
min.
Sometimes a short
leiks,
is
substituted, as in lichy
"like," at the
" nos,''
end of comveis,
On
stress,
the long
as
It is
i,
in wir,
Gothic
we can
usually,
no
we match
Gothic mis.
we
by the addition of an
h.
68
71.
tions in the
e i
and
w, I
and
than that
is
as often suppressed as o
but
it
never
is
We may
lay
[G. Ed.
way
in
has given
in Latip
Compare.
SANSKRIT.
iir<
obere:.
Ttepi,
LATIN.
GOTHIC.
fair. (. 82.)
pari,
per.
imfi: upari,
^figr asti,
^rf^ff
vnep,
eCTi,
evTi,
super.
est,
ufar.
ist
sind.
santi,
sunt,
72. Where a concluding i occurs in Gothic and Old High German it is always a mutilation of the German j (or y) toge-
" exercitum," is
a mutilation of haryaA
42.,
Before a con;
and
is
mostly a weakening
High German, and still more in Middle and Modern High German, the Gothic i has often degene67.
In Old
rated into
is
which, where
it
expressed in
Grimm by e.
We retain
this character.
We
%
* The Sanskrit
*'
ruler "
f^il pitri, " father," probably stands for VM^ pdtri^ to the true original.
(Gramm.
Annot.)
in order to
.
68.
1.
12.
and as the j
is
the
German j
will be represented
by y
in this
59
beginning of a syllable
is
above, which
73.
y,
Grimm
Zend
retains.
As
i
in
(. 41.),
?,
i,
or
an
is
so also, in
Old High German, the corresponding sounds have obtained [G. Ed. p. 64.] an assimilating power; and frequently an converted into e, without any syllable is preceding a of the
power of prevention on the part of either a single or double consonant. Thus, for instance, we find from ant, " branch,''
the plural
vallUf
esti; fall,"
from
and from
vell'it.
"I
vellis,
German
not
we
find,
for
instance,
arpl,
" hereditas*'
74. In the
e,
which springs
and assimilation; inasmuch as, with few (Grimm, p. 332,) not only every a by its retrospective action becomes e, but generally, also, d, u, and o are modified into le, u, and o; 6 into as, and no into ue. Thus the plural gesfe, drcete^ brilche, k'dche, leene, gruese,
from
On
in the Old
i
e
;
and we
gaste-s, drate-s,
&c.,
because
German
masculine
class,
reduced to e the
belonging to the
class,
The
by German,
the modification of a,
in cases
retained in the
as,
Ende, Engel,
sefzen,
iiamnyan, brannyan.
is distinctly
short or
60
[G. Ed.
p. 65.]
from short or long a and in the same from o, au from au for instance, Brdnde, PfrVe, Dunste, Fliige, Koche, Tone, Bdume, from Brand,
relation,
w from
u, 6
P/dl, &c.
76.
For
g-tt,
"31
w,
u,
Among
we
Grimm,
p. 41, of
long
u,
which corresponds to the Sansk. "^^swddu, "sweet," (j^JJ-f), and in which the long u may stand as a compensation for
the absence of the w(v), which becomes vocalized. In Old
High
German
trust,"
it
seems
to
me that puam,
which
" to
stand
from
comes
r. 51.)
form of which
cf.
(. 26.)
connected
vrfgrra
The Middle High German continues the Gothic Old High German u, but the Modern High German substitutes au, whence bauen, trauen, Taube (Gothic dubo).
fast,"
As out of the Sanskrit T u, in Zend, the sound of a short ^* has developed itself (. 32.), thus, also, the Gothic u shews itself, in the more recent dialects, ofteuer in the
77.
form of
than in
its
own.
in the
Old and Middle High German (Grimm's 9th conjug.) preserved a radical u in the plur. of the
but replaced
it
Compare, for instance, hugum, by o in the passive part. " we bend,'* bugans, bent," with Old High German pukumSs, pokan^r, Middle High German bv^en, bogen. The example
*'
adduced shews,
also, the
e,
in un-
High German
as in
Modern
all
High German
may
it
represent
as a
original vowels
and we
may
lay
down
rule,
that all long and short vowels in the last syllable of poly* Cf.
447. Note.
61
to a
mute
78.
e.
p. 6B.j
Wt
d {a
and
d.
;
***tmMs
AMiere
6*
--
and a + u; and as in
is
from ama'imus
(. 5.);
the
+ u, whose
element
a,
latter
element appears
{hovis,
while
the
first
in
its
degeneration,
appears as o
(. 3.).
Compare,
GOTHIC.
SAXSKRrr.
^JT charema
'^TIT
(eamus),
(eatis),
faraima,
faraitJu
varSmis.
charHa
varH.
ikaim
all
dSm.
In like manner, in
[G. Ed. p. 67.] The Middle High and Gothic au ;f G.'rman has shortened this e, as standing in an unaccented
varet).
Besides
this,
the Middle
High German
If,
has, in
common
^S
and
o, hut, as
Grimm
con-
du : in approximate to the Vriddhi- change (. 26.) ^ at and German e, 6, as opposed to the Gothic ai, au, are not
by the Sanskrit
to the union of a
with
or u,
century.
62
where
it
s),
had been
v or
o.
(Grimm,
Compare,
OLD
GOTHIC.
aiv,
HIGH GERMAN,
hvin.
sn^o.
" cBvumr
"nix,'"'
snaivs,
snS.
mais, "magis^"'
laisyan, "docere,"'^
laihv, " commodavUf^
mir,
liran.
m^
Ureru
Uch.
m
mer
(jnehr),
lieh,
In the
partly replaced;
Schne {Sclmee),
p. 983.).
gedieh.
(Grimm,
As
ai,
Old and
consonants
favoured by certain
numerous.
They
according to the
Sanskrit division,
16.)
/,
d, z, together
and
sibilant (n, s)
and
h,
which,
as a termination in Middle
Grimm,
in
Middle
in the absence
For instance.
(traxi,
5^^ duddha
(mulxi,
mulsi,) ;
but pouc,
hu-bh6ja.
fexi,
jlexvt,
Gothic hauy,
Sanskrit
^>?^
man,
to
as
and
in
the modification of
75;
next,
shortened to
o,
, ;
63
au
run";
81.
As
by
ai,
and likewise
and av by au
as,
{Paitrus,
Galeilain,
apaustaulus, Paulas
and
Gothic
ai
and au
represented in like
ai is replaced in
Old
77.)
or
e,
and au by or
by ei, and these Grimm deduces from therefore ou or au by d (. 84.) and au one facts a double value of the diphthongs ai
ai is replaced
;
by
^,
or
( .
85.)
{ai, au),
another with
We
German system
value in
all
although
we
fact, that,
in Sanskrit,
never replace his ai and au; but everywhere, ^, wt d, where occasion occurs, do replace di and du. We think, howis
As concerns
counted
for,
may
be ac-
[G. Ed.
p. 69.]
which
Ulfilas
a.
Could
have looked back into the early ages of his language, and
a,
From
au,
ai
and
him
at
ejusdem generis,
(^nd).
is felt
as
weaker than
tj
and o, as
is
proved by the
fact
not
TUTTTo/Liar.
The
expression of the
Greek
at
and av by
64
even
if ai
was pronounced
like
S,
and au
or u.
like
6,
yet
still
As
ai
Gothic
effect in the
younger
Sanskrit,
same foundation in the older might be sufficient to observe upon one feature
but require
it to
;
of dialect
peculiar to the Gothic, that h and r do not content themselves with a pure preceding
i,
be affected
by Guna
26.)
thus, ai for
i
i,
and au for u
while other
dialects exhibit
the
The
relation of the
SANSKRIT.
"^
shash,
^^
damn,
swasura,
dahshind,
1.),
^ pam,
hrid (from hard%.
"'BTnc
"dextera,"
?[f^?!n
p S 7
hairtd, "heart,"
^^
^T^Tf^
hhartum,
dar-i-tum,
"to tear,"
^^^
2
is
stairnd, "star,"
ITTO tdrd,
i
had been
placiul
to
(. 66.),
the forms
sihs, tihun,
Guna power
had produced
man
sehs, (
t'ehan
upon an
Guna form
. 1.)
"daughter.""
Where
the
65
Ha has
preserved
to
i,
itself
not weakened
the occasion
ai,
since
compare
The
alterations
tc
the Gothic.
of the diphthong
^6
shews
itself often in
regular manner, as
27.)
a contained in F ^ (a + i) becomes i, which, with the second element of the diphthong, generates a long i (written as e^, The Gothic iu has either retained that form in Old . 70.).
High German, or has altered sometimes one, sometimes both [G. Ed. p. 71.] of its constituents. Thus have arisen ?o, eo.
There
is
which cannot
fail
to surprise, as
we know that a simple u never becoms a.f High German iu has either remained unaltered,
changed to
ie,
In Middle
or has been
which
is as old as
man, as
it
is
found in Notker.
ie
In
the substitution of
iu,
* Ahtau^ashtau
is
^ au; on
is
au
often answers to
is
^t
d=i{a-iru).
+ There
Grimm
(p. 103J
Gothic
such as
"
After this analogy _^or, "four," (according to Otfrid), arose out of the
Godiic fidmrr, in this way, that, after the extrusion of the de, the 6 pa^ised
into
its
Grimm,
m
p. 198.
66
for phonetically
it is
absorbed by the
i.
Compare
Besides
still
this
form,
we
75.);
lawleis,
Old High
German liuti,
for instance,
German
niuni,
Gothic niuneiSf
Sanskrit rn^T navan (as theme); neu, "new," Old High Ger*
man
This
nivi-s,
however,
is
difficult to
account
it
in as far as
it is
i
corresponds to an
this
in
and
vowel, of itself
is
capable of
no
iu,
power
of attraction.
Long u
is
for
found iu
lugen,
"to
lie,"
liugen, triugen.
84.
Where
making au the
equi-
valent of
the Middle
High German
authorities,
baug, "JtexL'
relation to
o in /3oGf
High German bouc, with the Gothic preterite The o of the High German ou has the same the corresponding Gothic a in au, as the Greek
'H a,
which undergoes a
gd.
Is.)
fusion with
word aft Old High German authorities (Gl. Hrab. Ker. have au for the ou of the later (Grimm, p. 99); and
^ u
in
the
^6
of the cognate
The
oldest
as,
67
rf,
80.,
like
our
German
a+
tars
u).
au,
the Sanskrit
ai,
6 (out of
letr
also,
both the
this
diphthong must be
^ ^.
diphthong
ai the
a alone
is
susceptible
High German
softened
down
to
in the cases in
which the
^,
contracted from ai
(. 78.),
ei,
does
not occur.
nunciation,
In
in pro-
GOTHIC.
haita, " voco,^
MODERX
HIGH GERMAX,
heisse.
skeiduf
scheide,
scheide.
73.]
Of
merely the
for in-
{k, g)
and
Ulfilas, in
imitation of the
;
tongue"
"to drink"; briggan, "to bring"; tuggd^ yuggs, " young" gnggs, " a going" (subst.). For
;
the
compound kv the old writing has a special character, which we, like Grimm, render by qv, altliough q does not
;
appear elsewhere, and v also combines with g so that qv {=kv) plainly bears the same relation to gv that k bears to gr;
compare siyqvun,
sing."
" to sink,"
with siggvan,
" to
read," " to
t- ;
H also, in
and
a special
often
In respect to h by
itself
we have
to
observe that
it
r2
^
kh,
In this
manner
is
we have,"
as bauth to biiJum,
not in
1
all
s,
and
if
our
ch.
High German,
is
so dis-
f,
for a double k.
(Grimm,
the
p. 422.)
(SS
Zend
c in contrast to ^
as also of the /
Hn
con-
trast to
(2.)
in Gothic, as
t,
in
th,
d,
For
th the
Gothic
alphabet z {=ts)
In the High
t,
German
so
By
the side
High German,
maintains
There are two species of z, which, in Middle High German, do not agree with each other. In
its
existence.*
the one,
is
s;
and
zss,
this latter
written by Isidor
and
its
reduplication
tz.
while the
In the
Modem
the
retained
but in writing
is
versally,
from
proper.
German
t.
fall
The
th
is,
according to
Grimm
"
It is,
69"
25.)
with a double aspiration, a surd i/=\p!i) (see and a sonant, which is written v, and comes nearer to
the Sanskrit
bfu
In
no longer any phonetic difference between / and v but in Middle Hiffh German v shews itself in this manner softer
than /, in that,
into /,
first,
at the
end of words
it
is
transformed
on the same
principle
the medials are converted into tenues; for instance, wolf not
wolv, but genitive wolves; second, that in the middle before
surd consonants
it
becomes
/,
zvcelfle,
funve becomes
and
f,
funfle, funfzic.
in Middle
signification,
p. 75.]
precarious,
[G. Ed.
It is
the
same
High German
as the original
letters,
93.) soften
down a
tenuis to
vnier,
its
medial
vater,
(Grimm, pp.
135, 136);
for instance,
demo
all
den
is
less
German
and write
/ for it
by
The
aspiration of the
is
also rendered
p/j, but,
in the middle,
and Tatian.
many
cases, has
" In
70
assume that these words were pronounced kufar, sceferi^ In Middle High German the initial |j/i of foreign (p. 132).
p. 326).
words of the Old High German has become pf (Grimm, In the middle and at the end we find pf, first, always
here" in which case
after m, kampf, " pugna^ tampf, " vapor" krempfen, " contra-
is
inseparable prefix
aside
its
t,
erd,
or, as
appears, in Middle
High German,
combine with
is
(. 25.)
necessary (see
Grimm,
p.
398).
just as in Sanskrit
(Gramm.
Crit. r.
preceded by
said for
its
tenuis
prichchhati
v^;!li( prichhati.
from the root VTS prachh. Middle High German forms view the
klopfen, kripfen, kapfen
In this light I
kopf, kropf, tropfe,
(Grimm,
p, 398).
we sometimes
Here,
also,
p
i^
has
it
be
the aspirate of p,
that
is,
is
ph,
like
while ph
+ th
would be im-
by^'
= y),
The Sanskrit semi-vowels are represented in Gothic r,l, v, the same in High German only in Old
;
CHARACTERS AND
(our w)
is
SOUNTDS.
uu, in
i.
71
Middle High
agree with
German
man.
written
We
and
semi- vowel
in
most authorities
for in-
As
in the Sanskrit
and
Zend
the semi-vowels
i
responding vowels
y and t> often arise out of the cor[G. Ed. p. 77.] and u, so also in the
from the
usually,
Germanic;
Guna {iu,
. 27.).
More
at terminations
. 73.),
become
for
vocalised (see
" servant,"
the
genitive,
we know, from
of thivas
(.
116.);
become a whole
like the
one.
In like
manner
is
(.
ihiviy
120.),
whose nominative,
was
however, in the
Of
the
last,
f
at
s.
Out
in
of this,
use,
howthe
ever,
springs another,
least
to
softer pro-
nunciation than
s.
This z
is
t',
/,
or n
n)
and a vowel, y or
"ashes";
n, in
some words
thus
finally,
everywhere
before
sonants,
and
it
must
while
(. 25.),
72
8 is the surd.
view,
tliat
a concluding
ei
and
passes into z
hence, for
"quos,"'''
from
thanzei
'*
from
*'
from
vileis
vis" haitaza
earlier
its
form
haitas.
The
by a reduplication, in the
Other examples are,izt;,"vo6is," "vos,"razn "house," talzyan^ " to teach," marzyan, " to provoke," fairzna, " heel." The
r,
especially
parts of the
final s
Grammar.
For
instance, in
Old High
German, the
vowel
commence with a
it
For example, from the " comes liusu, I lose," Ida, root lus, I or he lost," lurumis " we lost." While in these cases the termination takes under its protection, yet the s of the nominative singular,
'*
where
it
is
everywhere
softened
down
to r
down
to
and thus an organic difference has arisen between two cases originally distinguished by a similar sufiix. For instance,
OLD
GOTHIC.
MODERN
HIGH GERMAN.
hiinde-r.
hlinde-s.
HIGH GERMAN.
Nominative
Genitive
87.
.
hUnd*-s,
blindi-s,
plintS-r,
plinfe-s,
exhibit,
in
respect of con-
Grimm.
dialects^
According to
73
[G. Ed.
p.
79.]
for h,
6,
for
t, and / for p; tenues for medials, t for and k for g; finally, medials for aspirates, g for 5^ The High German bears the same and 6 for/.
and Greek
medials
rates
;
its
tenues.
its medials for the Gothic aspirates and Greek Yet the Gothic labial and guttural medial exhibits itself unaltered in most of the Old High German authorities, as in the Middle and Modern High German for instance,
and
Middle High German biuge. Modern High German biege. For the Gothic/, the Old High German substitutes v, especially as
German
aspiration of the
and either
in
sounds, z in
simple aspiration
h,
which case
or
it
it
sometimes coincides
the level of the
falls to
High
German, and,
g instead of
in the
k, the High German adhering, as regards the beginning of words, to the Gothic practice, and participating with that dialect in the use of the h. We si\e here Grimm's
'
p. 584.
Greek
Gothic
B F T D Th K G Ch P B Th T D K G B{V) F P D Z T G Ch K
P F
74
[G. Ed.
p. 80-1
EXAMPLES.*
OLD
GREEK.
LATIN.
SANSKRIT.
GOTHIC.
mCH
GERM.
^TT^^ pdda-s,
^f4t\^
folus.
vuoz.
vinf.
vol.
panchan.
quinquey
plenus,
pater,
fif^f
fulls.
puma.
irXeog,
Ttarrjp,
ft? pifri,
"^^ft upari.
fadrein^ vatar.
ufar,
.
.
inrep.
super.
ubar.
KavvajSts,
cannabis.
hanaf.
^
>9
T^ bhanj,
bliuj.
/rang ere,
frui, fructus,
frater,
hrikan.
brilkdn.
prechan.
pr'&ch&n.
m^ hhr&tri
*| &/i W,
brdthar,
baira.
pruoder.
piru.
^ep(a.
6<ppvs,
Ace^oAj;,
fero.
bhru.
prawa.
haubith,
K^TTq5
kapdla, m. n.
caput,
.
houpit.
RT tiuam (nom.),
fT^r^
TV,
thu,
du.
den.
dri.
/am
(ace),
rov.
is-tum,
tres,
alter.
thana,
threis,
Wire antara,
erepos.
arUhar,
andar.
i*ilH^danta-m(acc.), 6SovT-a,
"Si
dentem.
duo.
dextra,
thuntu-s. Zand.
tvai.
dwau
(n. c?m),
Svo,
zu^nS.
^W!n dakshind,
^^ Mc?a,
Sf^iJ duhitri,
ae|/a.
vSoop,
taihsvd.
vats.
zesawa.
unda.
.
wazar.
tohtar.
tar.
Bvydrrip,
dauhtar,
daur.
rn
"ITTT
cZwdr,
Bvpa,
fxedv,
fores,
m
W^ madhu,
JyH^swan,
m'eto.
PIjp
KVUiV,
canis.
cor.
hunths.
hairtd,
hund.
herzcu
^<^ hridaya.
aksha.
KapSia,
OKO^,
;_! VHiSj
oculus,
augd.
ouga.
zahar.
vihu.
^r^asru.
\
$aKpVf
lacrima.
iagr m..
faihu.
^^ pa^u,
pecus,
is
not separated
from the
(theme)
;
simple form
of the verb,
we
t Parenta."
7$
651BK.
GOTHIC.
HTGB GERM.
eKupoj,
socer,
svaihra.
iaihun.
suehur.
BcKa,
yvtj/ui,
decern,
zehan.
chan.
gnosco,
kan.
kuni.
jdti*
Tevoj,
genus,
genu,
chunu
chniu.
mihil.
Yow,
kniu.
mikils,
H^H mahatt
fxeyocKos,
magnus,
ansevt
heri,
'^
hansOf
XV^'
Xdes,
Xei^d},
gans.
gistra.
laigd,
kans.
k'estar.
?ni hyas.
f^
lih.
lingo, left
ISkdm.
88.
the
consonants without
its defi-
simple
tenues
for
the
Compare,
UTBOAmAir.
rafa-Sf
"wheel,"
bhavishydmi,
who,"
I give,'^
ka-s.
dumi, "
^[^ daddmu
"master,"
[G. Ed.
p. 82.]
pats, "husband,**
vfjm
pati-s
tt^T^ panchan.
"three,"
pi.
m.)
pi.
chatwdras (n.
m.)
szakd,
f.
"
bough,"
The Zend
in
stands, as
all
in the
same rank,
Fromjattf " to be
:73
47., certain
them, this
may
manner and
ginal tenuis.
GOTHIC.
Compare,
.
SEND.
j7(3 thri,
j\>Qf^(3
SANSKRIT.
fi
tri.
thwdi,
^ twL*
T(
xi^\ fra,
pra
(theme).
love,"
ahva +,
river,''
p. 83.]
m^jm
pronounce
dfs
WI ap
[G. Ed.
this coincidence
between the
pan,
ivai),
/ stand,
on the other
Zend everywhere
the letters
is
in by far the majority of forms which admit of comparison, either Gothic aspirates are
met with
in the place of
Zend Zend
manic law of
medials.
*
Compare,
occurs as an uninflected genitive in Rosen's Veda-Specimen^
like the mntilatcd
Tw&
''
p.
2t>,
and may,
I 1.
U, be
bless," from the Sanskrit root pri, "to love,'' united with the
prep.
X
Ahva.
signifies
and the
7t
SSMD.
^^^
*'
turn.
pi.
Jidvdr, (ind.)
fimf,
mj
pancha.
perenS (n. m.)
paitar-em (patreni).
master,''
j^vjj^jajq) pniti-s.
j^)>j}a53)
pasu-a.
charaiti.
he wanders," j^jas^aj^
fraihith,
tf/ttr,
"he
asks,"
"
over,"
ajua) opa-
jc^ iL
hva$, "
tvai,
'*
who,"
two,"
^^
AJ^
M
c?ra.
[G. Ed.
p.
84.1
asjja)^ c/ia.
(^ h too
is
sonant, see
:
25.)
correspond,
as,
iiowever, in the
6.
Zend the 6^
Compare,
GOTHIC.
is
not found,
_i b
ZBND.
SANSKRIT.
f^T>TfS bibharti.
" bair'ith,
he carries," j^jas^^
^joj^axj^
Aii>
haraiti,
hruthar, "brother,"
hat, "
6/irdiarom (ace.)
(n. ac. v.
both,"
*"
uba,
"^^ ubhdu
du.)
brukan,
to use,"
^
rwi
bi (prep.)
midya, " middling," ms^co^xjQ mnidhya, (o^^ajj bandh, bindan, " bind,"
madhya,
T^ bnndh.
by
persistence in the
same
T$
words.
German
vatar, the
of the
Greek
Tlie
High German
quaiuor,''^
;
has become d
in
the
Gothic
Jidvdr instead of th
but in
entirely dis-
appeared.
The p
^^ swap, (Latin
slepa,
and
High German sMfu stands in the Gothic category, but the Sanskrit root is more faithfully preserved in the Old High German in in-suepyu {sopio, see
[G. Ed.
p. 85.]
.86.4.)
90.
Nor have
everywhere submitted*
in
many
instances, either
remained
primary
sound, or have, at
scribed
least, rejected
by
87.
compare
first
habent:
the
it,
for habanth.
pres., the
of the old
not th but d
the
is
changed
It
would be better
to regard the
Burning
and
German
it.
The
lias
form
same
is
which
is,
man,
in
comes ta
ruption.
T9
same prin
vowel
ciple
softened to
Greek
to, of ervTrrer-o,
and
in
the Sanskrit
it
ta,
of ^>?^TT abhavata.
original
notice
is
due to the
fact, that in
the middle
consonant
it
often
sometimes because
ters, alterations
Mute consonants
nounced
like
(. 23.),
among
which, in
[G. Ed.
it is
p. 86.]
to be prot.
our
ch, protect
a succeeding original
odo,"''
Thus,
^^
is
in Goth, ahiau, in
Old
High German
"night,"
vv^,
ahto
accusative),
nahts.
in Gothic
Old High German nahL The liquids, on the other hand, like the vowels, which they approach nearest of all consonants, affect a d or th after themselves. From these euphonic
causes, for instance, the feminine sufl&x
fir ti
in Sanskrit, in
Greek
(r/f,
as
-notrjaig,
di,
and
tlii.
The
ori-
shews
117.),
man
unnan,
" to
euphonies:
(from
little
Ds 18 an abbreviation
= G. rat Sansk,
tS,'aee . 466.
80
affinity
tja-skaff{i)s,
The
acfiis.
form
where the
vowel of the
away,
i. e.
in the
nom. and
sing., to convert
more
easily than d,
a favourite letter at
the end of words and before consonants, though d also is tolerated in such a position. Hence the root bud, " to bid,"
(
pres. biuda,
pret., bauth, in
base,
mana-se-di, "world,"
nom.
On
and after
the
gabaurths, "birth,"
[G. Ed.
p. 87.]
"memory,"
is
gaqvumthim.
From
excluded.
On
markably with a similar phenomenon in modern Persian, where the original t of grammatical terminations and suffixes
is
and
changed into d
"to cook": on the other hand, dd-dan, "to give," bur-dan, "to
bear," Am-dan, "to come."
release the
I
ti,
Germanic
t,
suffix
and
commencing with
and terminations
t
commencing with
81
much
s,
more extensive prevalence, than does the Gothic; inasas it retains that letter, not only when protected by
and/, but also after vowels and liquids
hj
euphonic
into
d.
/ is
inserted
and
after
I
an
the
is
only after
changed
"jourschvld,
ans-t,
mah-t, "
kipurt,
birth"
rar-/,
scul-t,
perti-
have found
it
every-
where observed
and Latin.
On
some
Germanic and the Sanskrit, [G. Ed. p. 88-1 same footing with the Gothic stands on the
but which are
to the
common
Thus,
;
T^^ bandh,
grah,
in the
Vedas
xr>T
grabh,
.
(pres. greipa
with Guna,
27.)
im yam,
" street
;"
^
in
is,
an
{Saio}),
no instance
93(a).
com spond
as initial letters.
We
return
now
tion to the
one ad-
where
it
was said
how
their places
may
ieither
be retained,
they origi-
* The Latin prehendo is probably related to the Sanskrit root ^j^ grah^ through the usual mterchange bt'twieii gutlurals and labials.
82
or an aspirate,
sentence.
*
in
As examples, we
ffo
harit,
{viriJis),
\nT?5>7
dhann-
lubfi,
. 94.,
"acquiring wealth."
These words
are,
according to
We find,
^ftfr
asti
;
also,
^f^ ^tw
\R^t^
^[^^2
asti,
dhana-lap
harid
also,
^fw vedavid
[G, Ed. p. 89
asti,
\R^m
^% dhana-lab
^Trl H^f?T
With this Sanskrit law the Middle Hi";h German is very nearly in accordance, which
86.
3.;
and
. 8".,
by tenues.
vibes, of
deprived of the
base,
inflexion
tnke the
;
forms
tac, (. 86.
for
luoden, gruoben.
aspirate (v excepted)
For instance,
wort,
^^w
dadatas, not
vidas,
f^^\
German
end into
dages.
and g into c; for instance, wort, wordes; dac, The Gothic excludes only the labial medials from
t,
terminations,
aspirates.
Hence
and
the accusatives
83
Compare
(.67.)
bauth, " I or he
with
budum,
"we
offered,"
haitith
"nominafur" with
" I have,"
[G. Ed.
"he
we
have."
p. 90.]
find, in
and
initial letters
As
fit
sentence,
and
after
strong consonants
liquid
turned into a
but
tes
minan
94.
got, "
my
God."
Two
is
rejected.
Zend
many respects, a disadvantageous operation on the Grammar, and has mutilated many forms of antiquity required by theory. In the High German we may view, as in some degree connected with this phenomenon, the circumstance that roots with double liquids
of inflexions) reject the latter of the pair.
//,
mm,
nn,
rr
of tenninations in double h or
for instance,
t, one is rejected. Hence, from siihhu (pungo) nr-priltu (sfringu), the 1st
and 3d
pers.
pret
stah, ar-prat.
In Middle
High German,
G 2
84
tz loses
the
for instance,
schaz, schatzes.
95.
Between a
t
final vr
ceeding
sound
as
is is
tT,
reckoned, for
ch
equivalent to tsh
in the Sanskrit an
9.,
euphonic sibilant
following
t
;
;
and
by
into
Anuswara
s-tatra),
*'
cumstance, that, in
the
t
W^ abhavam tatra, {abhavanWith this coincides the cirHigh German, between a radical n and
s,
of an
affix,
an
"
for in-
stance,
German,
" ardour *'
I fa-
voured," an-s-t,
;
"favour";
is
from prann
"
comes
prun-s-f,
from chan
derived chun-s-t,
knowledge," our
German Kunst,
g'dnnen,
tlie
in which, as in
s has stood fast. The Gothic phenomenon nowhere, perhaps, but in an-s-ts and allhrun-s-ts 'holocaustum.' In Old High German we
exhibits this
find
still
an
inserted after
(or-s-fa, I
r,
hence,
tar-s-t,
thou darest,"
dared."
2d Note:)
only
among
s steps in
between the prepositions sam, W^ava, vftpari, irfiT prnti, and certain words which begin with ejr h. With this the Latin s between ab or oh and c, q, and p, remarkably accords*,
[G. Ed. p. 92.]
tion,
which
s,
when
To
this
we
*
We
scarcely think
it
S5
is
In the Greek, j
t, 6,
shews an
incli-
and
/u,
an euphonic
j,
in opposition to the
We
euphonic
which
is
common
places
with a dental.
/
The Latin
p between m and
a following
and
t.
German
<t,
In
)8
Greek we
/x,
an euphonic
after
of a 5 after
/z,
oldk B after
v,
and
with p and
p.
avdpo^,
i/j.d(Td\t]
see Buttman,
80)
while the
Modern Persian
places an euphonic
d between
The Greek
affords
at the
dialect, as the
The
and
to
-naKiv.
.
18.,
^ m,
v
93]
The concluding
from
^l,
in
Greek
is
and corresponds to
Zend, and Latin.
;
this
frequently springs
p.ev
final
thus,
for
instance,
(Doric
personal
/zej)
and the
dual
i?Tl^
rov
answer
to
the Sanskrit
tas.
terminations
which
have found this explanation, have given elsewhere, of the origin of the v from j
I
im
86
n ( Anuswara,
9.),
and f^ hin
is
An
judicial effect
also
of vowel terminations
is
and com-
mencements, a hiatus
fusion of the two vowels, or, in cases where the vowel has
a cognate semi-vowel at
into this
latter,
its
command, by
its
transition
and ^wu For the sake of clearness, and ^niH asty ay am, "est /ur." because the junction of two vowels might too often give
find, for
We
hoc,"
more words
to one, I write in
my
most recent text ^i^ '^, in order, by an apostrophe which I employ as a sign of fusion, to indicate that the
vowel which appears wanting in the
in
dam
in
is
contained
the
final
still
We
to
might,
perhaps,
[G. Ed.
its final
write
"S^
'^,
order directly
p. 94.]
word
shew
that
We
middle
of words,
those
of the
final
letters
of the
we
find,
life,
strength,
and
is
consciousness
*
the
Sanskrit
and
original
this
language
MSS.,
as these exhibit
and
separation.
8i
is
still
so strongly
for the
that
wliile
of-
admits of moderate
it
changes,
avoiding
elisions,
harshness,
never,
if
we
or
rendered irrecognisable by concessions too great, or transYet does the Sanskrit, more than any itions too daring.
of
its
honourably and
strenuously maintained.
(.
25.) of
no in-
surd
(.
25.),
before them.
Thus,
T{^t
and
yj ih
;
^
^
Ifh,
(Z,
TX
g,
;
V gh preceding them
kh,
xr
only
W
</i,
t,
not
^
;
tli,
V dh
eS
A:,
v
TT
dh allows only
t,
"^I^
it g,
not
^
Tj
gh
only
^ d,
not
it.
c/A
only
b,
not
p,
TS.p/j,
bh to precede
The
[G. Ed. p. 95 ]
roots and the nominal bases have to regulate their final letters
by
this
law
itself,
since, in
and
also
among
vinr
many which begin with consonants (wn^ To cite instances, the bhyas, ^ su).
forms ^fa admU
" I eat "
;
root
but not
nor
m^A
:
ad-ti,
^^
ad-tlia,
but
^ifm
The base iR pad, " foot," Vj^ pat-su, not Tf^ pad-su; on
*r^
mental plural, Wffk^ mahad-bliis not K^dftnT mahat-bhis. 99. The Greek and Latin, as they have come down to
us,
this conflict
of c*onsonants,
first
of any
it,
to surrender
or
88
at least
fication of the
altogether,
its
or violently alter
i.e.
convey
it
proper organ.
fewer occasions
and ES,
iS-jjLev,
ecr-Te,
no
root,
termi-
personal terminations, or
Greek
perf. pass,
alterations,
The makes an exception, and requires euphonic which, in part, come within the natural limits
The
.
tiie
98.;
according to which
k, y,
'x^,
or
0, because
the surd
it
;
rai,
from TYX.
the
Sanskrit in
this, that
precedes
it
and con-
For
we
should, on
TreirXeKfar,
(. 98.)TeTVTT-fi.at, rerpijS-iJLai,
The
and
inasmuch as
t,
T before a and
fjL
5, d, and ^ (5cr), instead of passing into are extinguished before a, and before t and
iriTtei-tyat,
become
<r
(7re7re/o"-Ta/,
TreTreia-fxai, "neTtei^-p-ai.
instead of
or
The Greek
$
;
termination in ai
Mand
89
in accordance
of the
We
find
Tiov-g
for
ttot-s-,
which
latter naturally
and
originally
must
iroJ-o-, itod-at,
consonants presents
the
t
itself
before the
(participles) beginning
with
t;
and
it is
in
98.,
[G. Ed.
p. 97.]
and
t,
scriptum from
h,
scrib.
It is also
(.
as a sonant
c
25.)
t
;
tenuis,
becomes
before
and
compare
vec-sit {vcxit),
^RT^TT
{mulai
a-vdk-shtt.
If of the
two
final
consonants of a
from sparg),
base,
this accords
with the Sanskrit law of sounds, by which, of two terminating consonants of a nominal
before consonants of the
the
last
vanishes
case terminations.
ought to
become
before
s;
created, claut-sit
from
Instead,
;
however, of
so,
this,
the
d allows
itself
to
be
extinguished
however,
is
that, in
compensation, a short
or,
made
long,
as dl-vl-si;
which
s,
is
d assimilates
roots in
itself to
/,
the following
as
from
ced.
With
from
cut
on the
mitt.
7nit-si,
from mit or
B, w, and
in jus-si,
Compared
which gn^
tish signifies
"burn";
90
is,
is
two
letters,
which
compensated by
thus,* sedi
from
that
sed, ridi
from
vid..
I believe, at least,
I
class
lei/,
Vike fodi
from J od,
car, &c.
legi,
for lee-si^
from
from fur/.
To these probably
from
conceivable
cavi could
cautum, fautum
con-nic-si.
(.
vic-si,
19.)
bability
probably
The
and
it is
in the
of v;
Sijlu-vo, stru-vo,
to be
50.");
on which
Thus,
we might
sfriic.
t
In cases of
.v
is
tiie
rule,
and
verti,
ar-si
for ard-i
an exception.
ar-si
like
they accord in
s
of
^iifiwfl^
^^^
of hardness,
we
sta.
The
the
are
rendered
doubtful
by
their
to
short vowel,
reduplicated
* Cf.
^.
and
in
their origin
first
probably belong
syllable
preterites, their
for the
having
547.,
and
whole
^. cf. .
91
[G. Ed. p. 99.]
lapse of time
in other
y?'c//,
of
tefigi,
the
of
which
employed in the formation of words and beginning with t, for the representation of which the
101.
The
suflSxes
supine
may
to the relations of
t
conflict
between
ought to remain
t',
as,
>t^^
before
would become
s.
Of
we
find a
rem&c.
es-t,
es-tis,
from pdo
ther, in
fix;
we
find,
We
t
comesum, the
whether the d of
f.
ed,
into
the s; but
is
an
of turn,
tus,
Out
by the
first,
suppression of an
s,
probably the
for
where of a pair
is
generally the
from
Icr/x/,
"no-at
from
ttoJ-ct/,)
possibly because, as in
100.,
an auxiliary verb
is
abandoned in preference to a
letter of the
main
verb.
s in suffixes
might
its
forms where
a
it
did not
p.
owe
origin to assimilation.
;
Cs
(i) is
[G. Ed.
100.1
favourite combination
tum, nec-tum.
The
liquids,
92
most of
all
the r
hence, ier-snm,
r,
by a conversion
us-tum,
into
s,
accommodates
itself to
f,
as
in ges-fum,
ios-tum*
as,
^ir^
m^
bhrdtas tdraya
mdm,
t
v^n
bhar-
not
>rer
bhastum," to bear."
n exhibits ten-turn, can-turn, opposed to man-sum. The other forms in n-sum, except cen-sum, have been mulcted of a
radical d, as ton-sum, pen-sum.
102. In the
for
Germanic languages,
in the Old
High German
In the
is
retain el
signi-
verbs,
weak pret,
terites, also,
where
it
relations.
We find
th, d,
in these
converts radical
sounds
(/,
also) before
a superadded
into
s.
[G. Ed.
p. 101.]
Gothic maimais-t
for maimait-t,
fai-fall h-f,
ana-baud-t.
High German
in
I
" thou
The Gothic,
in the
weak
knew
"),
instead of
* The obvious
Upon
that of Jiro
from
"grr
A, see
97.
93
from
viita,
as ca-sum, clau-sum.
The
is
man
first
Here
d,
the transition of
z,
and even
remain unaltered
t
and d are
"duxi," ki-neiz4a,
for
huld-ta.
retained, and of cA
or cch only
The
gives
way
and thus
lei-te is
dul-de,
The change
law b
of
into c
98.) is natural,
but
remains
unaltered.
[G. Ed.
t*,
p. 102.]
both in Gothic
labial tenues
changed into their aspirates, although the tenuis accord with a following t. Thus, for instance, in Gothic, vah-fvo,
* With the exception of the High German passive
form, which, in the adjunstion of
the pret. above described
its f to
part, of the
weaker
94
"watch,"
mah-t(ji)s,
;
"sickness,"
ga-skrif-t(i)s,
from
suk
from
mag
" creation,"
from skap fragif-i{i)s, " betrothment," from gib, softened from gab; Old High German suJit, maid, ki-skaft, " creature,"
kift,
" gift."
(s),
The
as
is
dentals replace the aspirate th by the the case in Gothic before the pers. cha-
sibilant
racter
combined with
t.
The formation
this
kind
under
Gothic mats,
" food,"
head comes our mast, related to the and mati/an, " to eat." In Gothic, the
springs from the
t
of hldtan,
hevt
"to worship":
(heitan,
heist,
"to bite,"
Grimm,
it
in
converts
sounds into
for instance,
;
jj s,
not
only before ^
ini,ta,
t,
m^mj7j
" bound,'*
in
from the root o jo ir'tth aj^ jjasj basta, from (S^^au bandh, with the nasal excluded as Modern Persian &jLo bastah, from Joo band; aj^jj/oaj
;
" dead,"
^i*i
idhma.
It is
= ch),
of
we
the pret., but generally is retained ana find, for instance, dg-t, " thou fearest,^ mag-t, " thou
t,
the aspiration
it falls
back,
upon the
initial
consonant of the
root,
onward on the
.
initial
consonant of
and Lithuanian,
457.
t No other
roots in
95
sulfix.
We
find, for
hhiil,
"
"I shall know,'' for sifivmin^ hudh-syumi knowinor the vedas," for ^\| budli
;
^w'ff m/'/-
?S
bud-d-'in,
"knowing," for
^y<[
budhta
>ft^?Tf*T dhuk-sjiijdmi,
"I
shall
Z^ dnh-tn.
l>art
of
tlie
some
a, t,
and
/u,
letters
which
admit of no union
back on the
an aspirate, and in
its
being thrown
6.
initial letter,
Hence, Tpe^o),
Tu),
ercKprjVf TedafM-jjiai
rpkyjji, dpi^oiJLai;
In
tiie
spirit
per when
*
"x^
is
obliged to
merge
in the tenuis,
See J. L.
Bumouf in
t It
is
supposed to appear
1 his one would be the last [G. Ed. p. 10 .] would only shew itself when the latter had been
the
fact, that,
merge in the tenuis. Opposed, however, to this exjdanation is on account of the inconvenience of accumulated aspirates, tlie
itself in
its
roots agnliibt
the evil, and has never admitted an aspirated consonant at oi.cc for the
initial
is
and
complete, there
In Sanskrit, the collection of \\ hose roots no such instance. The foi-m.', however, fd(i(f)0qv,
present a difficulty.
by its frequent
ai)plication to
its radicality,
was
legitimate.
a combination in
cording to
it wider thau might also say, that since (f)6 (as x^) is so favourite G ree k that it is even substituted for ird and ,^6 while, ac-
and extended
We
. 98.,
an original
(pd
tendency to aspiration of the root remained unsatisfied by fTdc{>6r]v kc; and as if the ordy existed out of reference to the 3, the original terminating aspirate necessarily fell back on the radical initiid. This theory, which seems to me sound, would only lc<;vc T(6d(j>aTai to be explained.
96
OF THE ROOTS.
[G. Ed. p. 105.]
105.
two
classes of roots
from the
verbs, and
by
far the
We
for
the
Verbal Roots
many
is
termination.
From
pronouns,
ticles
:
all
all
express a pronominal idea, which, in the prepositions, conjunctions, and particles, lies
more or
less concealed.
No
meaning or
root.
their form, to
(or
their declension-theme
same
time their
all
The
end with a
Among
is
not a
other vowels,
"to
go,"^ as
106.
The verbal
OF THE ROOTS.
monosyllabic;
97
the grammarians as
syllable, as Wf^Jdgri,
contain either
a reduplicate-
which
Except
may
present
itself
under
all
and most extended, as well as those of a middle decree. This free state of irrestriction was necessary, as the language
was to contain within the limits of one-syllableness the whole body of fundamental ideas. The simple vowels and
consonants were not sufficient:
it
was
requisite to
frame
combined
in inseparable
it were, simple sounds; e.g. "mi sthd, "to which the age of the co-existence of the s
and
th is
all
the
members
So
also,
in
^;^
is
The
simple vowel
is
sup-
nearly
all
the
individuals of the
" to
go
"
by the root
i.
of the
trace back
consonants, which, as
I-
tlie
year 1824,
p. 126,
&c.
98
OF THE ROOTS.
;
and
may
with the
first-
belonging to the
chiefly
because
it
is
the word.
kdlul, "slain,"
in
the fem.,
while
kotei, "
same
addition,
com-
kdtldk.
Neither
ktdl, therefore,
little
nor
kdil,
and just as
can
it
infinitive,
which, as
it
were, has
grown
In the imperative
kldl the
abbrevia-
command
is
usually enunciated.
the word.
katala, "
By them,
for example,
kut'da,
is
dis-
tinguished, in Arabic,
slain";
he slew," from
"he was
kdtulf "slain."
it
A
it
Semitic root
vowels, an advance
grammar.
languages,
if its
which
and whose destination is, to express the secondary ideas of grammar which the root itself cannot express*
gate,
OF THE ROOTS.
99
The vowel, with one or more consonants, and sometimes without any consonant whatever, belongs to the fundamental
meaning:
raised
and,
its
it
by Guna or
to
and
this
lengthening or raising,
a,
more
an original
(. 66., 67.),
opposed to
weakening
or change to u
belongs not to
more
to the
imagine
108.
tion,
As
so
must
it
appear
[G. Ed.
p. log.]
two chief
races, of
which
meaning by an
by
inflexion, the
which
may by
is to
be in future,
and
its
sisters to
to
the Semitic
lan-
guages
the
second.
writes,
down with
;
no longer distinguishable
the Arabic, and in
all
the
first
by the addition of
which have
which
suffixes
shews
itself
may
9.
100
OF THE ROOTS.
discrimination:
one
may
at
least safely
by admixture or
artificial
We
must
tlie
it,
nouns as in Arabic.
How
which
state, also
pronominal ideas?
By
inflexion,
F,
von
he
(p.
from without.
Jo or Jw, in Greek,
comes
/ixt,
a-o>,
drjaofieda,
is
which
not at
?
internally altered, or
If,
then,
by
inflexion,
an
Greek &c. have in that case except the by the elements of the root
inflexion at all
to shew.
If,
scarce
it is
;
any
however,
5o,
Orjaoixeda is
simply
because
touches
it,
with
it
expresses
a whole
may
be repre-
sented as an internal modification of the sea, and vice verad. " In the Indian or Grecian P. 50, F. von Schlegel remarks
:
is
truly that
and
like a living
germ;
development, the
fulness
of
which
can
be
OF THE ROOTS.
extended, and
is,
101
rich.
All,
in fact, often
wondrously
howroot,
retains the
stamp of
adheres to
it,
and
itself."
I find,
how-
for
how can
externally added ?
What kind
<ra),
of stamp of relationship
is
there between
/z/,
Orjaofieda,
and the
[G. Ed.
p.
111.]
We
inflexions
of the Sanskrit
is
grammar.
But even
b<?
grammar, by external
would
not,
first
for
that
glance, in
much,
that they do not belong to the root, but have been added
from without.
points,
A.
to
W. von
assents
the above-mentioned
division
of lan-
he gives three
les
classes, viz.
structure grammaticale,
langues
d inflexions.
Of
"Je
inflexions.
On pourroit
les
appeler
Wvant de
m'ex-
developpement
priiner
artifice
ainsi,
feconde.
Le merveilkux
de ces langues
murquer
petit
nombre de
102
inflexions, that
OF THE ROOTS.
they are not modifications of the root, but
foreign
additions,
whose
characteristic
lies
in
this,
that
regarded,
pT
se,
have no meaning, at
do not,
turn,
and
ii,
are
and al-Ti,
" I ate."
he
eats,"
ATy
i
is
probably,
two
(comp.
F.
. 6.)
made by
on which
von
it
Schlegel
founded,
untenable,
on
the
reasons
is
there
is
much
We
(1.
prefer,
c), three
first,
languages
This class
fication,
le sens
du mot auquel
elles
sent jointes.
En
aux
racines
On
exprimer
complexes.
adjectifs, et les
par cas
on conjugue
les verbes
par voix, par modes, par temps, par nombres, et par personncs,
en employant de
memo
augmens
qui, se-
en un seul mot
I'id^e principale,
souvent
deja. tres-modifiee et
tres-com-
OF THE ROOTS.
main
point, can only be discovered
103
Secondly, languages
their
way
alone.
The
class,
chief principle
appears to
me
to lie in the
nominal
as
it
roots,
100.).
To this
class belongs
all
moreover
other
1.
comprehended under
words
and
renders
to the
simplest elements.
roots,
of the roots.
We
here gladly
we do
however,
meaning, but in
and application
of them,
relations,
which
ing to
The Indian Grammarians divide the properties, ( which extend only to the
tenses which
We
find this
W.
la
von
na^
sur
le
genie de la langue
chinoise."
: ;
104
1 call
OF THE ROOTS.
the special tenses,* and to the part, pres.,) into ten
classes, all of
also,
We
shall
The
first
and sixth
class
add
^a
to the root
and
we
The
1000
sixth
class of nearly
this,
(.
that the
26), while
pure;
e,g.
^vfiT
bddhati,
"he knows,"
tundit),
he vexes" (comp.
and
6,
^a
and
In Greek,
corresponds to the
affix
^a
<pevy-o-fxev,
first
from
AIII,
$Yr
fall
(eA/7rov, etpvyov),
belong to the
while,
class. II
e.g.
class,
Guna
( .
26.)
6iy-o-ixev,
6\i^-o-^ev,
In Latin
we
(indie, imper.
and
optat., the
them
be-
In German, the
mood
corresponds.
t The accent here distinguishes the Ist cl. from the 6th. e.g. for pdtati did it belong to the 6th. cl., we should have patdti.
t
We give
Guna
the root, but in the beginning and middle remain without admixture of
tile
^ a;
so
OF THE ROOTS.
which
first
I
105
first,
and sixth
we
;
as a
(. 8.)
and
German,
of
all
some remains
time, laid
2.),
stand in clear
is
which
down
in
its full
extent.*
The
^a
which
added to the root has, in Gothic t, before some personal terminations, remained unchanged before others, according
;
to . 67.,
i;
so, liait-a,
;
"I
am
a-m,
pi.
hait-
The
radical vowels
is
(written
ei,
hence keina
= ktna,
" "
"I germinate," from KIN; hiugo, I bend," from BUG, Sanskrit mr bhuj, whence TTri bhugnn, bent." The diphthongs m, an, as in Sanskrit if and "^
from
kiina),
(. 2.),
Guna
a.
The Sanskrit
radical vowel
It
lengthened in the
.
69.)
have already,
in
my Review
of
conjecture that the a of forms like haita, liaitam, huilaima, &c. does not
is
with the
^ a of the
Guna
Guna.
We
point
Book II. pp. 282 and 259.) make frequent mention of the Gothic alone as the true startingand light of German Grammar. The application to the Hi^h Ger-
man
106
thus,
e.g. far-i-th,
OF THE ROOTS.
to
"mfn charati
to ^r^TT
(. 14.),
he wandered,"
chachdra
tenses
or,
weakened
8.)
corre-
in the
same way
a.
. 87.,
'STT fl)
The
root
'5?^
ad, " to
eat," in Gothic,
according to
forms
AT;
hence, in the
third fate
present, ita;
The
is
/,
which
befalls
a complete
weaker
which
i. e.
is
?,
in the
receives
Guna by
sing,
by
(. 27.),
pi. it is
preserved pure.
To
this
mentioned above,
The corresponding
born"
(see
(jripxim,
:
Sanskrit root
.
is
87.)
from GRIP,
other hand,
original
i,
on the
has an
" to
BIT,
so,
" to exists
bite," * (beita,
bitum),
which
in
bliid,
cleave"); just
(2.)
f^
vid.
The
syllable
spring
(weakened to
yi),
which
;
is
special tenses
e.g.
j^^^MOS^y
ucs-yann, " crescebant,^' Vendidad S. p. 257), " cresco," vahsyi-th, ' crescit," pret. vohs.
* Occurs only with the prep, and, and with the meaning " to
but corresponds to the Old High
scold,'
German
root
BIZ,
*'
to bite."
OF THE ROOTS.
(3.)
107
add the personal
classes
e.
g. ed-i-mus,
e-/,
not ed-mus
old construction
issra-mi*
es-iis),
Gothic
to the Sanskrit
^im
ad-mas.
^^ ad
belongs, leaves
addition, with
Guna
Guna
;
before
light terminations,
e.g. ^fir Smi,
corresponding to
etfju
imas,
as in
Greek
to
tfiev.
It
contains not
Greek
4>Y
4)A,
rXO
iyid-di).
(e^i/i),
AY, &c.
To
nants of the termination has become too heavy, and 'E2 alone
(because of the facility of
a/i,
nian, and
German.
Hence, ^f^fT a^/i, cot/, Lithuan. esti, est, int. In the Latin there fall also
and also
QUI, is the root, which, in Gothic, appears as QUAT, weakened to QUIT, with the accretion of a T. FER and J EL {JUL) have preserved
in-quam, whence
QUA
weakened
some persons
[G. Ed.
p. II8.3
The
third class
distinguished from
tlie
second by a syllable
in
Greek
also,
and Lithuanian.
In
can, however,
*;
as there
is
scarce
first class.
108
Sanskrit
it
OF THE ROOTS.
comprehends about twenty roots
Lithuanian dudu;
" I beget,"
;
e.g.
^^fi?
dndami,
(. 16.)
;
StBooixi,
^^^\^
dadhdmi, ridrjm
yi-yv-o-fj.ai.
inrf^ jajanmi,
class, of
comp. which
The
seventh
extended before
e.g. f^rrf^T
bhinadmi, "
cleave,"
we
cleave,"
The
114 G.
Latin has kept the weaker form of this nasalization, but has
further added to the root the affix of the
Ed.);
first class (p.
From the Greek come to be here MA0, AAB, IF, in which the inserted
on
in the word, with the preis
xed
a,
affix
of the
6iyy-av-o-fxev.
(4.)
The
fifth class,
kri, " to
make,"
addi-
terminate in
:
tt
n or
7^ n,
has u for
its characteristic
tion
is
lengthened
supplied by
v, is
thus,
as in Sanskrit
mur."
An example
K^
tan, " to
extend,"
whence TR^fi? tan-6-mi=Tav-lj-ixt, TT'^'ra tan-u-mas=rav-v-fj.e^. With the ^ u, v, of the eighth class, is probably connected
[G. Ed. p. 119.]
the V in
however,
it
German
it is
point of view,
must be regarded
strong verbs, the
as a radical.
Hence
all
affix of
the Sanskrit
first
(5.)
The ninth
class adds
*tt
lable, before
*
of. .
now
80.
consider the v of saihva and similar verbs as purely euphonic, and Latin forms like cogno, Ibiqiio, stinguo.
OF THE ROOTS,
to
"^
109
heavy
^rt
a by the lighter
E.g. from
\i
(%
6.\
and
thus weakened lo
"q^ ni.
mrid, "to
comes
n^jirf^
nimas.
In this
is
easily perceived
vrj^Mt
relationship with
ij.
Greek formations
jiev.
in
(i'/i/)
vdfxev
e.
Sajivyj/jLi,
^dfiva-
As
a, ,
and
o,
are originally one, formations like rifx-voonly that they have wandered into the
fiev
belong to this
class,
more modern w- conjugation at a remote period of antiquity; for more lately vew would not have become vw from irjfjj.
(6.)
The tenth
is dis-
the
final
a of ^nj aya
is
peculiar to
all
them, but
ay
All causals,
Guna
the root;
"he
from
ysi
f^ vid; ^TRTTfiT srdv-aya-ti, "he makes We recognise, in German, the affix snu
two shapes
:
in the one
[G. Ed.
p. 120.]
the
first a,
last, is lost,
and in the
latter case
so that I have no longer any scruple in y has become i tracing back Grimm's first and third conjugation of the weak
form to a common
origin.
According
to all probability,
how-
" to
make
to
regarding which we will speak further under the verb. The Old High Germtrn gives e as the contraction of a + iy
. 78.),
(see
ai,
but retains
its
the Gothic
a.
its
Compare
German hapim,
is
German and
110
OF THE ROOTS.
it in like manner has Compare Sanskrit JTT^Tnft? m^fn mdnemi* Old High
German, var-manem,
[G. Ed.
p. 121.]
moneo
OLD HIGH GERMAN.
LATIN.
SANSKRIT.
JTRTUfn mdnaydmi
jniT'^ftr
^wf^ mdrtimi
^^m^S mdnesi
JT'^f^
var-man^m
manes
manet
moneo
mdnayasi
.
JTR^fiT mdnayati
Wl'^PlTH^
mdnedl
man mond
-s
manemes movemiis
manit
monetis
W(Wr^ mdnayatha
>?T^^'PtT
mdnMha
mdn^nfi
mdnayanti
*TT?!lfTT
manent
monent
In regard to those
first
affix,
weak
aya,
we
will
ijye),
Anglo Saxon, whose connection with WH aya is to be traced thus, that the semi-vowel y has become hardened to g, (comp. . 19.), and the preceding a weakened to i. In Greek,
the cognate verbs to the Sanskrit of the tenth class are to
*
is,
am
not at present able to adduce this verb from the edited texts
it
however, certain, that mdnaydmi mi\\\s dialect can have no other sound
but mdnSmi.
class,
The conjugation
"
I
is
as chintemi,
nivMemi (from
In the third
niv6-
day ami).
mha
is
together with mdnenti the forms mdnaanti and mdnanti arc also admissible.
won,
*'
to
honour": more probably, however, the verb, for which this root is supplied, is only a denominative from mdtia, " honour" ; and this substantive
itself
avaman, "to
despise,"
as in
var-MAN
Tlie root,
theref"ore,
which
is
contained in
varman6m
identical
for
To this class make to think" (Old High German a of which we explain by the principle of . G6.
see
.
66.).
while the
of memin-i
is
explained
by
. 6.
OF THE ROOTS.
be looked for in those in
oco, ecu, oo)
;
Ill
in Latin, besides the
-1th
We
shall recur to
them when
of the mul-
examj^^les
but
we
will select
as are
common
The
to
guages.
greatest forbearance,
however,
all
requisite,
as an authenticated comparison of
that admits of
com-
be devoted to
(1.)
this
subject*
:
[G, Ed.
(.
p. 122.]
"There
roots in
as has
105.),
no
w a;
but roots in
^ d are numerous.
;
Thus
also,
T[f gd,\
perhaps,
member
in Greek,
{Siprjfii
answers
and
;
rests
Gothic
ga-tu,
Zend >^ms^
"a "I
grit
us
Old High
German
ga-m,
con-
go,"
= nnfir _/a-^4-mi
(p.
not therefore,
as
but,
Grimm
jecturts
S6S),
with a more
G.
Ed.), as in
da-mus answering to
std-f.
also,
sld-m,
in like
wr
sfLd,
which
is
Somewhat
my
Sanscrit Glossary.
classes described in ^. 109.
112
which
will
OF THE ROOTS.
be
more
closely considered
hereafter.
The
German
hlstdmi* (for
sisfdmi, see
Ob-
occurs
so
often
in
the
s
stander,"
with o for
the sign
of
the
nominative.
How,
then, in Old
extended
form
"
I
of
High German, comes from STA the the root STANT, whence the preand
preterite
stuonf,
sent stantu,
stand,"
"
or
he
stood";
will
for
We
obd,
we have
an
Thus
we
" to
find,
from
wash,"
" to purify,''
(Sansk. ^T snd,
S. p. 233,
;
bathe,'')
whence
in
Vend.
from au^
G.
Ed.),
we
find /-^^^CajAi^j;
deponant
"
(as
Vendidad
S. pp.
i-^^^GjAj^jy
^9fJ
:
"in
"
siccd
find the
imperative
depona-
ni-dd-thdma,
mus
aj^Wau
9^yAj^
^'^jM^Mjh
naraiim
^-^^j^j aj^
M^jM<3JM^jf
xs^
As^Aj^
AJ/>WAJ
kva
isritanahm
tanum bardma Ahura mazda kva niddthdma, "Quo homlnum Of the Germortuorum corpus feramus, ubi deponamus'?). manic we will further remark, that the root n md, " to measure " (cf. fxe-rpov), has connected itself with a /-sound, and
forms, in Gothic,
MAT,
present
mUa
(. 109*. i.).
^^ jnd,
(gnarus)
GNA
CHNA
(.87.);
whence
chnd-ta,
"I knew,"
To
I believe I
may deduce
this
pers. pi.
J^^Cfe,*y>**
tlie
hiitenti (cf.
more on
this
head under
verb.
OF THE ROOTS.
the special form, '^rr^rf^Jfindmi, for ^TRlfK ^n^-n^-mt,
113
may
be-
Old Hi^h German CHANN {kanru chan^ "I know," see .94.. kunnum, chunnum, "we
Icns the Gothic root
KANN,
uiT^
itself in
the
special forms to VH dham, Latin FLA, according to the second class (. 109 i), Old High German PLA (. 12. 20.),
whence
tioned
pld-ta, "flavL"
As
in Sanskrit,
VT dham, comes
"a vein";
blijth,
nominal base Vf^ft dhamani. so may the Gothic base BLOTHA (nom. ace.
the
We
fjass
and have
to
mentioned at
in
German.
We find
G. Ed., ^ i, " to go," is not unknown it in the Gothic imperative hir-i, "come
I believe, too, that in
i
the
went," the
sumed
(from
sri,
as the root.
Ffir eii,
"he
ei-tu
goes'"
according to
Lithuau.
fv
with the prep. T7T uf, "to raise itself"; hence, ^fidrf uchchhrita, " raised," "high"; compare cre-sco, cre-vi (see . 21.), Old High German SCRIT, " to step," with the
addition of a
t,
" to go,"
Jfid:
perhaps
"
the
Guna form
he
goes," being
observed.
;
smU
" to
smile," Old
^)ilfri
(. 47.),
High
Goth.
vif hhi,
German
SMIL
Zend
(. 87.),
compare
fm priya,
" dear."
feiyaii/
"to fear,"
Jiya, "
I
f^irfir bibhi-mi.
Gothic
hate"^ {fiyais,
" I
man
the
viem ov fiem,
hate"
the
Greek
<pe^-o-yiai
so that, contrary to
prefix,
left
common
but
only
m
(3
we give,"
p. 124.]
Perhaps,
also,
[G. Ed.
?,
^lA,
4>i$onou, is to
so that an
;;
114
OF THE ROOTS.
unorganic dental affix would be to be assumed. si, " to lie," " to sleep," with irregular Guna in the middle
hence
sS-tS
German
p. 115.
a-tiy
= Kel-rat. ^ hri, " to be ashamed " Old High HR U, " to repent " {hriw-u, hrou, hru-umh, see
;
G.
Ed.).
Of roots
in u,
"5;
dm, "
Guna
/x
form, the
to derive
Greek
its
Spd-crKo>, Si-8pa-(TK0i,
the
of dpeno,
how-
ever,
might pass as a hardening of the ^ v (. 63.), and therefore represent most truly the
"to swim,**
FLU.
if
The Greek
the old u had
been corrupted to
of the
Guna form
:
plav-a-tS
the future
Guna (.
(p.
26.),
swim," with
98.
G.
Ed.).
flow,"
pre-sup-
FLUT
all
(.87.);
final
which
vowels
commonly
Gothic
"hearer,"
invested.
-^ sru,
" to
hear,"
KAY
(. 20.,
21.),
HLIU-MAN (nominative
with weakened
&r,
hliuma),
;
"ear,"
as
Guna
also,
'*
(. 27.)
compare,
dunis
I
with
srdni,
f.
" hip.")
Lithuan. klausau,
hear,"
is
hear."
Perhaps
:
erudio, as " to
make
and rudis
ori-
j9a3^^a>jui7ji>
Irdvay&mi (^9X\sk.
(V. S. p. 38).
"I speak," "recite" The Old High German, scrirumh, "we have
sr&vaydmi),
exclaimed," gives
the form srdv
SCRIR
as the root,
and
rests probably
i
on
(. 20.),
(.
66.)
the present and sing, preterite, however, have lost the r (serin
OF THB ROOTS.
for scrim, screi for screir), like the
115
kAt-o-o*, KeKhfj-Ko,
Greek
&c.
relation to y^m^sran
(. 63.),
and
dpcfj.
to
glorify"
from J dm, (M^^pv^ hunuta, " he celebrated," V. S. p. 39.), is probably the root of the Greek u/xvoj {vfj.{e)vo\ which I do not like to regard as an irregular derivative from vSui.
drav,
> /iii\
" to run."
\pu
This root is the verbal "to purify," PUms. parent of the wind and fire, which are both represented
^'
as pure,
as suflSx) is
(neut.
is
[G. Ed. p. 125,] xf^^pavana (with Guna and ana the wind,*' and the corresponding Gothic FON-d
.
116.) is "fire/*
which in Sanskrit
suffix.
and aka as
The
relation of
FONA
to xi^fTporana
;
the loss of the syllable ^ va Latin mAlo from mavolo The Greek is replaced by the lengthening of the a (. 69.).
irvp
VIURA
(.27.),
(nom. ace
viur),
the
latter
fall
Guna
and ra as
suffix,
both
to the root,
^u,
-^ bru,
^^ mru
the Greek
pe(F)oi rests
also
pect),
on the Guna form ^^ftfi? brav-i-mi, and has, former of two initial consonants pevci, and mo, with s sni, ** to flow"). The
SPRAH,
or
^SPRAHH
(sprihhu,
'I
from
by hardening the
I
akin to the p.
^ v (see . 19.), and prefixing an bhu, "to be," Zend bu, Lithuan. BU will be"), Latin FU, Greek $Y. Pro-
bably,
also,
BY, in
irpecr-^v-St
ttpea^vrriq,
, 18.);
&c.,
is
only
another form of
have
to
n
.
pro,)
96.).
by a euphonic
(cf.
wpecr/Su
n^ prabhu (excelsus, axigustwi), literally, " being In Old High German pirn or bim corresponds
12
the
116
Sanskrit
H^riffr
OF THE ROOTS.
bhavdmi: more exact, however,
is
the corre-
pir-u-t, to bhav-d-mas,
To
PU,
^w
la
7^05 **to
dwell," in
may
Latin facio
its
conjugation answers
make
to be," v/hich, in
Pra-
may
bhdveli
(Gothic baua,
bauais, bauait).
See
p. 121
G. Ed.
diphthongs (^ e,
roots in ysn d.
^6, ^
no roots in i^ du)
many
We
We
shall
give
[G. Ed.
u.
According to
to
we do
^n and ^ri
Long
class of roots
^ a.
So
W^^'^' vach,
S. p. 124),
(m^S^^m adda,
(.
"dixit,""
Vend.
14.),
Latin
"
WAG
(ki-
wahu,
ira
mentionem facio"
ki-wuoh
pi.
ki wuogumes).
prachh,
Zend
,Mg7g(5)
peres,
Gothic
FBAH;
pres ^^sifiT
.
82.
and
ROG
{rogo, inlerrogo)
appears to
be abbreviated from
FROG.
J^i pat,
"to
fall,"
"to
fly,"
Zend
"
^ajq) pat,
S. p. 257. ^^^^aj^
^u^^
'>>aj;*o
/">.> ^*V5(5^>
aj7a>7>
fly,
where birds
One
OP THE ROOTS.
that, in
117
Trrrjfn,
Greek,
trtTrra,
Sea-
belong to a
proBpetes,
common
root IIET
Latin
for
PET,
pefo, im-peto,
penna
or,
by assimilation
pet-na.
In
Gothic be
FATH,
looked
FITH, might
To the latter corresponds, according to .87., Old High German FED, in ved-ara, "feather,*' ^^" vad, " to speak," Latin VAD^ contained in vas, vad-is. From
for.
^ vad
tains
ud, to
which per87.,
'YA
fK4Z
class.
^ down
""
<;mrn vddaydmi,
sad "
Latin
SED, SID,
Gothic
an,
sido,
sedeo;
Greek 'EA,
"
I
'IZ, eSo^,
eBpa,
fCofiai;
(. 87.), sita.
^
I
SAT
"to blow,"
"to beget,"
"to breathe,"
^H<Ji anila,
w^^
Jan,
zazdmi, "
beget," Sanskrit
Greek TEN, Latin GEN {yiyvofiai, yeioy, KIN, "to germinate,"" (p. 116 G. Ed.)
(.66.).
kunU
**
gender"
this
WJ^ kar
(^A-W',
the
e.g.
fifth
omfir Nardil.
class;
e.g.
**facit":
root,
in Zend, follows
uan
or garauan,
*'
to
prepare";
(. 14.),
paro
Greek
with
tt,
irpda-eo), irpaK-aoi,
[G. Ed.
p. 127.]
Trpdy-fxa,
to be a hardening of the
(.
19.),
of
'S(^[f^
kur-u(. 57.),
-anti).
W^
Latin
fo-yo^.
.
50.
VEH, Greek
Tg^
and
svas,
22.
"to
breathe,"
spiro,
according
the
to
original
this the
tm
grabh.
To
to
the
tenth
class,
and.
Il8
OF THE ROOTS.
r,
but
:
before
as
<d
p.
Thus we read
A5<^j^
yizi
ndit
asti
chitha?
tenet),
"Pure I
qutBnam
si
non
dimittit, qui
hominem captum
capit
(i. e.
ei est
pcena"?
the Gothic
GRIP
nues,
(p.
prehendo
92. note)
KAEn
also
seems to belong to
" thief."
HLIF,
" to steal,"
yp7^os,
hliftus,
and appears to
me
tiie
to be related to
i.
the a into
^^
^cr-rat
"to
sit,"
second
. 109*. 3.
class,
;
at
answers exactly to
stands for rjanai, as
(middle
(San-
voice),
and hence
fjnai
for
ea-fxi
skrit asmi).
orj*
vr^^
bhrdj,
"to
shine,'*'
Zend jg^p
herez{^. 58).
nom. m. "W-^J^g-l
quently occurs.
High German
PERAH,
$AEr
(.
whence
PERAH-TAX, nom.
20.)
one.
chhid,
The cognate
root in Latin
is
FLAG, fiagro.
(.
fw\
14.):
this
2XIZ, perhaps also 2KIA, a-KiSvrjfxt, &c. belong place tlie form is more genuine, and the ideas,
;
to
too, of
* Anqnetil
t Cf.
'I.
translates,
" Si
celui qui
a commit lAguereflS ne
reconnoit
1281.
Note*
with
t.
The h
. 87.,
l>ui is
OF THE HOOTS.
clearing, dispersing,
TO
kindred ones.
the
separating,
separate,"
are
if
The
is
Gothic
to the
SKAID,
root.
"to
relationship
Guna, so that
to
. 87.,
ai appears to
belong
According
form should be
for
SKAIT and
f^^
vid,
the Old
High German
SKEIZ
vid,
8EEID.
erSco,
" to
know," Zend
_^^
'lA
and in
"
" I
to
which makes
according to
is causal,
p.
121 G. Ed.
the tenth
class,
and
signifies
"to
.
summon"
VIT
adore"
{inveita,
dis'
;
invitum).
f^
dis,
"to
shew,''
hence ^^^.majaj^oa frada^sayd, "thou shewest" (Vend. S. p. 123), Greek AIK, with Guna BeiKvvfUf
Zend MJ^
according to the
*
fifth class
Latin DJC, in
causa
).
dico, as it
were,
to point out,"
and
dicis ( diets
laid
down
in
. 82.). On the other hand, in taikus, " sign," the law for the transposition
of letters is violated,
"alive,"
w\^
live,"
gywenu "I
nom.
as his
quivs, "alive";
Latin F/F, as
from tviginii. Zend has dropped either the vowel or the v of this
duis (Sansk.
from
fs^
dwis), viginti
The
root.
Hence, eg.
xiii_Jva,
nom.
vpii,jv6,
"living," (V. S.
p. 189);
<^iiAj^^jj> hu-jitay6, "bonam vitam hahentes'''' (1. c. p. 222), from J^.^i> hu-Jiti. From Ji, the root, would become, with Guna, jaydmi, on which rests the Greek ^aw, the j having
and
Vide Gram.
Crit. p. 328.
120
fallen out
(. 14.)
;
or THE ROOTS.
but
fBiog
and
finds
"^
ruch,
Of
rud,
"to weep/'
may
is ^^^-^^ radch,
(. 28. 32.),
[G. Ed.
p. 129.]
raochay^iti, "splendet!"
In Latin correspond
LUC,
RUD
;
by
/,
AYK
Aas^o
and
AYZ
in
Zend,
jk\5>
(. 40.)
We
The
27.),
also,
LUH for
like
LUK,
according to
87.
whence,
" to
Guna
(. 26.,
" lightning,"
lauhatyan,
A root
. 87., .
corresponding to
i^ rud
it,
is
wanting
in Gothic,
German
" to
has for
RUZ,
weep"
{riuzu,
80.,
ruzumh).
^^
bhush,
"to adorn,"
loss
is
amo
in
relation
to zirnnnfk
t^ sh*
kdmaydmi,
love."
With
The latter "to honour," mMh, "to think "(?). cannot hit'nerto be quoted as a verb it springs, however,
:
^^
WT
rn^dhd,
"understanding," unless
The Gothic
viz.
has, for
comparison,
MIT, whence
mitd,
" I
word
to s^v,
2EB,
cre/3a). (. 4.)
110.
From
and
sub-
stantive
by the annexation
of
syllables,
OF THE ROOTS.
which we should
per
se,
;
121
not,
significative
and, as
were, supernatural
mystic
beings
we are not
natural
to
willing to
surrender ourselves.
It
is
more
a
is
likewise significative.
Why
should
The
object of nouns
is to
persons or things, to which that which the abstract root expresses adheres
;
and hence
it is
most natural
to look for
There appears,
too, in reality,
we
shall
plete*
between the most important elements in the formation of words and some pronominal bases which
identity
But
it is
not sur-
more
all
taken,
it
Still,
individual
cases,
we
the
may remark
appended
the
admirable exactitude
syllables
with
which
grammatical
have maintained
treatise
them-
my
Pronouns
in the
122
OF THE ROOTS.
unaltered form; from the perfect accordance
I say,
we may remark
exists
this
which
removed, as
been
it
own
fate
and experience.
e.e.
111.
There are
those of which
G. Ed.
p. 131.]
are, in
stracts
as,
vft bht,
"joy."
(oTr-j).
w^
pac
(pac-s),
due (dues),
pel-lie (pel-lec-s).
words
exist, although,
by reason of the abbreviaword in the singular, many words appearance; for from the abbreviation
it
is
precisely the
most modern
116.)
Naked
roots
seem most
According to
"duty-knowing."
is as
a radical a
weakened
to
or e;
tubi-cin (een).
An example
in
Greek
x^P^'l^
i^^^
'^^"^
from
v/TT-Tw).
OF THE ROOTS.
as
ftf
123
this
**
to conquer,'' are, in
compounds of
t,
kind,
without signification,
them-
on an auxiliary
e. g.
Thus,
vi-jit-yu, "
by conquering."
In Latin
I find
[G. Ed.
p. 13-2.]
latter
weakened
"
al-it
(al-es),
goer with
wings ""
in this
123 G. Ed.)
**
to
measure."
124
FORMATION OF
112,
CASES.
take up the declinable
<
word in
of
all
primary form,
;
i.e.
in its state
when
destitute
is
case-termination
and
this
In this
we
unless
yr
and where we give Sanscrit and Zend nouns, they stand, it is otherwise specified, or the sign of case is
the
base, in
separated from
their
primary form.
The
W^^
-S
^
V
mary forms by
tion
the
method of independent
analysis, as it
were by an anatomical
practical use of the
language
itself,
of
compounds
and
in Sanscrit,
just
or declension
As
as
it
most general of
cases, which, in
and
followed in composition
and as
it
if to
vex
places as
^
^
>
the
first
first
member
of the
compounds
in the
pronouns of the
plural,
third person
thenom. and
FORMATION OF CASES.
this point,
125
have applied
them by
yushmadt
augmented ^Wff
i\**t^
asmat^ or
awd
^a
and
ij
yu belong
extend
to
the singular.
the
a matter of course.
That the
him for the
who
f^
W. kimaK
kali,
i.
e,
ka*
is
substituted for
kim.
If this
and the
neuter quid
manner regarded
at
as
the
theme, then, in
order to
get
(after
cus,^'
In another place
(p.
825),
Panini forms
from idam,
of passing
for
a base) anrt
^Tli^
idankimdr
the
Gram-
[G. Ed.
p. 135.]
and H.
Sanskrit, and the languages akin to
still
it,
The
which
besides
the
two
to
another
Kliva,
the
eu-
Grammarians
be a
t.e.
nuch;
which
appears
He
become kimah.
126
skrit,
FORMATION OF CASES.
or most perfect family of languages.
intention
it
According to
its original
VI
mate
nature, but
to
what
is
is
by nature
^^'
animate.
in
The feminine
where
it
and
of
the
case-terminations,
loves
a luxurious fullness
form;
<^
and
is
distinguished
from
it
the
other
this
marks
^
't''
^-^
by
broader, and
more sonant
vowels.
The
base,
b^-^'^'^J^V neuter,
./
V
"^
but distinguishes
and
also,
its
in the vocative
when this is the same as the nominative. 114. Number, in Sanskrit and its sister
by a particular
affix
languages,
is
distinguished, not
number
is
at once
known
the first
ifv^
syllables, and,
;
among
"),
The
time
is
the
first
[G. Ed.
p. 136.]
is
of infinite number.
fully,
both in the
its
The Sanskrit possesses the dual most noun and in the verb, and employs it everyIn the Zend, which
it
where where
is
noun
viz,
The
much
left of it as the
Latin,
a remnant of
in
FORMATION OP CASES.
and "both";
the
in
127
wanting.
,i
the Prakrit
it
is
entirely
Of
-'^
^
^^ivj^^^
P^s'-
German
it,
possesses
trary,
while,
on the conthe
in
the
it
Hebrew
is
(speaking
here
of
Semitic
languages)
many
;
other
the Syriac
it
115.
The
tions of nouns,
e.
of,
to
to space, but
also to
time and
cause.
\According
part,
^ey
most
hereafter.
of space,
pronouns, as will be more clearly developed /^Whence could the exponents of the relations which have grown up with the primary words
taken,
more
distant,
that which is
on
this
or that side?
i.
>
e.
LG. Ed.
p. 137.]
As also
sufiBxes
the pronominal
although,
no longer
recognised and
origin, they
f
I
felt to
are
replaced, or, if
we may
"^
A
-
use the expression, commented on by the isolated pronouns prefixed to the verb so, in the more sunken, insensible
;
dead case-terminations
or ex-
* Regarding the character, the natural fonndation, and the finer gradations in the use of the dual, and
its diflFusion
of language,
we
by
;
W.
Transactions of the
Academy for
published by Diimmler.
128
plained
FORMATION OF CASES.
by prepositions, and
Before
in their personal signification
by
the article.
1 1
6.
we
final
sounds of
the nominal bases with which the case-suffixes unite themselves, as well as to point out the
mode
The
u)
and long,
at the
M.
thus,
^ a, ^ 7 m
t,
wd,
%i,
"gj
To
a,
always masculine or
neuter,^^
never feminine,
also in
German, where, however, even in the Gothic (in Grimm's first strong declension), especially in substantives, in more modern dialects it i it is only sparingly retained
:
recent u or
e.
In Greek,
is
in \6yo-s):
and
was
;
it
to
nom. and
An
old a, however, is
left
[G. Ed.
p. 138.]
nominative
is
which has proceeded therefrom, must likewise, accordto which, in regard of quality
and preservafaithful,
its
have remained
old
is
excelall
w hich
does not at
1.
20.
G. Ed.
FORMATION OF CASES.
suit a
129
theme
in
a or
tj
as
fJivpoTrui\>]-,
irou^orpl^r]-^, in
nUA
compounds
To
the short
/,
German
ever,
it is
to be looked for in
I
Grimm's
fourth strong
declension,
which
shall
make
the second;
where, howit
becomes
In Latin,
declension.
is
interchanged
with
e;
hence facile
for facili,
mare
In Greek, before
e.
vowels the
is
The
Greek
v,
it
distinguishes itself
in
that
it
is
retained as well
before
(d,
i,
tl)
113.),
Zend
the long
final
it
words
as
in 6 correspond
feminine bases in
d,
sing, is shortened
so, "she,'*
monosyllabic forms
Sanskrit
k(\.
trt
sd,
Zend
M;
kv6,
"which?** Sanskrit
and Zend
voc.,
The
nom. and
In
feminine
preserved,
into
>;.
d,
sometimes
130
119.
FORMATION OF CASES.
The long
thus,
appears, in Sanskrit,
most frequently
mahati (magna)
as a characteristic addition in
bases,
the
feminine
base
ir^
i
The same
most
suffix
strictly in
part. pres.
ant,
and
and
be,"
fut.
an
is
hant-i,
"
the
" that
that
shall
correspond to the
Sanskrit
wt
sat-t (for
asati or
asanti),
Hrjuidl bhav-i-shyanti.
i
In Greek and
sion
and where
affix
it
has
still
organic
tions.
This
rj^eia
affix
in Greek, either
a or B;
in Latin,
c.
Thus,
corresponds
to
the
Sanskrit
-rpid,
e.
Wf^
e.g.
swddw-it
from
^^T? swddu,
"sweet";
-rpia,
6pyr}<nptcct
^ KYjiTrpiq, \r](TTpiS-o^,
g. l{ft{^ janibru
responds
feminine
is
This
[G. Ed.
Tepeiva,
p. 140.]
analogy
is
by
fieAatva, raXaiva,
as in the
it is
t.
In deatva, \vKaiva,
to be
s^s^TOft/nis
of Indra, as derived
i
from
^^ Indra,
termed.
The
vr,
is
solely represented
the preceding
v,
however,
replaced by v or
or the
mere lengthening
cr
:
of the pre-
ceding vowel, or
it is
assimilated to the
e/cr-a,
hence, ofir-a,
for
ovr-a,
eaa-a,
si^-a,
ao--o*,
ai/r-a,
ikx-a
evr-a,
vvr-a.
FORMATION OF CASES.
To
this
131
which
J.
Grimm
(II.
328.)
like
very correctly, in
my
opinion,
')(api-e<T(Ta, ^leTuTo-ecraa,
nation or assimilation.
most recent;
not
supported
The
it,
Latin,
leaves,
its twin-sister,
power
120.
The German,
t;
too,
old feminine
intro-
duces
it
are introduced,
so-called
ei,
weak
and as
i*
in Gothic
is
denoted by
so to the
^^^
anti,
and to the
142.
comparative bases in
fwt
lyast,
121
at
The long u () appears, in Sanskrit, rather seldom the end of primary forms, and is for the most part
feminine.
vf
bhrih
"
eyebrow."
V,
To
the long
not different
is distin-
from ^
i.
way
any
K 2
at
all
with
-^ i
with
^ di
(from d + i, see
2.)
only"\
rae,
l3Bi
FORMATION OF CASES.
tW rd-s
Still I
In this
is
recog-
in e should therefore
the Sanskrit
^ di
for, in
sponds elsewhere to the Sanskrit ^ ^ (from a + i), never to di secondly, the connection of the e of the fifth declension
;
first is
not to be mis-
it
many words
A
is
and
declension
a sufhx which
is
employed
from adjectives
[G. Ed.
p. 142.]
sounded as well
as
;
Ha
{planitie-s,
ia,
like
pauperies, pauperia
same
suffix, identical
for the
with the Sanskrit "m yd, which is used Let us now la, Ionic irj.
the
in the
nom.
if
sing,
and
pi.
es,
mus/e (musai),
singular,
it
is,
Ke(paKr],
Ke(paKai,
As regards
declension be
seem
to
like the
a.
donment of the nominative sign, and the complete equalization with the primary form in ;R7n suid, '* daughter," and
similar
itself
words, although
it
has appeared to
me
as losing
ever,
of
antiquity than
(to confine
for
example
participial
FOEMATION OF CASES.
older forms than the Sanskrit and Greek, like
"K^yoiv,
133
H^^
tudan^
Tidei^,
tive
together
with
the
nasal,
and
therein
stand
on
of
Zend forms,
find,
like
J3'^Ail
bavans,
"being."
cannot,
therefore,
in
in
the retention
the
fifth
declension,
any decisive
first.
argument against
its
We
In
nominative plural.
common form
e answers to deae
es to familias.
the
more
rare,
we
require
them
be as
as
little,
perhaps, as a familia-is,
letters
Sir;-^,
quired as a
clension,
have
declension,
we
QUIET,
the
fifth
declension, then
fifth,
i.e.
merly been a
like
otherwise from
qidis,
it
QUIET
i.e.
must have been bases in e, could only have come QUII {quies,
there
in spite of the rejection of the
t
ccedes);
tion between
in
my
opinion, to
would be
it
Greek 7^-v
to
in the
remaining
cases,
has
"^tigd
for
base.
in e (Ruhig's third declension) which resemble the Greek 7 in the suppression of the singular nominative sign, but in the
nominative plural in
in e.
e-s
134
122.
FORMATION OF CASES.
Primary forms
in
^d
div,
only ones
known
is
to
me
are
^ dyd,
" to
heaven," and
rft
gd
the former
(a radical
f^ dw
its
word from
f^
zation of the
^
y.
V,
after which
the vowel
becomes
semi-vowel ^
[G. Ed.
diphthong into
p. 144.]
rj,
To
^ri'T
dyd-m,
of die-rn,
is
the Greek
Doric
yd-v
the Latin
final
e,
however,
the original
language requires
die-fn.
f^
div,
as on the other
heaven
*'
viz.
f^ divd,
which
as
primary form at
f^tfM dicasa,
div),
masc, and
latter
signifies
"
heaven."
To
dyu answers, after rejecting the d (as viginti for Latin Ju of Ju-piter, ' heavens - lord or dviginti), the
fx
father":
better
the
oblique cases
Jov-is,
Jov-i,
Jov-em
answer
to
the broader
theme
?ft dyd,
and the locat. f^ dyav-i. The Djovis, moreover, furnished by Varro, deserves mention, as that which keeps
dyav-^,
most
sig-
nifies, therefore, in
accordance with
its
origin primarily,
"heaven":
form
dropping the ^ d the following semi-vowel ii y became The oblique cases, on the contrary (A/os-, A//, &c.), C(. 19.)-
and must originally have had a digamma, proceeding by the natural law of sound from M, after which change the semi-vowel j must have become
belong to the Sanskrit
fr
dyu,
a vowel.
123.
same
tioned
primary forms
in
d,
viz.
t^ gd.
It
has several
FOBMATION OF CASES.
meanings
;
135
as masculine,
common
are
**
bull,''
and "cow"
forms.
Both significations
The Greek has preserved for the meaning " earth ''^ With regard to the vowel, 7^. 7a follows the
lias
been already
gdm {yrfv) stands for g4-m [G. Ed. p. 145.] For the meaning "ox" the Greek has preserved
(for,
for
expected, according to
ral
. 4.,
^6 = ay>u may very well be ov) but has exchanged the guttuG.
Ed., ^i^VH-'
medials for
^^^
WUfH
have
jaijdmi.
originally
become BOf
but in
middle
;
digammi
and there
for replacing
in
digamma, the medium of metre the oldest writings. Only theory and
decide here.
(n
comparative
in the
grammar can
diphthong)
into
a homogeneous mass
(cf.
. 4.),
the nature
BO
becomes
v,
The Zend
cussion into
AAiAu^
z,
and gives
in the nominative
zdo for
:
zds
(. 56*^.),
zanm
(. 01.)
am
remained
in
Zend, and
the former
136
FORMATION OF CASES.
believe t^
ndu
to be
an abbreG.
ed.),
with
sru, p. 125
and that
it
may
also
have
meant
and
" to swim,""
t?^
veco, na-to,
appear to
be connected,
the analogy of
^
6
ov.
daddu
. 6.,
from dadd-a.
As
by
a,
according to
is
^ du better than
commonly
repre-
(from short a + u)
is
sented by ev or
Hence
tf^^
as exactly as possible;
BOY, has maintained itself only before consonants and the digamma, which replaces it, is lost before vowel inof
flexions;
vrj-e^, i/a-ej,
'w{[^;^
ndv-as\
as /8o-es
from
^6F-eg.
The Latin
is
As
the semi-vowel
easily
hardened
to
a guttural
(. 19.),
we have here
also,
form
High German
125.
We
f,
s,
and r appear in Sanskrit most frequently at the end of primary forms all other consonants occur only in radical words, which are rare, and in some nominal bases of uncer;
tain
origin.
We
Of
consonants.
kh, g,
* Thus in
German an
ift
case sign in
where
the
dues not belong to the case designation, but to the here nninflected
base.
FORMATION OF CASES.
the end of the nominal bases most in use
Latin,
c is in
;
137
[G. Ed.
p. 147.]
In Greek, y only radical DC'C, VORAC, EDJC, LEG. K, ^, and y are only radical, or occur in words of unknown
origin, as <I>PIK,
ROPAK. 'ONYX
(Sanskrit nakha),
$AOr.
in
Of
most frequently
rdj,
"king," the
" blood
'*
end of compounds
^rnr
asrij,
(sanguis)
evil
in Zend we have i>^ dmj, f., as name of an demon, probably from the Sanskrit root "j? druh, " to
:
hate.''
Of
t,
T-soimd, the
first,
or
lingual (z
so
more frequently employed. Still Z d,'^ dh, occur only in radical words, and therefore seldom Tf th perhaps only in tt^ path, as the secondary theme of ijf^PT pathin, "way"; nom. Mi^^i panthds, from ^^^ panfhas, which I
the
;
much
think
examples are,
again recognise in the Latin PONT, pons. Other ^^ ad, " eating," at the end of compounds,
f.,
and ^m yudh,
suffixes
" strife."
The
letter
tT
is
so
much
the
more common,
^J^
ant,
employed
end with
w^
at
t,
or
ex-
The Greek,
besides
hibits also 5
radical;
KOPY0
0H,
last
member
"
and according
is
KOPY0
so
in
what
autumn," " rainy season,** which Grammarians explain by a suffix ad, in my opinion means nothing but " water giving," and contains the root
Sanskrit, ^it5 sarad,
dd,
"
Greek
suppressed.
:
'OPXI0
finds in
its
expla-
"wood"; and
if opvi
is
con-
[G. Ed.
p.
U8.]
138
nected therewith,
FORMATION OF CASES.
we may
;
would derive
its
name from
its
its
passage
through the air, it is called, among other names, f%fJT riha-ga. Regarding the later origin of the in feminine
bases in
i,
an account
i8
is
given in
119.;
that is to say,
i,
patronymics in
e.g.
may
daughter of Bhima.
is
Probably, too,
;
a later addition
they
my opinion,
In
connection
affix in
with them.
d appears
as a
more modern
the base
PECUD,
with a
final
d,
which remains
nominative,
it
is
conducted by the
affix
an
a more current province of declension. The more modern German dialects under no circumstances leave the old T-sound without a foreign addition commixed with
into
the base.
In
suffix ant, in
re-
am
for
ants, rests
exactly upon
Zend
step,
more consonants,
affix,
i. e.
cannot unite
case
them
the
more modern
to
the
participial
ia,
ant
is
added
of
[G. Ed.
149]
syllable
by the
influence
which
ch
the
experiences
the
nasal
euphonic
of
this
transformation
dental
T-class,
into
viz.
(=
*
fsch^).
Tliis
The
is
the
sound
Grammar.
FORMATION OF CASES.
proper
n,
139
In the
like
German
the San-
the words of
skrit,
vowel termination.
cases adds
The Lithuanian
same
a base in en sometimes
ia,
sometimes a
including the
simple u
126.
final
labial,
member
too,
but seldom.
we have
^r^ ap
(probably from the root ^nr dp, "to take in," "to comprehend"),
"water," which
is
used
only
in
the plural;
in
bases in p,
b,
(f>,
unknown
or in
and
so,
as in
German, the
to
first
Grimm, have only the appearance of a base terminating with a consonant. Of this kind is plebs, from plebis ; to
explain which
it is
:
the Greek
-nXrjdo^
PLE.
bam.
The derivative
bis, bes, I
bills,
The
with qu
(cf.
quinque with
rests
snmnus
for soptius,
euphonic law
(Gramm.
Crit. r.
58
).
The Sanskrit has from the same which we recognise the Latin aqtior,
cequus, but
is
transferred
from
the waves, or the mirror of the sea, to other things of a similar natnre.
same
oriqin.^
140
60 {amabam,
-bo),
FORMATION OF CASES.
as
FEE,
often
changes the
(. 18.).
it is difficult,
in
distinguish
truly and
origi-
pear to do so;
on the consonantal
originally.
and introduced an
it
into dif-
impossible
of forms
a con-
affix;
it
is,
however
bus, have,
my
opinion,
more correct
to
VOCI,
AMANTI;
it
so that
.
we ought
was
to divide voci-bwt,
amnnti-hus, just as at
that in most cases
125.
it
extends
its participial
bases in ant to
an
frequently finds
its place,
without
its
i
would be necessary to
On
the
other
hand, juveni-s, cani-s, forming the genitives canu-m, juven-um, remind us of older bases in n
;
as in
Sanskrit TSR
tuan,
"
,
"a dog"
p. 151.]
and
^^^
yuvan,
young" (abbreviated
[G. Ed.
yun), in
close
KYN, really
it
German resembles
rals,
convenience of declension
has added an
to several
numeconso-
whose
nant;
thus, in
from
.
FID FORI
(Sanskrit ^rr^
129. ^hI4.
dative fidvori-m.
navon,
The themes Tnr^ saptan, " seven," tT^ damn, " ten,^ by the addition of an i
FORMATION OF CASES.
in Old
141
Hi^h German mould themselves to SIB UNI, NIUNI, ZEHANI; which forms, at the same time, pass as
masculine nominatives, as these cases, in Old High German,
have
lost
the case-sufl&x
if
$.
The corresponding
Gothic
nominatives,
taihunei-s.
More on
the
^^
127.
Of
semi-vowels
v),
have
never
found in Sanskrit
y and
at the
f^
div,
before mentioned,
ift
which
dyo and
dyu.
On
especially in
to which, in
w^ tar*
cognate
bases
in
r.
Moreover,
r in Latin
s,
of an original
skrit f^iTT lyos)
re,
;
as,
and,
;
an abbreviation of
ri-s,
as
for lis, le
or, in
viated
from
ru-s;
as in
(.
belongs to bases in a
consonantal base
Sanskrit
^^^
salila,
exactly in the
12S.
same manner
from
fie-^oKo^.
first (^r s, '^ sK)^
Of
as also the
h,
ts
fore seldom;
common
suffixes
^^
as,
Thra
tejas,
"splendour,"
from fK\
tij,
" to sharpen."
this,
this
sibilant
between two
^^
rt is regarded
by the Grammarians
($. 1.)
14^
FORMATION OF CASES.
is
usually rejected
yevos (from
MENE2. TENES,
fxeveo^,
e into 6),
yevecro^.
I
for fxevea-og,
The
of the nominative,
however, belongs, as
to the base,
have no
in the nominative.
itself;
hence
(pSpog, in
which
to
it
of a
form of word
answers exactly to the Sanskrit WCj^^jaras, "age," although In Lithuathe Indian form is not neuter, but feminine.
nian, another remarkable
suffixes
terminating with
perf., in
in the partic.
Sanskrit
(.
T^
^^ us)
130.);
still,
by the subse-
quent addition of
[G. Ed. p. 163
]
ia,
i
a or
the
i,
a,
declension
is
same with
sides those
locative.
an instrumental and a
also
These two
cases
exist
in
Lithuanian;
Ruhig
tive
is
calls
whence.^"
wanting.
same
or
FORMATION OF CASES.
suffixes used in the
143
all
the cases,
desirable
weak
is
The strong
accusative,
the
other cases,
of the
larity,
is
weak.
Where a double or
exists, there,
triple formation
primary form
the
cases which
have been
designated as strong
fullest
a comparison of languages,
which appears also in the beginning of compounds, and hence is represented by the native Grammarians, according to
part,
.
122., as
the
The
pres.
may
serve as an example
it
with the suffix ant, but in the weak cases and in the be-
n,
which
is
by Zend
ticiple in
e.g.
so that
also, for
the
most
part,
at is
given as the
suffix of this
tt^ tud,
par-
The root
" to vex,"
in-
form 7T^
-dant
(cf.
tundenf-em),
declined,
STRONG CASES.
WZAK
CAS8.
Singular
H<^^H tudaniam
i^fudafd.
-^^tudatS.
rl^it'V
Dat
Abl.
tudatas,
^sn.
Loc.
W^cT^ tudatas.
-^tiidaii.
^^^^m^tudadhliydtn.
H^lft^ tudafds.
Gen. Loc.
144
FORMATION OF CASES.
STRONG CASES.
WEAK
CASES.
Plural
Nom. Voc.
Ace.
Instr.
TrerrfH
tudantas
ifJrf?r O V TT^fsH tudadhhis.
tudafas.
Dat. Abl.
5^^
rTijrTW
rftfrW
tudadhhyax.
Gen.
Loc.
130.
ludatdm.
tudatsu.
Where
Gramm.
Crit.
r.
185.)
the cases
[G. Ed.
p.
155]
most of the cases, which in Sanskrit proceed from the weakened theme. Words,
of form.
base
hound," which in
con-
Zend likewise
in a double
swd, TiETRH
swdnam
(. 50.).
The
but
Zend
the strong
sing.
nom. auoam dfs (. 40.), accus. ^^q>au dpem; on the other hand, ap-6, " of the water," ap-at, " from the water," &c.*
This word occurs
in the
Codex of the V.
where that
S.,
edited
tlie
by Burnouf, very
o which
it
initial
is
so that
is
can only
be imputed to an error
in writing;.
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
146
reason, crept in
^^yAuaJjs
found for
and the weak ^y^^ sund, " canes,^^ and, on the spdno in the nominative
;
:
The Greek, in the declension of kvu)v, has limited the [G. Ed. p. 156.] strong form to the nom. and voc. sing. in some cognate words in p, however, in accordance with the
132.
:
Sanskrit,
it
Compare
iraT^p, "narepa,
fxrfi
with
fmn pita,
fMHI.M^
pitaram, f^fRp'ttar,
and
the
vocat.,
opposed
bhrdta, \JTKT:r
bhrdfaram,
HT%
Accordwhile
e.g.
weakened
to
(. 1-10.)
JHMAN,
final
"spirit^
140.).
133.
As regards
the
mode
of
combining the
vowels
vowel,
is
we must
first
draw attention
to a phenouienon,
which
am
facile
exchange of
and
jukj
a, the confusion
S. p. 21,
sights.
Thus, V.
we
^^ji^ijwasI^
dp<'-
M:<^'>>y^l}
^i^juu
tsanhuisvohistdo ynuzila-
dhatao ashaoms aycke, " aquas puras, optimas, ab Orinuzdo creaias^ viuudas
celebro"
oilier
I
and ^a)AU
CukJ5)j}.^9
vUpuo apo,
'^
omnet aquas."
On
the
AJ^i;\>^C5
xs^^mm^m
^^J
has aquaqiie
146
FORMATION OF CASES.
it,
it
guage
otherwise
it
cognate European
fore regard
it
dialects,
We
there-
itself to
It is necessary
Veda language
the
as
common
is
Sanskrit
^^
ayd,
^JH\ iyd,
Tm
vJ/d.
The euphonic n
[G. Ed.
p. 167.]
its
is
intro-
also,
And
it is
in Old
an n
thus in Old
High
German,
AHO
is fur-
(nom. aha).
there
Guna
which
to the
(.
SINGULAR.
NOMINATIVE.
134. Bases, of the masculine and feminine genders, end-
which
w,
and
is
A (. 2.),
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
takes place only befoie sonant letters
(.
147
25.)*
Examples
are given at
148.
case-designation
^ sa,
^sd; and
the said
the
fact, that
pronoun does not extend beyond the limits of the nom. masc.
and fem., but
is
and feminine in
[G. Ed.
135.
be-
p. 158.]]
who ?"
*'
host is,
according to
(j/a),
i
In masculine substantive
bases in ja
however, the
final
vowel
is
retained, only
If,
weakened
as
is
to
(.
"army."
however,
final syllable is
preceded by a
long syllable, or by
to ei (=t,
.
more than
e.g. ondeis,
70.);
genitive,
which
is
in like
manner denoted by
i
s.
To
the
from an elder a.f I deduce this from the majority of the oblique cases, which agree with those of the a bases.
Where,
however,
in
Lithuanian,
consonant precedes
which
is
the
more common
/,
case,
ing
i,
suppressed
hence,
ynunikkis,
"young man,"
for
adjective
bases in ya,*
sutas tava, ^fi-
(/.
T^
V[t\
mens" Tlim
IR
tuus" {.
-2-2.).
t Throua;h the
euphony
I
Zend law of
1309 G. Ed.,
(. 42.).
tlie
Respecting
in ya, see p.
Remark.
L 2
148
as
FORMATION OF CASES.
"the middle" (man),
V^vc^^
midi-s
for midyi-s
also,
from midya-s,
in
Sanskrit
zation*
madhya-s,
The Zend
the
vocali-
a remarkable analogy
to
A5^*0 yo.
before a final 9
regularly to ^
i,
as also
Aj(p
va
to
^u
136.
(. 42.).
has,
up
to
form of
r; never-
and adjectives
[G. Ed.
p. 159.]
is,
to
which belong
in the
form
of
e,
German as
it
appears through
is
not in monosyllabic
forms.
Thus, e.g.
;
plint-^r,
^'
coscus,"'
as to the Gotiiic
Middle and
tive
and,
in
fact,
stands.
entirely lost.
137.
in
d,
few exceptions, polysyllables in ^ i, together with '^ strt, " wife," like the corresponding forms of the cognate languages, have lost the old nominative sign (with the exception
of the Latin ^ bases, see
.
121.),
the
final
In Gothic, 6 be-
comes a
(.
69.);
only
s6,
Zend
*
I
Jkuw"
hd and
^3^^ led
and vocalize
Trans.
to
vowel
iU corresponding vowel.
NOMINATIVE SIXGULAB.
AU d
is
149
even in
shortened.
In Zend, ^
also is shortened,
V.
S. par. 136,
(by
Olshausen),
vaque^^
;
p. 28,
where we read
aj^j'ij)jj
stri-cha, "feml-
Here,
too,
the
Zend nomi^''
natives in
;o e
similar to the
Greek
in
ij;
as jrsi^^^^ perenS,
*'
plena,
which
zdo,
^j
I
without
my
have
found
peren^.
kanyn), which
^-NS^^/As^
is
of frequent occurrence,
find the
accus.
kanyanm (V.
proof
In ^^y>^M^ nic influence of the suppressed ^^ y (. 42.). " " cousin," and aj^^^j^^ tuiry^, a relation in the brdturyi,
fourth degree" (V. S.
p. 3S0),
on
the
the
other
"grandmother,"
We
cannot
it is
everywhere
preceded by an
flnence of this
i
;
is
by the
in-
where
rejects the
((TO(f>ta).
combination with
genders which
lose, in
if
Sanskrit, according to
same
Hence, f^ifU
"the bearer";
^TTcf
w^
"the vexer";
^T^ vdch, f.), for m^ idk-sh, " speech." The Zend, Greek, and Latin, in preserving the nominative
vdk (from
sign after consonants, stand in an older position than the
Sanskrit;
Zend jm^jm
df-s
(for
dp-s,
.40.),
"water";
150
>\57^^ Ic'r'ffs, " a demon."
FORMATION OF CASES.
"body""; m5(3^>^ cZrwc-s (from the base druj), The Latin and Greek, where the final consos
of the nomifor
^Eolic,
and
this point,
s,
gives the
corre-
form
(man).
139.
ns;
10.),
final
is,
in Sanskrit,
no
theme
in
the
first
member
of a
compound,
rajan-putra
and
;
a preceding
e.g.
lengthened
in
;
masculines
nT ndma,
ndman,
n.
from
^fJTT
dhanin, "rich."
;
The Zend
e.g. >Axitii^(i.shava,
from
yA5A5ta5-w ashavan,
m.
/w^iajAs^ chashman, n.
The Latin
but
and
feminine,
not
in
the
neuter:
sermo,
The
this
root
can
at
the
end
compounds, refrains
from
weaken
still
more
weak
radical syllable;
. 6.).
Lien-^ia
an abbreviation of
is
tion
of the
not
surprising.
Pecten
rather
isolated.
ciple
of the
of n
^^^
" slaying,"
" smiting,"
I
ncm.
^ hd,
is,
have
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
met with
is
151
sic4,
so used.
which,
sun,
theme
to
^^
The
"
"5SR
to
(cf.
so
W?^
yuvan,
young,"
126.).
between
-is,
the opposition
in several
words
is
as homo, hom'mis
arundo, arundin-is
the nominative
i;
distinguished from
me
a stronger vowel,*
weaker
by which,
in
in Sanskrit,
;
comes
Thus,
the nominative, u
= mo)
for
or
primary
forms of the same signification, ^^^ asman, yp^^ swan, have arisen ^^qi asmd and "sj swd. It does not follow that homin-is has come from homon-is,t because the old language
but
the
same word. 140. The German language also rejects a final n of the base in the nominative and in the neuter, in the accu* Althoagh
trary,
still
it
its
is
arbi-
contrast to the
Greek
rjv,
fv-oi
atv,
ov-os.
For the
rest
it
has been
t In bases
in yspt
with the exception of the vocat. sing. ; thus, not merely XTSTT rdjd, "rej:," but also rajdn-am, "regem," rdjdtias, " reges."
X I
4^|<|H<I
taking the
of homo.
uhmin, to the nom. and ace. ahma, ahman, wliich preserve the original voweL
152
FORMATION OF CASES.
In
in
Gothic,
in
the masculine
and neuter
old
where
alone,
my
opinion, the
n has an
n.
an
is
There
none in
to
in
and
The
a,
however,
.
weakened
in the
weakest cases
entirely
dropped.*
Among
and which therefore correspond to the Sansk. TTn? rdj-an, "king," as "ruler." Thus J H- J N, "spirit," as "thinker"
{ah-yo, "I think"),
STAU-AN, "Judge"
aha, staua. in
(s/aw-i/a,
"I judge"),
also, as in
There are
man
as,
AHMAN,
nom. ahma, with which perhaps the Sansk. '^iw^ dtman, "soul,"^ nom. ^nTTT dtmd, is connected; in case this
stands for dh-man, and comes from a lost root ^n"? dh,
" to
think,"t
where
it
is
to be
remembered
root
^H
changed
its
hintot.
The Gothic
MILH-MAN,
gh,
arises the
nomiin the
o-fxcxi-eo)
the
meaning
is
Neuter bases
e-ff'
* In case two consonants do not precede the termination ^r^ an ^TfW|n dtman-as, not dtmn-as^ but f|^lT ndmn-as, not ndman-as, t Perhaps
identical with the actually -occurring ^STT? dh,
in
" nominis."
" to speak,"
as
JT'JT
Zend means
also
A76-y>j^
MUN-THA,
mouth"
$.68..
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
tive,
163
[G. Ed. p. 164.]
only in the nom., accus., and vocat. plural, where, for example, ^rTrfr chatwdr-i, "four," with a strong theme,
is
like
^ttRHi chaturbhis
(instr.)^
The
a, also,
of neuter bases in an is
and in Gothic
and hence
fl'JlfT
ndmdn-i,
in
However,
exists,
(. 130.),
ndmn-dm,
"
nominum'"
by the example
namin-i.
142. In the feminine declension in
German
can find
no
no
feminines in an or
first
formed
;
as,
TT^
rdjni,
rich'' (fern.),
from
"vftnT
dhanin, m. n. "rich."
Gothic
fe-
this consonant,
= ^,.69.)
And
(
already, at
120.,
a close
and Lithuanian in
z,
^ in)
a,
"the fair" (woman), from Wf^sundara m. n. "beautiful" Gothic substantive bases in ein for the most part raise
the
adjective,
to
an abstract;
154
[G, Ed.
p. 166.]
FORMATION OF CASES.
e.g.
MANAGEIN, "crowd, nom. managet, from the adjective haaeMANAGA (nominative masc. manag-s,
neut. managa-td)
;
MIKILEIN,
nom.
from
bases
MIKILA
in
6n,
I
As
to feminine
and
in 6n
as
BLINDON,
nom.
must be
adjec-
derived, not from their masculine bases in an, but from the
a,
Grimm's strong
made
Sanskrit feminines in
these old
Greek in
a,
ri,
Latin in a
and in
final
n.
Thus,
to
{
TUGGON (pronounced
Latin
lingua,
nom.
tuggo,
answers
jihwd,
the
and
and
to
the
Sanskrit
fT3fT
= dschihwd,
;
see
. 17.);
DAURON,
vid6v6, "
nom.
daurd, to the
^scti-
Greek dupa
skrit
VIDOVON,
nom.
widow," to the
f^\m
uic?/iatj(l,
MITATHYON,
"
ACTION;
as
is
too, the
on
is
a later addition,
suffix fiT
of the
a-i-g
(old rig),
Gothic
ti,
ihi,
di (see
91.).
And
the base
TATHI,
the
In
RATHYON,
RATION,
;
nom.
raihy6, "ac-
at least in respect of
word
is
[G. Ed.
p. 166.]
the th belongs.
part, rath-
in the Gothic
soil,
The
RATHYON
"knowledge."
Of
the
same origin
is
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
143.
If
155
a few
members
may
be
and
may
all
;
sounds, in
when
final,
are sub-
ject to abrasion
many
languages
to relationship,
and to
tlie
human
races,
surprising, there-
with
its sisters
and in
its v bases,
nomiIt is
is
a remnant of the
oldest
period
away by
which
again
and by the
example of
their
own
oblique cases,
v to
be
lost,
common
similar
experienced
to the Sanskrit,
we
should be
raXd?
It
more
probable.
that,
p.
167]
remarked,
in
is
German, the
n,
which in Gothic, in
the oblique
the nominative,
dialects
made
its
way
in
So early as the
Old
High German
native,
this
70.),
ei
oppose
to
the
Gothic
the
base
in
as
Grimm,
p. 628).
In our
New High
156
FORMATION OF CASES,
the
German
fusion
phenomenon
is
worthy of
notice, that
many
m
its
as
if
e.
as
if
they be-
longed to
Grimm's
s,
first
strong declension.
Hence the n
is
makes
thousand years
Thus,
man
In
Backe or Backen, Same or Samen ; but the genitive has in these words also introduced the s of the strong declension.
Among neuters the word Herz deserves consideration. The base is, in Old High German, HERZAN, in Middle High German HERZEN; the nominatives are, herza, herze ; the New German suppresses, together with the n of Herzen, the vowel also, as is done by many masculine n bases; as, e.g. Bar for Bare. As this is not a
transition into the strong declension, but rather a greater
weakening of the
[G. Ed.
weak nominative,
With
/xeAa-f
this
the
form
Herzens,
prising.
s
assumed or newly-re-
stored inflection
nominative
g,
as of
v of Satfxoov, reprjv
in case, as is ren-
still
of the base
is
not entirely
Several
viz.
unknown may be
cardinal
example.
numbers
Sanskrit
conclude
their
base
with "3 n;
pancha?i,
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
144.
157
Bases in
ar
(^ ri,
ceding vowel
"brother,""
e.g.
from
JTTffT
daug^hter,"
come
f^f^^ pita,
^mn
r.
bhrdta,
mm
Jtiatd,
^f^ffl duhitn.
The
I believe, as
a -compensation
As
through
of the agent,
rrjp,
which corresponds
tor, this
to
Greek formations in
all
pro-
words WTT tdr, and not iTT tar, is the original form of the suffix; and this is also supported by
bability,
these
through
all
the cases
rrip, Tiop,
r,
tor; only
an
Compare
ORERK.
Sor^p,
BoT/jp-a,
^orrjp-e,
Sorfjp-eg,
SAWSKRrr.
LATIN.
dator,
Nom.
sing.
^T?n ddtd,
Ace. sing.
^TrnTH ddtdr-am,
dator-em,
Nom. Voc.
The Zend
rejection
pi.
^irfK^ dutdr-as,
dator-es.
"nine," damn, "ten." These numerals are, indeed, used adjectively^ when they are not governed by the gender of their substantive, but display always a neuter form, and indeed, which
is
accusative, and vocative sing, terminations, but in the other cases the suit-
pancha (not panehdnas) rdjdnat ; e.g. Xf^ TITTT^ " quinque reges "; on tbe other hand, ^^^ TUTO pancfiasu rdjasu " in quinque regibus." To the neuter nominatives and accusative of the sinable plural endings
j[Tf sapta,
^^
dasa
^which
inrd,
rest
on the
Svca,
answer
Greek
neirre,
eVi/ea,
with the distinction that they have become quite indeclinable, and retain
the old uninfiected nominative through
all
the cases.
158
FORMATION OF CASES.
noun agent,
in the
same
places
gular,
e
a,
as always
when
final, is
shortened;
;**
ace
paitar-em,
^^/au^au^ ddtdr-em.
In Lithua-
nine bases in
tive,
er,
which drop
of the
nominathe
old
but in most
oblique cases
extend
er base
by the
later addition of
an
the
i.
Thus
dukte
"
daughter,"
;
answer
to
abovementioned Jnrn
In the genitive singu-
bases.
base
SESSER,
" sister,"
belongs to
this
place
it
nom. '^rfn swasd; but in the nominative from mote and dukte,
swasar,
^^
thus
sessh.
p.
[G. Ed.
170.]
145.
in their
affinity)
r bases (to
contrary to the
r in the nominative.
As
-narrip, fxrjTrjp,
^^ divar,
^^d^v/U
nom.
It is
\m devd), frater,
;
soror
dauhtar
in Old
a rem-
being anciently
its
made
way
in the
think the
latter
more probable
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
for
159
suppression
Greek words
<T(iiTr,p, prfrtup,
ferred giving
(as
tt;? is
of
to the nominative
$,
form
t>;-?,
whence
should
form
in
Zend and
to-r, rrjp
and TCdp, speak at least plainly enough and comparative youth of the nouns of
agency in
146.
rr]q.
^^
as
in
Sanskrit lengthen
are, for the
They
most
as ^ffr^
p.
durmanas,
(before
" mind,"
" evil-minded,"
from
25.
^tt
dus
[G. Ed.
171]
sonant
letters
5T dur) and
fern,
^^^ manas.
is
^^rpw durmanas,
here
$vcrfi.eve^.
neut.
^^^
s
remarkable agreement
j;
Svcrfxevrj^, 6,
opposed to to
The ^
of y^Hi?T durmands,
wanting, according to
the
J
94.
of
^v<TfMvfj
durmanas-as, but
.
Bvajxei'io^.
If,
^hH^S 'ON
128
is
/xei'eoy is
abbreviated from
/xevecr-of,
SvafievTjg also,
and
all
similar adjectives, a
belonging to
the
base
lie
must be
at the
form Bvaneveaos
In the
must
Bvafxeveos.
160
FORMATION OF CASES.
g
or the
durmands would be comof the base has been dropped before the cases^-sfHT
is,
sign
?.
The
is
latter
in
my
for the
former
answer
to
where the forms which the Sanskrit as bases are in the nom. masc. and
fem. in like
manner without
the case-sign.
skrit comparative suffix is ^tto lyas the last a but one of which is lengthened in the strong cases, and invested with a
. 9.)
in Latin,
;
ior,
with the
changed
in
o,
into
r,
both genders
however,
is
In the
is
;
because u
and prevents
its
transition into r
JTT.1i|
jt;^
guruy
"heavy,") as
lupus
to
"^"JPfl^ vriftas,
s of the nomi-
The
though
us,
short,
must nevertheless
does to
a similar antithesis
8vcrixeve,
to gravius that in
Greek
Bva-fiev^g
147. In
isolated,
and in Sanskrit ^Rrr^ durmands to 5^^r^ durmanas. Lithuanian a nominative, which stands quite
menu (=:menuo),
:
"
here to be mentioned
it
MENES*.
the
same
(. 139.),
ahnu has
The
which
signifies the
same
from ^T^
tiie
is
remarkable; for
T
Sanskrit
na in roots of the
MENSI that
1.
c.
NOMINATIVE SINGULAlL
to
l61
AKMEN, sessu
s
to
SESSER
the
er
and en
an unorganic increase
is menesio,
whence
from
WILKA,
nom.
148. In neuters,
which subject
is
treated of at
152. &c.
We
here give a
and for
:
all
following examples
"who.?"
f.
fifd^ Jirtud,
"tongue f
m.
"lord,''
"husband;"
Tr\fn
*'
"water ;"
vihj^Jifibliavishyanti,
who
is
THT tanu,
"body;"
vadhu,
" ship."
final
f.
"wife;" t^gd,
"bullock,"
Of
m.
1.
n.
"
bearing,"
from
>tt
bhar
n.
(>T
bhri)
^rnW5T fitmnv,
hl.rdtar,
m. "soul;"
ttihtt
ndman,
"name;"
>JTcTT
ddlar,
m. "brother;" ^ffiTT duhitar, f. "daughter;" ^IT^ m. " giver ;" ^^w vachas, n. " speech," Greek, 'EHES,
FEDE^,
f.
Feiro?.
AJ^ ka,
m. " who
.?"
m^ma
datum
a>^
"this;"
jm^^^ hizrd,
"tongue;"
M, "which?"
cases:
* Masculines and feminines in the consonantal declension agree in all hence an example of one of the two genders is sufficient. Tha
is
only exception
^rr ar
^,
114.),
whxh
form
this case
162
J^JAJ^ paiti, m.
FORMATION OF CASES.
(. 41.)
" Lord
;"
j;o^^^am
^ti,
f.
" bless-
ing
"
f.
'*
;"
j9jmI^ vairi, n.
will
;"
who
be
;'"'
>j3ajq>
"water;" ^^^jxi^i)ip^_^ bushyainii, pasu, m. " tame animal ;" >yAj^ tanu,
n.
body
>^^
madhu,
"wine;"
^^
gd,
m.
f.
*'
bullock,"
[G. Ed.
p. 174.]
cow
"*;
^Awt
^^Aj^Aii barant, or
barat,
^^g^
barent,
m.
n. "
bearing
;" yAj^jJAj
^^ch,
ndman
*
It
(also y-w^"^*/
nanman),
$.
n.
"name;"
Aj^au^I bTdtar,X
"earth," accus. ^vnV ssahm, that I have only met with these two cases.
is
nevertheless represented
b}'^
after
I I
same theme.
I
agree with
him on
much
^^'^^j
the rather as
believe
"
terrce," (dat.)
1
J^? <
emi,
that
to the Sanskrit
do not doubt,
at . 63.
is
and
p. 114, the
Zend ^
tw is to
v.
The Indian
gav, would consequently have made itself almost unintelligible in the meaning " earth," in Zend, by a double alteration ; first by the transition
of
to z, in
e.g.
^xs^jam, "
and
which J must be assumed as the middle step in which to go," from im gam, has remained ; secondly, by the
Advert,
also, to
hardening of the v to m.
since 8
the
Greek
8r],
for
yrj,
in brjfi^rrjp ;
z,
from
Hj
sound whence they have sprung, that the Greek has retained the T-sound,
the
Zend the
I
sibilant.
;
but
c
;
it
can only be
j^
change into
(S^
u>7a
druc-8.
drtij,
"an
evil
that
what Anquetil,
is
in
liis
the nomi-
(3^
by kh, and
44, as
by
sch.
X
is
In the theme
we
by
it
interposed.
NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
163
m.
"giver,"
It is
:
"creator;"
^?^Aj(p
vachd,
n.
(.
56".)
"word."
and Latin
Lith.
WILKJ,
JULFJ. m.
HFA, m. "who?"
Goth.
Lith.
GERA,
f.
n.
"good;" TJ,
n. "the;**
DAURA,
HVO,
THA,
D. "this;" Lith.
(.
RANKA,
69.);
f."
which?"; Lith.
/,
GASTI, m.
"it;"
o/f);
"stranger;"
f.
m. "he,"
[G. Ed.
p. 175.]
Lith.
Goth.
"sheep," (Sansk. ^i^ avi, m. cf. otw, AWI, ANSTI, f."mercy;" Lith. Goth. SUNU, m. " son;*
f.
Goth.
HANDU,
"hand;" Lith.
Lith.
DARKU, n. "ugly;"
Goth.
SVKANT,
Lith.
AKMEN,
AHMAN,
SANSKRIT.
m.
m. "brother;"
m. m.
vrika-s,
ka-s,
"daughter.*
GOTHIC.
GREEK.
LATIH.
UTBUAN.
wilka-s,
ka-s,
vehrkd,X
kd,X
\vko-^,
lupus,
vulf^s,
....
....
hva-s.
isolated
pats, "husband,"
all
in the
nominative suppressed, as
is
bases
vtg-paiti,
region."
t These and other bases ending with a consonant are given only in
those cases which have remained free from a subsequent vowel addition.
I
all
same
is
also,
^7^ o^ assumes
before
^ cha
hence
said
And
in
its
length
hence
ajcjau>j^ jihvdcha,
''
" linguaque,"
AJ^^^^jAs^^l^jll
'''fraterqus "
final
hushyuinitcha,
Even without
vowel
is
found undiminished
how-
and
observe
it
everywhere
in the terminations.
164
SANSKRIT.
FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.
GREEK.
JwjOO-V,
TO,
LATIN.
UTHDAN.
GOTHIC.
n.
ddna-m,
ta-t.
ddte-m,
ta-t,
doTium, gera.
is-tu-d.
ta-i.
daut'.
tka-ia.
Q.
f.
f.
jihwd.
kd.
hizva,*
kd,
paiti-s.
X<^pa,
terra.
ranka.
....
TTOO-Z-y,
....
....
m. m.
f.
pat is,
hosti-s. pati-s.
....
prili-s.
....
nopTis,
t^pt,
is,
sitis,
....
awis.
dfriti-s
vairi.
ansfs.
n
1
1
vdri,
mare.
i-d.
....
Pn
^
ft
....
.... ....
!X,dv.g,
iriTV-s,
....
busenti,
i-ta.
....
....
sunus.
handu'i
faihu.
paiu-s,
tanu-s.
pecu-s, sunus,
Sf. tanu-s,
socrus,
pecu.
....
darku.
n madhu.
.
madhu,
....
gdu-s,t
jxedv,
f.
vadhu-s,
.
....
/3oC-r,
....
bos,
....
....
m.f
f.
f.
gdu-s,f
ndu-s,
....
....
....
vav-^f
OTT-,
(}>epoiv,
....
vocs.
....
....
vdk,
vdc-s.
....
m.
bharan.
baran-s.
ferens, sukah-}\fiyand-i>
sermd'.
m.
n
dtmd\
asma,*
ndma'.
brdta\*
akma',
ahma'.
ndma,
bhrdtd\
rdXav,
ttarrjp,
nomen.
frater.
.... ....
dukte,'
nam6\
brdthar.
m.
f.
duhUd\
ddtdf
vachas,
dughdha*.
dvydrrip, mater.
doTrjp,
eTTOf,
dauhtar
m.
n.
data*
vachS,*
dator. opus.
....
.
.
ACCUSATIVE
SINGULAR.
149.
The character
;
of the accusative is
v,
in
Sanskrit,
in Greek
In
to
has become
more weakened
t
X
gos.
Or jiup^^
^"o*; 33.
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAE.
the dull re-echoing nasal, which in Sanskrit
[G. Ed.
p. 177.]
165
is called
Anu-
express by n
(. 10.).
The German languages have, so early lost the accusative mark in substantives
entirely, but in
tive
sion,
it;
still
the
masculine:
character, and
the High na instead of the old m The German, with more correctness, a simple n hence, Gothic hlind-na, " coecum,'* Old High German plinta-n, Middle and
Gothic gives
blinde-n.
in
San-
157.
i,
151. Monosyllabic
words in
u,
and
du, in
Sanskrit,
as
am
in place of the
mere m,
way
and n ndut "ship," form, not bhi-m and ndu-m, as the Greek vau-v would
polysyllabic.
vi\ bhi,
become
Thus,
" fear,"
From
the bases
^^3
if
''"f/ **^
S.
cJAmp vach^
;
I find
besides ^?Ji>
7a
and
that
is
how-
Zend
for
ce mentioned
^j; eg
^M^i^AXiA
;
^m^jaxaa dadimaMy
answering to the SanvrSL"
"we
166
[G. Ed. p. 178.]
FORMATION OF CASES.
lead us to expect, but fnVJ^ bhiy-am,
^H^
ndv-am.
With this agree the Greek themes in ev, since these give e-a, from eF-a, for ev-v; e.g. /3ao-/Ae(F)a, for /3a(ri\v-v, It is, however, wrong to regard the Latin em as the true, originally sole accusative termination, and for lupu-m, hora-m,
suffices to charac-
thuanian, and Gothic. The Latin em in the accusative third declension is of a double kind: in one case the e belongs to the base, and stands, as in innumerable cases,
for i;
agni-m),
t-v,
Li-
thuanian
i-n,
ina,
em
to
which
152.
corresponds in
many
The
Sanskrit and
and
nominative
also
this
character,
which
is less
the neuter
hence, Sansk.
^|44fH^
AH
ter,
in the
places a final
by the cognate
e;
thus,
spends to the Sanskrit uf^ vdri, " water"; the Sanskrit and Zend, leaves the / unchanged
Sanskrit
HSpt-s, iiSpt, as in
vrf^
suchis,
tN suchl
The
tlie
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
167
place both of nominative and accusative : in Sanskrit ire madhu, '* honey,^ " wine," asm, " tear," ^tT^ sicddu, " sweet'" in Zend >'^^ vdhm " wealth" (Sanskrit ?rB
^^
vasu); in
Greek
fiidv,
The
is
to be explained
With regard
is
perhaps a reason
ex-
explicable as a
by which,
too,
the o of the second declension becomes long. shortness of the u of the fourth declension
pi.
The
is
original
u-bus.
The
2, in
Greek
is
words
ed at
case
129.
as
with
:
the Latin
in
neuters
like
genus,
corpus,
gravius
it is
127.);
and corpus
vapus, gen. '^Tl^Tf capu-sh-as (see . 19.). and would consequently have an r too much, or the Sanskrit
^^
The 2
me
to be the case
sign, but
an
is
Trpdyfxa) or
exchanged
ttjoot/,
[G. Ed.
p, 180.]
from
Sanskrit
jffji
prati
Compare, in this respect, brachium, ^paxiav^ with m^Tl biihu-s, "arm"; frango, pifywfu, with tTTn^q bhanajmi^ "I break," Vf^Stm hhanjmas, " we break." t With thia view, which I have already developed in my treatise
**
On some
and Conj unctions " (Berlin, by Diimmler), pp. 46, corresponds, as to the essential points, what Harttmg has since said on this
positions
fobject
168
In Latin
it is
FORMATION OF CASES.
to be regarded as inconsistent with the spirit
this
gender extend
also to
if it
aman{f)s.
much
by the Sanis
no longer
case sign
is
in a stand on the
u,
and consonantal
the nominative
in that, in
inflexion.
Compare,
with regard to the form of this case, daur{a) with ^TR**^ dwdram, which has the same meaning. In Gothic there
are
no neuter substantives
p. 181.]
in
i;
[G.Ed.
bases;
e.g.
from the
likewise
liEIKYA, "rich"
(Sanskrit
TTW
rdjya,
the
The want
of neuter
bases
p. 152, &c.
where
nlso
vention of
2..
The
To
TJoinT yukrit
h and p
the
both owe to
it tlieir p,
'
word, in
?
weak
e.g.
r,
for
if
With
regari to the
p ofvdwp, compare
TJ
W^ sani-udroy "sea."
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
in
169
German
is
Zend, and Greek, the corresponding termination in the neuter Of neuter u roots the substantive deis not very common.
clension has preserved only the single
FAIHU.
is
" beast."
In
latter relate to
case,
Adjective bases in u, in this pronouns. have their nominative and accusative singular in pc-
darku-n.
nian,
followed in Lithua;
by the adjective
forms
bases in a also
and thus
gera,
ex-
cluded from the vocative in Sanskrit and 2^nd), was originally limited simply to the a bases, and was not joined to the
The
e of neuter
DIDYA
nom. maac.didi-s
"youngling"
ex-
As
also the
ia
is
the nominatire and accusative neuter in such words identical with the
is
likewise, according to
signifies also
nine, very
;t3
to the
)c/cq) perene,
ro^y>^iu2i brdturye.
also, the
as giesme^
"song."
As no masculine
forms in
is
or
where tfiesmy-u
from
is
down with
it.
170
i
FORMATION OF CASES.
;
we had
ori-
madhu-m ?
felt
I should
;
not wish to
for
why
should
without a sign of
that the
more probable
to
the de-
of their analogies;
stantive, in like
in
by means of the greater force the same way as the verb subits
manner, on account of
German
vr^JT^
bhavd-mi.
as the
nomina-
base
is
and indeed
this
mean
rogative form
f^
ki-m,
which
may
is
ki-t,
which
recog-
Otherwise
or u-bases of
(man), substitutes
[G. Ed. p. 183.]
tive accusative neuter do not occur; for 'em awu, "that" adas ; and \h " this," combines with
^^ ^ dam (^^
Concerning
and accusative neuters no explanation is afibrded by the pronominal declension, as all primary forms of pronouns terminate in vowels, and, indeed, for the most part, in
155. Pronominal bases in a in Sanskrit give
t,
a.
the inflexion of
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
Grothic gives, as in the accusative masculine,
171
na for
or n,
man
gives,
z instead of the
(. 87.),
in
the most
follows in
bases,
of
t.
modern period, s. The pronominal base I (later E) German, as in Latin, the analogy of the old a and the Latin gives, as in the old ablative, d instead The Greek must abandon all T sounds at the end of
:
words
common
however,
From
this difference,
it is
perceived
would
we ought
to divide ot-t/
o- (.
156.
We
in the
THA,
this ex-
planation
iR sa,
[G. Ed.
34.).
The
m
;
is,
origin
and
it is
i-ma, "this,"
occur just as
;
little
as ta in the
of which, therefore,
amu-shya,
"
illius,""
among
178
FORMATION OF CASES.
nominative to the
tive.
Moreover, in Zend
this," (n.)
(nom. accus.), but not imo, " this" (m.), but ^rsM
aim (from
(f.). Observe Greek the pronominal base MI, which occurs only in the
same
rela-
ma
ta
(in the
compounded base
lf^
H-m
"
what?" has
( 87.),
to
ka-s "
who
"?
The Gothic
:
termination
sound
ever,
to the Latin
(id, istud)
this Latin d,
t
;
howthe
apot
seems
to
me
as, e.g.,
of the cognate
^R
and in Zend the d of 9^__^* d-dem, "him," is clearly only a weakening of the ^ of iT ta, a5^ ta.'f [G. Ed. p. 185.] 157. To the Sanskrit ia-f, mentioned above,
Zend
ta-t,
Greek
to, &c.,
corresponds a Lithuanian
I
tai,
" the,"
do not believe,
which
is
TA
Sansk.
a.
" t See my treatise " On the Origin of the Cases in tlie Trans, of the As T in Greek easily becomes 2 (but a Berlin Academy for the year 1826. final 2 has in many parts of Grammar become v), Hartung founds on this,
in the pamphlet before mentioned, p.
original identity of neuters in v
ever, agree with
1.54,
We
cannot,
how-
him
which we
ascribe to
tliis
the Sanskrit and Zend, than probably the v sounds can boast, which, in
tas.
What
is
a neuter
J
by the Sanskrit
and
am
to
^^
ados,
and
r.
to explain
;
it
Gramm.
when
Addend,
the
299.)
ta, as in
Zend
We
treating of the
ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
is
Vt3
d,
t,
of the cognate
languages
and to the
it,
which
is,
in
Vedas
a petrified
;
gender or case
^
I
it,
is
i-ta,
dropped the t or
was ac-
represented as a consis-
and
+ if),
p.
"if,"
net (na+it).
[G. Ed.
at
.
186
148.
form
in the accusative
ZEND.
CREEK.
LATIN.
UTHDAN.
wilhi-n,
ka-tif
GOTHIC.
m.
n.
irrika-m,
vehrke-my
ke-m,
ddte-m,
ta-t,
Xvko-v,
,
lupu-m,
vu/f.
m. ka-m,
dana-m,
ta-t,
hwa-na,
Su>po-v,
ro,
donu-m,
is-tu-d,
gera,
tn-i,
daur.
tha-ta.
n.
f.
jihwd-m,
kd-m,
hizva-nm,
ka-nin,
are given
-xoipa-v, terrain,
ranka-n,
gibn.
f.
....
by Rosen
as,
hvdA
pp. 24, 25,
* Examples
in his
Veda Specimen,
"he,"
which, though short, are in the highest degree interesting for Sanskrit
^T^
sa'it,
trf^lT iamit,
"him"
ir^fut /a^onV,
tasmdit,
^ to him" ;
SHW
jiT
(m
).
in the
same way
a) or
frequently.
Cf.
with the interrogative: A3J3A5^ kas^ and jjjaj^ kasi, "who"? occur Perhaps only one of the two modes of writing is correct.
Gramm.
Crit.
Addend,
to
r.
270.
t One would expect hv6-na, or, with abbreviation of the base, hva-na, which would be the same as the masculine. With regard to the lost casetermination,
it
may
constant in handing
down
A charge which
is
incurred
is
by the
in the
386. p. 544.
174
SINSKRIT.
FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEKD.
paiti-nif
GREEK.
ttoan-v,
LATIHr
UTBnAN.
GOTHIO.
m.
pati-m,
hostem, pdti-n,
gast\
i-na.
m
f.
pnti-m,
vdri,
mare,
i-d,
*
dwin,
dfrtti-m,
vairi,
TTopTi-v, siti-m,
i$pt,
ansf,
n.
....
....
*
n
f.
....
bhavishyantim,h{ishyainti-mi
....
i-ia.
.
m.sunu-m,
pasu-m,
tanii-m,
i')(Bv-v,
f.
tanu-m,
madfiu,
Ttirv-Vj
handu,
^n.
madhu,
fiidv,
darku, faihu.
^
f.
f.
vadhH-m,
ga-nm,-\
^ov-v,
vav-v,
oir-a,
J^ m.f.^4-m,t
ndv-anif
bov-em
....
vdch-em,
....
voc-em,
^.
f.
vdch-am.
....
* The feminine participial bases in t, mentioned at $. 119., remain free from foreign commixture only in the nominative and vocative singular
in all other cases, to the old
i
is
further added a
more modem a
and the
RANKA exactly;
i,
Latin
fifth
a becomes,
or
may
become, e:
suppressed, as
1.
c.
and
czeh
suksentif
to turn,"
(see. p. 138,
Note) or sukanczian,
if,
sencziah.
And even
e, o,
according to
it
before o,
is
scarcely heard,
the
case, as
and
it
was
vowel appears
to
From grammar shews, has an original posihave made its way, in Lithuanian participial
and
to be here invested
with
is
a short masculine
a.
The
it
same
light as yaunikki-h,
YAUNIKVA,
i.e.
answers to the Zend accusatives, like 9j7j^) tuirim for tuiryem and to the Gothic, like hari from the base (. 136.).
BApyA
t See
J.
121?.
175
UTBCAN. GOTHIC.
^epovT-a,
$aiixov-a,
ferent-em,
Jiyand,
sermon-em,
ahmaru
TaXav,
-narep-a,
nomen,
fratr-em.
namS.
brothar.
dauhtar.
m. dntdr-um,
n.
dafor-emy
opus.
vachas,
vachd*
INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE.
158.
The instrumental
inflexion
is,
is
denoted in Sanskrit by wi d
opinion, a
fi a,
and
this
in
my
[G. Ed.
p. 188.]
^n
d,
" to,"
" towards,"
up
to,"
which
The Zend d appears still more decidedly in its pronominal nature in the compound mentioned at . 156. Note *, ^?/um As a d-dem, "him," "this," (m.) fern, ^-^i^ d-daiim.
case-sign,
juu
p. 163.
Note
X)i
one with a preceding aj a of the base so that in this case the primary form and the instrumental are completely
similar;
e.g.
Ajjaj^As^
zadsha,
"voluntarily,"
AJiio<|>A}<A
often
occur;
ajjaj
**
ana,
"
through this"
(m.),
M^'^'^'^^J^JM^ paiti-berefa,
uUevato.^^'\
a;
thus
Jcha
is
au^jo
p. 46.),
In Sanskrit a euphonic ^ n (Sanskrit siva, . 35.). added to bases ending with short vowels in the masc
* See.56.
t Cf. Gramm. Crit. r. 638. Rem. This interesting instmmental fonn was not known by Rask when he published his work on the Zend, and
It
to discover
it,
on account of
its
gkrit
final aj a.
176
FORMATION OF CASE^.
final
a,
however,
is,
as in several
it
6;
this clog
n-d,
^
(see
mTxjm
vnka,
WHTT sunu-n-d,
madhu-n-d, from
exhibit
&c.
further
n, as
^rrnn
from
^rJT
swapna, m. "sleep"
133.)
7^xn vru-y-d
for
T^wr
43.);
uru-n-a, from
^^
uru,
prabdhu, from
p. 189.]
m^ bdhu,
pra.
[G. Ed.
finds "
u
in
analogies
the
jtSjn
common
bases
ma and
m.
^^ sakhi,
d,
And from Jjfif pati, m. "Lord," and common dialect forms instruT
n, viz. "mtfj
paty-d,
TT^m sakhy-d.
as before
into
J? i,
that is to say,
is
blended with
it,
and
it is
shortened
to 'H a;
d).
The Zend
6,
As
in Gothic, according to
thi, hvi,
. 69.,
just like
re^
and
base
THA
base
remarkably
the
jkM^c
khd from
also
svi
as^jo
We
SVA
is also,
orig'nal has
''Stammen
gen. masc.
ond fem.
;"
but genitives of
a do not take a euphonic n, nor do feminine nouns ending in short vowels use such an augment in the instrumental : here is no doubt
some typographic
error.- Editor.
177
akin to jim^o khd from kha (. 35.).* The meaning of svS is "as'' (o)S^), and the so, which has arisen in High German from sva or sv^, means both "as" and " so," &c. The case relatious, however, whicli are expressed by
[G. Ed.
p. 190.]
The Anglo-Saxon form for sve is sid, in which of the Zend auj^ khd is most truly preserved.
sva, " so," is,
sve,
the colouring
The Gothic
:
according to
its
this
its
abbreviation,
become
is,
identical
with
theme, just as
ana in Zend
its
according to
. 158.,
theme.
Gothic and in Old High
tlie
German
of the
dative
only, as
polysyllabic
words
in
Zend,
it
may be
proper here to
of the
describe at the
dative.
German
In a bases
ULFA
comes
vidfa, as A>^^kv^(;>
from
EHRKA.
and answer to the monosyllabic iustrumentals th^ v^ svS, which have been already explained, viz. hvamme-hf hvar-
ulli,"
for
ainamm^
Grimm's conjertures rtgarding the forms sva and svi (III. 43.) appear to
me
untenable
tlie
impossible.
More
regarding this
pronouns.
*' t If as " is regarded as ** through which means, in which manner or way," and "so" as 'ihrough Uiis means, in this way," it is certain that
among the
is
The German
identified
da. sing. is
according to
;
356.
Rem. 3
where
and
so, too,
the dat.
the
of which appri aches as closely to the Sansk. bhyas, I^tin bus, Litlu mu*,
as the instrumental teriiiination
6/it',
Lith. mis.
1*78
FORMATION OF CASES.
Bases in
i
hurt (. 66.).*
sign
hence
to the
Veda form
n^T^m pra-bdhav-d.
with J
i >
[G. Ed.
p. 191.]
Guna or
AAj^.u3j
not at pleasure.
bdzav-a,
57.)
;
Thus we
find in the
Vend.
S. p. 469,
"hrachio^^ as analogous to
p. 40S,
J|'fIlIT
pra-
-bdhav-d (.
AiarfG^Ai^ zanfhiva
from
zantu,
From
^yjj'^a)
>jm^q> paiisnu,
" dust,"
we
c. p.
form
pansnu, which
if
cette poussiere";
and
the read-
ing
is
mination
is
made by lengthening
Gothic sunau.
lost,
would answer
to the
in Ger-
ahmin-a, br6thr-a.\
to
All femi-
nines, too,
must be pronounced
have
lost
the
dative
sign, paradoxical as it
gibai,
may
"dona" and
thizai, "
izai, "ei,"
do not contain
any dative
gibai to
inflexion, while
we formerly
believed the at of
be connected
bined with
AJc>J
cha,
" and."
{for fatera), "patri," proceeds,
theme
FATERA, extended by a.
The
is
remark-
have
FATEJiA.
179
di.
and
neuter
not,
we could
the
except from
most urgent
necessity,
necessity,
Gothic
feminine
dative.
This
however,
does not
"albaer from
HVEITO
from
HFEITJ, may
iwitay-d, " aM,''
from
WI swM,
by suppressing the
ter-
same manner as, above, sunau from sunav-a, [G. Ed. p. 192.] or as the fem. handau, " manui^ from handav-a* Analogous
with sunaUf handau, are also the dative feminine
and, e.g., anstai, "graticE," has the
i
bases
same
relation to its
theme
ANSTI that
162. In
handau has to
HANDU.
diu, hviu, correthS,
we
the
shall say
mode of writing them,* regarding which more under the pronouns. Tlie form hiuy
from a demonstrative base HI, has been preserved in compound hiutu for hiu-tagu, " on this day," " to-day" (see Grimm, p. 794), although the meaning is here properly locative. The Gothic has for it the dative himmaalso,
"daga.
itself also in
i,
substantive
although
it is
preposition mit (see Graff, I.e. pp. 110, 111); mit wortu,
" with a word,"
from
WORTA;
C UA TA ;
important
KASTL
in
sociative
It is
here
Sanskrit
relation.
the
We
upon
this w case
as generically different
dative, which,
we
N 2
180
FORMATION OF CASES.
:
and meaning
[G. Ed.
we
p. 193.]
mental in
which
is
That
diewu
this
is
it,
also,
has
tlu^
a,
and thus,
for
e.g.
akin to
Zend
" deo,""
ama)^
da^vd,
appears to
me
very surprisingly to
over, in
ii
^^^dSvdis.
also, the
More-
many
In
Lithuanian
the plural
corresponds
the
Sanskrit ^T d;
also,
e.g. in
genitive.
feminine a bases,
is
in
Lithuanian, the
but
its
quality
not
changed
as,
e.g.
raiika
manu" from
RANKA.
In
all
as, in
63.,
Latin, bis to bi
I
b.
tiBI)
and, according to
do not doubt
that in both
163.
numbers the
m
in
ZEND.
LITH-'ANIAN.
GOTHU;.
m.
f.
vrikS-n-n,
vahrka,
hizvay-a, paithy-a,
cannot
wi/kii,
vulfa.
gibai.
jihway-d.
paty-d.
ranka.
pati-mi,
m.
gast'-a.
let.
derivation
from a short a
for, first, it
ap-
pears, according to Notker, in the pronominal forms diu, &c. without a cir-
in his
;
works);
exchanged for o
(. 77.)
hence, wio,
whom");
because these, in
probability,
owe the
vowel
181
ZEND.
LITHUANIAN.
GOTHIC.
prity-d,
dfrithy-a.
1
awi-mi.
.
avstai.
.
bhavishyanty-d, busJiyainty-a,
sunu-n-d,
pasv-a.
tanv-a.
P s
v i
ii-i
m.
f. f.
sunu-mi,
sunau.
tanw-d.
vadhw-d,
gav-d.
....
gav-n,
m. f.
f.
ndv-d,
vdch-d.
....
vdch-a.
barent-a.
m.
bharat-d,
m.
n.
dtman-d.
asman-a,
ndmn-d,
bhrdfr-n,
duhitr-d.
ndman-a.
brdthr-a,
m.
f.
dughdlier-a^
ddthr-n.
m.
n.
ddfr-d.
vachas-d,
vacanh-a,
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
handau.
.... ....
fiyaiid.
ahmin.
namin.
brdthr.
dauhtr.
".
....
164. In
is
which,
demonstrative base
i
am),
"this";
which, however, as
appears,
is
itself
a,
is
common
many
i
admixture
of
its
an
(. 2.).
sequently would, in
origin,
(.
* E.g. Vend.
9^^<3>q)
S. p.
45:
^^JM^QM^
JH341J^JJUuyAV)^^Ai
^9\^aj'
v^^JMM*i6^
The
182
[G. Ed.
p. 195.]
FORMATION OF CASES.
We
to
remark, that in
affix ii
bhyam (from
the
plural.
i
+ am)
in ttwjh tu-hhyam,
" to thee/'
stands in evident
bhis
fk^
in
The feminine
u>
bases in
d,
i,
u,
and
dz
to
with the
jihway-di
d of the base an
is
blended
hence faT3^^
from jivdi~di.
On
ceive the
Guna augment before ^ ^, but broader ^ di; as ^R^ sunav-S from sunu.
nation
:
In Zend, femi-
nine a and i-bases, like the Sanskrit, have at for their termi-
however, hizvdy-di
is
.>au^^ajjj
so frequently shortened.
Bases in j
"and on account
cha,
from
karste.
Without
sole
however, the
occurs,
e.g.
form
A>g e^
is
almost
the
one
that
ri<^'^<^y>^ kharetei,
"in order to
eat,"
from i^<^M)A
ay-i,
hhareti.
This form,
by
re-
as
a has
become
dfrile,
g e (. 31.).
Forms
j^^j^au
AW^ J^ iJMJMSf
word
are,
no doubt
I anti-
to be read for
Anquetil translates
femme, qui
n'a pas
Vend.
S.,
to them.'*
Cf. p, 286
Note f.
183
on errors in writing.*
Bases in u
may
take
Guna
The
;cAj'9uU9 van-hav-e
the
more common.
nation (.43)
165.
e.g. ;t3^j>yAj^
Bases in
i (
^ a add to the case-sign i also an ^ a = a +1) and a is formed ^m aya ; and this,
Aya,
arisen,
by suppressing the
the
its
to
the dative
e,
and that
this is a later
appearance in Sanskrit,
;
from a f ^
(. 2.).
also,
from the
particle
w
?
sma,
which
added to pro-
^ smdi
and
thus,
e.g.
whom"
im^^
addino-
The
from
a,
which
since
cipal
nation,
cal
pronoun, cannot admit any superfluity in its termiand for this reason gives up its radi- [G. Ed. p. 197.3
a before the termination
in in the
locative
case
also,
166.
tion,
The
particle
which introduces
ter-
in fact,
first
I
as
have
attempted to shew
* ^^^jus dfrite
is
undoubtedly incorrect
however, c
is
ofln
184
in
FORMATION OF CASES.
Sanskrit
my
Grammar gives
this
to the
pronominal declenit
in fact
As
particle
cognate
there, as I
enigmas of declension,
appearance, pursue
it is
all
we
its
first
possible.
In
53.,
Pali, in
h,
has become
and
"
by transposition
altered
^TfTojrH
mha
e.g.
Prakrit
^srT%
amM,
amhdkam, Zend ^^^au^ ahmdkem, rifj-iov. From the PrakiitPali mha we arrive at the Gothic nsa in u-nsa-ra, rjuQiv,
u-nsi-s,*
**
nobis,''''
" wos."
left
the
on
of
into n, for
s,
more
ing
it
rests
on a more modern
the
We
cannot,
therefore,
[G. Ed.
be
common
we
Grimmt
it,
cf.
vulfa-ns,
and thence
with
allow
as though
it
had becases,
come a property
and connect
it
some other
new
case-terminations.
To
this is op-
and yet in
;
essentials the
in their declension
and
and u-nsa
(weakened from
u-nsi)
as the
compound
base.
And we
according to
r.
67.
dative singular."
813, 34,
185
veis,
of
can be nothing
goes through
y of yu9,
**
your''
yu,
of
yuyam, "ye,"
while in the
(.43.)
1st
person the ^
r of
^Tlf[^
vayam, "we,"
is
base
This a, then, in Gothic, 'S a with the particle FT sma. through the influence of the following liquid, has become
u
;
(. 66.).
As
swa shews
diffe-
itself* in
rent
letters,
believe
least
can point
out
the
;
particle
sma in Gothic at
the second
namely,
mma.
zva,
The
first
where
particle
its
larly modified, in
two persons,
in
doubly transformed.
sma has in them been The form zva from sma rests, first,
syllable
s into z (. 86. 5.)
common change
of
and v
(. 63.).
From
sma has
been
still
German
dialects, in the
pronoun of the 2d person, by the expulsion of the sibilant. The Old High German i-wa-r has nearly the same relation
to the
p.
376,
&c
186
FORMATION OF CASES,
which is older than the Homeric Compare, without intervention of the Gothic, the
i-iva-r,
i-u,
form.
i-wi-h.
yu-mus, yu-s
thus
it
would be regarded as
is
not the
noun; and
opinion.
it
iw-ih,
in,
Pali,
leave
me
of
it
time
(e-ue-r
from
:
i-zva-ra,
from
Old High
German
(^^
i-ivi-h)
yu), as in
[G. Ed.
p. 200.]
German,
is
zva-ra,
The Old
nian,
base,
Saxon, however, and Anglo-Saxon, like the Lithuain respect to the preservation of the
shew themselves,
which in
more complete than the Gothic, and carry the w, Anglo-Saxon has become o, through all the
iu-we-r,
eo-ve-r,
oblique cases:
"vestri^
&c.
If
merely
dis-
cussion
the
Sanskrit and
New German
forms
be
con-
is
the u, which
is still
retained in the
In
North Friesian
(Grimm,
p. 81-1),
187
common
169.
with the u of
tf
of the syllable
w sma.
and plural in the oblique
first
The
persons
is
not organic in
German
for
the case-terminations.
are, in Gothic, the
two plural numbers are distinguished originally only by These, however, in our pronouns
same; and the difference between the
lie
in the base
ugka-ra,*
(TtpCtiv,
izva-ra, vficiv.
But from
more
bers,
languages,
in the
is
and
it is
combined with
the plural.
then the one form has become fixed in the dual, the other in
to
[G. Ed.
p.
201.]
must be assumed.
At
came k
a hardened form
Pali,
of an earlier
gives, in
{=kv
86.
i.)
for
the guttural the same form in both persons: Old High Ger-
Old
i-nce-r.
Slavonic,
It
u-nA'e-r,
i-r,ke-r
Anglo-Saxon,
u-nce-r,
would
consequently
first
distortions
and mutilations of
;
different kinds, to
as
It
188
FORMATION OF CASES.
all
in
which
that
first
have brought
What
have there
like
thamma, imma,
ha.ve arisen,
by
assimilation,
from
tha-
Grammar
of the
is
language which
Compare,
whom?"
We
sma similar
[G. Ed.
v-fxfi-eg,
to the Gothic,
p. 202.]
since
we deduced
^olic forms
a-/i/x-e?,
&c.,
from
vixeig,
oi-a-fxe-es,
v-a-fxe-es,
to which the
common
forms
rjiJ.ei,
German de-mu has to the Gothic tha-mma, only that rjfMeig, vfxei^,
in respect to the termination
6?$-,
more
lost the
/xeTj.
/xe-ef
to
mma
are, as
follows
from
by
sma
made
158.),
its
way
^
*
tSna, "
according to the
is
Zend
principle
used
Zend
The
difference
thS, hvS,
first in this,
the case relation by the affixed particle, the former in the main base
secondly, in this, that
1S9
and neuter,
be aj^;o tahma
In the feminine, as
we
e.g.
this'""
(m.),
"this"
we have found
the
AjyAj
^^ ahmi,
p. -203]
The
Sixuski
it
appended pronoun
L^. Ed.
W sma should, in the feminine, form either tRT smd. or wt on the latter is based the Zend form ^Q hmi, mentioned 57ni at . 171. But in Sanskrit the feminine form wt smi has
:
my
it.
From
ta-smi must
come
These forms,
by rejecting the m, have become abbreviated to tt^ ta-sy-ait l*fl!H^ fa-sy-ds, rff^m^ ta-sy-dm; and the same is the case with the feminine pronoun smi in all similar compounds; so
that the forms mentioned appear to have proceeded from the
forms
ihi-zds, "hujus,""
* The Zend, too, has not everywhere so fully preserved the feminine hmi, as in the instr. a-hmij-a; but in the genitive, dative, and ablative
has gone even farther than the Sanskrit in
tlie
The feminine
it
^W-^
also
a-n^'-ao($. 5Ga.)>
"%/' for
which the
^fev^AJ
dative
ainh-do, in
i is,
(. 41.).
From
we
find
jMiiy^Ai
ava-nh-ai, and
ablative
X'A^A> ava-nL-dt
19b
thi-zai,
this,
FORMATION OF CASES.
"huic^ might be deduced from the masculine genitive
6s
and ai
and
as, too,
Zend genitives in? mama, xsjxs^ mana, HW tava, a}aj^ tava, and have the same as base. After discovering the Zend fe[G. Ed. p. 204.]
in
the
then,
di-
above-mentioned forms in Sanskrit cannot be regarded otherwise than as abbreviations oUa-smy-di, &c., as this
suited to the nature of the thing.
thizds, thizai, will
is
far more
vided into
thi-z6-s, thi-zai.
nom.
blinda, "cwcot"'''
from
BLINDA,
by the
tion
SMO,
however,
loss of the m, as
SO
but the
s,
on account of
.
its posiz.
86.
5.),
has become
With
thi-z6-s, thi-
have nothing in
common
THA, and
jectives)
6&.).
173. Gothic
pronominal declension,
differ
from
it,
but extend
it to at,
hence
blindai-z6-s, blindai,
blindi-zd-s, blindi-zai.
* Cf.
356.
Rem.
but seven.
+ With respect
to ai,
pi.
and
191
syllable
sma
in the
we
find
i^fil
Ucay-i,
1st
person, ma-him'-i,
Prakrit, in this
The
;
son
irives
-i,
" in
with
assimilation,
and
IT^ tai;
and
JwfiFR
in
German
s in
persons, a
remnant
sma
to
be
looked for?
" to
The
and
the
Gothic
mi-St
thee,"
sis,
;
" to
himself,"
appears to
me
in
no
other
way
intelligible
Of
nos"
similar origin
i-zvis, "
the
"";
and
its
appearance in
through
all cases,
but
is
here deprived of
the Sanslq-it
?it
case-sign.
is
In
sma
doubly con-
am
forms,
tu-masm'i, "in
s.
For
and
there
is
facile
combination in our
;
class of languages'
what
is
often
more modern
dialect.
le
Pali,
192
[G. Ed. p. 206.]
thu-k, si-k {me,
vcot'v,
FORMATION OF CASES.
175.
te, se),
s,
&c.,
from
so
that
mis
is altered to mi-h,
first
ap-
form
thee," u-nsi-h,
w-s/-c, " us,"
"us,"
the-c,
i-M'i-//,
"
you";
eo-vi-c,
Anglo-Saxon me-c,
"
me,"
"thee,"
"you":
in
the
High German, but has disappeared Old High German and Anglo-Saxon
:
Old
Saxon mi,
176.
tin;
Anglo-Saxon me,
the.
In Lithuanian
w sma
174.) Prakrit
first,
forms
namely, with
dropped, as
ma and
;
indeed,
in
two
we cannot, however, refer to this the m, which the latter in some cases have in common with the substantive declension. The pronominal base TJ, and the
first
persons
adjective base
GERA,
good
and
if
The
two
lords."
We have a
particle
9T smn
in
the locative interrogative form ka-mme, " where "? Sansk. '3|;f^^ ka-smin,
193
have
for
final
a before
passes into u
hence
willcu-i.
of the
Greek and
Latin,
this
the Indo-Zend
grown out of a +
1,
has been
left.
For
The nominal
.
and Lithuanian,
explained at
148.,
declension of which
we
ZEND.
vehrkdi.
hizvay-ui.
LITHUANIAN.
m.
f.
vrikaya.
uUku-i.
ranka-i.
pdch-ei.
au'i-p?.
jihuay-ui,
m.
f.
f.
paty-iA
pritay-^,
paife-ifX
(yrife-S,
bhavishyanty-di,
sunav-^,
bushyainty-ah
pasv-S,
....
sunu-L
Dl.
**in
whom," which, according to the common declension, would be eC^ kasmi (from kasma-i). Compare the Gothic hvamma, ** to whom?*
hvasma.
for
The form dwiui, with dwiei appears to admit of being explained as arising from the commixture of the final vowel of the a bases.
t
The form
XfjQpatyS
is,
with respect to
its
want of Guna,
irregular,
we
find in
V.
S., p.
473. A5aj;o^^(3Jaj3>
paithy4-cha, and hence deduce for the instrumental (p. 193 G. Ed.) the form
pait/iya, while, according to
}.
47., also
From
after the
160.
194
FORMATION OF CASES.
SANSKRIT.
ZEND.
tanu-y-6,*
UTHUAXIAN.
9 s
l>0
f.
f.
tamiv-4.
vadhw-di.
f.
m.
f.
gav-e. ndv'i.
vdch-e,
hharat-^.
gav-i.
....
vdch-i,
barent-S,
f.
1 f
m. m.
n.
diman-i,
asmain-S,
ndmn-e,X
bhrdtr-e.
duhitr-e,
ddlr-e.
ndmain-S,
hrdthr-i.
m.
f.
dughdher-e,^
ddthr-S,
m.
n.
vachas-^,\
vachanh-^,
I give
j-,
ho considered
it,
and tanave
it is
may be
necessary to
y between w and ^ is not everywhere necessary; and, for instance, in the dative is the more rare form. t The c^in 1o1<^(^q>a dughdhSr6, and
dughdhera,
consonants.
is
>4
>A dughdhr-ahm.
140,
compound
aocto-
p. 4,
and frequently).
nic
it
^/^fxi^
l^iAJ^ctJA}^ Jiazanro-ghaoshahe bahiare-chashmand, "of the thousand In words in van, on eared, ten thousand eyed." Cf. Anquetil II. 82.
is
V becomes
>
or
41.
i4>
o.
in
^mum^msi
ndtnainS, see
ABLATIVE SINGULAR.
195
ABLATIVE.
179.
The Ablative
be
in Sanskrit has 7^
[G. Ed.
p.
209.]
longer
we
are conducted at once to the demonstrative base /a, which already, in the neuter nominative, and accusative,
we
shall
a personal termination.
a,
which
is
lengthened
Gramma-
would therefore be
to
to bring
class of
words in
can be
the true
and whence
and not
it
dt, is
ablative character.
hereafter.
first
(German)
edition of
my
Sanskrit
Grammar,
to the arbitrary
;
and 264.)
and
first
more
correctly, a simple
I
must be regarded
This view
Grammar, on
the ground
that in old Latin also a simple d appears as the suffix of the ablative.
since then the justness of
But
my
been
still
Zend stands
more emphatically confirmed by the Zend language, because the in a closer and more evident connection with the Sanskrit
III.
311
02
196
FORMATION OF CASES.
and thus tM^7wclf
i
Zend
vrikd-t
'
Bases in j
have
di-t
in Sanskrit ablatives
pate-f,
pritS-t (. 33.),
which, by adding
e-s.
Guna
The
Zend-Avesta, as far as
offers
I
it
is
but few examples of such ablative forms in >j^ Si-t owe the first perception of them to the word <j<^^^5^ju>
dfrifdit,
" benedict ione,'''' in a passage of the Vendidad,* explained elsewhere, which recurs frequently. Examples of
masculine bases are perhaps r^j\?^M5>^M7M^ f^A'H^^ rajoit zaratusirdit, " instftutione zaratvstrica " (V. S. p. 86), although otherwise jjjaj/ raji, which I have not elsewhere met with,
is
a masculine
the adjective base zarafustri, however, beFrom j7ja}^ gairi, " mountain,""
in
the Yescht-Sade.-j;
ablativell
Bases in u have qeXxi ao-tt in the and in no class of words, with the exception of
* See Gramin.
Crit. add.
ad
r.
156.
t What Anquetil Til. 170. Rem. 4, writes ffuerScd can be nothing else than the ablative oo^^j/a(0 garoit, for Anquetil generally expresses
M by gu,
however,
AJ
is
by
e,
^^ by 6e,
and
(x>
by
d.
treated in
Zend
as if gari
final
as
remarked by
M. Burnouf in
ji\5j\|>!a>|Vj
1. c.
tlie article
gnrois.
with respect
to the genitive,
to . 41., is
adduced through
final
of the base,
this termination.
For
this
we
also find
e.g.
maingu.
II
^ 6 are
particularly
e.g. for
common, owing
to the
Thus,
r<^A>/^ niraot,
"ho
is,
we
for, first, it is
supported
by
ABLATIVE SINGULAR.
that in a, does the ablative
197
more frequently occur, although number but five or six, the ablative use
e.g.
of which
iione,"
is
very frequent;
qo^xsw^^Mj ddonhaot,
*'crea-
ii>Aj'3LU
from ddonhu, in a passage explained elsewhere* anhad-t, " mundor from >yyyj anhu ; (^Ai^M^
from
>yAj^ tanu.
tanadt "corpore,""
little
able to
annex the
letter, as
the accusative
annex
at as their termination,
e.g.
numerous examples of
;
t^Andj^ ap-at,
" aqud'^
rAxs/<3xu aihr-at,
t^Mtxii^tip^^^ chashman-at,
"naso^"';
(cf.
"oculo^^;
/wAjyAsw^^y
',
ndonhan-at
vis-af,
i)6>Ais>2^ druj-at,
" dcemone''^
. 21.).
juj
rAjjj^^
"
loco''^
vicus,
according to
Owing
d,
to
the facile
interchange of the
a with
iaj at;
<au at is
thus,
Vendidad
chanl-at
rAu^^A5^'^Aj.M sadchant-dt for rwAj^^As^'^Ajj} sad" lucente."^ Bases in u sometimes follow the
answers to the
is,
mraom
a
(V. S.
123)
in
ao, bat
by
^ 6, before which,
:
according to
<J>aj
28., another aj
is
placed,
hence
$.
<^aj
ao
.
ao represents
u, in accordance
with
32 and
28.
then,
tl^rrr
pasu
respects,
Guna
form,
for at p. 102
(asojasw
"from pure
e preceding
vanhu
and the c
is
the
p.
is
Gramm.
198
FORMATION OF CASES.
(aj at
although
more
ianaot,
rarely.
" corpore
Thus, for
the
above-mentioned i^aj/aj^
p.
482).*
Feminine bases in am d and ^ i have au 6.1 in the ablative, as an analogous form to the feminine genitive termination
Wnr
guj do; e.g. as, whence, in the Zend dahmay-at, " prcsdara,''^ from axj^aj^^ dahmd ;
<au^^a5^^a5__^
jiu^^aj/aj7>
urvaray-dt)
^x^/xs7>
urvard;
r^xu^^/ogTAil
^7og7A5i bare-
from
also in u,
in
i,
may
thus,
(cf.
from zantu,
Gramm.
Crit.
640.
Rem.
declensions in
is
also, for
still
the
genitive
in
construction
read.
with
sub-
Thus we
<>>A>J3.^9
Vend
S. p. 479,
rA>>*o
to
another
Codex.
both
also,
terminations beginning
Guna
are possible.
t Vendidad Sade,
9g7(J>Q)
p.
436
<^/(O^AJi>^^7A>G)(r<3AJ^
|>y
W J9
m(3xsj^
<Ai^7Gg7A}i /A^^/JAJ^J/A5^bjy Yatha vehrko chathware-jangro nishdaredairydt harWiryat hacha puthrSm, "As a wolf,
A5^A>^
its
mother."
This sentence
(cf.
is
Gramm.
Crit.
363.).
\
p. 172.
Rem.
ABLATIVE SINGULAR.
181.
Efird
199
in re-
to the debisrnation
two
and
most important
so that
letter could
tliis
name
in
of a paragogic
suflBx,
hence, forms
answer
to
the
Zend mochard-al
dtkr-at
igne);
senatu-d, like
cjaroi-t,
(xsj^'^jom
;
" monte^^
&c.
and in
have a simple
also
sound to
The Oscan
Bantia,
e. g.
remarkp.
inscription
of
dolu-d
[G.
It
Ed
2U.]
mallu-d,
cum
may
be pre-
Oscan forms
similar
for es-to,
and
are
correspond
remarkably to
which
sense
signifies
is
both "
from Panini e.g. "^ifimmtjiva-tdt, vivat'''' and "vive,'" but in the latter
(cf. vivifo
and 2d person).
Latinity a kind of petrified
ablative
182. In
classical
form appears to be contained in the appended pronoun met, which may be transferred from the 1st person to the
others also, and
answers to the
it
Sanskrit
ablative
matt
"from me."
But
is
met
may have
t.
to
200
dropped an
FORMATION OF CASES.
initial
s,
and
may
its
stand for
sinef,
and so be.
sma, explained in
smat,
(for
165.
it
corresponding with
ablative
to
which
from smar,
. 1.
"to
all
memor
mesmor) does
remember."
for
require
itself
no excuse,
to
persons, though
must
The
Bacch.
inter;
conjunction
of the reflexive
as
governed by
[G. Ed.
215.]
whence
it
may
is
is
med
in Plautus.
from a
whence
case,
;"
and
destination
of this
to
which
towns.
is,
the
Latin remained
the
relation
trans-
constant
"
in
the
names
of
From
in
ablative
Sanskrit,
any thing
is
done
is
an action proceeds.
tive
t6na
(.
158.)
and
tasmdt,
may
further,
and in
relations,
In Greek, adverbs in
may
be looked upon
bases in
o,
used in Sanskrit,
e.g. pasparsa,
hereafter,
1.
adduced
in . 294.
Rem.
p.
384.
ABLATIVE SINGULAR.
^HTIT d-t,
201
^^rfir
from bases in
has to
dadd-t i
samd-t,
Thus,
ofMco-s
may
be akin
to
the
Sanskrit
5Hlfl
"from the
similar," both in
In
if
T sounds
and in
152.
we have
it
t,
in the uninflected
lost
cases,
preserve their
into
j.
by
or
changing
We
deduce, therefore,
adverbs like
6/io>-5,
from
&c.,
and
way of bringing
these forma;
and
it is
Greek
alone.
The
relation in adverbs in
a)-f is
same
as
that of Latin ablative forms like hoc modo, quo modo, raro,
perpetuo.
but then
this,
of adverbs
(rco^pdv-o)j,
from
o bases,
may have
may
be
like rAMi^^7<^^^^
We
must
also,
with reference to
the irre-
* As,
in ovToj, together
with
ouroj-r, S)8f,
S(f)v<o,
prepositions
e^o), avco,
Kara, &c.
It is here desirable to
(Gram.
Crit. ^
652 p.279.).
may
exist
T sound
retained.
We will
member
202
FORMATION OF CASES.
THE GENITIVE.
[G. Ed.
p. 217.]
184. In
no case do the
different
members
declen-
first
first
with the
as well as the
two
persons
placed
it
by that of the
first
old locative.
The
Sanskrit termias,
are
^ s, common to
"m
sj/a,
^w
and
^^
ds:
as is
member
and
may rest
with a(^pob-inj.
In Sanscrit,
'STiJTf^iTT
ahhrdditd would
from a cloud,"
for abkrd-t
93\) ; and in
neuter verbs the otherwise passive participial suffix ta has usually a past
active meaning.
this
Of this usage
tr?;,
therefore,
She who
who
sprang, from
toS.
foam."
The only
vowel of ob
for
As
re-
may in
most declensions
j
t (cf. p.
and, as the
Zend
dtman-at
so
it
will be
most natural to
vogue
t
;
with
s,
which
more or
less in
particularly as
it is
known,
also, that,
* passes into if t
(Gramm.
Crit.
in their history
most declensions, would be only external, and the two cases would vary ; so that, e.g.jihwdy-ds would be, in one sense, viz. in that
of linguee, independent and original
;
and
corruption ofJihwdy-dt.
At
the time
when
it,
may
also its
Zend
form with an
ablative
meaning
{e.g.
Vend.
GENITIVE SINGULAR.
principally confined to the consonantal bases,*
203
and hence has
the
same
am
has to m,
and, in the
185.
Zend
ablative, at has to
t.
Ji
the
[G. Ed.
p. 218.]
vowels ^
and
g'
u take
Guna
in
more
this
augment.
from sunaus
(. 2.).
;
In the
bases in Gothic,
^nr^ Guna
bases
to irtri^ pritS-s.
see
193.
from the
earliest period,
all
feminines: in consonantal
wanting in
consonants assumes, as
s,
/
were of necessity
og,
(. 94.),
viz. as for
the vowels
and
with
185. are
unheard
of;
answer,
like iroJ-of, to Sanskrit genitives of consonantal bases, as tj^s pad-as, " pedis, ^^ WP^re vdch-as, " vocis.''^ The Latin, on the
but
is
without
Guna
gasti-s.
of the u
class of
may
or,
more
correctly, this
principle,
was compensated
u,
for
by
this, it
t, 'gi
au
in neuters in
204
lengthening the
FORMATION OF CASES.
u.
The
is
of consonantal bases
[G. Ed.
p. 219.]
is
^
i,
as than
og,
With regard
is
important to remark,
"
Zend
also,
the
mainyeu-Sy
of the
spirit,"
after
cf. p.
the
212,
manner
G.
Ed.),
(from
as,
danhv-6,
or
^m'^a)^ danJiav-6,
for
danheu-s "
loci,""
Sanskrit, the
more
full
genitive
sign
sya
hence,
e.
g.
IT^ ta-sya,
" hujvs,''^
&c.,^Faj amu-shya.
It
(. 124.), so also
aarfFos, and that aa-rtos, therefore, should be compared with the Zend
genitives with
Guna,
as
^xi^^^
danhav-6.
The
e,
therefore, in
tlie base,
but the
Guna vowel
foreign
to the base; but the v of the base, which, according to the original law of
before vowels,
is,
digammas
latter to
in the
The
is
certainly a very
e,
v,
in the
The corruption
(^"i.
to e is less surprising,
also,
and occurs
is
also in
72.).
In Greek,
deficient;
a consonant y
TToXfcosy (Tivdnfos
may
GENITIVE SINGULAR.
205
[G. Ed.
e.
illius," (. 21.)
In
Zend
this termination
hS, (.
p.
220.]
42 )
hence,
g. jww'aj^
Vj9
^vi^^^h^^
tuiryMii. "
quarti,'"'
place, pointed
where
it
might be
most expected.
bases in
o,
As
bases in
generally dislodged,
do not enter-
tain the smallest doubt that the old epic genitive termination in
to is
an abbreviation of
the
first o
crio
ta-sya,
belongs to
case-sign.
As
<j
in roio, the
is
where a 2
can doubt
eBiSoao,
in the
of eXiyov, just as
for
also,
In the
(r,
common
and the
language the
/,
o of the termination,
which has remained, has been contracted with that of the base
to ov
;
to-o.
(Bopeao,
a-io,
and
^ sya to
-jus,
so frequent, of the
^>3H9
&c.
I cannot,
is
of the second
/
declension
an abbreviation of
;*
of which the
alone has
p.
been retained
liipcp
for
it is
[G. Ed.
221
.]
from lupai rest on the same principle and if lupi proceeds from \vKoio, whence can bipni be derived, as the corresponding Greek feminines nowhere exhibit an aio or rjio?
* Hartung's Cases,
p. 211.
206
FORMATION OF CASES.
markably from those of the other declensions, and denote the case by o, in which vowel, at the same time, the final
vowel of the base
milka-s.
It is
is
contained
thus,
(o)
wilko,
"
lupi" for
and
vpm
nabhas.
the sylla-
contracted
it
to
o,
may
they
this
In
HVA
weakening to
more worthy powerful nominative has preserved the older more powerful form, and an unorganic difference has found its way into the two cEises, which
in Lithuanian, only the
ought to be similar.
19 L
pre-
this case,
resemble the
bases,
become
in Old
weakened
with
to
thus
vulfi-s
for vnlfa-s
as also
[G. Ed.
(. 132.).
The
older sister
an
i,
preceded this
ahmin-as,Jiyand-as,
e.
an
a,
more
brdthr-as,
The Zend
GENITIVE SINGULAB.
207
its facile
combi-
nation with s*
192.
fuller
genitive
ter-
viz. as
for simple
p. 223."1
and, in
fact,
so that the
[G. Ed.
may
simple
or ^ro^
ds',
and instead of
The long
This
.
vowels ^^ d,%i,
"Wi
u,^
have always
in
'WPR^ ds
hence, fHd^liTIU
termination
^rm
ds,
is,
Zend,
according
to
56^.,
sounded do
hushyainty-do.
In bases in j
and
>
* Hence
dughdhar-8
and
for
-w*, and
they would
have
The same
is
^HT
on'
'v\
<t|rlll
by
transposing the
r, gives jiv>/v:ajc>j
c^aiAn
marians
also, in
(
genitive sign
Laghu-Kaumudi,
"^fe kroshtu (from the theme fhj^i. kroshtar or "^{W kroshtri^ see $.
may
it
Grammarians
incline,
\\
here
And
it is
impossible,
if
a transposition of the
base ("^W ^"!T ), for this cannot be and yet changed into (of. Colebrook,
Rem.)
(Gramm.
rC8
FORMATION OF CASES.
;
dfritdi-a.
or ^)Xi^ tanv-d,
^M)Ai^ tanav-6,
find
no ^^^w^oAam d/rithy-do, gusyAj^ tanv-do. The cognate European languages exhibit no stronger termination in the
feminine than
ever,
in the
genitive,
this
tradistinction
i
bases, as has
this vowel,
at
all.
Compare
Respecting
and accusative
zd-s, see
giba,
and
172.
224.]
a-s,
opposed to
(rcfyvpa, cr(j)vpa-v,
ixovaav*
In
Latin, also,
terras,
It
cannot be sup-
character.
That,
other
which continually
ditary possessions.
193.
lose
The
Lithuanian, in
The
Attic termination as
;
is,
Sanskrit ^l^R da
answer
nevertheless
SKNITIVE SINGULAR.
resembles the Grothic;
places the feminine
209
cases, also, reIt is
a by a long or short
i
doubtful
genitives of
are, for the
most
may
made
this
r,
might
from
aui-&s
(ef.
p. 174, note*),
however,
it
be com-
pared with
as
't(tk\ pTites,
i
and the
^ of aw'ih
be looked upon
is
Guna
of the
(. 26.),
objectionable.
" of the
fire,""
for ugniSa
an
is
generated by
its
influence
(p.
174,
all
is for
i-h or ySs,
GIESMYA
bases have, in
some
cases, ex-
were explained
view appears to
cially as in the
in
the note,
p.
174
(cf.
. 120.),
This
me
fG. Ed.
p. 226.3
giesmye, or giesmie.
I
194.
designated
personified, with
tlie
language
in
V And there a pronoun for the fuller termination also, ^ sya, which occurs
134., the
viz.
a
(cf. . 55.),
and the
of which
is
t
replaced
by
(Gramm.
TTK ta-t.
268.)
so that
UTiT
^ sya
that
stands in the
?r
same
relation to
WR
R
tya-m and
tya-t
sa
does to WT ta-m,
in tya,
^ aya,
210
FORMATION OF CASES.
ti
ya.
;*
Here
ZEND.
GREEK.
LATIN.
LITHUAN.
GOTH
vulfi-
m. m.
f.
vr'ika-sya,
vehrka-M,
\vKo-io,
....
cu-jns,
wifko,
kd,
ka-sya,
ka-M,
hizvay-do.
patdi-s.
....
'Xjcipu-g,
hvi-
jihwdy-ds.
pati-s,
terras,
hosti-s,
rankS-s, gibo
.
. .
m.
....
ItOffl-O^,
.^ gast
paty-us.
f.
....
dfntdi'S,
....
siti-s,
priU-s,
....
<j)V<Te-U),
t anai
pnty-ds.
f.
....
paseu-s.
....
sunaH
s,
m.
sunt
....
^^'
P-f.
pasv-d,
taneu-s,
iyOv-og,
socru-s.
TTiTU-Oy,
tan6-s.
han
tanw-da,
tanv-6,
vadhw-ds.
f.go-s,
....
gpu-s.
^o{f)-6,
va(F)-of,
OTT-Of,
isOS e
f.
bov'is,
ndv-as,
....
vdch-d,l
barent-6,%
vdch-as.
hharat-as,
VOC-is,
m.
n.
<ppovT-o, feretit-is,
^atfiov-og,
....
Wjiya
m. dtman-as,
ndmn-as,
asman-6,\
sermon-is, dkmen-s,
ahn
nan
ndman-dfX
ToAai/-of,
nomin-is,
....
* The meanings
:.
And
may
yyAt^c/c
b^reaato,
'^
The
is
reten-
the
more
common
also
For
f C^^?^^
barento,
<|j^^AJ^ii baranto,
possible,
and likewise,
older A5
for c
e.
which
is
Vide
254. p.
.302,
Note
%.
LOCATIVE SINGULAR.
SAHSXBIT.
211
UTHOAJf-
zsso.
GRE.
LATIH.
GOTmi&
brothr-s,
bhratur.
duhituT,
brdtar^Sj*
varp-og,
fratr-is,
....
dughdhar-s,^
ddtar-s.
dvyarp-og, matr-is,
^oTrjp-cg,
eiTe{a)-os,
dugter-s, dauhtrs.
ddtur,
vachas-ast
datOT-is,
oper-is,
vachanh-6,1
THE LOCATIVE.
-
and Zend,
racter,
[|
its locative
avr"^ 7Mep<?i
pvktL
So in Sanskrit,
With
)f
^a
S
it,
;
the locative
passes into
(. 2.),
Zend
but here,
also,
j^
fjiotf
6i
stands for
jo i
Zend
oiiKoti
and
aot,
in which
subscribed, or
To
the
forms mentioned answers j^^^^aj^ maidhydi, "in the middle. One must be careful not to regard this and similar
'
phenomena
as shewing a
a correspond in
a remark-
able
wonld be better
to
**crealoris."
(Bumouf, " Ya9na," p. 363, Note), + The gen. of dughdar is probably dughder-6 (aee X Seep. 163, Note J.
p. 194,
Note
t).
locative,
cases admit of being more abundantly qnoted in Zend than the with which, nevertheless, Rask appears to have been nnacquainted at the time of publishing his treatise, as he does not give it in any or
Few
now
^12
tract
this
FORMATION OF CASKS.
a with the old locative
to e
;
i,
from
DIETFA, answers to dht jj^A)A5^ da^. The bases which terminate with other vowels employ, however, in
Lithuanian, without exception, ye as the locative termination,
e,
a circumstance which
is,
ganic echo, which has occasioned the change of the old locative
i
by
adding an
most
part, in the
form of a5i:^
To
the Lithuanian ye
answers
so
that nehes-i, "in Heaven," and imen-i, "in the name," agree
most
198.
strictly
ijvffTt
nahhas-i and
n'rfT
ndman-i, from
Masculine bases in
and
u,
viz.
v:fi(
du, before
which
^*i
and
7w
are dropped;
but in
pati, "lord,"
remained
in its
and ^f^ sakJii, "friend," the i has euphonic change to "^ y: hence, Vj$\ paty-du,
;H^^ sakhy-du. If we consider the vocalization of the s to u, shewn in . 56^, and that, in all probability, in the dual,
also,
tlie
(. 206.)
moreover,
dakshindydm, Panini
VIL
i
1. 39.)
and, finally,
we
be
ds,
much
^ dv,
from
W^
in
Zend usually
as), while,
(from >R^
is
more com-
mon
thus
we
read,
in
the Vend. S.
p.
337,,
j^^iom
^jMjM^MJ<y
<ajC1^
^^^
LOCATIVE SINQULAE.
hoc
213
mundo quidem existenie."'' This Zend termination 6 (from a + u) has the same relation to the Sanskrit du that a short a has to a long a, and the two locative terminations
are distinguished only by the quantity of the
of the diphthong.
first
member
in
On
the
other hand,
we
find
the
feminine base
locative
form j /aj^
tanv-i
that, in
p.
229.]
i
madhw-i, or
nrfT
madhu-n-i).
Bases in j
termination
di-s;
Vend.
S. p. 234, ^iMi^xit
j^
a locative meaning;
e.g.
Vend.
S.
p.
(cf.
46,
jw-m^v
^^^^Om
ainM
vis^, "
^tvj/jAj ainhdo,
200.
172. Note.).
From
compelled to
Zend and Sanskrit we have already been acknowledge a connexion between the genitive
the
and locative;
genitive by the locative. Through the formal agreement of the corresponding Latin and Sanskrit termination, and from the circumstance that the genitive occurs
first
declensions
M.
Prof.
Rosen was
first
first
induced to characterize
declensions as borrowed
[
from the
old locative
do not doubt, and which I have already corroborated elsewhere by the genitives of the two first persons, in which mei tui, agree most surprisingly with Hftj mayi (from m^-i, . 2.X in me," twayi (from tiv^-i). Or ought, perhaps, a double
'
j^
i
inflexion
to be
tl^
FORMATION OF CASES.
Should Romts (from Romai\ Corinthi,
in their different meaning be also of
a locative dative ?
be on
[G. Ed.
different origin?
And
genitive
found already
mayi,
r^ftl
Should mei,
tui,
mama,
As
pass
easily
from
one
relation
of space
to
become the
me more
after the first declension had lost its as, then the dative,
according to
its
became
substi-
form
o-i,
which belongs
o),
to the
Greek
oi
and
of
which examples
still
remain
handed down
altered
:
to us (as populoi
Romanoi)
either
p. 231.]
[G. Ed.
first
and the
form has
fixed itself
latter in the
me inadmissible,
because in
all
other parts of
Grammar
has in
numerous
Roman
this
letter
it
no
no
no amce
for
amas, &c.
The question
word
The
genitives in e-
and
as
for
sucb
as
and
from
The
by Hartung
ia Latin, a
relation
(p. 161.)
am
to
n^H
lupvA. to
"^MM
LOCATIVB SINGULAR.
genitive,
^tl^
which
is
nom.
plural,
where,
in like manner,
is
Romani stands
for Romonoi.
mination
for in the
r?nT
as,
first
answers to
tu-bhyam;
locative
to TTWW
while vice
is,
for
instead of
Pronouns of the 3d person have, in Sanskrit, in of the appended i in the locative, and the ^ a
hence, sma is elided (see . 165.) wfWT This n, iasrnin, "in him"; csfw?^ Arasm'jn, "in whom?" which seems to me to be of later origin, as it were an n <l>\Kv<mK6v, does not extend to the two first persons, and is wanting in Zend also in those of the third; hence,.
pronoun
j^
As
signifying
is easily
discovered as
;
soon as
is
which,
viz.
^iw
at
dm, in which,
also,
and u
may
will participate
(cf. .
and
for
wm
common
fear,"
|^ i
hence,
fvnjT\
bhiy-dm
or
bhiy-i,
"
in
from wt bhi*
[G. Ed.
p. 232.]
dm
is
198.
^a{mH(| g
where
it
216
natioij
FORMATION OF CASES.
dm
(of.
.214.);
4i^)ii
hence,
Ai.i.J^>*0
(cf. .
yahmy-a,
"in
which"
from
yahmi
172.).
to be less
This termination appears, however, in Zend, diffused than in Sanskrit, and not to be applicable
i
to feminines in j
and
>
u.
is
clearly
S03.
We
(see
148.)
m. vrike*
t,
vehrki*
hizvay-a,
. < . .
Kvko),
lup-^,
ierra-U
hos(-i,
wilke.
Jihwdy-dm,
XWP9
"nocri-'i,
ranko~ye,
pdti-ye.
m. paty-du,^
f. f.
prlt'-du.t
....
TTopTi-'i,
sW-i,
awi-ye,
m.
f.
....
tanw'i,
'X^i^-'
irtTv-i,
pecu-i,
socru-i,
sunu-ye.
n.
f.
madhu-n-i,
....
gav-i,
jxedv-t,
vadhw-dm,
/3o{F)-i,
vd(F)-t',
m.f.gav-i,
bov-i,
'^ f.
ndv-i,
bharat-T,
barent-i,
....
W
o
ra.
<t>epovT-t, ferent-i,
m. dtman-i,
n.
asmain-t,
8ai[iov-i, sermon-i,
ndmn-i,
bhrdfar-i,
duhitar-i,
ddtnr-i,
ndmain-i,
brdthr-i?\\
raXav-i,
Ttarp-i,
nomin-i,
fratr-i,
m.
f.
m.
n.
datdr-i,
oper-i.
vachas-i.
vacanh'i,
* See
II
196.
The
rejection of the
its
Or tanw-dm. t See . 198. J Or prity-dm. a preceding the r in the theme seems to me more
probable than
retention.
The
of the termination
is
guaranteed by the
exemplify.
p. 194,
contrary
to
VOCATIVE SINGULAR.
217
VOCATIVE,
204.
The vocative
the
or
is
identical
with the
the
former
practical corruption,
and
mono234.]
" fear P as
k!-^.
A final
a of the nominal
p.
in Lithuaalso, in
nian
it is
weakened
to e;
We
these
xeiTe,
"^
vrika that
pears in \vKO as
e without
in lupus as
any
letter following
it.
bases,
in the
fre-
vocative also;
we have
neuters,
which
(^ ri),
with respect to
do not
is
must here be further remarked, that these too, in the strictly foUow the suppression of the a in the weakest
conditionally prescribed in , 140., but optionally retain
it ;
cases,
which
the a, or reject
so that with
ndmn-i
also
ndman-i
pitr-i,
is
used.
With
$.
given at
132.
may
218
FORMATION OF CASES.
{l
while a
(. 2,).
final 58n d,
shortening the
sarae end, only
at
by opposite ways
and
To
the
Guna form
Sanskrit
6,
Lithuanian
?nft sun6,*
as
sunau,
sunau,
resembling
i
:
the
do not occur in
as,
however, they,
from
ANSTI, might
to handau.
their
The Lithuanian i bases in the vocative extend theme in the same manner as in the genitive (. 193.);
to zwdke, giesme (Ruhig's third declension),
i,
like
the masculine and neuter a bases, have lost their final vowel
hence vulf,
with the
daur*, gast\
Latin the
suppression
the
final
consonant,
which has passed over from the nominative to the vocative; while only the Sanskrit and Zend again ihtroduce
at will attach
Guna
to a final
>
, or not;
and we find
a final j
only, with-
Guna; and
So Vend S.
p. 466,
The j t between
assist
a conjunctive vowel, to
Note).
It follows
from
ei
this,
and from
that
{.
rectly assumed
VOCATIVE SINGULAR.
219
into the vocative the nasal which had been dropped in the
nominative.
vocative,
Adjectives in
have departed
of
from the
to
the
retain
blind's,
the
case-sign
!'^
the
nominative;
' blind
preserved a tolerable
number
of its
requisite
language has not got free of the nominative sign in the vocative,
because kj and
ttj
(^,
yj/)
tions, to
the
[G. Ed.
p. 236.]
sound which might be expected from a theme dvaKT, to which, in its uninflected state, neither kt, nor, conveniently,
even
tlie k,
could be
left.
"
it is
easy to imagine
not usually addressed, prefer, when they happen to be addressed, to retain the form of the nominative, as w ttoCj !" *
still
mascu-
line
.
second declension.
* To this circumstance may also the re-introduction of the case-sign in the neuter be owing, while the Sanskrit employs the bare base. Moreover, this fact also
may have
freeing itself in the vocative from the bare primary form, because
ap-
much more
(See
J. 112.)
220
SANSKRIT.
FORMATION OF CASES.
XESJ}.
GREEK.
LATIN
UTHUAN.
wilke,
OOTHIC.
m.
n.
f.
vrika,
vehrka,
ddta,
\vK,
BS>po-Vf
5(;Wjoa,
lupe,
vulf.
ddna,
jihw^,
pats,
donu-m,
terra,
hosti-s,
siti-s,
....
ranka,
daur\
giba?
gasC.
hizvSf
paitif
dfritif
m.
f.
Ttoyi,
....
prifA
vdrit
itopri,
i^pt,
n.
vairi,
mare,
L m,
f.
bhavishyanti,
b^shyainti,
sund,
tandf
pasu,
tanu,
tx6v,
iriTV,
pecu-s,
socru-s,
sunaH,
sunau.
....
handau.
n.
f.
madhu,
vadhu,
tnadhuy
fiidv,
m
i
pecu,
..
OQ^Sf
Qm.f.ydu-,
gdu-s.
vav.
..
g ?
ej
""^
f.
idu-s,
vdyt,
f.
vdc-S?
baran-Sf
OTT-f,
voc-s,
m. bharan,
(pipav,
Saifiov,
m. dfman,
n.
asman,
sermo,
dkm&',
ahmd,
nam6'.
brothar.
ndman,
bhrdtar,
duhitar,
ddtar,
ndman,
brdtare*
Ta\av,
iraTep,
nomen,
....
m.
frater
mote,
dator,
L nu
n.
dughdhare,* dvyaTep,mater,
ddtar e,*
vachd,
Bori^p,
67rof,t
dauhtar,
vachas,
opus,
DUAL.
NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, VOCATIVE.
206.
line
which probably
s (cf. . 56^.
arose from
198.),
ds
by vocalization of the
and
and
is
termination
The
mentioned and
See
44.
t See
$.
128.
221
lively personification.
Compare,
with
the
also, in
i
long
^ff^ITTt
of the dual
short
of the plural;
as
asruni with
^TSTT!! asruni.
it
still,
however, so that
S.,
p. 203, i.}^jJAj^>y^)o
schenubyaschit,
"and
as far as
is
In the verb
it is
is still
more rare
not en-
tirely lost,
and
many examples
The Sanskrit termination du occurs in the corresponding places in Zend in the form of gui do, which, according to . 56^, stands at the same time for the Sanskrit
V. S.*
termination ^ra
d,
ruption of ^rr?^
ds,
appears in
grammar
198.),
while
by the Zend.
sibilant
before the
particle
as^ cha,
and uses
if
the
dual termination
^ du, in
Thus we read
in the
i\>^
S. p. 225,
Amertats."t
What
p.
239]
Cf.
Gramm.
Crit.
Add.
to
r.
137.
t Cf. Anqnetil II. 175. The two Genii, which Anquetil writes Khordad and Amerdad, appear very frequently in the dual, also with the termination hya
this
($. 212.)
;
may
'
222
bulary
(p. 456),
FORMATION OF CASES.
writes
naereke'ido,
else
JM^j7jjMf ndirikd.
however,
as,
evidently
^^j7jAuy ndirikd]
(. 213.),
ndirikd.
From
>^j^ bdzu, Rask cites the form ^>>^auj remarking that it is a dual it
:
and
>^AUi
bdzu forms, in
bdzavd.
plural,
^>>^amj
bdzvd
or
4>A5^Ajii
have no doubt.
In the Veda dialect, the termination
d,
^ du
;
occurs
frequently abbreviated to
diphthong
viated
is
suppressed.
as, ^jfTfftn form occur in Rosen's " Specimen " " asvin-d, the two Aswins,'' from asvin, and Jfjj nard, " two [G. Ed. p. 240.] men," which can be derived both from nar
by the
plural.
Thus we
VVe
will,
read,
I.
c. p.
211,
any longer here, but only remark, that hnurvatdt is very frequently abbreviated to haurvat^ and the d of amereldt is often found
on
this point
is
a palpable
error.
must
l)e
Com-
pare
1.
c. p.
33.),
but incorrectly
^6
ior \) 6.
Immortality."
likewise feminine
(cf. . 28.).
g^
.
ubhi
We
must
form mentioned at
46. of
223
from
nar.
and from nara, but which more probably comes In Zend the abbreviated termination from du is
fact,
termination
also, the
and we rejoice
youthful beauty.
h3(oJaj9jaj,^
We
313,
vi>mMj^
yavano yaz
The
Sanskrit
the former
175,
we owe
Note
%
chxi (see p.
G. Ed.).
The
(if
the read-
ing be correct), as
furnishes a
new
part,
most
when
209.
From
the
Veda termination
it
e,
d,
end of words,
is
vocative
(. 204.),
above-mentioned Veda
though, according to
"sni
nard, and
also
Zend
m7asj nar-a.
Al-
. 4., to
WT d, still we must avoid regarding: KvKOi as the analogous form to g-ciT vrikdf or juuA^fevclp vehrkd (see . 211.). That
however, the Lithuanian dual
bases in a
(in the
it
of masculine
is
[G. Ed.
p. 241.]
nominative)
of,
a, I
p. 23,
AiAjy Xi>>^
dm
Cf.
Gramm.
Crit.
Add.
to
r.
137.
224
have the
Sanskrit,
FORMATION OF CASES.
less doubt,
thuanian dual also agrees in this case most strictly with the
places, equally the representative of
and the Lithuanian m or S (uo) is, in some other an old d (see . 162.),
^^rfi?
or dudu, " I give,"" with " dusu, I will give," with <^ <4< rH ddsydml
compare, dumi,
daddmi;
And
the
mono-
syllabic
thus
tu
= Tn td,
wilku,
ku
= kd.
We
hold,
therefore,
vehrkd,
:
the
Veda
at
form
least,
^TcRT vrikd,
the Zend
as
jM^?vi>^(^
thuanian
identical
in
to
principle
we
is
are,
much more
inclined
this
^ du,
and that
falls
u,
on the
205.
may
and
and u suppress,
du, and, in
its
comunin-
form
thus,
xfif\
pati,
from
^fVr
^sj^rm.
tioned in
.
The ^>>^a^
207,, is
men-
abbreviated forms.
The
also,
curtailed
is
form
is
not, however,
wanting in Zend
and
From
>i^yjAj^
we
^A^yjAj^
mainyu
on the other hand, for _^JJ^J erezu, " two fingers," we meet with the shortened form
is
><f7j
erezu,
which
identical
211.
The
Lithuanian, in
its
and
bases, rests
on the
hence,
awl, "
two sheep" (fem.), answers to w^ avi, from 'wf^ am; and mnu, " two sons," to ^^sunu. On this principle rests
225
If it be Greek dual of the two first declensions. remove the o) of Xvkoj from a Grecian
it
and banish
completely to India,
it
may
be allowed
a of
^"oRT vrikd,
but in
first
its
sented by
this letter is
it,
first
declension an
tS
Be
that as
it is
it
of Kvkco
may
;
for
must be assumed,
a in Greek, and
^<*^
vrlka-s
had become
Ay/ca-y,
^
(^).
?
du, but
i,
as in
final
^
"
sate,
with this ^ t passes into ^ (. 2.); hence, "two hundred," from ^nr^sot^-t: [G. Ed. p. -^J-S.]
In
as,
two
palates."
;
Zend
the a bases
snit4 (. 41.),
^\57jxjAs'
for example,
we
^ saM
and
for
(. 43.)
% ^r^
distin-
^^^
dw^
sahasri.
213.
guishing the neuter from the two natural genders; but the Sanskrit appears to have extended the neuter t mentioned above also to the feminine a bases.
cidence
of the
from fiTd^Jihwd, with the neuter ^^ ddne, " two gifts," is. as the Zend instructs us, only external, and the two forms
226
meet
FORMATION OY CASES.
in quite different ways, and have such a relation to
one another, that in ddn^, from ddna + i, a dual term i nation, and, in fact, the usual
one of neuters,
is
actually con-
tained; but in
tion
a^jihwi
du (from
two
has
women."
believe, that
to
and
121 G. ed.).
The dualjihw^,
(^.
161.)
termination,
i.e.
is,
but
it is
[G. Ed.
firmation of
in
A)
^,
my
even
this abbreviated
form
particle
aj^ cha
side
it,
and,
Ai^^^^A5^^/^^As
we
find.
spent^,
Vend. S. p. 58, Hd^vWPQ>J) As^jJAJtajg^J^ amhhes-cha "and two Amshaspants" (" non-conniventesque sancamisha and Nalus V.
25, 26.
and see
. 50.).'|*
The form srv> Ss is to be deduced from the full form M^^^AA ay-dos ; so that, after dropping the fJM do, the preceding ay must have been contracted to ^, just as (p. 121
r<Hd^'4')f1
jihway-6a.
although, as
it
Cf.
c.
c^^gQ>j}
^.
^^Jtvs^^At
"^/J3XJ^ |^AJ
amesi ipente;
and see
51.
227
G. Ed.) in Prakrit, ^fR Smi has arisen from the Sanskrit We may support the <amrn aydmU by rejecting the d.
derivation
of fiT% jihwS
also, that
from
ftn^
Jihivay-du,
by
this
circumstance,
bases
in the
Veda
may
naked base
^ITT^
dMM^
^ro^
vdrdhydu.
We
its
find, frequently,
V^^9;o
Vend. S.
tevishi applied to
p.
{e.g.
225.);
i,
and
from the
frequently-occurring plural
h5^CU^?^ tevishis
[G. Ed.
z,
(Vend.
214.
p.
245.]
forms in
as
ranUt, horn.
RANKA
ment
is
left
wHkuh.
The
Latin has preserved only in duo and amho a remnant of the dual corresponding to the Greek, which, however, in the oblique cases, is replaced by plural terminations. Here follows a general view of the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual (see
. 148.).
It is perhaps a participle of the rednplicated prct., according to the analt^' of the Sanskrit Fftr^TT tinivas, fem. Ttijwi thatski (Gramm.
Crit. $. 603.)
to
be able,"
it
mar
The e
e for a) e
is
explamed by the
is
influ-
ence of the
p. And ^^J^iyM^>
am
to learn
utayuUi also
an
adjective feminine
dual; but I
from which
whether ^
or
t is its
final
YOweL
228
SANSKRIT.
FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.
GREEK.
.
LI-i-HUANlAir.
'-rm.
P'
vrikdu,
vrikd,
vehrkdo,
....
N. wilkii, V. wllku.
....
....
vehrkd*
ddt^.
KVKU),
hoipiji,
=>
ddnS,
Mzvay-do,
hhvS,
paiti ?
....
i'lL-i
jihwS,
Xwpd,
TTOCTi-e,
N. ranH, V. ranku
'S.pati,
-S^o
path
pnti,
V.
pdfi.
du>i.
dfrM
....
Ttopri-e,
N. awu N.
n.
vdri-n-i,
t8pi-e.
* While consonantal bases occur in the dual both with a long and a short
a, the
a bases, contrary
nom.
most
vowi
1.
deduce
this,
e g.
Vend. S. pp.
juj
yy icCAi
HSOJAS^^AU
<|j'^^HM^>'
JkM/(3A5Jivi(J^>
JkXJ^^CQ>jto
amesha speatd
coimi-
who
created good."
final
If amesha spentd
short, or at Uast
a would be
much more
a,
a long
S. p. 67.
Cf.
. 20;).).
from the
Amshasp
20P.)
180.
We
find,
also,
the forms
meaning
as the so frequent
shew themselves only as masculine duals, in the same Wc find also, frequently, amesha spentd.
" the two most holy
is
spirits
likewise con-
The answer
to
the query,
Whether
is
vtry
perhaps,
we
Amertai
229
mrili.
GREEK.
UTHUANIAS.
blmvhhyanty-^Ufhushyainti,
....
ixdv-e,
n'trv-e,
m.
f.
sunu,
tanu,
madhil-Ti-i,
pad,
tanH,
N. sunu, V. sunn.
m.
f.
....
nedv-e,
vadhw-du,
....
....
va(f>e,
m. f. gav-du*
f.
f.
ndv-du,
vdch-du,
vdch-do.
Amertat, and whether these two Genii, according to the principle of the
Sanskrit copulative compounds, have the dual termination for this reason
alone, that they are usually found together,
and
are, together,
two?
reply
whether, in
fine,
these
Indian
Zend-Avesta ?
The
aU these queries
lies
this book.
although each
is
in the dual,
are, together,
named
}^-i?^
mainyu mazdd
tevisht, &c.,
"the
As
of great indefinite number, where they are praised, often have the
it
would be important
to
names
for
them.
In Panini we find
ftl
ri
(p.
niatara-pitardu and
Vedas.
1.14
1 ri
O pitara-mdtard
marked
as pecuhar to the
They
signify
literally,
they probably
mean
"two mothers two fathers," and "two first member of the compound can here
viated dual pitard,
fathers
two mothers."
For the
matard; and
if this is
the case,
* Bases
in
&om
^ du
those in
^^
the exception of the vocative singular, the last rowel but one (see
$.144.).
230
SANSKRIT.
FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.
GREEK.
OTT-e,
UTHUANUJI.
>
vdch-(i,*
vdch-a,
barant-doy
-Qin.
bharant-duy
bharant-d,
dtmdn-du,j[
....
^epovT-e,
.
.
barant-a,
asman-do,
....
8aifJiov-e,
...
dtmdn-d.
asman-a,
N.V.
dkraen
^n.
m.
Tidmn-t,
....
brdtar-do,
rdKav-e,
bhrdfar-du,
....
Trarep-e,
bhrdtar-d
brdtar-Oy
t
m.
n.
duhitar-du.
duhitar-d,
ddtdr-du,'\
dughdhar-do, ....
dughdhar-a. dvyarep-e
ddtdr-ao.
ddtdr-a,
.
ddtdr-d.
vachas-i,
Borfjp-e,
e7re(o-)-e,
....
Zend dual
common
It is
termination;
termination from
in Sanskrit nT bhydm,
Aj^jli
abbreviated to
bya.
persons, denotes
the dative
become abbreviated
agrees
^R hyam
[G. Ed.
p.
(. 23.).
249]
and or
t^)
iJ.
1.)
grammar,
thongs
**
;
in the
Vedas d
is
e.g. ffTHT
navel."
p. 229.
231
to
H^m ma-hyam,
plural, is
does to
WWR
bliyas,
The Lithe y, and with the usual change of as into tw. thuanian has mus for bus in the dative plural (. 63.): this
more complete form
pronoun of the two
yu-mus,
in
all
has, however,
first
persons,
where mu-muSf
" vobis"
while
other words
we
find
This
is,
final letter
(.
of bhyi\m,
to me, at
but the
least, it
initial labial, b, in
63.)*
and
have
with
of wilka-vh
"kuKoiv,
According
to this
German
[G. Ed.
p. 250,]
mination
f>ni
as
mental plural.
in 2iend *v^^
bis.
On
'
(cf. p.
doabt
^yicfiq
dvdm,
which
we
common
in the
in this
form
Whether
the case
dual person
'ifra
tdm
t Cf. Grimm, I. 828. 17, where the identity of the Lithuanian-German inflection m with the b (bh of the older languages) was first shewn. When,
however, Grimm,
adjectives have
I.e.,
ms
simply m, this
;
is
named
for
Ruhig
232
(also Miji bis),
FORMATION OF CASES.
has in Latin fixed itself in the dative and which must together supply the place of the instru-
ablative,*
mental;
labial
mis
is
the
217.
termination
is
<pi,
(ptv, is
and what
there said
may
be introduced here
If
<f)tv,
and not
may offer
<pt^,
of the change of neg into fiev in the 1st person plural, which
<pts
would
bis,
in nobis, vobh.
also,
and
the
former
may
;
same
bis in tibi
and
"
vobis
and
that, in Lithuanian,
to mis
in akimi,
eyes."
It
through the
(pi
:
and
ex-
[G. Ed.
p. 251,]
their
is
plained
by the
fact, that
the
common
The
strict genitive
mination
positions,
^i, 0/1/,
denied
for if pre-
* In the
Ist
vo-bis),
bhi/as.
where
wni
1826.
its
cog-
Essay
f^
hih.
233
we
all
on
this account, to
these
cases
Greek.
The
signification,
incorrectly consi-
dered to represent
latter, in
the
genitive
termination, where
the
the
common
In
dialect,
lost ablative.
in Sanskrit, be
is
the relation
verb mentioned
more usually, though less suitably, used The same is the case with oaae Sa~
In
'l\i6(pi /cAt/ra rerj^ea it is
not requisite
to
make
'lAid^i
governed by
Ilium.''''
re'iyea,
but
it
may
be regarded af^'
as locative ''to
And
{iroKi/g 5'
itvdofjievcav)
there
is
no necessity
to look
upon
by
ossibus.
know no passages
besides
where a genitive
To the meaning could be given to forms in (pi and (piv. cjn, foreign, the form <piv, is and accordlikewise, accusative,
ing to
its
nor does
it
appear in
Buttmann,
p. 205).
As
to the opinion
^/, ^tv,
[G. Ed.
p. 252.]
of the old
Grammarians, that
may
declension,
we
Buttmami
(p. 205) has rightly objected on this head, 218. The neuters in 2, mentioned in ,
cpi,
(ptv,
in
234
op<r-<f>i,
FORMATION OF CASES.
(TTrjdea-^tv,
cause the
2 dropped
is
Of
(}>iv
KOTYAHAON
;
the only v
and since
so readily as 2,
it
assumes an auxifollowed,
;
KorvXT}6v-o-(f>tv
after
pound words
like Kw-o-dapaiq^.
it
This example
however, by SuKpv
is
aKpv6(f>tv
ndubhis
for in
compounds,
o,
also,
the
NAY
on which
account vavaradixov
may
pounds
219.
like
^^^
to
it
But
wnn bhydm,
a
final
it
is
lengthened
It
^oifrr?
vrikabhydm.
; and that hence, from "^ vriJsa also vrikd-bhia would be found. The common dialect has, however, ab-
^^
2.,
vrikdis,
which
for
is easily
derived
bh',
di
is,
according
1
to
=d +
i.
me
first
in dis-
persons
w sma,
;
smd-bhis;
which forms
asmdn, '^*M}^
the
same
relation
to
^wr^
its
cog-
Essay III.
235
practically established
final
by the Veda
dialect, that, in
it,
from a
^a
^^
asia.
In the
hos,^*
common
answers to
Veda
^ a,
on
from
^ttT
Veda
a,
no necessity hence
on an
Perhaps, however,
never lead to
ibhis,
dis.
dbhis might
force of the
i
become
[G. Ed.
p.
264.]
owe
comd of
y.-\
The
i the
From
i,
ibhis
would come,
but
ai/is,
for
=a+i,
it is itself
ff^fW^
nadi-bhis, as
an abbreviation of nadi-bhis (for after rejecting the bh, from nadi-\-i would be formed nadis), but as a very common instrumental, for which an extension of the base nadi to nadya is to be assumed. On the other
Zend pronominal instrumental dis mentioned by Bnmouf (Nonv. Journ. Asiat. III. 310.) may here be considered, which occurs frehand, the
is
probably an abbreviation of
jj^rjjjfl dibis
or
from a base
i
di,
"him,"
unlengthened, contrary to
64.
The
connection of
the
baae^ di
with
aj^o ta cannot,
on
this account,
be disputed.
236
FORMATION OF CASES.
asmdsu, yushmdsu;
and
;
adjectives,
and thus
to the
Veda
oiw^f>?H kusumi-bhis.
Trfim S-bhis, ^f^ e-hin, had arisen, from ^iftro dbhis, by the change of d into S, dis must have proceeded by means of
rejection
This
ebhis
14,
Tif^ yajndis;
and 21
often.
^ranff arkdis.
In
tremely
221.
[G. Ed.
255.]
its
same way
as the
employs, namely,
. 28. 41.
for
d:
but
comes
vehrkaeibya.
A}.ijiijn3Ajfe>'
hvaiibya
But
If in
^ is
supplied
p.
by
6i (. 33.)
).
305
this
form the
I
lost nasal
be
restorec*,
and
it
be assumed (of
tv is
which
an
By
is
'ToRfH^
trrikabhis,
sacrifice,"
*^haa,*' for
237
fall
first
would
to
it
The third
tion
first
declension,
by
its
and not
iv is
shewn
to
where
tv
and not
oiv is
(yiov<ra-tv, \oyo-iv).
iv
we
in the
\iz.
same manner
21S.
as a conjunctive vowel,
its
way from
it,
i. e.
(into
the bases
in
and
as, in general, in
and
u.
It
vowel o to make
termination,
its
as
comes evidently from a time when the tv was still preceded by the consonant, which the eoiTesponding Sanskrit termination hhydm leads us to expect
^amov-o-tv,
;
in
all
probability a
thus,
from
Bouiiov-o-cfiiv*
<piv
We
here a different
217.,
we endeaas,
predecessor m,
in ge-
neral, at
o,
has an origin exactly similar to that of the possessive snffix evr, which has
Y.vt
must
digamma made
thus
Tix'p-o-is
to irvpoiv,
from
Ttvp-o-lv
to TVpOUf {TVpO-w).
238
view
in
still
FORMATION OF CASES.
more
clearly
how forms
the language
as
corruptions
of preceding dissimilar
first
per-
in one
case from
in the other
If
from
eTvirrovT.
iv
222.
traction of bhydm,
we
shall
have found,
tv,
of
changed in
it
this
number
in the
were by accident
(f/fi-^v,
v^x-lv,
together
with
a^i-at).
this respect, is
guided or
very
as termi-
"nobis,^^ '^^{v^^
yushma-bhyam,
all
"vobis''''),
other words.
as easily, or
(cf. . 42.).
From
more
so,
this
at iv quite
As, however,
.
bhyam, and
has also
its
its
abbreviated form
215.,
as,
also, in
common
i,
which
is
locative, presents in
(.
200.)
we
can,
form
the end.
In the
both coincide.*
Max. Schmidt,
The
occasional accu-
"Comto
con-
diflferent
way, by designating
it
mination
239
plained from
its
no longer
felt,
and
caused.
satives,
On
we have
in
/xiV
and
fxi-v,
vi-v,
and
a connection between
-7 v.
223.
fin?
As
bhi-s,
wm
wm
bhy-as, which
notice,
to,'
first,
begin with
wy bhy (from
bhi),
we must
^aft?
abhi, "
cf.
" to-
"apud^^).
ter-
However, in abhi
manner, the
;
^ a the theme
so that this
u-bi ;* just as
the
pronominal
Greek
the
Related
to the suffix fv
is
dha,
common
dialect
"here," and in the preposition sa-hOf "with"; but in the Veda dialect exhibits the original form and more extended
diflFiision,
also, is
mination ^TT in
(. 201.).
Greek
tf,
which, according to
my
it
explanation,
Still I
may
this,
that
is
but the
common
($.201), but
what has been said above in support of my opinion. * In Prakrit the termination f^ hih, which is connected with
"where?'*
(cf. .
217.), unites also with other pronominal bases, for the formation of
240
FORMATION OF CASES.
;
nominal bases with a locative signification e. g. a>(2;Ma ava-dha, "here." In the Greek, compare da of ev^a, opposed to
dev,
from
evdev,
efxedev,
&c.,
from
\RT dhas,
for
iT^ tas, in
^TUTT a-dhas,
V dh
stands as a permutation of
and occurs in
this
way,
are
also, in
Th
I
refore dha,
dlii,
to be derived
ase
ta
but
it is
more
difficult to
aficj)!).
6f hhi of
^H ahhi
used for
(Greek
[G. Ed.
(rtfitv,
p. 269.]
dropped. Sanskrit
As
in Greek, also,
(ptv is
and as
in
f^^K
an abbreviation of
fs^rfw dwinsati,
and in Zend
is
jho^^j his,
dvit,
hhi
may
^ swa
or
f^
swi
&c.; and so
indeed,
Tlie
in the aspira-
hh, as, in
Prakrit
still
(. 166.),
TH
Greek
this
for
(T(piv is
found also
yj/lv.
+A
is
not entirely
way
r.
is
to
" more," to
Crit.
251. Rem.).
224.
The following
and Lithuanian:
Amon^
others, in the
for
is[
dhwS and
8^ dhoam
^ tw^, j^
twam.
241
UTBCAKLUI.
tcilka-m.
{vehrkaSi-bya, or
in.
vrikd-bhydm,
vehrkoi-bya,
y
ranko-m.
Ttcxyi-o-iVf
f.
Jihicd-bhydm,
hizvd-bya,
paiti-bya,
m. paii-bhydm,
f.
paii-nu
tanu-bhydm,
tanu-bya,
iriTv-o-iv,
OTT-O-Tv,
vdg-bhydm,
vdch--bya*
bar an -bya,
m. bharad-bhydm, m. dtma'-bhydm.'\
(pepovr-o-iv,
BaiiJ.ov-O'iv,
a.
asma-bya.
cjiJjaj/
beginning with
b,
and always
ce as conjunctive vowel
raoch-e-byo.
We find, also,
jic^PpiSA}^
/,
when
on the other
hajid, the
/ of
^m
nt
is
berezen'-bya,
" tplendentibuSf"
brvat-byaiiniy
with
**
t,
contrary to
60.
rAJ>>Zs
word the
case
as often as
S.
word
p. 269,
twice
^WJ^
is
iK>M>>2i brvat
byahm ;
5>n4^
that
bhru),
would seem
>2
rAJ^ brvat
I
bru (Sansk.
word
in
it is
not likely,
is
^^aj^
nt, the last
brvant
its
theme:
it
would be a
last
participial form,
and would
but one also
sin-
consonant of
may
be rejected.
Or
are
we
to regard brcat
byahm
as a
form of that
gular kind that unites with the termination of the ablative singular that
/ \
bru would
still
be the theme
i\r,
in Sanskrit
;
with a consonant
242
lAKSUUT.
Yn.
FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.
GREEK.
MTBrANIAN.
bhrdtri-bhydm*
bhrdtar-e-bya,
vachd-hj/a,
narep-o-iVy
hxe{a)~o^iv,
....
.
n.
vach6-hhydm,^
GENITIVE, LOCATIVE.
[G. Ed.
p. 261.]
225. These
^fft^ 6s,
two
cases, in Sanskrit,
have
tlie
common termination
the singular
which
may
be connected with
genitive
termination.
examples:
mftw pafy-6s,
^^t^
^^PRt^ vachas-ds.
In
Zend
is
this termination
seems
to
have
likewise in
:
PLURAL.
NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE,
226.
^^
all
as
for the termination of the nominative plural, with which, as in the cognate languages, the vocative is identical in
clensions.
I
de-
and the
in
.9,
which
that
gender,
in
the
the plural.
t';eir
The
one another, as
it
comparative, and superlative, and the highest degree belongs to the dual.
In
Zend
36
VT ar before
to^r
is
short-
ened
($.127.).
243
the Latin es* with anorganic length of quantity through the influence of the s but elsewhere simple
aj^j3A)/a)2^P
-es,
;
s.
duhitar-as,
2J dughdhar-as'cha, dvyarep-e^,
of the termination
is
dukter-es,
matr-
227.
The a
melted
a of the base to d
thus,
<i4illl
from vrika
(.
IVLFAas
69,).
In
however, with
the vowel of the base, the Gothic has preserved the full ter-
mination
asm
to
is
weakened
135. 191.)
And WF
d,
with
what
has
has been just said, that the Gothic gibos, from simple
its
s
GIBO,
case designation.
228.
in
a refuse, in
Sanskrit,
tion,
full
nominative designawith
and in place of
i,
of an
which,
i,'\
according
the a
of the
base forms ^
* Vide
.
di;
797. p. 1078.
t As
tliat
is
lengthened in
first
many
other cases to
is
^ e, and
all is
conjoined, there
as in the singular
6 for 6s
;
is
and
in
Greek
while in
This opinion
is
CriU
244
hence, Sanskrit ^
[G. Ed.
p. 263.]
FORMATION OF CASES.
t^,
Zend
w^^
to the
td,
Gothic
thai,
"
this,**
answering
feminine form
irra
tds,
To
this corresponds, in
Greek, rot
i,
(Doric for
ol).
In
Greek and
which
mained
.
in the masculine
pronominal bases in
{='^
;
a,
116.);
but
all
first
it
declen-
sion, have, in
hence,
terrce
\vKOt,
(from
The Latin
fifth
declension,
although in
first (. 121.),
has
narrower
restrictions than
the
more
correctly,
lupi,
want of inflexion
that in
gives, indeed,
wilkai=\vKot,
Honour,
it
this
respect
has not
is,
ds, . 207.)
fication
thus, frequently,
^^jud^
zxu^^fxi?
Crit. . 271.)
shews
itself clearly
cases, as
The form
which occurs
244.),
t^,
itself; thus,
H^H
tay-as.
In Zend, the
pronominal form in e occurs, for the most part, in the accusative plural and thus the abovementioned vispes-cha 1. c. stands probably as accusative, although, according to Anquetil's inaccurate tiuuslation, it
might
245
luces^
for I believe
[G. Ed.
p.
264.]
in a
and
"
lupos^ rests
^HTOTT dsas
(.
from
^ffW stoma.*
Guna, but in
its
weakened form
which, before
u,
(for suniu-s,
telligible
from
sunau-s,) a
without the
Guna
shewn
melted
70.);
to belong to the
German.
Ii
bases the
i
Guna
is
down with
The
to long
(written
ei, .
from GASTI,
ANSTI
;
(cf. p. 105.).
2jend employs
Guna
or not at pleasure
hence
^^^^ojajq)
paity-6, or paitay-6,
'|jjas2)
pasv-d, or pasav-6.
in Zend,
as in
the
full as,
s,
which belongs
is
the
the
which
too
per-
This fonn
is,
in
my
t The
i,
which, according to
$. 41., is
in spite of the
I
a preceding the
is,
y.
it
very
diflBcult to
come
first, I
have
directed
my
attention towards
it.
Bumouf
Joom.
hu-matOy
bene-cogitata"
we
has
246
FORMATION OF CASES.
speechless gender, has been dropped.
Tliis
the
same
"
case,
as
(Zend
:
6,
aj^joaj
ascha).
The
pura
In
;'
are examples
\
A5yA5Ajja3As
ashavan-a,
M^^Mxs(c/c
AJ^Ajy
nar-a,
" homines
;"
aj^^^^aj
ast-a,
is
"
ossaJ'"'
no-
melted
down with
the
received condition
its loss
language, according to a
by lengthening the
final
either compensated
We
must
with a con-
sonant.
The examination
of this subject
is,
prone,
neuter in the
class of a bases
When,
e.g.
"human
being,"
am nevertheless
aj
not an
abbreviation of
no other part of
Zend Grammar
form belongs
culine
stands for
^rw
ds:
am
to the neuter.
The
by
number it is clear that gender and personality are far in The personality of the individual is lost in the abstract
;
and
so far
we can but
praise the
it,
Zend
We must
blame
however, in
it
and that in
this
respect
it
which
has very
much impeded
hundred"; chathwdro
(masc.) sata *<four hundred." In general the numbers " three " and *'four " appear to have lost the neuter ; hence, also, thrayo cunfn-a, "three
nights," chathwdro csafn-a, " four nights": in Vend. S. p. 237, on the other
hiind, elands
."
although
NOMMATIVE, VOCATIVE
LDEAL.
247
[G. E<L
;
p. 267.3
for thd,
HVAa;
*'A<Bc"
for
to,
MiJ^
yd,
It-
"qiuB,"'^
opposed to
ajoaj agha,
" peccataT
from agha.
the a of the base has been dropped before that of the termialthough the form might also belong to a theme
but
riara,
which
also occurs,
much
less frequently
than nar
whence
also,
From
(also,
"word,"
appears,
ajciWiu^
"speech," we
vach-a);
e.g.
find
frequently vdch-a
S. p. 34,
erroneously as
it
Vend.
From
JA>AJX3)A5 ashavan, " pure," occurs very often the neuter plural
:
'shvana-a
as,
too,
although
-ery rarely,
extends
(though
it
the imorganic extremely rare ashavana, than from the genuine and most
common
aghavan., in the
weak
cases
ashaun or cushaon.
;
Participial forms,
I
common
and
any ground
the Vend.
for
assuming that the Zend, like the Pali and Old High Gerparticipial
theme by a vowel
addition.
In
we
find
corruTnpaitia (i)."
and means
So
literally
is
"
f^
kshi, intrans.
"to
be mined ").
tar
is
much
and
is
which
in
follows, as also
from asha-
van-a, that where there are more forma of the theme than one, the Zend,
like the Sanskrit (see
Gnunm.
refrain
from ad-
ducing other examples for the remarkable and not to have been expected
proposition, that the Zend, in variance from the Sanskrit, forms its plural
I..atin
nomm-a, Greek
T-uXay-a,
248
nation, for
it
FORMATION OF CASES.
could not be dropped, because the base-vowel
first,
concrete.
:
The
this
old
is
It
Greek ra
This a
is
date,
from the
a.
come, in Greek, o or
maintained
its
204.), in Latin, w, o,
and has
and the
a,
which
This
a,
become
offspring
shortened.
6, e,
its
u,
may even
pass for a
232. Bases in
and u may,
we read
from
in
j^jaj^
p. 313, gaiiis
renders by "une
119),
naro-vaipaya,
[G. Ed.
p. 268.]
e.
"
actions
means
Burnouf8 MS.
for
divides thus,
following OlshauI
have no ground assuming that in Zend there exists a preposition and, " without," so tliat and peretha miglit mean " without a bridge " ; and th&t peretu would,
sen (p. 6), but with the various reading andperetha.
in the singular instrumental, iotta perethwa or peretava.
fore, that
I suppose, there-
peretu
may
negative
an have been
249
may
form of a semi-
Guna
in Olshausen, p.
>spJ>>^JC^
7),
ydtiu
same
magic" (according
mo gicien).
sins
of
sorcery
quetil's
(An quetil, "la magie tres mauvaise"); and in AnVocabulary is (p. 467) 9^oju>^ ydthvaiim, the
of our
base
yfitit,
which
means,
the
to
An
V. S.
p. 122,
seven Indies
(Anq.
11. p.
270).
It
("up-starred?") in opposition
to
^^wgty
(?)
^j^As^oo-wjiOAy
[G. Ed.
p. 269.]
An
is
a u base
the very
frequently occurring
233.
vShu, "goods,"
(cf.
from >^v^l}vdhu.
in
The
interrogative base ki
Sanskrit forms only the singular nominative-accusative (neuter) foFT ki-m, but is
elsewhere replaced by ka
this base, the use of
whence, in
is
Zend,
what ":
which
very
limited,
aj^^^ ky-a*',
and
* V.S.p. 341. A5WJU56jUJ^ 'C^3^ A'-C^ Xi^Xil^ ^^A)A5 AJi^^ M^^/^Mi juoj/o kya aeti vacha yoi henti gdthdhva thris dmruta (erroneously thris dmruta), " "VVnat are the words which are thrice said in the
prayers (songs) 1"
to
Note
at . 231., occasion
So
also
V. S.
p. 85,
xi^^^ kya
before
250
this
FORMATION OF CASES.
form
is
the
still
i
require
of the
the termination
a (above,
may
abovementioned hendva
from
vairi,
were in
tive
use.
As
i
and adjec-
bases in
are
wanting, the
base
numeral base
/,
THUI,
the
pronominal
very im-
" three
hundred
")
and
iy-a,
monosyllabic
its
simple
thus, in Sanskrit,
fnm
bhiy-d,
from
bhl
234.
The Sanskrit
a,
Zend- European
neuter
an ^
p. 270.]
i,
[G. Ed.
perhaps as the weakening of a former a the final vowel of the base is length(. 6.)
;
it
placed
(. 133.)
madhu-n-i.]
hence ^^Tf?T c?dn4-n-i, mr\fm vdri-n-i,* ^\^^ The bases which terminate with a single con;
sonant
t^
prefix
to
it
a nasal,
kya ratavo,
n following
Crit.
r. 84''.),
an
TT
r,
letters,
is,
under
certain conditions,
changed into
f^ysn vlswd,
t In the Vedas, the ni in a bases is frequently found suppressed ; e.g. '^ omnia" from viswa. In this way the Sanskrit is connected
this coincidence
is
only exter-
nal ; for as the Sanskrit nowhere uses a neuter tcrminationa, f^fv^viswd can-
not well be deduced from v'lspa+a, but can only be explained as an abbreviation of the d-ni, wliich likewise occurs in the Vedas, as also ^'iR
purii,''^
9, 10).
251
;
is
lengthened
hence
I
^^rftl vachdn-si,
mm^fi
ndmdn-i.
and
h(e-c
quce
is,
however,
while
it
tolerably distant
kd-n-i,
is
ke
from ka+i
(.212.).
is
age
is
[G. Ed.
p. 271.]
quce
kS.
We
ZEND.
GREEK.
LATIN.
lup'-l.
LITHtJAN.
GOTHIC.
m.
vrikds.
tS.
velirkdonhd.,t KVKOI,
tS,
w'dkai,
tie,-{-
vulfos.
thai.
m.
n.
f.
rot.
is-Ci,
ddnd-n-U
jihwds,
data.
Slop a,
duna.
terrae.
....
daura.
hizvdo,
X^joa/,
rankos. yibos.
* The termination
yH tha or
"ff
tis
tos, not to
ia,
Greek
With
akin to
it, I
would
refer prelimi-
my
.
treatise
Words"
t See
(l)y F.
Diiramler), p. 2.
229.
X This form belongs not to the base gular, ta-s, and nearly all the other cases
TA
j
(=(1
to
tn),
whence, in the
sin-
TIA, whence, through the influence of the i, tie has been developed (cf. p. 174, Note* and and whence, in the dative dual and plural, tie-m, tie-vis. The . 193.) nominative plural is, however, without a case termination. The original
but
;
form
TIA
^^
194.;
while
the base
shya^ see
$.
65.)
is
252
SANSKRIT.
f.
FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.
ido,
GREEK.
rat,
LATIN.
is-tae,
LITHUAN.
tes,
GOTHIC
th6s.
ids,
m. patay-as,
f.
paity-6,*
hos-es,\
TTopri-es,
....
gastei-s,
prttay-aSf
vdri-n-i,
dfrity-6*
var'-a,
mess*-es,i dwy-s,
anstei-s.
n.
mari-a,
iy-a-
n
Pf.
eu
ky-a,l
bhavishyanty-as, hushyainty-u*
m
n.
f.
sunav-as,
tanav-as,
pasv-o,
tanv-6,*
TTlTV-eS,
pecurs,
socru-s,
sunu-s,
sunyu-s.
*? f.
to
....
handy II- .
madhu-n-i,
vadhw-as,
madhv-a,
fiedv-a,
pecu-a,
m.f.gdv-as,
is szie.
its
geU'S,^
^o(0-ef,
bov-es.f
From the pronominal declension the form ie (from ia) has found way into the declension of the adjective also so that the base GERA,
:
GERIE;
and nom.
gerie-m for
This
for gerai.
is this, is
that the
oibom
(cf.
yaunikkie-i.)
* Seep.
t See
X
163,
Note t. from
if,
p. 1078.
To
this kg-a,
Latin gui-a
is
(quiaiiam, quiane),
as I scarce doubt,
singular neuter
(cf.
'"''
\h&l," quia is cliarly shewn to be an accusative the In the meaning meaning " because " is less apt for tliis case, and would be better expressed by an instrumental or an ablative; but in the singular ^twd we must be content to see the idea " because " expressed by an accusative. On the
signifies
grammar.
We
**
bovesque;" but
we
read jte>C(0
M^
td,'*illa,"
$.231.
253
UTHUAN.
GOTHIC.
ZEND.
GREEK.
LATIN.
ndv-as,
vucli-as,
....
vdch-6,*
va(f )-e?,
oit-eq,
....
vocs,f
....
....
fiyand-
m. bharanf-as,
m. dlmdn-as,
II.
barent 6*
(pepovr-e^,
aifxov-e^,
ferent-es,f
....
asman-6,
sermon-es,f
ahman
namun...
.J
ndmdn-i,
bhrdtar-as,
duhitar-as,
ndman-a,
brdtar-6*
Toc\av-a,
-narep-eg,
nomin-a,
fratr-es,f
tn.
f.
dughdhar-(j*
....
....
m.
n.
ddtdr-as,
ddtdr-6*
vachanh-a,%
dator-es,f
oper-Ot
vachdns-i,
....
THE ACCUSATIVE.
236. The bases which end with a short vowel annex ^ n in Sanskrit, and lengthen the final vowel of the base
hence,
'"J<*1^
We might
imagine
this
n to be related to the
from
^Tfir ami.
The
masculine, an abbreviation of
tire in the
ns,||
Gothic
but
has been
according to
. 94.,
* See
p. 163.
Note
t See Note t
I
in preceding page.
The Gothic r
BROTHAR becomes
S.
Or AJWjj^Aj^
vachenha.
p 127, rwmenha^
{y{ff^ namas,
mmo
and as governed
by aj7(^7g_j
berethra,
"from him
who
II
him
offering."
The Old
Prussian, too, exhibits in the ace. pi. ns, e.g. tdva-na, naTtpas,
hr,
from
n, see . 517.
Remark.
254
sonants, and has
FORMATION OF CASES.
lengthened, as
it
appears, in compensa;
but has
permitted the v to volatilize to v.f In fact, Kvko-v has the same relation to hvKov^ that rvTrrovcri has to tutttovo"*, from
[G. Ed.
p. 275.]
Ti^TrTovT/.J
For
-nocrt-a^,
ix^v-as,
itocrt-v^, i-)(dv-v^,
as the
and
t;
bases in
all
hence "q^ padas = iroSa^ and even in the most vigorous period of the language ns could not have attached itself
nation
;
:
Thus
r(3lHH
{*'
vidwdhs-am, in the
uninflected
nominative
vidwdn,
sapiens").
t As
Tvi^rav{T)s^ fiikavs),
Hartung
(1.
c p. 263)
is
sense the
in iEolic accusative
forms like
&c.
As
quoted by him,
culines,
believe that they have followed the analogy of the massufficiently distinguish their
gender by the a
first
preceding the
we
and
in vs, as neither
has the Gothic in the corresponding declension an ns, nor does the Sanskrit exhibit
rison, p. 62).
I
cf.
Rask
in Vater's Tables of
Compaa truly
It
rCtTTovTo-i,
monstrous form, which never existed in Greek, while the tvhtovti before
us answers to all the requirements of Greek
Grammar,
anti,
as to that of the
enti,
whole
Sansk
Zend
Goth, nt';
But
to arrive at ovai
from ovri
so strange a
form as ovrai
become
ovo-i is
proved
from
it,
by the
into 2,
(cf. p.
ovon
(\tov<ri
not 8aifu>vai)y
ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.
the Ionic arat, aro, for vrai, jto, a
255
from the places where the vocalization of the v was necessary, to those also where v might be added {-neneldaTai, rerpd(jtaTai
;
KeKKtvTai).
pears to
me
more
in point, as, in
my
opinion, the n
in the presupposed forms, like "^^Wt vrikahs, ^THI^ patins, \vKovg, has the same object that it has in the 3d person
plural
;
viz. allusion to
The
of
in-
an admixture which
to the
is
least of all
mere lengthening
an
final
pression of the
too,
a* thus
for as or ns
may
perhaps,
menon, which
compensation
is is
even
if it
were
so,
we must
still
be
satisfied, if the
in all
the one,
appearance under
* Monosyllabic bases only have preserved the a as the case sign in the singular nominative
(.
137.)
hence,
f^t^T
striy-ag,
^^eminas,"
vmT( bhuvas, ''terras," from "Bfi stri, Vfbhu. There is scarce a doubt that this form originally extended to polysyllabic bases also for besides
;
{. 238.),
stance that in the actual condition of the Sanskrit language the accusative plural shews, in general, an inclination to
weaken
itself,
and thus
266
feminine gender,
able than n.
FORMATION OF CASES.
too,
is
more
suit-
of
grammar
which
is
annexed by masculines
in
and neuters
has) is
feminine
t6s (eas,
= ITW
;
feminine
may be regarded
follow the ex-
masculines.
nomi-
227.)
ahman-s,
for fiyand-as,
ahman-as.
238.
final
vowel lengthen
it,
to
compensate, as
appears, for
is
formed from
and
thto^ tanu-s
from tanw-as.
spect, only
The Greek
Cy,
u-ej.
The Zend,
like the
Greek, follows in
its
pasv-6 {pasv-al-cha,
i,
or,
with
Guna,
paitay-o, pasav-6.
In feminine bases in
ti-s,
u,
occur at
(Vendidad
S. p. 313.),
-H3j>Jg7^
erezu-s,
"rectos,''''
"pontes."
239.
Masculine bases in
a5 a,
mos" (Vend.
[G. Ed.
S. p. 65.).
The
p. 277.]
copiously quoted
as,
As^jj^eyj^-'^
"
non-
ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.
257
agricolasquey*
The form
to
a}cijjjv>j^>7jC3aj
a^^au-
remarkable, as
there
is
no reason elsewhere
and
this
also could
auxiliary vowel
that, in
however
unless, indeed,
we are
has been
More important,
and
Av>^7(jojj streus,
we have
^76au
it
athr-o, in
But how
is
to be explained ?
nns,
believe in
K6^^'ov\
the
a5
a has be-
come
c e
a and
^ ah,
is jj i,
must, after
u,
appear as M^
s.
in the V. S. p. 311,
^g/ ner-ans
But
formerly thought
I could,
95.
by
cases, in
which no ground
an original
sibilant,
cha
(cf. ^. o&>.
more important,
Towel.
hereafter)
cases,
>/,
may be regarded as derived from a participial nominative. Other which might suggest occasion to assume, in Zend, a euphonic after have been nowhere met with by me.
8
258
FORMATION OF CASES.
4Aa>i*i)A5 a7>aj am^as^ -M^^ify iM^jJM^ ddidt at nerans mazdd ahurd ashaond, &c. "da quidem hominibus, magnv Ahure !
240.
As a
letters
we cannot mis-
state of
unorganic addition, the more inconvenient consonantal declension into that of the vowels, I cannot therefore think
that
it
New
Persian plural
of
termination an,
which
is
is
restricted
to
the designation
thus,
^^^li/o
T^TT
241.
dn, applied to
fitted to
garding
that
to
New
the
Persian
plural
termination which
is
appended
suffix,
appellations
of
inanimate
objects.
is
in
the
formation
of words
is
which
(. 128.),
peculiarly
is still
^^
as
which
In the more frequently used in Zend than in Sanskrit. 56*. or enha form anha 235.) plural, these Zend neuters (.
is
;
New
Persian
answers to
Zend
and
often,
too,
correctly
but,
it
except
could not
its
fVorter'''' is,
in respect to
New
its
Persian hd.
As, however,
German
s
has,
r,
from
o
changed
into
and
into
(later
e),
have
no
* Thus in Spanish the whole plaral has the termination of the Latin
accusative.
ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.
doubt the
ir
259
er
Middle
is
and
which
suffix
makes
its
man
neuters,
^m
as;
Grimm,
pp. 622
and 631).*
242.
Here
:
mation
SANSKRIT.
ZEND.
GREEK.
lATTN.
UTHDAJC.
tcilku-s,
GOTHIC
vrika-n.
ddnd-Tt-i,
vehrka-n.
ddta.
hizvd-o.
td-o,
KVKO-V^f
Suipay
Xwp<i-?,
rd-.
7ro<T/-af,
lupd-s,
vulfa-ns.
daiira.
dona.
terras,
is-ta-s.
....
jihwd-s.
tds.
patt-v.
ranka-s. gibd-s.
ta-s.
thd-s.
paify-d,\
dfrity-d,1[
hosf-es,
....
....
dwy-s.
gasti-ns.
bhiy-os,
prili-s,
iTopTt-a^,
TroprT-f,
mess-s.
....
ansti-ns,]
dfrili-s.
....
mari-a,
vdri-n-i.
var-a.
kya.
tSpi-a,
....
....
iy-a.
p. 280.]
....
....
....
....
....
bhavishyanti- s, bushyainii-s,\
....
pecu-s.
[G.Ed.
sunii-s,
sunu-n.
bhuv-as.
tanu-s.
pasv-6,\
sunu-ns.
....
tanu-s.
ttlTV-^,
....
socru-s,
....
....
handu-ns
* .
.
madhH-n-i,
madhv-a,X
fiedv-a.
pecu-a,
* This
ir,
however,
is
theme
originally
Hence, compared
^. 168.),
Bu
terminations in
Cf. pp. 148
More regarding
X This form
is
peso-tanu, which signifies the hind part of the body (\199.), but
also
used in the sense of " blow on the hinder part of the body "
and
in this
manner
it
as^aso* <A>fe>^JA
AJyAJ^<|>jJCa)
hacha
260
8AKSKBIT.
f.
FORMATION OF CASES.
vadfiH-s,
m. f. yds*
f.
gdu-8.
va(f)-aj',
vdch-d,'\
barent-6,1f oTT-a?,
bov-es.
ndv-as.
t m.
m.
n.
vdch-as,
hharat-as,X
voc-es,
<})epovr-as,
$aifj.ov-as,
ferent-es,
fiyand-%
dtman-as,
asman-d,^
sermon-es,
. .
ahman-%
ndmdn-i,
bhrdtri-n,^
ndman-a,
brdthr-eus?
raAav-a,
Tiarep-ag,
nomin-ai
fratr-es,
namdTHi
m.
f.
....
duyter-es,
duhitns,^
ddtri-n,^
m.
n.
dator-es,
....
....
vachdns-it
oper-a,
THE INSTRUMENTAL.
[G. Ed.
p. 281.]
it,
243.
The formation of
this case,
and what
is
connected with
it is
224.
commet
du tana/our). In regard
to the annperetha,
men-
tioned at
232.,
it
is
th can only bo
occasioned
by a
<wJ to
theme of the
concluding substantive
:i
iff
9^ (V
122.), for
7l^^^gav-as.
The
on the
(also
gdu ;
weak
cases
(. 129.),
distorted.
In the noai-
we
A^>eM
t See
See
Note
J.
t See ^.129.
$.
127.
Note and
$. iMO.
Note
%.
INSTRUMENTAL PLURAL.
by which a summary view of the subject
261
may
be assisted.
As
its
character
(for
see
215.), in
bhh
vqTJ
terminations.
SANSKBTT.
ZESl>.
GREEK.
6e6-<piv,
UlTIK.
UTHUAN.
GOTH. DAT.
m,
vriki-bhis,
....
tehrkd-is,
vo-bls
wilka-is,
vu^a-m,
trikd-is,
f.
jihiL'd-bhis,
hizvd-bis,
dfriti-bis,
pnti-bhis,
m.
f.
sunu-bhis,
nau-bhis,
dtma'-bhis,
pasu-biSj
....
ansii-m,
ranko-viis, gibd-m.
awi-mis,
iunu-mis,
sunu-m.
....
asma-bis,
m.
n.
ndfna-bhis, ndma-bis,
.... ....
ahma -m.
.
namn-am.
p. 282.]
[G. Ed.
Mention has already been made of the suffix of Only the s of the Latin bus has , 215.
in
been
left
the
first,
occasionally, also, in
of
from
specu-bus),
must be
by ambo-bus,
in
dtw-bus.
o, u,
From
from an original
as occurs
Hartung,
p. 261).
In
the
first
Vide
t See
$.160.
66b.
Note:
and 128.
26!^
FORMATION OF CASES.
is
wanting;
yet the
compensate for
283
weakened the a of the base to T, which; the bu which has been dropped, has been
mdlo from mdvolo.
ZEND,
vehrka^i-byd,
lengthened;
[G. Ed.
p.
Compare,
LATIN.
lupi-s.
terri-s,
SANSKRIT.
LITHUANIAN.
m. vrike-bhyas,
f.
w'dka-7n{u)s*
jihwd-bhyas,
hizvd-byd,
paiti-by6}
dfriti-byd,
Tanko-m{u)s.
m. pati-bhyas,
f,
hosti-bus.
priti-bhyas,
messi-bus,
awi-m{u)s.
m.bhavishyantt-bhyaSfbushyainti-byd, ....
....
sunu-m{u)s,
m. sunu-bhyas,
f.
pasu-byd,
vdch-e-byo,
pecu-bus,t
voc-i-bus.
vag-bhyas,
....
m. bharad-bhyaSf
baren-by6,%
ferent-i-bus,
....
....
m. &tma-bhyas, m. bbrdtri-bhyoa,
asmd-byd,
brdtar-e-byd,
sermon-i-bm; ....
fratr-i-bus,
THE GENITIVE.
245.
The
genitive
plural
in Sanskrit,
in substantives
and adjectives, has^the termination ^t*^ dm, in the Zend anm, according to . 61. The Greek wv bears the same relation to the original
e^l^oiv
does to
va<*<^IH
adaddm (.
The Latin
has, as usual^
See $.21
t The mascaline
by an anorganic increment,
and dative singular,
1.).
And
in the dual
p. 35,
also,
PATJ had
I
to be given
up (Mielcke,
Rem.
I liftve selected
PECU,
few
ried
cases,
it
>Ji)a)q>
in a have car-
through
may
here also
Note*,
p. 241.
GENITIVE PLURAL.
preserved the labial
final
263
original form, but
;
nasal in
its
by
its
hence,
short
a,
as in
In Gothic, however, the d, which has been left, shews itself under two forms, and thereby an unorganie difference has
been
introduced
between
the
feminine genitive
;
termi-
partly
place, in Sanskrit, a
short, is lengthened.
partakes of
it,
for
a and au
6.
hence, ^"^/Aj^^tyg^
vehrka-n-anm,
9"y-w'jj>^,
jihva-n-anm.
To
um
.
in places
the reader to
. 119.
126.
mentioned in
and
may have
157.)
thns the
form ferenti-a ;
it
is
The same is the case with the i of the neuter bequeathed by the deceased feminine theme FE'
RE ATI.
, 126.,
On
we must now
Zend vdch-e-byo.
annex an
Here
it is
to
be observed
we
also of the
common dialect.
264
FORMATION OF CASES.
6-ti-6,
e-n-a;
hence, Old
High German
aife-n-a.
247.
kep6-n-6,
y
We
find the bases in short
and long
i,
in Zend, if
:
[G. Ed.
p. 285.]
on the
Guna
"aviumr from
vi.
Bases in
>
only pasv-anm
on
like >yAj^
nam, "corpse" (cf. veKv^ according to With Guna 9>^a>j3aj^ hitherto only u-n-anm.
(. 27.).
Guna weakened
sdm* for
^T^^
248,
iRTf
dm
formerly universal
may be
case-suffix,
dm
and the
this
which in the
the old
228.),
no wider scope;
sdm, according to
rum.'"
hence
.
thi-ze
(.
86.
5.)
= te-shdm
(for tS-
21.)
"horum";
thi-zo
td-sdm,
"ha-
Here
the
a, like
i (.
THA, THO,
appears weakened to
jective a
and
Old Prussian
"rwyJ
GENITIVE PLURAL.
(from fat-sdm) from the base
TT to.
2G5
r,
as
many
other places;
High German,
and
thi-z6, of
To
rum
for
sum
249.
We
the genitive^:
SANSKRIT.
ZEND.
GREEK.
LATIK.
LTTHTTAS'.
GOTHIC.
vrikd-n-dm,
\^.te-shdm,
vehrka-n-anm, KvK-tav,
tae-shaiim,
r-atVy
lupo-rumt wilk'-u,
isto-rum,
vulf-i.
thi-zi.
f-H,
jihwd-n-dm,
hizva-n-anm,
yoapa-uiv,
terra-rum, rank'-H,
kep6-n-6.f
228.), found
its
way
and
fifth declension,
which
is
originally iden-
with the latter (), 121 and 137.). The transplanting of the rum termination into the declensions mentioned was the easier, as aH pronorau
in the genitive plural belong to the second and
first
declension.
Forms,
however, remain, especially in the old languages, which evince that the
language was not always equally favourable to the bringing back the termination
rum {deum,
socium,
&c.).
On
rum
with
e as conjunctive vowel,
at least, the
are to be regarded
;
and
go may
gava.
:
Sanskrit ^TTT
sdm
lead us to
in the pro-
noun
to the Latin.
The forms
been dropped.
It is
as the San-
S,
of the
from
uftCova.
\vKo-v-(i)v,
^apdav from
x.'^pa-v-wv
see . 246.
266
SANSKRIT.
FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.
GREEK.
ra-coj/,
LATIN.
LITUUAN.
QOTHIC
tki-z6.
td-sd7n,
d-onhanm,*
Ihray-anm,
dfnti-n-anm,
istd-rum,
e-n.
tri-u,
Q"- n.tray-d-ndm,
n''
^3
rpi-cdv.
nopri-Uiv,
t^6v-(i>v,
tri'um,
thriy-S.
pnh-n~am,
suniL-n-am,
messi'um,
awi-Ut
ansf-e.
suniv-S.
m.
pasv-anm,
tanu-n-anm,
pecu-um.
socru-um,
sun-u,
''
f.
ianu-n-dm,
gav-dniy
irtTv-cov,
handiv-L
gav-anm.
i8o(f)<3^
va{F)-S>v,
6tt-Q)v,
bov-um.
.... ....
....
Jiyand-i
f.
nd-vdm.
....
vdch-anm.
barent-anm,^
....
voc'um.
f.
vdch'dm.
m. n. bharat-dm.
^epovT-cov ferenti-urrif
8atfj.6v-uiv,
m. m.
dtmon-dm,
asman-anm,
bhrdfp^n'dmi brdthr-anm,X
Ttarep-oiv, fratr-um,
....
This word often occurs, and corresponds to tho Sanskrit ^TPBT^T d-sdm
**
(''
56^.)
from axj^
td,
which
am
unable to quote.
The compound
;
t Or,
also,
p. 131,
also
This and the following genitives from bases in ar are clearly raoro p;'nuiiie
to the cognate
ri,
it
From /Mt
" fire,"
on account of tho
dtar,
fri^iiji
tisri-rt-dm
(Gramm.
Crit.
r.
256.).
find the
form
dughdher-ahm
dtujder-anm
(p.
(cf. p.
the
Codex
has, however,
472, L.
the more
common.
267
plural locative
is
[G. Ed.
p. 288.1
t|
in Sanskrit,
(.
su,
which
shu
Zend,
(.
52.);
while from
>o
hiu
The more
to a Sanskrit
Wswa.
me
is
to be the original
more common
ti
in
^ ua and
ya should free
T^
far
ukta
is
42.).
The
termination
extension of
that of a
by a lately-added
especially as
in
Zend no
But
it
if
^ sioa
si-bi
is
nation,
is
base
sua, of
The same
iu-bi,
relation
which, in Latin,
tured from
su-i),
has to
Sanskrit
"rrwn?
ai {(riv)
has
su.\
in
tribui"
is
since the
pronoun in
the latter
t Regarding the termination iv of the pronoun of the 1st and 2d person see . 222. From the ^olic form dfifitaiv, quoted by Hartung
(p.
is
an abbreviation of
It
o-iv
if it
were
so,
the v also in
appears to
me more
fluence
common
;
an influence which
268
[G. Ed. as in
(. 2.),
p.
FORMATION OF CASES.
289] 251.
The bases
i
;
in
many
to
other cases, an
ot
but from a
;
+1
is
formed ^
corresponds
t
hence, KvKoi-ai
^V^
vrihS-shu.
Hence the
r}-,
in
Greek has
either preserving
its full
;
value or sub-
remains pure
hence, fvid^
best
116.
names
of towns
.
'kdrjvrja-i
(Buttmann,
7.
and Hartung,
p. 461.).*
252.
difference
se,
and the
original and
more powerful a, which, in the masculine, has The ending sa is plainly from the swa, softened into e.
(p.
assumed above
which
253.
it is
267,
1.
7.) to
made by
m.
f.
KvKoi-a-t.
OXvjjLiriaa-i, "xidpai-a-t.
"noprt-cri.
ranko-sa,
dwi-sa,
^f.
^m,
(g-
sunu-shu, pasu-shvQy
go-shu,
lydv-ai.
(Bov-ai.
vav-<ri.
m. f.
....
....
JS f.
nau-shu,
* The
common
lost,
termination
formed by curtailing
ot-o-t, ai-tri,
uon,
is
here
tailed instrumental
^<iw
Greek dative
t
otily
it
to in
copious instances.
LOCATIVE PLURAL.
SANSKRIT.
f.
260
GREEK.
ott-ct/
ZEXD.
UTHDAH.
idk-shu,
vdc-sva?
brdfar-e-shva ?
....
ra. n. bharat-su,
(pepov-au
m.
atma-su,
bhrdtri-shu,
m.
n.
asma-hva* ....
vach6-hva,X
irarpa-aiA
ejreo'-<r/.
vachas-su,
Thus,
uahaji,
in the
Vend. Sade,
p. 499, AJ'AJja)>
Xiy^wxi^MA ddmahva, from im^j^ daman. form is not, as is generally supposed, a conjunctive vowel, but rests on a transposition as thpaKov for ebapKov, and in Sanskrit '^^\{\\drdkshydmi, "I will see," for ^T^fir </arA-.<A^amj (Sansk. Gramni.
and
p. 600,
t The a
in this
$.34b,)
(compare
rea-crapai),
which, by preserving the original vowel, agrees with the Sanskrit base
fitccr better
than
The same
theme of dpvos
has, as appears
rejected a vowel
in
removed from
place.
The whole
( tjnri),
is
REN appears to
"a man," for dpijv properly means " male sheep." The a of dpvaa-i
281.
:
Rem. 2.).
it is
It
ismore
difficult to
give any
word must have had, besides its three themes YIAT, from which came vldai, as yovaai from
latter agrees
rONAT,
the
with
^fmjdnu.
X
we
AnquetU translates
ira-
the former by " au lever du soleil," and the latter by " a /a nuit." It is
possihle to pronounce these forms aught but derivatives
OJAJ ai (<^ 6, . 66'>.)
from themes in
Most of the
which occurs
very frequently in various forms, spring from a theme in ?m ar, and the
interchange of
ajQ>Ajjiv5(S^
is
a similar case
to that in Sanskrit,
^5^
and together
with
270
G.
Ed.
p.
FORMATION OF CASES.
291 .]
*
Remark.
to
which
The
dative eaai (
= ^rw as-su)
itself to
an exwhich,
to be adopted
(.
241.)
(from
is
and
thin,
from
as),
in
which are the plural themes, with which the nominative, accu-
identical,
dative,
sirum, chalpirum;
yvvaiKe(T(Tt, noX'ieacri,
and
others,
in-
creased themes
logy of 'EIIE2.
KYNE2, NEKYE2, &c., according to the anaFrom the doubled 2 one may then be renoKiecri, fn^veat),
jected (dmKTecr/i/,
self be
or the doubling of a
2 by itThis,
employed
as, for
veKV-crt.
with the
theme
^r^X ohar.
Sanskrit
"day"
"night," as
<;sapan, of
this latter
word has
pi.
also a
theme
in n,
/ajq)ajaoCS^
^^mxsM^CS^ csqfnanm
analogous with
is
(. 40. relative to
A/for
Q>p)
found in conS.
nection with the feminine numeral ^vjJ/MJJ^o tisranm, " trium " (Vend.
p. 246);
for
we
read,
I.
c.
. 163.,
asnahmcha
{=W^[^
nights."
ahndncha),
In Sanskrit,
its
by the suffix
meaning,
has arisen out of ^f^ii ahan, which, however, occurs only in compounds
(as
not
?
as
The
it
A/^AJAV}(3^ csafna
^ j\MMi<^ csafne, wliich might also be taken for the dative of ^ajq>A5ao<J$
csapatiy
LOCATIVE PLURAL.
in
271
.
most important
particulars, is adopted
ecrat
by Thiersch,
;
128.,
for the
draws from the neuter bases described in . 129., as EEAE2, the 2 which belongs to them, and, by a supposition, proved
to be erroneous,
BEAE
is
made
the
theme
and he divides
and,
I
forms
like
o-)(e(Ji^i
o-)(^e(r-(pt,
by
be-
from
o^e-(T<pi
while, as
218.),
base
tion,
'OXE2
in
however,
An
assimila-
from yovvaT-ai,
the second, not
so that the
first letter
has assimilated
the reverse.
the
first
.
In SeTraa-at
shall leave
undecided whether
the
be primitive, and
or whether
it
yrjpa^,
128.),
AEIIAS
AEDAT
with
TEPAT, KEPAT,
one
class.
If,
it is
Compare,
ami,
also,
c.
$. 149.,
aj^oJ
ithra,
ithra,
csa/ne,
this night,"
adverb aj/oj
" here,"
To
the theme
xiAxy*M^
same sound
and
csafna,
might
also be assigned,
:
which occurs
c.
^. 330. 331.,
csafiia,
in several
places elsewhere
" three
nights,'
ajAajac^
0.
231. Note J
it
frequently-occarring ablative
MM3?xs(ij&Mi^
csapardt, however,
if
we
the reading be
272
however, in
case-suffix,
all
FORMATION OF CASES.
these forms,
all
or
mv
to be the
and
that precedes
it
Homer
men-
present
itself as
the case
sent
it'is,
could pre-
itself,
namely, as
&c.,
while
eTrecroj, eitea-i,
not
eTreoj,
But
from
the assumption of
8.),
260,
ff.)
and Kiihner
(1.
c. .
255. R.
. 35.,
Kiihner says
ej (character
c.)
The
plural)
is
of the
and
or
I,
iv
fore, ecn{v)."
however, think
nominative
suffix
to
me, not to
be imagined.
If it
were
so,
is
how
which
e? in the
nominative
locative ending
^ su
so adapts
<Tiv,
itself,
by the form ^
to the Greek,
for
<Tl.
254.
After laying
it
down
single case,
may
We
cases,
FORMATION OF CASES.
273
we
it
parison.
MASCULIXE BASES IN
Nominative,
Sanski*it
vehrk-d,
a,
GREEK IN
O,
LATIN IN
U, O.
8IXGULAK.
vrika-s,
Lithuanian
wilka-s,
Zend
vrika-m, Lithua-
p.
294.]
"SLko-v,
Dative,
Sanskrit
u'ilkuL
Zend
vehrkdi,
Lithuanian
Ablative,
Sanskrit vrikd-t,
(see
. 181.).
Zend
Genitive,
Sanskrit
vrika-sya,
Greek
KvKo-{d)i6\,
Zend
* The meaning
in its first origin.
rests
is,
and so
is
the
theme
The connection
and
this
latter goes
languages.
The
and
labials,
by the corresponding
this
u.
labial
but lupus
is
is
the
Greek
\vKo-s :
it
is
While
are, in
Greek, separated by
t M. Reimnitz, whose ramphlet, "The System of Greek Declension" (Potsdam, 18.31), had not been seen by me before I complet* d the preceding
Part of this book, unfolds
(1.
c p.
the
274
Locative,
[G. Ed.
FOIIMATION OF CASES,
Sanskrit vrik^ (from vrika^-i),
. 196.), .
p. 296.] {maidhydi,
Lithuanian
195.) Latin
ivilke,
Gen. lup'-h
Vocative,
Greek
DUAL.
Nom.
ivilka,
Voc. wilku,
Zend Greek
vehrkd,
Xvku).
ZendvehrkaH-bya, Greek
Dat wilka-m
Rem.
1.),
Gen. Loc.
Lithuanian wilku.
PLURAL.
\vKo-vg,
236.),
Lithu-
the
Greek oto and its connection with the Sanskrit a-sya which
.
I have, withI
189.
have,
my
views in
my pamphlet
"
On
Case"
Academy
Here
AHMO,
in the suffix
by which
;
it is
and
is
with reference
which
is lost in drjuoio.
With
let reference
be mad<
and the identity of the Sanskrit suffix of words manushya, " man," as a derivative from Mann, with the genixq shya for
tive ending
sya, as in ^W^iT
.
With
the Greek, Latin, and Lithuanian forms XvVoi, hipi, wil/tai, see
228.
FORMATION OF CASES.
Instrumental, Sanskrit
vriki-blds,
275
vrikd-is*
Zend
Prakrit
. 220.),
deve-hin
(from
dSva,
"God,"
see
Greek
(. 215).
deo-iptv.f
Gotliic
Dat. Instr.
uulfa-m
Dat. Abl.
Sanskrit vrike-bhyas,
vehrkaei-byd,
Zend
[G. Ed.
p. 296.]
. 244.),
Lithuanian wilka-m(u)s
Genitive,
Latin lupo-rum
therefore one
noance
vrikdis,
trisyllables,
dissyllaWes.
t
(})iv
have remarked
at
ending
and the
thence-derived Prakrit
I
with dev^-hin.
f^ Mh, and the Latin bis in nobis, vobis ; and more than a conjecture here, also, in comparing 6(6 <^t This only is certain, that with the syllable fi? bhi, which
bottom of the case-forms fira
bhis,
nT bhyam,
Greek ^i
and
vzrnr
bhydm, as their
common
root (see
and
(Piv is also to
be associated.
with
narj- (Berl.
p. 51.), that
222.)
by the
(as in
&c.
. 222.).
The
from the usual dative-ablative plural termination VITO bhyas; again with
the corruption of s \o
v,
from
^ej,
and
in
^m
thas, j(j(
tas.
this
number
unlimited plurality.
I prefer,
however, to consider
fV^
bhis or
I^
bhyas.
T 2
276
Locative*
FORMATION OF CASES.
Zend vehrkaS-shva, anian wUkuse, Greek Dat. KvKot-at.
Sanskrit vriM-shu,
LitLii-
NEUTER BASES
Nona. Ace.
IN
a,
GREEK
o,
LATIN
U, O,
SINGULAR.
Greek
Vocative,
diopo-v,
Sanskrit ddnOf
Zend
data,
Gothic daur\
The
DEAL.
Nom. Acc.Voc. Sanskrit ddni (from ddna-j-i), Zend The rest as the masculine.
[G. Ed.
p.
ddlS.
297.]
PLURAL.
ddnd-n-i, Vedic ddnd,
The
"Remark
ceived
blished
The Zend system of declension has resome valuable additions from the treatises pub1.
must
lay before
my
readers.*
First
a dual case,
viz.
it
alone in
all
rable copiousness.
et
M. Bumouf
p.
eclaircissements,
cxxii.)
by the
expressions
^i^'^jy
S.
be twice found in V.
First,
particularly to the
Zend
Sur
les
mots Zends
FORMATION OF CASES.
translation
is
2T7
monde."
the
much
. 187.,
more
also
according to
might
tion
this
be
the
singular
genitive,
which
frequently
We
a,
probably,
the
according
Burnoufs
acute
6,
conjecture,
through
loss of the
con-
cluding
s.
am
the
more
inclined to assent to
first 6
Burnoufs
of ^i^^-l* uboyd,
find
another example
because, that Vi.iY ^y^ actually occurs exercising the force of assimilation in
the
is
to say,
no
letter
question precedes
(
mean
the form
<^^^aj^j3av zastayo
as^jjai^ zasta,
= Sanskrit
from
[G.Ed. p. 298.]
examined
by M. Burnouf (V.
S. p. 354.)
jau^daj au<3A5^
"i^Aj^jjAj^ 9"8*J^
which Auquetil
vielfrai-je
le
(p.
by
'*
main sur
Daroudj?"
little
appears,
how-
ever, that
"i^i^Aj^jjAi^
I I
jjukJCtjAj
ash6i can as
be a nominative as
;
zaslayd a singular
accusative
literal
and
:
believe
am
translation
"How can
give the (Daemon) Drudj into the hands of the pure (into
the power) ?
"Remark
2.
In
M. Burnouf
admits the termination ana in bases in a (Ya<;na, p. 98. passim), with n introduced, for the sake of euphony.
* The Codex has fauhily jjujooaj asdi and ^ 9ii>>^ drryjem.
2*78
FORMATION OF CASES.
w^ina
(, 158.).
He
rests this,
among
ajjaj^jjaiaj^
maesmana,
attention,
" urinal"
my
in like
if I
Burnouf
theme terminate
Sanskrit
and
"
this
word, which
mingerer by a
suffix
n^
man,
Aj/As^jag^Aii
baresmana,
analogous with
quently.
M. Burnouf
ma in the word maesmana, in which we we cannot agree with him as long as we cannot supply any cases which must indubitably belong to a theme in a. If, further, some words, which in their theme
adopt a suffix
think
terminate in
mm
as
(<^,
Sanskrit
^^
as),
instrumental form
M. Burnouf quotes,
and
p. 100 note,
mjm^m^
still,
mazana,
AiyAJ^^AJAW srayana,
Aj^Aswjtulp
vanhana;
in
my
opinion, bases in a
may
But now we prefer dividing them mazan-a, so that the letter s, with which these themes
undoubted bases in
originally terminate,
[G. Ed. p. 299.]
is
as,
yakrit,
^l^
sub-
iakrit
change their
xioF^
for
n in the weak
sakan
first
]
cases,
and
may
stitute
yakan,
igprli^
or
as,
in
more remote
/xei/
a:i ilogy,
from
/xef (^fX
mas, "mus
").
Besides
M. Burnouf
cites
what.'**'
which
is
my mind somewhat of
vazna
yazdn^,
"
my
^O/Au^As^ '^Vi^'^
AjyA)^
kana
with
FORMATION OF CASKS.
what offering
this
shall I sacrifice?"
'
279
I
(V. S. p. 481.)
have
prone
I
not,
the
pronominal bases
are
to
miglit
is
contained in ^nr
ana and FT ^na forms also the last element of asjasj kana, if from this base the instrumental only had been evolved
or
^Stj
preserved,
as
has
also
occurred
in
the
Sanskrit
rest,
ajjaj^
ana and
it
For the
the Greek
kana, if
KeTi'oy
is
also
appears
not directly
meaning,
is
still
kakchana,
"
who-
Under
these circumstances
of in
any instrumentals
i
words
(. 160.).
which we have noticed, have dispensed with a similar insertion In another place {Journal des Savans\ M. Burnouf deduces ihe frequently-occurring instrumental Juu^^AjjajAj
ashayd, " with purity,"
Ajjajjy
asha
aj^^aji^aj ashaya,
an
which
hesitate
to
acknowledge, although
in
it
.
would be
158.,
^THH
from a theme
^w
swapna.
But
if
instrumental forms of
to be pro-
the
case
of
swapnd,
form tn
280
FORMATION OF CASES.
be explained according
p.
may
I
to the
analogy of
rioimi trishI
[G. Ed.
300.]
In every case
think
may
theme
Zend
"
a speech/' occurs,
Remark
exists,
also
as
satisfactorily proved, a
form nearer
although
corrupt
to the
rather
comparison
sufficiently
with
frequent
the
in
form
hS,
more some
its
according to
the
proofs given
by Burnouf.
had remarked words with the ending am^^> ht/d, but in passages where AnquetiFs translation was little
too
much
obscured through
its
usual
me
under
k^w M, and was, moreover, concealed from appearance of an instrumental form. the
termination hyd
However, the
Sanskrit
for
it
which
is
sometimes
approaches
sya,
to rule, as far as
that
of Nerio-
the
passages
the
original
us to
it.
Such a
passage
is
grammar:
M^)^3Xi^
MiJMXi^
AU^^WASjajAS
AU^AJo)
AUQxfCaW
^cyAM(2A3
MAM^ Aj^^c/^jJ
M^cj^
kosud
znnthwd paid
ashahyd paourvyo kasnd kheng strencha ddt adhvdnem. Neriosingh translates this passage word for word, only that
man?"
FORMATION OF CASES.
than "who," for the idea of
2Si
in
Tid,
man
by
is
lost
the general
crt tjt
but simply,
by
cFt
kd,
as follows
Hi^'^^JT
cB^
nT?rt f<Tin
JJIWW
TT^PT
W.
^^^
HKcBT^TTW f^
'^
kila
sadvydpd-
[G. Ed.
p.
301.]
i.e. "
^
for
i.e.
"
viam
We
"
Quis {qualis
primus? quis
dedit
viam
?"
erroneously
>^,uja3<
given -WJ^^W
zantu
;
zarithd, is plainly
the
instrumental of
infinitive, "STtTK
I
This form
is,
besides, re-
markable on
is identical
with the
n,
would sound
l{:^j^ jantwd.
and
160. p. 191
xiifS'<^'^ii_^janthwa is to
ance to
.sage
is
that,
taken
lengthened.
The Sanskiit
singh translates the Zend instrumental case, must be considered as an ablative, as this case often enters the depart-
ment
of
tlie
instrumental, and
is also
capable of expressing
is
a cormption for
Vmw.
prathamaJi, "primus,"
which answers
to the original,
and
is to
be
+ Vide as
to Ajarf"(3vj^
s :
282
FORMATION OF CASES.
XIL
89.).
with AwoxTOvij zanthwd, which cannot possibly be a genitive, for the genitive of >^^aj^ zantu could only be J^^>c^^Av
zanteus, or, also, "^cxfCaW zanthwd, or <^a5^^a5^ zantavd (see
. 187.),
but in no case
is
auoxTcs-^j
zanthwd.
Add
to this, also,
that nrf^Jawani
since in
it
changing.
genitive,
M. Burnouf, who
jananM
as a
according to this
'S(^fi\ janani,
but he
302
sic.
est le presoleil
aux
astres."
contradict
my apprehension
of Axxafo"^
zanthwd : he makes
and does
not, therefore,
axj^^^-
the termination
for, in
it
was
have next
as follows
bein taken for an instrumental, and perhaps have been translated " father with purity."
" Quel est le
His translation
is
qui a donne
S. p.
(p.
FORMATION OF CASES.
de
lui
is
283
The must be
it
meme
les astres
sun
here quite
left
and
it
is
much obscured
in this passage;
we might
identify,
with reference to the form of 50^?!^ kheny, this expression with the reflective pronoun aj^jo kha (as in kha-ddta, " created
of itself," which is
often
said
of the
stars,
as of self-
created lights),
slren-cha
;
and consider it as the epithet of aj^^c7^jj so that it would correspond as accusative plural
It is
in
some chapters
instead
of the Jzeschne,
m^
and,
ng
is
repeatedly
found
of a
simple
nasal,
indeed,
without
initial letter.
So we
dushdaas
V.
S. p. 391, ^^c7c3Ajjkv?(S^A5^y>^
dushacsathreng*
^^cy6^A}^wo.M3>^
ineng,
dusskyadfhnevg,
indeed,
^^^A)a}^Jo>^
these
Anquetil,
renders
expressions
le
mal, attache
la
4''3uu^A}tb>^
'|'9ui'yA3^l*y>^
dushmarmnhd,
refer to the plural 4'^-^^cZ.5 dregvato, and I have no the whole passage, howdoubt of their accusative nature
:
ever, like
many
We
elaborate exactitude
leaves
Burnoufs
will
excellent
Commentary
to
us no
hope that he
the
elucidation
I
of this
am
most curious.
But
to
however,
little
CUM <^h
284
the
FORMATION OF CASES.
^ kh
makes no
even
in its
acceptation for the sun, for which, commonly, j7a5' hvare is found (the Sanskrit t^TT^ swar, " heaven,"), as jo kh is used
35.)
j^w^o
khare,
n,
and
and
may
this
m^
ng has
arisen out of
out of
r,
as
shewn
in San-
" day,"
and not
I
it
g/AJQ)A5Jcv5(5^
At
all
events
take
^n^9^
indeed,
may
not also be
entirely lost
may have
and that
it
may
be
^^c^^ kheng
kita.
according to
my
opinion,
is
genitive
stdranm.
^c7^jj
stren
might
easily
cha, I
explained
in
239.;
to u, is
there retained,
.
239.);
espe-
is
found in construc-
tion
of the person,
given.
^<^jMi(Oj^
fail
Sanskrit 5HgTTH
adhwdnam cannot
to
(comp.
4 5.).;
MS. we have
easily seen to be
an error.
This
false
and upon
this is founded
" qui
aj
is
FORMATION OF CASES.
taken for
the
285
as
number
^TtTTanana, "countenance,'*
corresponding syllable.
FEMININE BASES IN
Nominative,
Sanskrit
rankn,
d,
dhard,*
Zend
hizva,
Accusative,
Greek
Dat
161.),
Lithuanian ranka.
Lith. ranka-i.
Dative,
Ablative,
Sansk. dhardy-di,
2^nd hizvay-di,
ferra(d).
Zend
hizvay-dt,
Latin
Genitive,
Sanskrit dhardy-ns,
^oypa-^,
Latin
terras,
Gothic
Locative,
gibd-s.
(.
Sanskrit dhardy-dm
202.),
Zend
hizvay-a^
Lithuanian ranko-ye
Vocative.
(. 197.).
Sanskrit dharS,
Zend
hizvS
(?),
Greek
%<3pa,
(?).
Nom. AccVoc. Sanskrit dhar^, Zend hizve (. Nom. rank}, Voc. rdnki.
Instr.
213.),
Lithuanian
Dat. ranko-m
[G. Ed.
(.
5.).
p.
305.]
(Bnttmann,
^'.
16.
Rem.
1.).
The root
is
. 1.),
also,
VTU
dhdrd^
the
which,
by reason
Greek x<^pa ( 4.), although it does not signify earth. t Without being able to quote this case in Zend bases in
no doubt of the genuineness of the above form, since
cognate case terminations:
that an
t
d, I still
have
1.
That the a
is
is
by the
power of the
(V. S.
termination
p. 308.)
hence,
e.
g.
in
AO^_iAuy?^ gendbis
;^G
FORMATION OF CASES.
FEMININE BASES IN
SINGULAR.
?/
Nominative,
Sanskrit pnti-s,
Zend
dfriti-s,
Greek
iropTt-s,
Latin
Accusative,
turri-s,
Lithuanian
aivi-s,
Gothic ansf-s,
Zend
afriti-m,
Greek
-nopn-v,
Dat
Zend
. 161.).
Dative,
164.),
Ablative,
Grenitive,
Zend
dfritdi-t,
Latin turn-{d).
anstai-s,
Zend
Greek
tropri-o^, (pvae-cog,
Lat
turri-s.
Locative,
dfriti,
Greek
Troprt.
dfriti{?),
Lithuanian
Nom.
i,
It may be sufficient to give here the cases of a Sanskrit mascnline in which differ from the feminine paradigma from agni, " fire," comes the
:
whilst from
. $.
jaa^i,
168.) and
is
stated in
it
is
now my
is
ydmi.
c e
is
to
With
Note
t.
FORMATION OF CASES.
lustr. Dat. Abl. Sanskrit priti-bhydm,
2ff7
dfntt-bya,
Zend
Greek
Gen. Dat.
(. 215.).
iropTt-o-iv,
Gen. Loc.
Rem.
1.).
FLUBAL.
Nom. Voc.
Sanskrit pritay-as,
turr-es,
Lithuanian dmy-s.
Accusative,
Sanskrit prtti-s,
Zend
dfnti-s,
Greek
-nopri-^,
Gothic
ansti-ns,
Lithuanian dwy-s.
Dat. Abl.
Sanskrit priti-hhyas,
ri-bus,
Zend
dfriti-byo,
Latin tur-
Lithuanian ain-m{u)s
(. 215.).
Genitive,
Sanskrit priti-n-dm,
turri-um,
Zend
dfriti-n-anm, Latin
Greek
Tropri-oiv,
Lithuanian awi-Ut
Gothic ansi-^.
Locative,
Sanskrit priti-shu,
ghu),
Zend
NEUTEB BASES IN
SINGULAR.
i.
vdri,
Zend
vairi,
Greek
tdpi,
Latin
The
DUAL.
masculine.
vdri- n - i,
Zend
[G. Ed.
p. 307.]
vdr-a, Greek
tdpi-a,
(from
THUI,
The
288
FORMATION OF CASES.
MASCULINE BASES IN U.
SINGULAR.
Nominative,
sunu-s,
Lithuanian
Zend
pasu-s,
Latin
pecu-s,
Greek
Accusative,
Greek
sunu.
^orpv-v,
Lithuanian
sunu-n,
Gothic
158.),
Instr.
Dative,
Sanskrit
sunu-i.
sunav-i,
Lithuanian
Ablative,
Zend
Genitive,
Lithuanian sunau-s, Zend paseu-s or pasv-d (from pasv-as), Latin pecd-s, Greek
Locative,
(Borpv-og.
Sanskrit sun-du.
Sanskrit sund (from
sunau),
Vocative
Gothic
sunau,
pas(L,
Lithuanian
Nom.
^oTpv-o-iv, Lithuanian
sunu-m
(.
215.)
Gen. Loc.
[G. Ed.
p. 308.]
Rem.
1.)
Nom. Voc.
Sanskrit
s4nav-as,
cha,
Greek
^orpv-eg,
Zend
pecu-s,
pasv-d (with
pasvas-cha),
Latin
Gothic
.
sunau-s,
230.),
Lithuanian sunu-s.
swm-m
(.215.).
FORMATION OF CASES.
Genitive.
289
Sanskrit sunu^n-6m
thuanian sun-u.
Locative,
Sanskrit sunu-shit,
Remark.
prifi
Feminine
from
Sanskrit differ in
p.
305 G. Ed.,
irtfif
differs
^fxtf agni
m.
NEUTEB BASES IN
SINGULAR.
U.
/zt'^f,
The
madhu-n-i.
Latin pecu-a.
The
FEMININE BASES IN
Sanskrit,
i.
[G. Ed.
p.
309,]
Zend,
bhi-s,
Nom.
Accus.
Instr.
iinri,
"woman,'
"fear,"
ndiri, "
woman.'
nari-m,
nary-d,
hhiy-am,
bhiy-d, bhiy-S, or bhiy-di,
ndiri-m.
ndiry-a.
vdiry-di.
Dat.
ndry-di
nary-ds,
AbL
Gen.
Loc.
ndry-ds,
ndry-dm.
ndiry-a,
ndiri,
Voc.
290
FORMATION OF CASKS.
Sanskrit.
Zend.
ndiri{se(i .213, p. 227.)
N
I.
A. V. ndry-du.
bhiy-du.
D. Ab. ndri-bhydm,
ndry-Ss,
bhi-bhydm,
bhiy-6s,
PLURAL.
ndiri-bya.
Loc.
ndiry-6 9
N. V.
Accus.
Instr.
ndry-ds,
ndri-s.
bhiy-as,
bhiy-as,
bln-hhis,
ndiry-do.
ndirt-s.
ndri-bkis,
ndiri-bis.
D. Abl. ndri-bhyoji.
bhi-bhyas,
ndiri-byd.
Gen.
Loc.
"
ndn-n-dm.
ndn-shu.
bhiy-dm,*
bhi-shu,
ndiri-n-anm.
ndiri-shva or -shu.
Remark.
By the
in
t,
feminine bases
peculiar to
which
the
terminations
will be observed, as
Nom.
Dat. bhiy-i,
ki-'i,
Plural
Nom.
Acc.
bhty-as, Ki-e^,
Gen. bhiy-dm.
Ki-crt,
which were
and
undoubtedly the
terminations, whose
common sound
As
far,
(.
appears so startling,
however, as concerns
k'i
was
not the original concluding radical letter of the word, but that a
consonant has
i.
added at will
to tiie
monosyllabic femi-
bhruvdi.
t Or,
words in
i,
ttriy-am.
FORMATION OF CASES.
that
291
nally Kifi
Kir is the true theme, and that the nominative was origifor if K/of, ku, in the form in which they have
;
A/05^, A//,
from A/foj,
A/F/,
to establish a
theme
Klf, a proof
found in inscriptions.
f^
div,
"heaven"
(. 122.)
likewise attests a
is,
digamma.
All
ground
for supposing a
I
theme KIF
and
be also the real final letter of the base, only that the long
t
in
compounds
m. f.,
(for
example iWiH
gfita-bhi
aTcjjl
Gramm.Crit. .
70.),
We
kI^
it
and we
find this, as
(cf-f,
as well in
form
as in
meaning
namely, in ?r^ kita, Nom. '<v\z\ kita-s, " insect " " worm," which would lead us to expect in the Greek <c7toj, Acc. kItov,
to
which
Ktg, kIv,
do not consider
it
re-
quisite to
W^
(.
but
ir^TT
mahat
is
v[^Rt
mahant,
Nom. masc.
/Lieyuv."
P[^T\ mahdn^
which
FEMININE BASES IN
aUGVULR.
Satukrit,
u, V.
Greek.
Nom.
Accus.
Instr.
"eye-brow,"
oxftpC-s-
vadhu-m,
vadhw-d,
ladhw-di^
bhruv-am,
bhruv-d,
6(ppu-v.
....
-d/),
Dat,
bhruv-^ (or
....
u 2
292
FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGUT.AR,
Sanskrit.
Greek.
Abl.
vndhw-ds,
....
6(f)pu-o^
6(f)pv-'i.
Gen.
Loc.
vndhw-ds,
vadhw-dm.
vadhu.
-<im),
Voc,
6(f>pv.
N,Ac.Y.vddhwdu,
I.D. Ab. vadhu-hhydm.
bhruv-du.
6(ppv-e.
bhru-bhydm.
bhruV'ds.
PLURAL
6^pv-o-tv
G. L.
vadhtu-ds.
....
N. V.
Accus.
Instr.
vadhw'as,
vadh'd-s.
bhruv-as,
bhruv-as,
bhrA-bhis,
6<ppv-eq.
6^pv-aq.
vadhu-hhis.
....
....
6(j)pV-lj)V.
D. Abl. vadhu-bhyas,
bhru-hhyas.
Gen.
Loc,
vadhu-n-dm,
vadhu-shu.
bhruv-dm
bhriL-shu,
(or bhril-n-dm).
6>ppv-(Tl.
Remark. The
[G. Ed.
p.
identity
of
>?^
6/jrM
and '0$PY*
is
312]
sufficient
. 121.),
is
organic (comp.
and
suppose a theme
O^VYF
(comp. Kiihner
289.) so as to
f,
jueAai'S".
for
example, o^pvFoq
when
shewn
The
o in ocftpvs is based
to
which
among other
ndma,
is
tf^^
shewn
FORMATION OF CASES.
changes, that
is to
293
0,
before
corre-
it,
and thus
is
formed
T^
for
u, as,
under a similar
"
condition,
^ from
and
example,
vadhw-as (not
women,"
and
as above, bhiy-as
In the dative
may
be attributed to
terminations."
BASES IN du (^),*
SINGULAR. Sanskrit.
Greek.
Nominative,
Accusative.
Genitive,
nd.u-s.
vav-^.
ndv-am.
ndv-wt.
vav-v.
vd(f)-os.
v(F)-V.
Locative,
ndtw.
ndu-s.
DUAL.
Vocative,
vav-^.
[G. Ed.
vd{F)-.
vd(f)-o-?v.
p. 313.
ndu-bhydm,
PLURAL.
Nominative,
Accusative,
ndv-as.
i'd(f)-er.
ndv-as.
va{F)-a^.
va(^F)Qv.
Genitive,
Locative,
ndv-dm.
ndu-shu.
ndv-as,
Dat
vaxj-<jl.
Vocative,
vaifyeq.
Remark.
1.
find
no
sufficient
c. .
294
FORMATION OF CASES.
case before us
for even
if
it
NAf
the vocalization of F to
vaFcri,
still,
on the other
its
corresponding
is
avoid
the
hiatus,
far
more
common
from the
though,
if
rules of euphony.
We
Indian
for ^ nAu,
if^
it,
gd
(bos)
al-
the practice
restrain
us from
laying
but
u,
before
consonants
have
which
.
would
be
phonetically impossible
navis
208.).
The Latin
itself
;
theme ndv
has extended
by an unorganic
it
ened to cani
and therefore
v.
nowhere
[G. Ed.
p.
u,
but universally
]
314
Sanskrit.
Zend.
Latin.
Greek
Thema,
ViCH,
vd^,
VACH,
vdc-s,
voc,
voc-s,
t)n.
Nom.
Accus.
Instr.
vdch-am,
vdch-d,
vdch-S,
vdch-em
vdch-a.
vooem.
oTt-a.
Dative,
vdchS.
See Locative.
FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGULAR,
Sanskrit.
295
Zend.
vdch-at.
Laiin.
voc-e{d).
voc-is,
Gredk.
Ablat.
* vdch-as.
vdch-i,
Gen.
Loc.
vdch-6,^
vdch-i.
D.
voc-i.
D.
01T-t.
Voc.
vdk,
vdc-s ?
DUAL.
voc-s.
N. Ace.
or
I.
vdch-du.
vdch-d,X
vdch-do.
vdch-a.
....
.
ffjr-.
D. Abl.
vdg-hhydm.
vdchSs,
....
vdch-6
?
D. G.
G. L.
PLURAL.
N. V.
Accus.
Instr.
vdch-as.
vdch-6,^
vdch-6,'\
voc-es.
oir-Cf.
vdch-as.
vdg-hhis.
voc-es.
oTT-ag.
....
....
vdch-aiim
....
voc-i-bus,
D. Abl.
vdg-bhyas,
vdch-dniy
Gen.
Loc.
"
voo-um.
vdk-shu.
vdc-shva ?
D.
6it-<Ti.
Remark L
commence with
opinion
(.
my
in
former
forms
224.
Note
*),
look
on
the
no longer as a conj^jj_ic^'i>A5/
junctive vowel
4^0 (from as
so that
as a corruption
of the
6,
and
to the
form
p.
way
276, on the Vahista (in the separate impression, p. 10, and following), to
rectify
my
p.
still
unde-
cided,
whether forms
Mi^QfM^
maxeblg, jkA5^_jc>Aj9
maneMs,
296
[G. Ed. p.^316.]
p. 40.),
FORMATION OF CASES.
I lind,
in
for
the Prakrit
Urvasi,
by Lenz.
^^^ff achkarmn
;
rdb/m)
and
if this
form
like ji\y^_19^vbA3:?raoc/}e6ii-,
many
jo S
occur, although in
the case before us the ^ e is very constantly written, and AJ ^ has not yet been pointed out in its place. If it is further
considered that
c^^l^
in
pronoun of the 2d
and, finally, in
;
the pronoun of the 1st person cy ne for ^y nd then we see the change of the ^ 6 with c e is sufficiently ascertained, although
it
iWaj^ mazo,
{mm
as)
is
united
with an
e.
to
deduce forms
liiie
vdch-e-bis.
con-
however, the
last
letting
whole
force into
e,
it
into
its
i
elements, and
for the deri-
mix
the
first
vation of manebis from mandibts from manabis, for manasbis, would extend
to the Sanskrit form
Hq ^fn ^
But
obis.
etns really
M. Bumouf,
review in the Journal des Savans (in the separate impression, pp. 30, 31),
calls attention
to a
form
^^boJU)9
is
once
^^^eb^OAMv?
vdghezhehyo,
FORMATION OF CASES.
nations
297
been pointed
out
as favourable to a following
mentioned at
I
p.
297, G. Ed.,
is
well-founded.
On
this point
w-hen, at . 224.
and
242., [
inconsiderately imagined
from
4>^Aj(p
and besides
according
vachanhi
to
is
.
i,
56^,
away when
MS.
is faulty,
and
is
therefore
30.)
mtroduced
in diflFerent
ways, plainly represent one and the same word, and have proceeded from
t^,i^j30Au(p
vdghzhbyo, which
itself
never occurs.
Although these
me
is
theme which
still
connected with
it
would
rather
from vdch
We
malformation, although
derives
its
superlatives in
utile,"
which we ought
if
This
latter
theme
<^y>je)opAU9
for
<|>i^jiv<3^AU9 vdcslyo ;
also
maneKs, occur
Mi4_i^x\^
mazMs,
m^^^mm^
mantns
in contact
with b become
zh.
298
impossible for
FORMATION OF CASES.
me
to use) the
p. 173,
manaMchd
vachahechd,
is
manahichd vachahichd. In a Grammar, the lost acquaintance with which is again to be restored, oversights
of this kind
will, I
trust,
be excused in the
to the
first
labourers
and
if,
for example,
Rask gives
.
word
paitdis, while,
according to
the
180.
p. 196,
Note
patois is to
be written,
still
form
first
taught
me
termination
If,
S-s
the Zend.
too,
scheme of declensions
new
error,
then
.state,
and brought
to light a
which
that
believe I was
i
the
first
to discover;
bases in
in
oit,
which the
it,
much
as I have of
I
are
make
this
remark
because
M. Burnouf,
I
as
it
regarding
tion.
I
As far as I am may assert that my communications Zend Grammar are founded on careful reflec-
my
con-
siderations,
and
am
For in this book M. Burnouf. Zend Grammar, one must carefully distinguish the disquisitions given in the text from the
also,
regard
to
In the former
I
in the
latter I seek
make
of the
am
sure
prevailing
given in the
tables,
FORMATION OF CASES.
of them.
I
290
and
if
an
forms
give
spoken
of,
and
by
me
it will
me
it.
pleasure to be able
The form
jwjuu^ajC?
and
[G. Ed.
p. 318.]
exhibit
it if I
in other
declension,
i.e.
Remark
2.
One
o of ottoiv instead
of a conjunctive
.
vowel, as
been
i.e.
stated
above (see
221.), as
as
an unorganic
it
extension of
ition
or, in
as a trans-
to
declension;
a decladual
ration which
itself to the
termination
{Ttoalo-iv, (3o-
forma-
tion of words
and arrangement of the same, where we have forms like neTuroa^, would
be,
According to
this,
/ieAiTOTrwAj/y,
be
expect the
nominatives
fxe\iTo-v, &c.,
The
declension which
prone, in certain
is
is
cases, to
receive
into
itself
the other
more
in use.
The
origin of
6iro7v
from 'ono, of
first
(f>p6\rrotv
from 4>EPONTO,
of the
;
was as
it
were the
commencement
closely
disease,
which came
this
to its full
since in
language,
which
resembles
the
300
in the old
FORMATION OF CASES.
way only
in the singular, but in the plural are
the
same time
have extended the old base by an unorganic a (= Greek o), and have thus partly brought it from the Greek third
declension into the
second
and in
the
singular,
also,
old form,
assume
more
manner
char, " to
stated.
^r
go," forms
partly
^Rfi{ charanta,
arbitrarily
from
'^ff
or
^TnT
Grammar, Colombo
l\2
et seq.):
Th.
CHARANT.
charan,*
charant-am,'\
CHARANTA,
charantd,
CHARAT.
....
Nom.
Ace.
Instr
charantS-n-a,
charat-d.
Abl
charanta-smd,
or charanta-mhd,4
I
charat-d.^
* The
final rf
n
I
is,
into the
Anuswara, which
t It
might
also
deduced from
charanta.
X
. 166.).
sma mentioned
in $.166.,
way
is,
The
which
was
to
suppressed.
$
Charaid
is,
FORMATION OF CASES.
301
CHARANT,
Gen
,
CHARANTA,
charanta-ssa,
charant^,
\
CHARAT,
eharat-d,
Loc.
^or charanta-smin,\
or charanta^mhi,
charatri.
{charath
\ ?
Voc
or chara*
pixnuL.
[G. Ed.
p. 320.]
Nom.
Ace.
Instr.
.... ....
{
charantdyf
charant^, charantSbhi,
(or charantehi,
like the Genitive, like the Instrumental.
Dat
Abl.
Gen
Loc.
charat-am.
....
charanfd,
charanti-su,
Voc.
" If the
charantd,
.... ....
ending with a consonant had followed the declension-confusing example of the Pali, one would have expected, for instance, from <f>epoiv a genitive (pepovrov,
Greek
in its bases
dative
(f)epovru>;
(pepovTtav
from
but
is,
in reality,
.
the suppressed
is
(Clongh,
p. 106.).
to a
theme
and
haa
Bumouf and
Lassen, p. 89)
also charantd,
is
as, for
example, gunavantd
the vir-
latter firom
gunavantd.
302
FORMATION OF CASES.
(pepovToi, (pepovrov^, ipepovroic;,
4>EPONT, but
In this
from 4>EP0NT0.
lias
manner
been
lost in Pali,
;
*EPONTO
but even
when standing
isolated, (fyepovroiv
may
com-
OEPONTO,
as the first
and
at
.
now
to that laid
down
thus
221. of
much
my
may
be looked on as proved,
which
lies
cases,
nor to the
true case-suffix.
[G. Ed.
p.
321.]
siNGuiAR.
Sanskrit.
Zend.
baran-s,
Latin.
Greek.
(Jyepodv,
Gothic.
N.
Ac.
bharan,
feron-s,
fiyand-s.*
(pepoi'T-a{i'),
fiyand.
Ins. bhnrat-d,
....
....
D. Y.fiynnd.
see Dat.
D.
bharat'^,
barant-at,
....
^epovr-o^,
G.
L.
bharat-as,
bharat'i,
barent-6,^ ferenf-is,
Jiyand~h.\
....
fiyand.
V.
bharan,
feren-t,
ipkpoav,
imagined,
p. 210, that
proved to exist in
Grimm
has
(I.
1017.) conjectured
made by Massmann
to
I {orvafiuand-is.
FORMATION OF CASES.
nu^L.
Sangfcrit.
303
Zend.
Greek.
<}>epovT-e.
baranUdoy or baranta,
D. Abl.
bharad-bhydm,
bharat-os.
baran-bya,^
barat-6? (p. 276,
PLURAl..
^epovro-iv.X
Gen. Loc,
1.)
[G. Ed.
Greek.
(pepovr-e^,
p.
322.]
Gothic,
Sanskrit.
Zend.
IiOtin.
N. V. bharant-as.
Ace.
bharai-as,
Instr. bharad-bhis,
barent-6,%
barent-6,%
ferent-es,
fiyand-s.
Jiyand-s.\\
ferent-es,
(pepovT-a^,
baran-bis,^
....
ferent-i-ous
....
.... ** ....
fiyand-eXX
[G.Ed. p. 323.3
Gen. bharat-dm^
Loc.
bharat-su,
barent-anm,fifirenti-um,
<pep6vT-a)v,
<j>pov-(Ti.
....
See p. 230,
Note*
See
2. p.
t Or harenbya.
X
241 Xote
*,
nnd
p. 210.
Note
$.
See
p. 299.
Rem.
$ Barentai-chcL, ^'ferentesque.'
II
j.
omitted in p. 260,
is
found at
5.
Matth. 5.
and agrees with/rtyoTi//*, " amicos " (" amantes "), Matth.
sonant.
See
** The Gothic
as the instrumental
f\ Or barant-ahm.
JJ
3ee
p.
266 Note
This case certainly cannot be proved in bases in nJ; but may, how-
ever,
See
243.
p.
a declension (comp.
299 Rem.
$.
2.),
shu, or -Afi,
*^'") for
250.),
p 354
^Mi}o>s^z/Adregva^
(^.
1
(read ^jaj
;
dregvat-
29.) dregvant
on the supposition
See
$. 52.
304
FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGU LAR.
Sanskrit.
Zend.
Latin.
Greek.
Sai/jutyv,
Gothic
N.
6imd
asma,
asman-a
asmain-e,
sermo\
sermon-em,
ahma.
ahman.
ahmin.
(. 132.)
5a//uov-a(v),
dtman-d,
....
see Loc. see Loc.
D.
I.
Oat. dtman-S,
see Dative.
asman-at,
sermon-e^d)
scrmon-is,
Bai/xov-o^f
Saifxov-i,
....
ahmin-s
(. 132.)
asmain-i D.sermon-i,
Voe. diman,
nsman,
sermo
1)U \L.
^aiuov,
ahma.
Sanskrit.
Zend.
Cfreek.
N. Ace. Voc.
dtmdn-du,
asman-do, or asmxin-a,
Balfxov-e.
Veda, dtmdn-a,
Instr.
D. Ab.
dtma-hhyam,
dtman-6s,
asma-bya,
D. G. ^aiii6vo-ivA
Gen. Loc.
asman-6?
PLURAL.
(p. 276,
I.),
....
Gothic,
Sanskrit,
Zend,
Latin.
Greek.
Batfiov-e,
N. V. dtmdn-as,
Ac.
Instr.
asman-o,
sermon-es,
ahman- s.
ahmAin-s.
dtman-as,
asman-6,
aermon-es,
{datjJLovo-cpiv),!}, I.
dtma-hhh,
-hhyas,
asma
-bis,
ahma-m\
ahmanS.
D.Ab dlma
Loc.
asma-hyo, sermon-i-bus.
Gen. dtman-dm,
dtma-su,
p.
asman-dm, sermmi-um,
asma'-hva,
Baiju-ov-av,
Sai^xo-iTi,
....
SINGULAR.
G. Ed.
324
Sanskrit.
Zend.
Latin.
Greek.
Trari^p,
'iraTe.p-a{v),
Gothic.
N. bhrdtd,
Ac. bhrdfar-am,
brdta,
/rater,
br^har.
brdthar.
brdtar-em,% fratr~em,
* Ahnaiius-cha,
'.'
coelique."
t Seep.299, Rem.2.
Seep.241, Note t.
FORMATION OF CASES.
305
SUiGCr^AIL
Sanskrit.
Zend,
Latin.
Greek.
Gothic.
In.
bhrd^r-d,
bkrdtr-S,
brdthr-a,
brdthr-i,
brdihr-at,
brdthr-d,^
brdthr-i,-f
132,
D.
see Loc.
brdthr-s{see
Trarp-i,
13
D.frair-i,
frater,
bhrdiar,
brdtare,X
narep.
brothar.
DDAL.
Sanskrit.
Zend.
Greek,
irarep-e,
D. Ab. bhrdtri-bhydm.
bratar-e-bya.
vaTepo-i
Gen.
Loc
bhrdtr-6s,
brdthr-6Q)
PLURAL.^
Sanskrit.
Zend.
brdtar-6,
\\
Latin, fratr-es.
Greek.
Nom. Voc.
Accus.
Instr.
bhrdtar-as,
bhrdtri-n,^
bhrdiri-hhis,
iraTep-e*
brdlhr-em?**
brdtar--bis.
frair-s.
iraTep-a
....
fratr-i-bus,
[G. Ed.
p.
325
Dat
Abl.
bhrdiri-bhyas.
brdtar-e-byo.
....
Genitive,
Locative,
bhrdtri-n-dm.
bhrdtri-shu.
brdthr-anm,^^
fratr-um.
iraTep-u
itaTpd-c
* Vide t See
. 194. p.
211, L
H.
1.
Note.
p. 216.
Note
See
is
44.
J.
which
p.
253, Note
IT
127. Note.
also brdthr-6, hrdthras-cha {"fratresque "), according to
** Perhaps
the
See ^.239.
'
FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGPLAR.
Sanskrit.
Zend.
Greek.
fievos.
iMtin.
N. A. V. manas.
1
mand.*
mananh-a,]
mananh-S,
genus.
nstr.
manas-d,
manas-e,
see Gen.
...
see Loc.
gener-e{d).
Dat.
Abl.
see Loc.
. .
mananh-aU
mananh-6 {mananhas-cho0,
manah-i,{see p. 3 1 6, G. ed .)D.
Gen.
Loc.
manas-as,
manas-i.
fxeve{a)-o^,
/xei/e((r)-/,
gener-is.
gener-i.
M. Burnouf remarks, in
1 ),
ending
is
generally long.
rt,
in like manner,
in passages
but
where
many a's,
to bring
the particle
A}p>>
preserved in
its
original length.
After deducting these two classes from forms in anha, the computation
I have,
would, however,
me
if,
still
in departure
a, the
from
tlie
advantage
words which
which
restore.
No
one will
deny
MSS.
many
believe I
may assert
MS. opens a
:
for although
correct
and
many
MSS.
For the
first
rest I
had
at
my command
the three
was not
MSS,
FOBMATION OF CASES.
[G. Ed.
Sanskrit.
p.
307
326]
Zend.
Cfreek.
/iei'e(o-)-e.
N. Ac. V. manns-t
I.
....
mananh-u{?)
/neve((r)o-/v.*
G. L.
297 G. ed .),
....
Latin,
PLURAL.
Sanskrit.
2^nd.
Greek.
fieve{(T)-a,
(jievecT-ipiv,)
N. Ac. V. mandiis-i,
Instr.
mananh-a,-[
mane-hts,
gener-a.
mano-hhis.
mane-byo,
see Loc.
/uei'e((r)-a)v,
gener-i-bus.
mananh-anm,
mand-hva,
gener-um.
fxevea-tn,
FEMINIirE.
SraGULAB,
MASCUUNS AND
Zend.
|G. Ed.
p. 327.1
Sanskrit,
Greek.
Nom.
Acciis.
durmands,
dushmando
(.
56^).
^vfffievrjg (. 146.)
5t(r/iei'e(cr)-a(v).
durmanas-am, dushmananh-em,
durmanas,
Voc.
....
The
N. Ac. V. durmanos-da,
Veda, dnrmanas-d.l
d^hmananh-a
(?)
SvfffjLevexo)-^.
The
N. Voc. durmanas-as,
Accus.
durmanas-as,
dushmananh-d
dushmananh-o
(as-cha),
(as-cha),
5t;(r/ieve((r)-ef.
Svirfiev{<T)-a.
The
* See
p. 299,
Rem. 2.
t See p. 245, Note;. It was, however, from an oversight that I, as was observed at p. 253, Note . read in the Vendidad Sade, p. 127, AJW^g^ jy nemenha it should be Ai^^^^i nemanha, and may also be
then
we
both
X 2
308
FORMATION OF CASES
SINGULAR, NEUTER.
Sanskrit.
Zend.
Greek,
8v<T[xeve^.
Nom. Ac V.
"
durmanas,
dushmand (a-cha),
The
the
is
Remark. It was remarked in . 152. (comp. . 146.), that in forms like fxevog, evyeve^, belongs to the base, and
;
in
forms like
to the
and in
manner belongs
first
theme.
M. Reimnitz, who,
ed.,
pamphlet mengiven in
tioned at p. 294, G.
my
treatise "
On some
in
which
as
I,
marks
[G. Ed.
p. 328.]
which the
final letter
as, for
The
in n which, differing
139.),
thus,
Only
full
cases
(^. 129.),
with
itself,
when
the
reason of this
mnliant,
H?T*^ mahdn, "great" (from the theme properly a participle present from ^^ mah, " to
according
to
the
form, as
Xeyov.
FORMATION OF CASES,
also in the other strong cases
309
{mahdntam
"
magnum" mahdntas
cative
by the
suffix
vant
and mant
(in the
weak
These lengthen,
;
so, for
example, dhanavdn,
[G. Ed.
p.
329.]
Before
we
Grammar, we
of sounds;
all
must
endeavour
it
to
explain
requisite
its
system
specify
and although
of the
is
not
to
the minutiae
subject,
we
must,
nevertheless,
Grammar.
It is therefore
our
f,
as has been
itself in
if the
remarked
has
maintained
(as opulents),
it
would not
I
be surprising
had
its
which stands
sj-Uable, as
is
same
relation to dhanavat,
by
middle
t It
malo
to mavolo.
stated
portion of this
general, that
it
by Professor Bopp, in the preface to the second published Grammar, commencing with the formation of cases in
had not occurred
to
him
:
an
them
in
the same
its
principles of declension
Editor.
310
FORMATION OF CASES.
more or
less
vitiated.
missions, or corruptions
therefore, for
We
give
the
first
Sclavonic
concerned,
to bring forward
and in
The Old
it is
e
a.
or o In
Greek
and
as,
related to AIyco,
bred'O,,
so, in the
Old Sclavonic,
"ferry," to
"I wade
through"
And
rabo,
as, in
is
related to the
theme AOFO, so
weight
than
"O slave,"
to
nominative
e,
The o has more "a slave." more than but a o and hence a
;
d,
so
that,
tm
is
abbreviated to o {vdovo
vowel, also, of the
first
as above
manner As final
a
is
member
of a compound,
weakened
to o
for voda-
just
as in the
Greek
to
Moucro-Tpa^jjf, Moi/o-o-^/A)/?,
[G. Ed. p. 330.]
o.
Even
I
if,
nevertheless regard
;
grammar,
shewn
as the long
us as
the short of
a,
d,
become
(6.)
and ^
i,
removed, at
least I
IN
do
311
or shorter I is anywhere not find that a longer compared with Let ^hivH, "I live." be spoken of. silz ; and. on the " virtue " ^vith sila, ,fNTf^ jivdmi to vid, " see." with the root other hand, vidyeti, to which, ^ftl v^dmi, the Old know" to the Guna form of from vyedmy, infin. vyes-t Sclavonic vyemy (abbreviated
;
#^
f^
ioTvyed-ti,)
so that v.d and "I know," assimilates itself, as two different roots. The vyed in the Sclavonic appear frequently in the Old Sclashort 1^ i. however, appears the Greek corruption to e (e). as
(.
72.);
that
is
to say. the
three (f?
and the numeral shew, in several cases, e for i. in composition in the iri) appears frequently
treputye, " fritium."
So. also, p^te-shestvye,
form
tre, e, g.
The iis also very frequently plural dadyaU "they *suppressed.e.i/.in the 3d person sut, "they are." Sanskrit dadati; Sanskrit
65o7rop/a
give,"
J^
is
is^
santl
Where
it.
preceding
it
Old Sclavonic, in the forms (c).-7 u and ^ fi have, in the both become i/.f In correctly, which are retamed most (infin. by-id answers to this manner, for instance, by
Dobrowsky's incorrect * The suppression here noticed of final i refers to i in Old Sclavomc has final the however, orthography. In point of fact,
has either been retained unaltered, or
become b y
e.g., that
which Do-
browsky,
corrected to
writes dadjat, "they give," sut, Regarding the nasahzed AAA-^Tb, dadahty, CATb sunty. vowels, see .783. Remark. u Crreek rw We express, as in Polish, the yery or duU i by y, as, like the
I.C.,
"they
are," should be
V,
long . supplies the place of the old short or as II. 666.), Gretsch p. (by ReiflF to It is pronounced in Russian, according according to monosyllabically ; and short in the French oui, spoken very
where
it is
original
it
Heym,
1.
(Heyra,
p. 5).
This
aU does not, however, remain the same than labials like a dull thick c), and it sounds after consonants other
("
i
sourd
et etouffe").
312
FORMATION OF CASES
mouse,"
to
>rq
musha
syn,
" son,"
to
^rr
sunu
nomina-
The instances of y for u are, nevertheless, more rare than those where y corresponds to the long "m u', for the short u, as in
tive masculine 'srstkh chatudras.
the Old
[G. Ed.
High German
p.
(. 70.),
has
for the
most part
o6a, "both,"
331.]
become
"daughter-in-law," answers to
to ^>n ubhd (Vedic form),
snushd
Zend
.wi> vbd.
Hence,
also,
similar to
the
"W
and,
on the other
side, o
may
:
also, but
only in
substantives, participate in
whence
it
is
easily
not
o,
in
e.
as
representative
of
original
u or
like
gs m, is
not
uncommon
mus,
in the
grammar;
(1st
that
is to
my
person
plural),
the Latin
;
has
arisen
and
if
the y here is so
have y in the nominative plural (vdovy, " vidua "), much the less to be looked upon
as
of y in this sense
base
is
But
so
on an o suce,
ceeding
it,
is
o,
changed to an
I think that to
following the
must
be ascribed, even
if this
y's
must be declared
much
IN
cognised
bases
all
313
thtir
in
the
to ye), and are thus sister forms to the Greek, like Ar AGO,
f^divya,
heavenly
";
so
soon,
then will
it
be no longer said
wit..
Dobrowsky
to the
(indefinite)
by annexing, according
the primitive, either
measure of the
If,
final letter of
I
however,
may
trust that I
have obtained
is
afilx
not in
t/7
as a mutilation of yo
from ya
yd).
me
subject to no
manner
svyatyi
of doubt, that
compound word
a,
acknowledged
through the ini
fluence of the
which
it
is
added to
it.
This
has, in
some
which
still
in a degree, in its
euphonic operation,
proof of
svyaty-m,
its
reflection,
former
existence.
Thus,
the
instance,
" per
sanctum,"
from
older
svyatylm,
svyatyi-ch,
and
" in Sanctis,"
from
said
pronominal
will into
syllable
t,
the preceding o
may
be changed at
i
* Dobr.
adjunct
;
or
ii
as the definitive
blag and
he appears
to look
upon the y
it
as having arisen
from the
of
ylch,
t In the oldest MSS., according to Dobr. p. 502, the more yim, yimi occur in the plural, for ym, ych, ymi.
fbll
forms
314
or not
:
FORMATION OF CASES
thus the interrogative exhibits the forms kyi,
"(juis?" (Dobr.
"in
quihm,
quorum?"
koi,
"quibus?'*
koimi.
kylmi,
"per
quos?
with
koim,
The
all
possessive
to the de-
last
member
;
of them,
e.
meum"
form
I
i
also,
a simple
is
;
y of the
but into
primitive base
so
that therefore,
for
example, sinu
sin-ii,
"the blue,"
sini-i.
is
to
The primitive
is
tive
which
of the base
y
"
of
which appears as
in the
nomi-
" ccerulei,"
sinii, at
coerulei.'"
fully to
what
is
already settled,
it
may
be stated that
its
pro-
is identical
base
t(
ya,
in the Lithuanian, in
which is most correctly preserved " which language *ya signifies " he
him").
the
all
The nominative
y an assimilating
i/a (. 135.).
"he"
(for
is
yas),
has given
influence, as
bases in
The
yes,
feminine, also, is
assimilation,
all
through
ya;
but
the
genitive
and
the
declension of ranka,
p. 333.]
[G. Ed.
* Written
from
GJESMfA
Note).
The
ja
in the text.
j^,
as haa
this translation.
315
Sanskrit-Lithuanian base tj ya, ya which, according to(a.). makes one expect yo in the Old Sclavonic, from which, according to (n.), must be formed ye* the y must be
hence,
7,
" he,"
"
him," which
i.
this
noun occurs in
all
to it
i-sche
means
as well ''qui"
"quod."
I
.
Now
as
means
how one
from
Dobrowsky
(p.
493),
and
perhaps other
grammarians
pronominal
;
;f
for this
other languages
Dobrowsky wrongly
itself before all
like
i-ch,
its,
&c.
p. xl.)
remarks against
I,
me ;
least of all
can
for the
him
that the
of vyati/i has
.
any thing
;
to
140.)
Grammarians, would be
nite forms.
3IG
for the
as
it is
FORMATION OF CASES
same
object,
i.
e.
equally
in
tlie
emphatic,
or,
;
and certainly
tive
that,
through
all cases,
only
is
[G. Ed.
is still to
(e.)
it
so
weakening the ^
S,
to
compensate for
would
"
this,
the semi-vowel
y has made
its
appearance, to which, in
be, according
to (c), to be ascribed.
with
Let pyena,
phina
foam," be compared
sveta
;
vyemy,
" I
The most important "cases in ^f^ vidmi. the grammar wth ye corresponding to ^ e are the dual case forms of the feminine and neuter, and those of the
know,'' with
the
(y.)
first
conjugation.
The
Sanskrit diphthong
6 (from a
;
+ u)
is
reprefirst
so that the
origin
and
its definition, it is
:
long.
In Bohemian
the former
is
pro-
nounced
in
ou,
the u
is
pronounced
short,
and Greek
ti,
and that au
is its
intensitive
Guna
u retained
in the in
au
corre-
Bohemian
a weakening of the au
is left
:
so that,
this,
alone
etymologically, that
say, the
Bohemian
v.
a, as also u,
(a), only that
^
:
6,
and without the loss brought about by time. Hence, also, usta (written vsta) " ora " corresponds to the Sanskrit '?ft osh ha, "the lip" more complete, however, is austiie, " by word
phonetically
more
IN
317
itself to
presents a simi(ov),
long vowel,
as,
in the
Greek
two hetero-
As, according to
(a),
become
be-
short
0,
we must
also (so
consider the
first
thong u
we
write the a) to be o;
and
it
comes
when u
is
resolved before
[G. Ed.
p. 335.]
^ 6 becomes av
go).
before a vowel
(ijf^ gavi
gi
u,
= ^ofly from
to
ift
Now
as, in
the Sanskrit, ? u,
rise
through Guna
stu,
(. 26.),
and sto-shyumi
so in
manner, y (cy) is interchanged with u so that bu in bu-du, "I shall be," must pass as the Guna form of by
(in byfi, " to be
"")
:
but
if
exhibit, in
many
must neither be
consi-
augment added
to the
nor can
it
si/novi, "
from
a son" (Sanskrit
(a'timi
is
^^
sunav-e,
from simu),
irynov-e,
"sons"
an abbreviation of synu
a representative
clear,
but
if
it
from
in
(c),
its
" filium,"
its
final
vowel,
to
it,
would sound
the
from
which synov
is
the
ji
Guna
intensitive,
for vsta
to the
;
is
to
p. 4.):
ruA corresponds
Lithnanian ranAa,
"hand"; andA2Mtoth8
hausa
to ^. 783.
Sanskrit
f^ hahsu,
q. v.,
was
to
distinction
u,
Remark
made between oy
318
of the
FORMATION OF CASES
vowel following
it,
but
has
remained
with
in
the
compared
the Gothic
As,
in
bases in u
adopt the
Guna form
suffix,
so
is
y,
very remarkable
also,
in
this
its
vowel
Guna
form
e. g.
domov-it from
and adjectives in
ov,
ev
(theme
as
as),
"descendant of Pandu";
drtava, "seasonable,''
Old
Sclavonic,
;
{ADAMY ZARYY).
but
with Dobrowsky
323),
assume a
suffix
ov or
we must
is
native,
{ADAMOV-0,
(.
(a.),
ZAREV-0). Through
Cfld Sclavonic
29.) thej
according to
usually corresponds to
by,
baviti
in the
Sanskrit
m^^H
baviti.
bhdvayitum.
sia, this
But
though
staviti
form
may
still
In order, then,
more to
establish,
o or
av by the Sclavonic
'Wt? dshtha, "lip";
u,
we
"to
mouth," correspond to
sh'&'i
sinister''''
(theme
causal,
SHUYO),
to
v^
savya;
buditi,
awake"
329).
IN
lost
" to
319
bodhayitum, also
to
and
T^vftTrHT
awake/' from
j^
budh, " to
know."
Thus
guhiti is
(1. P.).
sfuditi of styd-nu
(Dobr.
is
to
cause to
enter,''
from
(fi.)
As
e.g.
f^
vis,
"to go
in."
u,
so
Tuka,
puty,
Sanskrit
M.^m
panthds,
id^
columba
hansa.
"
" a
gander,"
and
many
similar
in
Hereby the u
in the accusative
for the
of bases
(from
d),
which are
;
remarkably explained
vdinu
weakened
to an o is contracted
u.
This view
is
further
also,
the
final
vowel
in the middle of
governed according
but at the end,
to the
letter,
probably through a corruption of sound, is said to have an equal value with a ringing h. This nasalizing mark
recurs also in the Polish verb, and, indeed, exactly in such a place where one had to expect a nasal, i.e. in
the 1st person singular and 3d person plural; and thus,
in
Bandtke's
e,
second
and
third
conjugation, the
so
marked
the
am
czytam, "
read."
5.783. Remark.
"
;
320
FORMATION OF CASES
has,
the consaid,
it
what has
been
thong
(o
+ u)
first
is retained.
When
an
corresponds to the
thou carriest,"
nes-e-t, "
he carries "
[G. Ed.
p. 337.]
from
e,
nes-e-m
it
before
its
and
o into
v.
The same
"
to be found in the
Old Sclavonic in
the 3d person
plural, where,
corresponding to nes-e-m,
"
we carry,"
is
nes-e-te, "
ye carry
nesent
The
this
m,
Sclavonic sut
also, in
many
therefore,
in
"),
wezau,
" vehunt
the u answers to
the n of ^f ftar vahanti, " vehunt,^' and the u which, in Bohemian, is united with an o, is essentially different from
that which stands alone
;
answers
to the
but as y
(c).
THE OLD SCLAVONIC.
what has been
TN
If,
321
then, through
the
m or
n, whicli is of
vonic,
remark-
able that conversely, also, the latter portion of the u () has occasionally been hardened into a nasal; and thus hudil, "I
will be," is in Polish bendp (written bedp).
(h.)
d (m) unorganically supplies the place of the Sclavonic H, i.p. in the instrumental of pronouns without gender, and all feminiues; thus,
vdovoy-u, "through the widow," answers to f^M^^yi vidha-
pres.). in the
sabddydmi,
chirdydmi,
f^i^l^^lfH
"I
from
f^
chira,
"long": thus,
from
ziel,
"
widow" (Dobr.
Finally,
words
in iln
H^(r^ yunjdna, "uniting," from tht^ yuj; so in the Old [G. Ed. p. 338.] Sclavonic, perun, {PERUNO), '^Deus
";
(BYEGUNO), from
BYEG
p. 289.).
by some are called liUertE aphona, but by Gretsch semivowels I mean the so-called soft yer* and the hard yerr. The former is represented by Gretsch as half U and by
;
his
translator,
Reiff (A 7),
as
answering
to
;
the
tones
p. 5)
and thus
respec-
"sympathy," and
soft
ogon^,
"fire,"
are,
in
to
the
yer
compared
travail
and cicoyne.
In the original ^*CT", prononnced, howerer, yer ; and hence y has been
sabstituted for J in all that follows.
Editor.
322
which
of a
is
FORMATION OF CASES
rather to be called a y than an
^
i*
and
it
may
sonant preceding
Hence we mark
it
it
y,
and
in the uniuflected
it
occurs in several
in zarya, " regis^
e.g.
from znry,
it this
On the consonant
its
which precedes
ders
its
pronunciation
more
y,
mild, because
sound
its
is
sound.
i
final
of
is
''
(^rfta" asti,
Lithuanian
est'i),
kosty,
"bones"
('^fvn asthi),
or
for the
i
nor with
final
y,
w, seen.); whose
y.
n,
is
my
opinion,
it
is
:
comit is
nothing ";
still
is
the residue.
Conso-
it
339.]
and Kopitar
it
(p. 5) tells
pronounced before
is
for this reason called the hard yerr, and not on account
its
of
own
pronunciation.
We
where
it
has remained
it is
also written
by a
j/ ;
as,
IN
323
mark, and
Roman
logically,
character,
for this
Dobrowsky
pressed
also on its
at the
end of words.
always
an
Etymonor, as
o,
Grimm
his valuable
u.
Preface
to
Wuk's
Servian Gramra.
xxxrv) a
by
0, e),
i,
w,
(for
which
may
stand
is
very
fre-
is
back
after
sound as
y,
the
m
by
Russian
the
replaced
is
clearly,
as
we gather from
the whole
Lithuanian, an
(/.)
I* believe
may
assert, that in
extent of
least
the
all
structure
the
language, at
iu
conditions
final
consonant occurs
NEBES,
nebes,
likewise
Sanskrit,
but
the
vanished
termination
" cceloe.
in
^W dm
(ve^e(o-)a)v),
(TT?rR
nabhasdm,
rum"), Greek uv
The
in Sclavonic polysyllables;
e.
g.
;
in the
nominative plural,
e (e)
forms
(m.)
As
far
as regards
of the
French j
{zivvtie,
sch, that
Zend
by
(. 65.),
by
in
German
sch
= ^)
2
sh
as
Sanskrit
; ;
324
and
also
'
FORMATION OF CASES
in
as,
Sanskrit,
the fsch
by
ch:
for
tlie
sound of the Greek ^ { ds) we retain (, and use z for the sound of our German z { = is): for 5^ we write ch. In
regard to etymology,
to
it
is
important to
to
call
attention
the
relation
of this
letter
sibilants,
by means
to
of
which
snocho,
"daughter-in-law,"
snushd.
corresponds
in
the
Sanskrit
^(m
Ch
also,
declension
into s
certain
vowels,
passes
some cases
I
whence
it
we gave,"
follows it;
hence, daste,
"ye
the
gave"
dasta,
As
mark
that the ch
the
;
I'For the
semi- vowel y (xi^ y) the Cyrillian alphabet in the cases for which the /, excepting
by particular
y with
to say,
ya
is
wrong
it
to
assume a
ye, also,
vowel ya, as
still
this
syllable,
itself
however
may
be written,
always unites in
two sounds.
For
it
rref ragable
considers the ch
and
ste,
passes into
s.
More on
when we come
to the verb.
t The vowels mentioned here, preceded by y, are, with the exception of ye, and "fe ye, nasalised vowels (see . 783. Remark) ; and hence pyaty,
must be pronounced /ja<^
(in the original cliaracter
"five,"
llATb).
IN
325
yil is
and
expressed
in
by an
to
o in conjunction with
Sclavonic as a
the
dialectic addition
cognate
languages.
Compare yesmy,
am,"
yam
{for
yadmy), "1
eat," pyaty,
An
(.
which follows
in
we have
p. 174,
and
the influence of a
preceding
it.
has assimilated a
has often
effect,
behind only
its
former existence.*
Dobrowsky does not express himself with when he says (cap. II. ^. iii.)
changed into
e.
sufficient
clearness re-
that
after
y and liquid
that,
According to
this,
ing
I
tbem
into
e.
Dobrowsky understands
and
(y), have retained a more flowing while he calls the consonants without yer " con-
c. p.
267)
so that
by nature and
of itself alone liquid, but receives this quality through a following yer
(a y without a vowel).
and
(,
liquid.
But
And
as in this
form the
is
consonant preceding
also, in
it
as in the
so the r
nowhere
stated
my
1
opinion, beit
at least,
find
326
[G. Ed.
to
p. 341.]
FORMATION OF CASES
256.
We
must now,
first
in order to be able
case-suflBxes of the
of
all
tain the final letter of the kinds of base which occur, as they
have for the most part been rubbed off in the singular nominative, whence it has appeared as if these letters,
where they again present themselves in the oblique cases, either belonged to the case termination, or were an addition equally foreign to the base and to the termination, which has
been termed "augment" by Dobrowsky.
[G. Ed.
p. 342.]
After becoming
minations assume, in
many points, an
with
whom
we cannot concede
or
e,
keep
all
might,
usually
is
represented as such.
It is
not,
grambe so
may
To
bases in
a corre-
zarem, knya^evi,
golubem, lebedem, are differently pronounced from what they are in pirom,
vo^om, hbom^ adorn, of Dobrowsky's first masc. declension.
in the
letter
The difference
last
two
which
e, after the
TN
accusative
327
singular:
the
Gothic blinda-ta,
it
"cacus"}:
has also
maintained
itself
in the Gothic
principle, the
required
as
as, nov,
"
novus"
"
appears in
many compounds
is
novo
{novo-grad,
new-
town
"),
but
vovo, "
novum" but
commo theme
[G. Ed.
p. 343.1
sex
is
pointed out.
The
nouns
form rab (for rabo), corresponds a feminine raba, "a maid": that is to ^T
a);
so that to the
say, all
Old
i.
e.
Greek
rj{a), 0-1',
Latin us,
a,
(yer),
as
an analogy
to
But
menwith-
"prince,'' more,
as,
255.
(n.),
must have
according
and
?i
ya, the
in
in the three
num-
"through the domestic," posiz-ma "the two domestics." This word appears to be identical with xj^ putra^ " son," Persian pisar "aaa," " boy," ** young man," and to owe its meaning to familiar address.
328
to,
FORMATION OF CASES
;
that
is to say,
serdze
corresponds to
neuter.
Sanskrit
^^^
hridaya-m, which
likewise
The
ya correspond
to the
ia);
and
Sanskrit feminine bases in in yd Greek la, Latin this form, in the uninflected nominative, stands
opposed to the masculine termination y and neuter e, as and sine, '^ cob ruleum"
[G. Ed.
p. 344.]
When an
y
last
y but one
masculine
in the nominative,
e;
and accusative
'^
as, vyetii,
nepos ex
form
i
is iva,
of the
form
and the neuter w, the y of which has arisen from iye, which is to be supposed the original, after
last
dropping the
y but
one.
To the
a, urn),
correspond thus
(compare Dobrowsky,
p. 285).
259.
The Old
:
1.
word
and
this
perhaps
to
the
most
rare.
which an unorganic o
i,
as, in
in
many
and
cases,
193.
p. 171,
Note*).
To
MORYO,
nom.
more, " the sea," the e of which therefore differs widely from
* "Where
I
fix
the theme,
I
give
SERDZJO
is i.e.
aa the
theme of serdze
ace.),
laid
down
which
is
IN
the mare in
Latin,
329
;
from mari
its
so
that the
makes
in
order to
be
mariu-m.
Are
345.]
Among
(theme
worm"
krimi
CHER}1[0), answers
to
the
Sanskrit
oTpiT
FERMI,
WURMI /and
ifrfff
{{JATYO),
"gener"
the
Sanskrit
jdtU
The
is
that
precedes a
mentioned in
the Indian
255.
So
gu<iy
(GUSYO)
hansa,
(. 255. g.).
among
vowel
is
an unorganic addition.
correspond to the
Thus fnouns
Sanskrit in
of agency in
TARYO
in
ryjp,
Latin in
idr,
and
to the
Greek
hence
tlie
nomi-
with
for
a,
pas-iyry, "shepherd."
Of
/
TELYO,
(. 20.),
the
of which
is
clearly
an interchange with r
forms
itself to
the Sanskiit
ur;
"a
cock,"
**
ai j,
for
example ^jna^
"to know,"
is in
647.
ft*,
As
in so far
infinitive,
it
Dobrowsky (pp.292, 293) and allows them simply ely as sufiBx (as
has been the custom to derive
also, in
also simple
the
Latin, tor
However,
it
is
certain
the
330
260.
FORMATION OF CASES
To the Sanskrit feminine bases in ^t d correspond been already remarked, Old Sclavonic in a. To
p. 346.]
as has
[G. Ed.
some masculines,
116.),
on which we
i
will
Among
the bases in
there are, in
a very small
number
of masculines
as
in
Lithuanian
as
which
Dobrowsky,
p. 469,
represents
as anomalous,
it,
i,
for
but
only
It is
and accusative singular that these three of words, from various reasons, agree and, gosfy,
;
"guest," from
GOSTl*
(Gothic
GJSTI,
Latin
HOSTI)
KNYA^YO,
and vrachy,
bases origi-
from
VRACHYY.
The masculine
i
there are
form
KAMEN,
^:^H^ asman),
is
extended to
KAMENI
correspond
and then
261.
follows
GOSTL
^
e
To
similar termination
that
TOR,
t
Sclavonic
TARfO, TELYO,
used to
borrow their
mencing.
not at
They form
LJUDI, pi.
num, nom.
au of which, according
pati, Lithuan
|Ji.255. {/.), is
its
declension.
; ;
IN
stracts in Tl, as
331
in Sanskrit irfw mati (for rwan/i), from the root " spirit," " meaning," from JHf man, " to think "* (compare [G. Ed. p. 347.] memini). These words weaken, indeed, in the nominative and accusative, their i to yer, but in no case
MAN, as
and
in
the
nominative
But
of a
mixed nature
in this
we
recognise
some words
which have, by Guna, changed a Sanskrit final ^ u to ot? and from this form several cases, as from a base ending with
a consonant e.y.
?erAu;-e,
o is
In
i,
some
in
cases the
;
theme extends
and
also
itself
by an unexten-
organic
others by a
before
is
these
suppressedt
zerkvii,
eccleaiis,**
g.
zerkviy-u,
" per
ecclesiam" zerkvi,
" ecclesia"
"
zerkva-mi,
"per
this
it
ecclesias."
The dative
locative zerkvi is
doubtful, as
zerkvi,
whether
come from
Dobrowsky (p. 355) imputes, in my opinion wrongly, the n of pomyami, " I remember," and some similar bases, to derivation, instead of
supposing that the radical n
Sanskrit,
is
snppressed before
t,
and
as, in
"a line"
'hOhW tanti-s, t The example given by Dobrowsky, zerkory, " a church," nevertheless does not apply to monosyllables, as krovy, "blood" (Sanskrit Jgsikravya^
neuter, "flesh"), nor to those polysyllables in which
for yatrvach
Reiff, p.
by
two consonants and krvuch would be equally imprac163). Brovy, " eyebrow," also appears
form
from a theme
BROFJ,
i,
)j bhru, feminine,
by the addition of
is
with a
Guna
of the gi u.
The
nominative plural
p. 115),
not brov-e.
332
FORMATION OF CASES
of this class
Some words
" sucrus"
(.
y,
and
with
255.
;
o suppressed
hence zerkovy or
262.
Among
bases in u (Greek
of the cognate
lan-
Old Sclavonic.
final
o,
suppress their
remaining cases
255. c);
shews
/.),
itself either
with
Guna
o
changed to ov or u
(.
255.
or without Guna, as
it
and in the
latter
form
Hence
more
255.
c.).*
With
this simim, it
much
and
that, in the
more modern
As
^ a,
a y
in
We
term this
yj
for
although
according to
^.
225. (c),
is
the
if it
But should
it
right.
The term u
bases
(etymologically
=^
6),
might be understood, not the Old Sclavonic but the Sanskrit T or the Latin u of the
IX
of ov.*
If,
333
349.]
"
260.
this de-
is
natural, to
final letters
of
the bases,
we must place knya(y, Dobrowsky 's second declension in the first, and by the on the other band, the words of rab, " a servant"
:
prince" (nominative) of
side
syn,
" son,"
and dom,
" a house," of
Dobrowsky's
to
first
masculine
declension
must be transferred
the
second declension
as mutilated y forms.
Of
by
Dobrowsky, vrachy,
ev to the
like zary,
'*
255.
(;?.),
opposes
of
SYNY.
On
"a king" (nominative), clearly form the nomihence zary e, native and genitive plural from bases in i
;
"kings," zarit,
spites,^''
ZARI ;
as gosty-e, "ho-
and
gostii,
hospitum" from
GOSTI.
In the dative
is
form zare-m
doubtit
in this
also, of
obscure origin,
rei,
in
is
it
is
certain
by an unorganic addition;
dative ognev-i, from
agni, Latin
OGNYY,
[G. Ed.
p. 350.]
255. n.)
little to
as
final of the base is pronounced e for ye from yo and hence, in the cases without Guna the yy bases are just be distinguished in their inflection from the yo bases, as, in
SYNY) from
also,
rabo-m
In the beginning of compound words, end like those in yo, with e for ye.
(theme
RABO).
the yy bases
+ As regards words inflected like mravii, the only proof which could bring them imder the head of the y bases is the vocative sing, mruviyu that they, however, although they have borrowed this case from the
declension, originally belong to
the a declension,
is
proved by their
334
FORMATION OF CASES
more modern
the
more recent
dialects,
e.g.
ov,
the
genitive plural of
rab (theme
HABO), "a
a theme
servant,"
(for
may
:
MAB Y
rabu)
and for
rab,
" servorum,"
we
of
may
this
also
class
have rabov
of words
and
find
we
according to the
adjective
analogy of synov-e.
On
the
other
hand, the
masculine o bases (the indefinites) of the y declension have admitted no irregular trespassings any more than the
pronouns.
264. Bases ending in a consonant are, under the limitation of
.
on the
at (yaf),
and
commencing with a vowel, divides itself so much the more distinctly from the base ending with a The bases in en correspond to the Sanskrit consonant.
the case sufSx,
in ^snr an, and
have preserved,
too, in
the
uninflected
255.
.
n.),
(see
139.).
them have an
so that
men
is
to be considered as the
formative
suffix of the
word, which answers to the Sanskrit r^ man c. g. in oiw^ karman neut., " deed " and to the Latin men ; that is to say,
STEMEN
mutilation
is
a
es
The bases
in
as,
in
answer to the
Sanskrit
neuter
bases
as
nebes,
IN
335
[G. Ed. p. 351,]
"heaven," Sanskrit
cluding
the e to
nabhas.
In the
(according to
(.
235.
/.),
255.
a.).
com-
which has
+ u.
As
then
cases,
which
it
is
then,
we
say,
not surprising,
if
when we
(compare
words,
241.),
many
that
now
is
the bases in
On
Dobrowsky proves
from
("
.
there
no admixture of
It
is
adjective o bases.
also
255.
(/.),
that
must
lay aside
the
t,
and follow
ac^fia,
not
m^
mahai
magnum'^) and
capvt.
265.
Of
144.
two
r bases, but
i,
by an unorganic
.
or
h\ya (compare
the Lithuanian in
144.): in the
nomi-
Lithuanian, they suppress the r. These are, mati, " mother," and dshchi, "daughter"; in the latter only occurs the increase
of the base by ya (in the nominative accusative and dative
plural) ; the declension of the
former springs
[G. Ed.
p. 352.1
* They are all derivatives from names ol young of the animal mentioned.
^nimi^lR^
330
partly from
(/xdrep-es-),
FORMATION OF CASES
MATER,
order
e.
g.
mater-e,
" matris,"
and matres
partly from
MATERI,
to
e.g. maferVi
"matrem."
266. *In
cases, the
now
the casea,
signs
which
(see
255. g.);
hence voM,
"
aquam" from
vodo-u.
The
instru-
no gender preserved the genuine Sanskrit inflection; but it is to be remarked of the feminine bases in i that they change this vowel before the termination <i, (for d, see
.
255.
h.),
y,
so that in this
closely with
respect the
more
the
Pali, which, in
the
final
before
iy,
than with
the Sanskrit.
Hence,
for
Masculines and neuters have their instrumental ending; and this is, I have no
v\w prify-d.
ore from
267,
bi (. 215.).
in the singular, a
(.
IS 5.); hence,
"medicor
Guna.J
f G.
from
SYNY
becomes
"Jilio*''
BRACHfY
(^.263.),
with
If the case-sign
Ed. p. 353.]
to
Mb my,
assume
for
Hence
am now
common
177., to
the
Lithuanian a
condition
ciise in
two
cases,
the
Old Sclavonic,
:;
IN
337
ti,
RABO, more
o bases,
rarely rabov-L
The
o bases
tives
blayii,
uninflected
sinyu,
form
*'
in u;
hence, e.g.
coeruleo,"
masc. neut.
slovu,
sinev-i, slovov-l,
morev-i.
masculine
in
names
of inanimate
itself also
things
this
uninflected form
u extends
to
the genitive
and locative; hence domu, "of the house," "to" and "in
the house
":
is
and in
The pronouns
of the 3d person
mas-
and neuter
with
have
in the dative, in
like
form
mu
in to-mu, " to
appended pronoun V{ sma (. 165. &c.). which has extended itself in the cognate European languages so much, and
under such different forms, and
dropping the
this,
SMO, from
mti,
which, after
as rabu from
RABO.
268.
While the
borrowed their dative from the y declension, the y bases appear, in the locative, to have intruded on the o class
for synye answers
(.
to
rabye,
from
is,
RABO
vrike
from
.
RABA
255.
(<=),
255.
a.)
clearly
^ of
according to
from
vrika,
[G. Ed. p. 354.] and answers to the Lithuanian wUke from WILKA (. 197). As, however, in Lithuanian, from SUNU
also the
all
dom
(theme
tali into
^ ,
i.e.
^ a.
338
FORMATION OF CASES
:
and
this is
hence vod-ye,
" in aqua,'^
to
In bases
masculine and
i,
feminine,
it
whether
the
" in
is to
be ascribed
to
theme or
to the
inflection
i,
as,
however, in the
more
We
may
else
also look
upon the
in the dative
last letter
;
bases,
the i, therefore, of than the vocalization of this y voli, represents nothing else than the v
of the
masculine bases
the neuter
269.
In
MORYC,
and feminine
of
which
but the
255.
(/.),
drop the
s,
365.]
vowel appears as
(.
e in all
with a consonant
It
objection, that
the f minine form rankoye in the Lithuanian, and vodye in the Sclavonic,
jihwdy-dm
might stand in connection with the Sanskrit ^rnTPT cydm in fuS^TTTT^T the m, as the Zend {). 202.), ( ). 202.) ; so that, after dropping
is
become
As
the bases in
in the
down
to
from
aivi-Sy
KOSTI).
IN
339
nebes-e,
answers
to
hihh
" of the
men-ey
"
tui,*"
seb-e,
because,
in
the
We
^ sya in
easily
= fl^ ta-sya
sufficient in place
to be
remarked the
adopted hardening of the semi-vowel y to g (comp. p. 121 G. ed.), and in the Prakrit to "^ j (. 19.) ; finally, let the
new
genitive
termination,
the g of the
Now,
if
termination go
taken for a hardening from y (xf y), then preserved exactly as much as the
;
Greek
Greek
of the
lo,
termination sya
to-go,
and go answers
to
to
the
As,
and
" hiijus,"
the
Greek
also
to-7o.
however, in Sclavonic, the sibilants are easily interchanged with gutturals (see
.
might
conjecture
the
the g of go to be a corruption
semi-vowel of
^ sya,
Tliis conjec-
sya and to. As, however, in the Old Sclavonic, g is elsewhere exchanged only with ^ and sch (Dobr. p. 41), but not
with
s,
in
my
(ti
y)
is
to be preferred to that
from
s.
270.
The
in disadvantageous
hold fast the old form, have lost the genitive termination go;
lost
termi-
[G. Ed.
p.
356.1
of,
according to
255.
(a.),
weakening it
z 2
to o
nova
(= Sanskrit
nava-syn) "vovi."
Now. although
340
FORMATION OF CASES
a,
Guna
271.
255.
(6.),
must disappear.
in
in
a,
those
a
;
penultimate
change that a
the
genitive
form
(see
255. d.):
;
this,
precedes the n
the theme.
bases
in
hence volya,
with
On
for
if to,
do
not doubt of the identity of the ending ya with the Sanskrit syds (. 172.), as in the
word
rT^trra tasyds,
.
of the
(A),
same
give
final
must, according to
255.
us, according
255. (a.), to
an Indian
d,
just
as the preceding o
points to a short
a.
The
y, as, in
ir^
t'l-sya,
and in the
mentioned in
. 269.
972.
is
In
in
suffix (. 204.), o is
weakened to
e (e)
and
a to
255
357.]
a.),
NOVO,
from
"new"), for
"water,"
(n.),
[G. Ed.
p.
Sanskrit
to the
nava,
is
:
nove,
and answers
;
Greek
ve(f)e
VODA,
.
comes vodo
for volyo:
but from
VOLYA,
according to
255.
vole
and so from
KNYA^YO,
IN
341
Bases in yy change their y by Guna to u (. 255./.), hence vrachifu more commonly, in analogy with . 205. On with y suppressed, vrachu " medice /" from
knya^e.
VRACHYY
y for their penultimate letter weaken their final vowel, and Guna, the commonly omit hence syne, " oh son !" more rarely like the o bases, to e
the other hand, y bases without
;
synu (Dobr.
skrit und
p. 470),
=Gothic
from sunau.
DUAL,
273.
By
number
is
lost
in
the
noun:
more true
Sanskrit
is
Greek by one
and Zend
is
case.
not to
let the
comparison be
made.
SANSKRIT.
SDID.
OLD SCLAVONIC.
oba.
ubd,
n.
ubhS,
ub^
uboi-bya,
obye
(.
255.
n.).
ubhd-bhydm.
L D.
o6i/e-/ia (. 2 1 5.)J
n. vbhay-6s,
uboyd,
oboy-iut
* The
ye,
may
:
be compared with
ye-ma, however,
some pronouns.
is
The
final
a of feminine substantives
from
DTE FA,
and
(Z.),
"a
girl."
t The form
casting
ending
6g, is,
according to
255. {/.)
necessary
away the
Zend certainly approaches the Old Sclavonic in voluntarily. The oy, which precedes the terminathe
OT
ay
(see . 225.)
and the
Ztnd
342
(
FORMATION OF CASES
p. 358.]
G. Ed.
cording to
case-sufEx
. 212.,
The Sanskrit vbM, as neuter, comes, from the theme ubha, in union with
is
ac-
the
i;
an abbreviation of
(.
ubhay-du, and
2 1 2.).
The Old
Indian ^
regards
opposes ye to the
it
no longer recognises the origin of this ye, and which the final
Therefore,
their
make ye
termination,
browsky,
mation.
and
last letter
manner, that those with y as the but one in the theme reject the termination ye,
;
and vocalize the y of the theme hence dyevye, " two from di/eva, but ste^^i, "two steps," from STEt,YA.
feminine
bases
in
i,
girls,"
The
in the
dual case
under discussion,
211.,
as
pati,
"two
h.),
sirs,"
[G. Ed.
that,
p. 359.]
aim,
.
"two
sheep,"
according to
255.
the
in the Sclavonic
not
DLANI
(nominative singular
Zend 6y or ay
(see p. 277);
two" m. f. n., and in <oy-M= Sanskrit tay-os, The genitives and locatives of the two first persons
older
on
rest,
this
a
is
nayu,
vdyu.
For the
however, the
rejected before
from
DJEVA, "a
girl";
dvii.
with
the
u mentioi.ed
in . 225.
may be
identical
is
also, in this
termination the s
IN
343
On
from
SYNY.
PLURAL.
Greek
ef,
and,
*
:
according
(.
to
;
universal
gynov-e,
rule
of sounds, omits
sons,"' ^<^
the
235.
/)
hence
" the
sunav-as
compare
asmdn-as
fiorpx^eg,
(. 21.)
;
kamen-e,
"the
stones,"
for
^^iTTTO
compare
$a/'/io'-ej,
gosty-e, "guests"
(theme
iioai-e^.
The
bases in
22S.),
but before
hence
Neuters
nevertheless, slova,
"verba" from
SLOVOas
.
^capa
from
AQPO answers
to
Vedic forms
As regards
the bases
ending in a consonant,
heavens," with ve^((r)-a
let
imen-a,
"names," be compared
;
and
with Greek
forms
like acofxar-a.
class of
words in ov mentioned at
;
261.,
have
lost
the no-
minative ending
hence volya,
" voluntates," is
the
same as
asthi,
theme.
The accusative plural is, in feminine and neuter Doons, the same as the nominative, and therefore in the former
344
mostly without
bases in
i
;
FORMATION OF CASES
inflection, exactly as
gosti for the
in the
few masculine
Bases in
o,
hence
Gothic
gnsti-ns.
RABO,
;
change
and
this o into y, as
is
to
pronounce
it
to be
consonant of the
inflection
which
has
been dropped
(a) of the
(corap. .271.):
vowel
hence wilku-s,
" lupos,"
answering
to
Sanskrit vrikd-n.
of
But
if
the
Old Sclavonic
bases
in
y,
animate
creatures,
form
this
owy
in
the
to
accusative
plural,
and
thus
answers
the
Lithuanian
svnu-s
(from
SUNU),
that
the Sclavonic
form
is
SYNOVO,
270.);
hence vrachya,
"medicos,"'''
like
knyntyn,
"
principes":
but
fol-
rule,
255.
is
(r?.).
the
more
incontrovertible,
(compare robo-m),
increased by
a,
SYNOVO,
sunu-ms.
.
corresponding to the
suffix
Lithuanian
This dative
according
all
215.),
LG. Ed.
to
255.
(/.),
extends
itself
over
classes
but, in fact, it is
. 279.),
declension, as
e:
final
?,
and
ch,
becomes
and a
345
. 126.).*
much
hence
"names," as
from
KOSTI,
is
to the
bhis,
and Zend
This ter-
mination mi
for
is,
and
bases
a final
of the base
is,
tion mi.
" bone
'';
The instrumentals
synovy,
(.
are,
like
the
i
uninflected
275.);
the
zation
after
of the
y of the
bases
KYNJ^YO, VRACHJY,
;
the
loss
of the final
vowel
be
is
there-
Greek
(p.
318 G.
ed.
Rem.
2.).
il,
Dobrowsky
(p.
and
es,
sufl&x of this
a,
and
away
it,
while
bases in
hence
rab,
[G. Ed.
p.
362.]
RABO; vod, "aquarum," from 1 ODA; syn. "Jiliorum," ivom SYNY; kostil, "ossium," from KOSTI; imen, "nominum," from IMEN ; nebes, " coelorum," from NEBES.
"servorum," from
The n and
tion
Sclavonic
we have only
a second generation of
final
conso-
while the former, with the exception of a few monosyllabic forms, has, according to . 255. (/.), disappeared,
nants
346
279.
FORMATION OF CASES
The termination
all
of
the
locative
plural
is
ch
throughout
.
classes
of
255. (m.)
recognised as identical
su,
and
this
Greek
compare,
in
.
also,
the
Zend
kha, for
the
Sanskrit
swa,
35.
Before
kh,
exactly as
the corresponding
rnbyc-ch,
Sanskrit
servis,^''
a into
answers to
in
"in
Bases in yo
and those
yy follow
suppress,
;
however^
cases;
preceding
y, as in
similar
KNY^KT^' A
" in viduis,"
final
a remains unchanged
hence vdova-ch,
For bases
in
i,
276.
we give
all
here, in order
the kinds of
theme
of the
with one
the complete
declension
KNYA^YO, m. "a prince," SLOVO, n. "a word," MORYO, n. "a sea" (Dobr. p. 476, "water," VOLYA,l "will," GOSTI, m. .11.), VODA, "a guest," KOSTI, "a bone," SYNY, m. "a son," DO MY, m. "a house," VRJCHfY, m. "a physician," KAMEN, m. [G. Ed. p. 363.] " a stone," IMEN, n. " a name," MATER, "a mother," NEBES, n. " heaven," TEL YAT, n. " a calf."* In
bases: i^/^^O, m.
a servant,"
f. f.
f.
and
All bases in
have a y
also,
is,
475
and hence,
If in bases in yo,
m.
n.,
and
in femi-
IN
347
word
to
rest,
thereby shewing
itself
be the
case-sufifix;
but
we recognise no inflection at all, ue. no we see therein only the bare base of the
;
or also a modifica-
which has
been dropped
present in the
(compare
271.).
we
notes, base
by which a division
the
dual,
is
rendered impossible.
to
With
respect to
all
which
cannot be proved
specimens,
belong to
refer to
.
the words
here
given as
we
273.
and iuhenye,
n. p. 474,
348
[G. Ed.
THKME.
p.
FORMATION OF CASES.
3 64.1
MOM.
ACCUS.
SINGULAR.
INSTR.
DATIVE.
GEN.
raba,^^
LOC.
rabye,'^
raV,
rabo-my.
rahU;^
knyaCy\
slovo.
knya^e-my. knyaCyu,
slovo-my.
slovu,
knyaCya,''^
slova,^^
knyaii,
slovye,^^
MORfO,
n.^
more.
voda.
volya.
gosty.
kosty.
syn'.
more.
more-my.
vodoy-u^^
voley-u,^^
moryti,
vod'-ye,^^
morya,^^
mori,
vodu,^
volyu}^
gosty.
vody^^
rod''ye,^
voli,
voH,
gosti,^ kosti,^
synov-i,
vlya,
gosti,
kosti.
goste-my,^^
kostiy-u,^^
gosii,^ kosti,^
kvsti.
hsty.
syn.
syno-my^''
syna,^^
tynye,'^
synu.^
DO MY, m/
dom'.
.
dom\
,
domo-my.
vr ache -my,
domov-i,
vrachev-i.
domu.
vrachya,^
damn.
vrachi.
dome
vrachyi
.
vrachy'.
....
imya.
kamene-my. kamen-i,
imene-my.
imen-i^
mater-i,
nebes-i,
telyat-i.
kamen-e,^ kamen-i.
imen-e,^*
mxiter-e<^
imen-i,
mater-i.
nebes-i,
telyat-i,
matt.
....
nebo.
telya.
....
nebese-my,
telyate-my.
nebo.
telya.
nebes-e,^
telyat-c,'^*
'
Cora p.
p. 273,
&c.
See
^-i^.
268. 259
p. 288.
^ '
Comp.
See
Comp.
p.285.
5 *
Comp.
p. 337,
Note.
See $.263.
;
The
cases wanting
come from
KAMENI
also,
(see $. 260.)
whence^
dative
just
also,
prefer,
MATER.
Comp.
. 133.
" See
'*
'2
Comp.
See
.
p. 306.
and
. 147.
13
See ^.264.
Dobr.p.287.
'
266.
*^
18
*"
'^ Comp. L'lth. pali-mi, Comp. Sanskritjihway-d, &c. See . 266. aunu-rm. '9 See Or rabovi, . 267. .268. The i may also be ascribed to the mark of case, and the dropping of the final letter
of the base
may be assamed
clearly belongs
to the theme.
2'
See $.270.
aa
347, Note.
See
).
269.
See
268.
m Or
syne.
IN
349
365.]
woM. roc.
rab'i,
ACCOS.
raby,
INSTR.""
DATIVE.*
LOCATIVE.*
rab',
raby,
knya(,i,
slovy,
rabo-m,
rabye-ch.
kiiya^e-ch
slovye-ch,
knyaCi,
slova,
knyaCya,
slova,
knya^e-m,
slovo-m,
knyaCy',
slov\
morya,
vodtf,
morya,
vody,
volya,
gosti,
kosti,
mori,
more-m,
voda-m,
volya-m,
goste-m,
koste-m,
mory',
vod",
morye-ch.
voda-ch.
volya-ch.
goste-ch.
voda-mi,
volya-mi,
gost'-mi,
volya,
voly\
gosttt,
gosty-e,
kosti,
kost'-mi,
kostii,
koste-ch,
synov-e,
synovy,*
synovy,*
synovo-m,*
synov,
synovye-ch.*
domov-e,
vrachev-e,
domy,
vrachya.
domy,
vrarhi,
domo-m,
vrache-m,
domov,
vrachev.
dome-ch,
vraehe-ch.
kamene-m,
tmen-a,
mater- e,
nebes-a,
telyat-a,
kamene-ch.
imen,
imene-ch.
tmen-a,
imeny,
imene-m,
....
nebes-a,
telval-a.
mater-mi,
nebesy,
telyaty.
matere-m,
nebese-m,
telyaie-m.
nebes,
telyat.
nebesye-ch.
tetyatecft*
See
274.
'
See $.271.
See
$.
276.
From SYNOVO,
and synove-ch.
'
see $.275.
See $.277.
See .276.
See $.278.
See $.279.
fre-
quently interchanged with one another, and the form yech appe&rs to
agree better with the preceding s (comp. Dobrowsky, p. 477).
350
ADJECTIVES.
ADJECTIVES.
LG. Ed.
distinct
p. 366.]
281.
The declension
;
pronouns, have, in
and if some inflected Zend belong only to the the cognate languages, emerged from the
further, they
As regards
already ex-
have
from
pronominal
:
declension
in
those
languages
into
general declension
we
will
may
in the
be combined
also,
masculine
and indeed
bases in
a,
i,
and
u,
terminating
in
singular
of kesa,
"hair,"
either
simply kSsd
p. 300),
sma or
its
In
s,
has, in
the dative and locative singular, passed over to the adjective declension, without imparting itself to that of the substantive,
renouncing this
syllable
as,
geram,
"
it
bono"
According to
indeed
this principle
lately
would
and
was
my
intention,
ADJECTIVES.
to explain the
351
full adjective dative,
170.),
with
[G. Ed.
p. 367.1
all
admixparallel
the
German
to
the,
led
me
Grimm's strong and Fulda's abstract-declension-form of adjectives diverges in not less than nine points from the
strong
substantives
(?. e.
those
which
terminate
in
the
jMjunded with
declension.
own
the
the
definite
(so
now name
it is
herent pronoun
cedes
it
;
thus
we say
to
would be opposed
still
for
is
it
lies in
conal-
tained,
as
tlie
we perceive pronouns
pronoun
is
in
im,
am,
beim,
its
though
original
left
case-termination.
In
Grammar, which
still
in
many
left
and we
felt,
in
forms
a pronoun which
proved by
tlie fact
that we place the definite form of when deprived [G. Ed. p. 368.]
352
ADJECTIVES.
but,
in
the oblique
eines
grossen
(not grosses),
is
grossem).
definite
same time
it
and
is
a bare
tlieme,
and therefore
which
is
and
dative,
but in
The pronominal
base,
which
in
Lithuanian and
is,
definite declension,
^^
in its origi-
= Sanskrit
and
has, in the
255.
(a.),
yo
ac-
cording to
255.
(n.),
ye or
some cases, however, the y has vocalized itself to i after lanIt signifies in both the vowel has been dropped.
guages
with
"
he "
sche,
complete declension of
The
SINGULAfi.
UTHHANIAN.
OLD SCLAVONIC.
Nominative,
Accusative,
m.
m.
yls
yin,
f. f.
yi.
m.
m. m.
J,*
i,
f.
f.
f.
ya*
yH,
n. ye.
yen.
n. ye.
Instrumental, m. yu,
Dative,
tye.
f.
n. im.
yeyH,
yet,
m. yam,
m. yo.
yei.
m. n. yemu, m.
m.
n. yego.
f.
Genitive,
Locative,
f.
yrh,
f.
yeya.
yei,
m.
yanik.
f.
yoye,
n.
yem,
f.
ADJECTIVES.
PLURAL.
UTHUANIAN.
OLD SCLAVONIC.
353
Nominative,
Accusative,
m.
m.
yfe (yi)^
f. l/os,
f.
f.
ySs,
yeis,
yes,
m- i* f. m. f. D.
m. m.
va.
f.
n.
yo*
ya.
Instrumental, m.
Dative,
Genitive, Locative,
yomlt.
D.
n.
imu
im.
icfu
ich.
m.
m.
f.
yiems,
f.
yoms.
f.
yu.
tf^sk,
f.
f.
n.
m.
yoM,
m.
f.
D.
DUAL,
UTHUANIAN.
Nominative,
Accusative,
m.
yu
(v&),
ff.
yh
t/in,
....
m.
m.
yun,
....
Instr. Dat,
Dative,
Genitive,
yiem,
f.
f.
yom,
m.
f. f.
n. yima.
n.
m.
yu.
Gen. Loc. m.
its
yeyiL
definite
declension,
the
pronoun
cited
which,
p. 52.), signifies
the
with
all
the
and
the
full
terminations through
its y,
and the
MASCULINE.
SraCCLAK.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
Nominative,
Accusative,
gerasis,\
gerui/u.
gene^fu
ger^fus.
geraiseis.
geranyan,
gerUyu,
geruyun.
Instrumental,
Dative,
Genitive,
geramyam,
geroyo.
giriemsiom,^
geriemsiema.
gertofiL
geru-tuse.
Locative,
Vocative,
getamyame.
gerasis,
geruyn
gerieyi.
page.
as, in
Or
The
gerassiSf
quently assimilates
I
a preceding
s,
as tassa,
" hujus"
HW tasi/a.
and appears to be
A A
354
ADJECTIVES.
FEMININE.
SINGULAR.
DUAJL.
PLURAL.
Nominative,
Accusative,
geroyi,
gerieyi,
gerosos,
geranyeh,
geraye,
geraiyei,
gerosies,
geriyin,
gerases,
Instrumental,
Dative,
geromsomis,
geromsom,
geruyii,
geromsomn.
geruyii.
gerosusa.
Genitive,
Locative,
geroyoye,
geroyi.
geriyi,
Vocative,
LG. Ed.
p.
gerosos.
370.]
284.
The Old
Sclavonic, differing
from
some
cases
the adjective
pronoun has
y only
in
in
some cases,
in the
Old Sclavonic
lost,
many
nation alone
insert
here, over
definite declension:
SF^ATO),
"holy,"
may
SINGULAR.
HASCUUNE. Indef. Def.
FEMININE.
Indef.
Def.
Nominative,
Accusative,
Instrumental,
Dative,
svyat.
svyat,
svyaty-7,^
svyaty-'i,^
svyata.
svyaiu,
svynta-ya.
svyatu-yiL
svyafom,
svyaiu,
svyaty-m,^
svyaloyu, svyato-yd.^
svyatye.
svyaiy,
svyato-mH,
svyuta-go,
svyafo-L*
Genitive,
Locative,
* See Note
'
svyata,
svyaiy-ycu
svyato-iJ^
svyaiye.
svy(tto-m^
svyaiye,
on preceding page.
^
See
255.
ff.
Or
adjective
3
is
inflected at the
same
The
indefinite
and
thatstn/fl/o-yej/M, as
The
the latter must originally have been written, has dropped adjective base svyata has weakened its o to a
just as in the dative and locabefore the pronominal addition (. 266. with the indefinite form is not tive svyato-i, where an external identity
perceptible.
*
a\
Or
svyatye-i.
Comp. Note
2.
ADJECTIVES
PLUKAL.
ludef.
355
Def.
svyaii-i,
Indef.
Def.
svt/aty-ya.
Nominative,
Accusative,
svyati,
svyaiy,
svyaty,
sryafy,
svyaty-ya,
svyaty-yot
Instrumental, ivyafy,
Dative,
sayatom,
svyaf,
svyafy-imi,^ svyata-m,
svvafy-ich,
svt/aty-ich^'
svyaty-imJ
svyaiy-iclu
Genitive,
Locative,
sryat,
srynfyech,
svyata-ch^
sryaty-ichJ
SINGULAR.
Indtf.
PLURAL.
Tndef.
Def.
Ikf.
Nona. Accus.
svyato,
svyaio-e,
svyata,
svyaia-ycu
The
*
tl
Dobrowsky
(p. 302.),
occnrin
lost
the
*
exter-
we most
nevertheless, in
I
my
opinion,
two
find,
however, the
which
m this case is
sdm, Gothic ze
(for se,
<).
248.).
This
s,
then, has, in
^ * (}.279.).
/.)
:
The
nasal rf
to rule,
be
lost ($.
255.
it,
to the Gothic
naman-e^
W^iT
for
^
le-xhu
^ e,
according to
$.
255.
(e.)
6.
arises
from
this, that
;
changed
is
and
$.
masculine neuter,
con-
verted, according to
256.
into y.
a8
366
[G. Ed.p.371.]
ADJECTIVES.
285.
6,
and as
this class
is,
in the
Old Sclavonic, only represented by bases in o, yo in the masculine and neuter (see . 257.), and a, ya in the feminine;
it
is
German
also,
tion
few in M
(of the
comparative
and
participle
present), all
dition,
end in
feminine
o for
(. 69.).
It is,
however,
its adjectives,
all
872.]
by an unorganic n, and
made
use
of,
however,
why
not
simply in part,
but
first
universally, and
early as in Gothic
have
passed into
the n declension,
the inflection
. 139. 140.,
of this
in
common
with
the Sanskrit,
Latin,
and
from the older languages, dispenses also with the dative character, upon the loss of which, in Old High German,
has followed,
sence of the
also,
This ab-
animating
to
might belong
itself
the
indefinite
more
it,
cedes
or through another
definite
it,
adjective, the
has
for the
most part
behind only
its
case terminations.
is
ADJECTIVES.
equal footing with
i.e.
357
of substantives,
As
the feminine,
where
it
is
not identical, as in
adjective
bases
in
in
always,
made
to diverge
it
to
the end,
is
to
remark
and
have
indefinite
adjective, in
p.
[G. Ed.
373]
e.g.
the feminine oi
BLIND AX
it is
entirely
last letter
As
BLINDAN
322 G. ed.). and
m.,
it
AMMAN
(p.
(p.
BLINDAN n., that of NAMAN BLINDON differs from the masinfiection, since its 6
a,
culine only
by a more regular
according to
remains
in the genitive to
and dative
therefore
. 132.,
MASCULINE.
weakened NEUTEB.
PLUKAL.
FEMININE.
Theme,
BLINDAN.
PLURAL.
BLINDAN.
SINGULAR. hlinflu\^
BLINDON.
StNCnLAK.
PLtTBAL.
SINGULAK.
^.Y.blinda',^
Ice. biindan,
blindan-s,
blindan-s,
blindon-a?
blinddn-Oy^
bhnd6\
blindCn,
b/ind&n,
bUndon-g.
bUndon-s.
blindS?
blindin}
)at. blind'w,^
blinda'-m,
blinda-m,
blind^-vu
jien.blindin-s}bl'mdan-S,
*
bIindin~s,^bHnd6n-Sj^
blindon-s, blinddn-d.^
See J 140.
See
141.
See
345.
358
ADJECTIVES.
we
will,
BLIND A m. n.
and
n.,
B LIN DO
"a
gate,"
f.,
and that of
f.,
VULFA
DAURA
GIBO a gift," and the interrogative [G. Ed. p. 374.] HVA m. n., " who? " what ?" HVOf.; further, by that of HAR YA that of MID JA m. n. {medius), MID TO " m., "an army," BADJA n., a bed," KUNTHJOJ., "news," and HVARJA m. n., " who ?" " what ?" HVARJO
f., f.
MASCULINE.
SINOULARPLCRA.L.
N. vulfsi
A. vulf\ D. G.
V.
vulfa,*
vulfi-s,
blind's,
hva-s}
hva-na,
vulfds^
hlindai,
hvai^
blindana,
blindamma, hva-mma,^
blindis,
blind's,
vulfa-m,
vulf-S,
vulfSs,
blindaim, hvai-m.
blindaize, hvi-zi.
blindai,
hvi
s,
v<tJf\
....
hvaryi-s,
N. hnryi-s^
A. hari,^
midyis,''
hury6s'^
midyai,
hvaryai?
midynna,
hvaryn-na,
D. hnrya.
G, hnryi-s,
hvary-is,
hary-^,
midyaizS, hvaryaizL
V.
hari,
midyis,
....
haryds,
midyai,
....
See
135.
"
See
See
.
$.
228. 160.
See
. 171.
See $.227.
*
.
^
^
From
haryu-s, see
135.
ya docs not
;
in the fragments
which have
last
appeared
and
by
c, the
form
yis
is
if its
analogy
ihe
with hardus
remembered, then
Grimm
comp
is
wrong in taking
MIDI for
theme, as in reality
HARDU
is
The
true theme
MIDYA
answers
ADJECTIVES.
NEUTEB.
959
^.A.Y,daur\
blindata,^
hva,^
daura.
hlindot
hiA.
The
N.A.V.
badi.
midyaia,^ hvarya-ta^
badycu
midyoy
hvarya.
The
SINGDTJtR.
FEMININE.
N.
A.
gihoy
g'lha.
gihai,''^
g'lbd-s.
[G. Ed.
PL0KAL.
p.
375
blindat hl'mda.
blindai}'^
hvS.
gibSs,^ gib6-s.
gibd-TTh
gib'-d.
blindos,^
hvds.^
hv6}^
hvizai}^
blindds,
hv6-s.
D
G.
blindaim, hvai-m.
blindaizo, hvi-z6.
blindos,
bUndaizds,^ hvizd-sP
V. giha.
blinda?
....
hvarya.
hvarya.
hvaryai}"^
gxbos,
....
hvaryos.
N. D. V.
ku^thi}''
midya.
kunthyos^ midyos^
kunthyo-s,
,
A. kunthycL,
midya.
midyds,
midy'6,
hvaryd-s.
kunihyai,'^'''midyai^''
,
G. kunthyd-s, midyahSs,
;hznM"i.
hvaryaizds}^ kurdhy-d.
kunthyds.
midya.
midyos,
as theme,
i
Adjective
bas^s,
to
^^/ja^
tmriniy
tuirya (^.42
9
and so
for
midyata
The form hvo, which, like some others of this pronoun, cannot be shewn to occur, is, by Grimm, rightly formed by analogy from tho,
'^heec."
Grimm
is
p.
fixed
173,
by
Note
See
$.
161.
'
$.
172.
final
vowel of the
base,
in
. 69.)
but here,
also,
hence kunthi as
aocnaatire.
Luc 1. 77.
360
If,
ADJECTIVES.
it is
then,
is
contained in the
German
defi-
same which,
ya).
in Sclavonic
[G. Ed.
nite,
p. 376.]
This pronoun
in
German,
but
it is
not
uncommon
words.
i
It
which, in Latin,
completely;
completely declined
in Gothic almost
maintained
it
itself
only in
derivative forms, as
" so
2^
i-ti,
**
^rvm
much,"
^^ i-drisa,
the
such."
The case
:
the
same
other
from
this comes,
my
opinion
also,
affirmative
is
particle
ya, as
in
languages,
affirmation
expressed
by pronominal
"if,**
forms
"so," ovrag),
analogous with
in Sanskrit. Tjf^ to
this, as
I
ibai,
"whether,"
"
if,"
ibaini,
also,
yadU
now
"he wanders"
adi,
c.
by Lenz,
Sanskrit
p. 63),
^ffffT
for
p.
the
ati.
u^jai
(1.
63 on j for
y, see
. 19.),
really occurs
for yadi;
so
of the
Prakrit.
If,
however, in
the
iEolic
el
the Sanskrit
y has
it
disappeared,
as
in
6g,
t!)Li/xe?= Sanskrit
yushme,
appears as h in
6,
17,
the article
line
where h
falls
and feminine,
wliile in 6f it
the cases, as
ADJECTIVES.
in Sanskrit the
Tr yas,
6f,
7{^
361
this
y of jm^
ya-s.
To
[G. Ed.
p. 377.]
in regard to the
relation
to ir^ yudh,
"to strive," ifiR yudhma, "strife" (comp. Pott, But to return to the Gothic YA, let us further observe yah* "and," "also," with h enclitic, of which hereafter,
pp. 236. 252.V
It also clearly
as,
with almost
"who?**
YA
shews
most plainly
all
in
bases
in u.
Of
these,
we annex
below.f but
a ya shews itself in
y the u
of the adjective
is
suppressed, as
in
and superlative
light," Inyhishtha^
suflBxes
"more
"most
as,
for
laghv-iyas,
laghv-ishtha
from
layhu;
and
even
in
Gothic,
hard'-hd, "
more
to
* The h may
word, and thus
may
Massmann's
Gloss.),
t AggvuSf "narrow," agluSf "heavy," ^i7^^ru*,"indnstrioua,"AarA, "hard," manvus^ "ready," thaursus, "dry," thlaqvtu, " tender," seithug, " late,"^u, " much," and, probably, hnasqvus, " tender." Some occur
only as adverbs, as glaggou-ba, "industriously."
Jibi,
Grimm
found
mats, "for
much more,"
Massmann's
Gloss.),
which
is
the more gratifying, as the adjective u bases had not yet been adduced in this case
362
[G. Ed.
p. 378.]
ADJECTIVES.
Massmann,
p. 48),
for
hardv-izd
from
HARD U.
if
Grimm,
as I doubt not, is
is
not to be met
Finally,
CKevaarovq
different
is
not
from
vulfans.
These
;
met
with, they
in
viz.
form
occurs.
may
be proper to annex
MANFV,
the
as it is
difference of
:
to be expected
MASCULINE.
SINGULAR.
FEMININE.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
N.
D.
mnvvu-s,
(manv-yni),
manvu-s,
(manv'-yds).
Ac. mnnv-ya-na,
manv-ya-ns,
(manv-ya,)
(manv-yds),
{ma7w-ya-mma),manv-yai-m, (manv-yai),
{manv-yaim),
G.
mamau-s,
LG.
Ed
p. 379.]
NEUTER.
SINGULAR
PLURAL.
Nom.
Accus. manv'-ya-ta,f
(manv-ya).
* I
am
bases in vu occur.
which follows
So Urvasi,
it is
work ;
n,
",
or qJ
/,
to g* m. p. 71,
dvaranu^ for
kdla^
tdki,
dvarana;
manoharu
for
manohara.
inflection
t Without
anian darku.
^di, Lithn
ADJECTITBS.
"
363
Remark
upon
1,
I.
Grimm
finds
(I.
appears,
as an originally
(comp.
c.
equal claim to
where
this is
wanting,
think
have shewn in
134. 137.
Adjective bases in
which
Lithuanian
is;
is
compare
^f^
m.
f.,
"clean,"
u,
with
Adjectives in
in
234., in the
agrees with
Tjiarjfu.
with
If
manvus
u,
in
com-
which
<iisl
is
particularly
and thus
sweet" (theme
and
is
nominative), answers
to
the Greek
(.
word
7]^eia,
;
which
lengthened by an unoi^nic a
119.),
for ^BFta
may
be lengthened, and
is
either tnnu or
tive,
whence the nominative fanu-s; and tanwt, as substanmeans the " slender woman."" The Lithuanian has
bases
t|tt
adjective
in
u,
as
szuriesu-s,
m.
**
light,"
" clear,*'
(compare
u by a
some,
of
bright heaven":
the assimilating
in
too,
they prefix an
to the a,
power
into e
(comp.
p.
169 Note);
as, sziviesiems
is,
heavens."
The feminine
364
[G. Ed.
p. 380.]
ADJECTIVES.
final
i*
the Sanskrit
ever,
in
swddwt
is
an unorganic a also
rjBeia
:
as it
has been in
phony,
(comp.
p.
174,
Note
*),
plural szwiesesf or
it
is
;
SZWIESA
hand " from
The
of
ia,
however, appears,
itself
"Remark
been
cited,
2.
With
the accusative
manvyamma
is
least
That Grimm should suggest forms like hardvamma, hardv-ana, arises from his regarding amma, ana, as the dative and accusative terminations of the pronoun and
doubtful.
adjective
;
mma
and
and na.
accusative,
theless
When,
therefore,
HARDU,
a
in
the
dative
without annexing
pronoun, follows
cases
never-
the pronominal
declension, the
mentioned
i-na.
If,
however, contrary to
expectation,
forms
like
themselves, they
must be deduced
it
from
hardu-ya-mma,
hardu-ya-na ;
w, in
would be
left,
v.
With regard
doubtful
blind' -{y)ana,
manv{u)-yamma, manv{u):
have thereforms
fore
left
them, as
undivided.
is
also
If
the
corresponding
from
is
MIDY^^f
the division
blinda-mma, &c.
made, nothing
left
ADJECTIVES.
has preserved
its a.
If,
365
now
which
is
also adopted
as in
some
gerus-yus (see
353)
blindH-amma
would have the same relation to blindC-yamma as midums^ " the middle man" (theme MID UMA), to its Sanskrit cognate form of the same import, inOT madhyama, whose relation
to
first
MIDUMA
aXo
i,
thus
trace
the
the
through the
66.,
3.
hUndans
is
not different from vulfans, and the simple not form aught but
[G. Ed.
p. 381.]
word
BLINDJ could
is
which
Grammar,
as well
where any
adjective,
I say,
inflections peculiar to
pronoun in the
exists
;
definite
this
inheritance really
thus, blind-anSf
and of deducing
from blind-yans.
Just in
the
an abbreviation of
only by
skrit
its
te,
word hnasqv-yaim, mentioned above, declares itself blind' -yaim ; but blindai proves
pronominal inflection (compare
ke) to
4.
to be
itself
thai, hvai,
San-
be an abbreviation of blind-ya.
Sanskrit, in
"
Remark
In the
final a,
some cases an
blends
itself
with the
and of the
Prakrit,
asua,
5^ft
ktuume-hin from
kusuma.
To
this
answers the ai in
366
ADJECTIVES.
hvai-m, "quibus"
its
iha-im
origin,
Ais"; as the
German
is identical
We
were, however,
compelled, before
we had
Y-^ in the Gothic definite adjective, to give to the extension of the base in
German
it
while
we
i
definites,
itself,
an
grammar shews
to reY-^f
cognise in the
may
be considered as
The latter view pleases me the better because it accords more closely with blind'' -amma, The vowel, blind'-ana, &c., from blind' -yamma, blind' -yana.
for yeras-yis, (p. 353).
then,
which in blind'-amma,
&c.,
maintains
i
itself
in its
view, as
is
in the feminine
which
=
to be divided blinda-
from
blinda-yizds
and
with
hvizds, ihizds,
(.
from hvazds,
the
thazos,
172.).
We
is
BLINDO
because
there
is
for
in the
is
difficulty
srhort
of d
tne
of
69.).
For
the the
is
rest,
let
it
be
considered,
that
its
in
the
Sclavonic
graver
feminine
before
union
weakened
to the lighter
oi in
masculine c
the Gothic
354,
Note
3.)
[G. Ed.
p. 382.]
never admissible;
on which account
i,
which
In the
belongs to this
mood
bliridai,
which
is
German
compounded in
the very
ADJECTIVES.
same manner:
line
367
is
in
phnfera,
or hlind'-{y)aize
syllabic
and therefore the division hlindai-ze should be made: as, liowever, the mono;
137.),
do
not retain
it,
and
tki-zS, "
hvi-zd, for
= Sanskrit
f.,
in hlindaiz^
m.
n.,
(f.
and blindaizd
of te-shdm m. n.
td-sdm), which,
form blindaizd
and
do
it.
in
izd, is
made according
to the analogy of
blinda-izds.
"
Remark
and
5.
kept
base,
itself free, in
has remained
upon
the
original,
as
The masand
through
animated
(see . 134.).
has cause to
Even
could be
ALTHYA,
I
according to Massmann),
High German
plinter
should
still
one nor the other has existed in Gothic, as even the u bases,
* The Gothic at would lead ns to expect i, and Grimm. As, however, with Kero, the doubling of
Notker, the circumflex
the
e, is
this, too, is
given by
368
like
ADJECTIVES.
manvu-s above, which, in the oblique cases, shew so clearly the pronominal base X-^* have not received it in
the nominative singular of the personal genders.
Pligh
In Old
German however,
its oldest
between
memorials and
to the
up
nominative
more
desirable, as the
p,
[G. Ed.
383-3
is
contracted from
High
ai.
German
i corresponds,
according to
. 78.,
to the Gothic
number of
strict
Grimm
of
all,
and in the nominative and accusais more genuine than the The form plintyu, moreover,
tive plural
(f.),
and
to the
instru-
where
all
Grimm
For explanation,
in
German
not in
all cases, in
wliat places of
in
come down
If,
to us the sound y,
it
and
what that
i
of
is
may hecome
in
the Old
High German.
like plintju
we
must,
t,iu^
m my opinion, leave
;
but desju
and expresses,
ADJECTIVES.
369
however, of the proDominal forms which have been mentioned, it is important to consider, that in the Sanskrit
the pronominal
base
to,
itself
noun
vowel.
first
pro-
SANSKRIT.
OLD scixvasic
ta-ya.
.
W\syd
sydy)
syu. dyu,
'
dya,
d'l/i.
tu-yu.
n-i.
T?ra
"her "hasr
dyd.
ty-yata-ya.
JKlfmydni, "hcEC,
dyu.
[G. Ed.
p. 384.]
one must
first
before they can pass as original forms for the Old High Ger-
man.
obtains
Our mother
demonstrative base
TO may
through
all
we have It is it occurs also in union with YO. in the Old High German the combinaall
tion of the base of the article with the old relative pronoun
itself
over
seen
plural,
dhn
dien.
occurs
dyem
(diem),
and,
Notker,
always
demu,
According to
this, I
difhr, d'es,
&e.,
from
dyer, dyes
(for dyis),
Ac-
cording to
this,
therefore, des,
B B
370
this,
ADJECTIVES.
would be, in their origin, just as different as in the
In the neuter, on the
blind'-ata
left,
i)
for blind-
DYA
e
is
(from
Further support of
bases in the
de-n
(I
my
German
furnished by
the
demonstrative
which
I explain as
compounded,
w tya,
men-
and
^ sya
which has a
full
a simple word.
ai);
upon
preserved
dia-sir;
referred
to
(I.
which the
strange,
Grimm
no
longer appears
for
dliea
from dhia
for
dhya,*
tya,
answers
6),
to
the
Sanskrit Gothic
form
"
sa
(Greek
6.
case.
first
Remark
The
favourable to the
M/Z>J^ = Sanskrit madhya, are less retention of the y of the definite pronoun
diffi-
culty of pronouncing
it,
may have
yn-ya
;
nominative midy^r
is
from midya-ir
for midya-yaTf
ntidynizus
from midyn-yizds.
however, according to
this
different authorities.
ADJECTIVES.
fontis in several other cases, so that the base
371
YA
is
therein
doubled,
we must
itself,
itself,
stronger personification
it
'
and,
is
'
The
participle
present
singular
has,
in Gothic,
preserved
only the
nominative
which
may
be deduced
from a theme
oijiyand-s (see p.
135.).
The
theme
GJBANDA,
as
GIBAND;
theme from
whence, then, by a
new
addition,
as,
the
indefinite
arisen,
is
above,
BLINDAN
all
unorganic n
mination
{nd,
r,
for as
and
n, . 125.)
GIBAND,
itself to
in order to
pare
(see
no feminine theme charanti has been formed from the unorganic theme charanta, mentioned at p. 319 G. ed.
290. In the Pali,
p. 68)
through the assimilative power of the y (see p. 353, Note +). The termination ai answers to the neuter tai, mentioned at . 157., for tat^ which
latter is contained in the
compound
is
tut-tai
After
entirely dropped;
hence
e.g. kurs-ai,
BB
372
ADJECTIVES.
form eharanfa has arisen from
The
.
{i,
see
119.); e.g.
has pro-
GIB AND
GIBANDA
it {as
and therefore,
GIBAN DAN
to
has no feminine,
GIBANDON,
which
BLIND ON to BLINDAN);
{ei=-i, . 70. \
gihandei
from
the
old
theme GIBAND, in analogy with the Sanskrit charanti, has become GIBANDEIN, by the later addition of an n.
Hence, according to
.
142., in
the
nominative gihandei
this
must have
arisen.
It is not,
ranti
{%.
137.),
sukanti,
"the
turning," for
sible.
nowise admis-
In Latin, bases in
or
f,
originally feminine,
must
a
have arisen
consonant:
.
from adjective
thus
:
bases
terminating
with
FERENTI
and
this
from
FERENT
i,
(compare
119. geniln-c-s)
feminine
as
is
the case in
p. 174,
Note) as
has
(p. 363),
in
some
i
cases no longer
remembered
to the other
genders
and hence
is
explained,
that
what
surprising,
the
ADJKCTIVES.
participles,
t,
373
when standing
which
is
"Remark.
In the yu
I
of k'epan'yu, the
feminine of kepantir,
On
it is
account
y//,
therefore,
ing
the
also
as
the derivative
KEPANTA,
and not
k'ppanto
{=Goih\c gibanda),
n. kepantn
to the
(= Gothic giband6). This only is peculiar Old High German participle present, in relation to
its
it
base
YA
in
its
contrac-
tion to
It
is,
there
is
far
more
frequent occasion to use this form divested of case terminations in the participle present, than in
tives,
all
other adjecin
as
the
definite
form
in
nds
in
Gothic,
it;
the
and as
place of
may
supplies the
;
so that
it
form
is
in
i,
be given.
So in
Grimm's hymns
flected ufpurrenti,
and haptizans by
or adverbial.
tioned
**
by
my
opinion,
be rather adduced in
374
proof of the
ADJECTIVES
propositioD, that the
participle
present has,
more
truly than
other adjectives;
forms
like
manvyana, mentioned at
German
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
291.
suffix
The comparative
tara,
is
feminine
tard,
and
the
to
superlative
by tama,
feminine tamd,
culine
the
common mas;
theme of the positive e.g. punya-tara, punya-tama, from punya, "pure"; suchi-tarut suchi-tama, from suchi, "clean"; halavat-tara, balavat-tama, from
and
neuter
halavat,
"strong."
the
In
the
a>7aj^
Zend,
tara
through
perverunite
sion
of
language
and aj^^^
^ma
e.
g.
from
huska, nominative
"dry";
Aj^j^'^^^goJjJ
"holy";
As^j^vM-^Aj^uj^gt?
verethrazant,
'
verethrazamtema
verethrazans,
(Vend.
S. p. 43)
from
nom.
(literally,
Vritra-slaying ").*
According to
my opinion
wttara owes
* The
which
recognise in
occurring <j<^AJ(2)> upa-zoitf " let him strike"; since, in fact, the root zan
(Siinskrit ^fT han) suppresses
its
final vowel,
and
pears in a-tt^rl Vritra-han, " Vritra slaying," and similar compounds, has,
in
pa^jdo (Vend. S.
p. 43),
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
origin to the root it tn (tar, step beyond " "to place beyond "
its
. 1.),
(e. g.
375
[G. Ed.
p.
;
"to
389.J
"
also,
has acutely remarked, with this root are connected the preposition trans, and also terminus, as that which
is
overstepped,
and probably
The
superla-
Grimm
(III. 5S3.),
comparative, although
the comparative.
factory etymology;
satis-
tan,
im tama would be no regular formation, and I now prefer recognising in it an abbreviation of tarama, partly because
torily
the
superlative
as
sufl&x
ishtha
its
may
is
be satisfaciyas,
considered
derived from
comparative
through the
suffix tha,
contained in
is
TPm tama-s
they both contain the same primitive, abbreviated in a similar manner, but have tiken a different derivative suffix, as in
iteyL-n-ro^
"the
fifth":
more
truly retained
In Latin,
become
and,
witli
s,
which
hence.
Latin,
simus;
43),
at p. 308.
More
nsnally, however, do in
in the
place of the Sanskrit an of the suffix txint and vd/ts ; so that, in Zend, the
sign of the noYninative has taken the place of the Indian n, the said sign
being o for
*,
according to $.56".
^t^ vdm,
the
2^nd
o may
also be looked
upon as belonging
BumouTs
Ya^na, Notes,
p. cxxviii. &c.).
376
ADJECTIVES.
However, the simus is, which we will
generally
hereafter explain.
292.
As
p.
in comparatives a relation
390.]
[G. Ed.
many,
lies
at the bottom,
it is
individual-
and
suffix
from that
in ekafama-s,
'
and expresses
instead of
the one of
many
tara
persons."
is
suffix
itself in
and in Gothic in that of THAR A hence uter, neuter, alter Gothic, hva-thar,* "which of two persons?" Old High German,
[G. Ed.
p.
391.]
to us in the
adverb weder, as an abbreviation of the Middle High Ger The Gothic resembles the Latin
nominative from
its its
in
for hvathar{a)s, as
" man,"
is
This sup-
In the Gothic, as
sonants
;
it
appears, the s
protected
hence akrs, " a field" (corop. Grimm, p. 599) still the adjective nommatives gaurs, " mournful " (theme Gaura, comp. Sanskrit ^ftx ghora,
"terrible"), and svirs, "honoured," occur, where this cause
is
wanting,
may
here
have operated.
first
In
valr.,
but the a
is
Latin, in adjective
,
bases in
with tbc
preceding
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
man, combined with a
also,
^rrfj^H antara-8,
377
Anthar,
whose
initial syllable is
itself
the
same which
*'
in
^^
TI
any a, "
alius,'^
has united
ya.
From
this "^PH
comparative
suffix
is
thing;
so
is,
also, the
and
so, also, in
Sanskrit, itarOf
i,
as,
in
same base."*
suflBx,
In our
German,
also,
wieder
is
the comparative
and the
whole rests, perhaps, on a pre-existing Old High German word huia-dar or huyadar, with a change of the interrogative
-weder.
p. 37j0,
meaning into the demonstrative, as in toeder, entThe icie in wieder, therefore, should be regarded as, die in dieser; and herein we may refer to the Isidoric
it
dhea-sa.
cannot be surprising
if
one
them invested with a comparative or superlative sufor if some of them occur merely with a comparative
For
e.g.
termination.
at the
bottom of
all
genuine prepositions.
its is to
preceding
i,
while
in
vowel of formation
* is universal in bases in sa
and
.si,
vowel of the
;
base
e.ff.
is
suppressed,
two
hence
"a
tall,"
from
DRUSA;
garuns,
"a market,"
which
from
*
GARUXSI,
I
f.
this adverb,
"the journey,"
my
Review of
Grammar
p. 479.
378
ADJECTIVES.
two
opposite
directions
thus,
" over,"
and
is
always
expressed in Latin,
also,
suffix, dexter
is
of the
interior)
;
customary
ior
(dexterior,
sinisterior,
like
sinistimus).
The
prepositions which, in
a comparative
suffix,
are
and probably,
inter
also, obiter
(compare audacter,
Wn(T. ardar,
To
"among," "between";
wanting, as in Sanskrit
an
is
is
standing
this, antar, in
an analogous
word
\(r.
Ed.
p. 393.]
was of
opinion,
when
I first
vowel of conjunction.
connected with
the Sanskrit ^fij aAhi, " to," " towards," the division obi-ter might also be
obi
observe
^tfim
The common
idea,
compounded of oh and
for ni,
Formations
intelligible
by by the
to
native authorities,
to arrive at,"
and the
analogous
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
Greek
-npuit
319
from
itpo.
For the
w^H
where explained
as
V a; from which, also, come ^vt: a-dhara and ^VH. a-dhama, "the under one," or "the most under," to which inferus and
infimus are akin, as
fumus
to
^nr dhuma-s,
d/ii^/
and in
dfitpot,
"ambo^^ answering to
suffixes
g^
vonic oba.
The
my
fama
first,"
mentioned in . 291.; as also in thr prathama, "the m. from pra, " before," the T sound of the suffix is
somewhat
differently transposed.
The
suffix
dhas of adhas,
fas,
to tara,
otas, is, in
intus.
The
the
it,
to express distance
6ev
from a
.
place.
In
this, also,
Greek
(from
Beg,
comp.
217.) corresponds
with
which, in regard
in ^avfi adhas
(.
to its
T sound,
rests
16
),
dev,
The form
p. 394.]
final
as in the Sanskrit
[G. Ed.
235./.),
sonant letters
(. 25.), viz.
which ia
fixed
(. 56*.).
**
to go."
A
are,
relation,
never-
They
however,
if
they
is
not
The demonstrative
baae
OVO
answers
;^'.
the
Zend
for a, according to
255. (a.).
380
"Remark. form of the
"there/'
ADJECTIVES.
Dobrowsky
suffix,
p.
451
gives
udil
as the
full
down a
suffix dcJye,
place, as kudye,
"where?"
onildye,
been treated of at
ttdH,
two adverbs,
so
&c.;
and as
this
pronoun
also
is,
in
general,
is
frequently
every reason to
ono-udtl,
itself in
is
contained
in
ovo-udu,
is
But how
I
the
dence on
this point
but
as,
according to
ii,
255.
(gr.),
in the last
a vocalised nasal
is
sometimes
compared
might
indcf uvde,
from
I, U.
J^wrfye, yildyH,
hiniar,
has arisen
the
from
hiuy
petrified
on which
Gothic
Before the
de,
with
tlie final
KO suppressed);
As
zdye (older
accord-
sde), "
here
.
i,
"";
where
" (relative).
e (e),
ing to
older
255.
I
from ^fu
strative base
which, in Greek,
aXAodi)"
in the form of
294. In
di {-nodi,
German, even more than in Latin, the preposishew themselves inclined to combine with the comtions
parative
suffix.
To
inter,
men-
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
uvonr, with u for the old
ever, the, in
a,
381
If,
according to
. 66."*
how-
my
one must
not, with
Grimm (III.
preposition und, " as far as," &c., by a suffix ar, and so again
from an ancient
period
of the
of a
language, was
existence
German
dialect,
preposition
relations
.is
according
to
the
of sound
mentioned in
language, or
"
. 66. 91.
The matter
"after,"
to
different
German
af-tar,
for
the
primitive
languages,
transmit
us
from
";
WiTT antar,
has
first
sutler,
itself
united
fjffra
look upon
as an abbrevia-
and others,
In
as
to in
feminine
the
tra,
from
exfera,
oftra,
&c.
regard
termination
thro,
however,
and
similar
forms
in-
appear to
me
as
datives,
i. e.
original
strumental
as
(.
160.), as also, in
an adverb,
e.g. in
Per-
although
they have a locative meaning, like "ij^ yatra, " where,'* are to be regarded as instrumental forms, according to
the
principle
in
Tf
of the
Zend language
Crit.
.
(.
158.),
and of the
gerund
tra
like
ya,
(Gramm.
trd,
633.
tttt
would be
to be derived
from
tard
compare forms
HH^^^I manushya
"inter homines"
(Gramm.
Crit.
. 91.
f Grimm however,
tionship in the
also,
at
II.
vatar
many
German and
Tsound
Gramm.
Crit. . 178.
Rem.).
382
.
ADJECTIVES.
As
aflra is related to aflar, so is the Gothic
is
Old High German widar, our widevt supplied by the Sanskrit through its
[G. Ed. p. 396.] inseparable preposition f^ vi, which expresses separation, distraction, e.g. in visrip, " to go from one
Exactly similar
first to
is
the Sanskrit
to
which
was the
to belong,*
and whence comes the adjective tT^ nicha, "low" (Gramm.Crit. . lll.)> the base of our nieder. Old High Ger[G. Ed.
p.
397.]
man
G.
ni-dar.f
From
hin-dary
Old High
177. c).
German
discussed
hin-tar,
(p,
comes our
ed.
hin-ter
394,
In
the
Old
High
German
sun-drd,
is,
" seorsim,"
in
like
and
the
t Grimm
259)
assents to
my opinion,
to suppose a
verb nithan, nath, neihun, to which the Old High German gindda (our
and
by Grimm,
root,
I.
me
correct,
suffix
;
and according
as in the
to
etymo-
"
too,
To gi-nd-
-da, indeed, the Sanskrit supplies no root nd^ but perhaps nam, " to bend
oneself," the
before
m of which, according to the laws of euphony, is suppressed which does not produce Guna as nata, " bent," naft, " bending,' with the preposition sam, san-nati, which Wilson explains by " reverence,"
t,
;
salutation."
is,
As the Gothic
as
inseparable prepo-
ga. Old
Grimm first acutely remarked, gi-nd-da has much the same formation
still
with aan-na-ti :
it
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
fication, related to the
383
and the
Latin
u,
therefore, is
from
a,
66.
The
in
con-trcL,
however,
is
nearly just as
much opposed
meaning
contra,
also,
to its primitive
cum
and
would
Observe,
gether
with":
the latter
the
end*^)>
the
in
meaning " end," cannot be unexpected adverbs of place and time, and, like Mitte, "mid,"
Be
that as
it
may,
so
much
is certain,
that
there
is
no necessity
for a hypothetic
the substantive gi'tiada or for the preposition nidar, as they can be fully
set at rest
ni,
the comparative suffix dor, which frequently occurs in prepositions. as the circumstance that genuine original prepositions never
And
come from
etymoto divide
verbs, but are connected with pronouns, I must, with regard to its
Norman
Danish
to appearance, are
wanting in
above preis
of
the same import with them (=:the Zend t^xi^ ^ot), and which, in most
of the dialects mentioned, maintains itself equally with the other forms:
as
is
it
word
384
(compare
ning,"
it
ADJECTIVES.
inmitten,
attaches itself
to the
prepositional ideas
therefore hinont, "this side," enovl, "that side," would be the same as " at this end," " at that end." With regard
to the comparative forms there
is,
further, the
Old High
Germnn
[G. Ed.
for-dar, fur-dir
(*' porro,''^
to be mentioned,
p. 398.]
whence
"
Remark
As
we have endeavoured
I
be-
thrd or taro
more confidence present the forms in as remarkable remains of ablatives. Their meanplace,
and to that of
"whence?" tha-tlirS, " thence," yam-thro, " hence," alya-thrd, " from another quarter," inna-thrS, "from within," uta-thro, "from without," af-tar6, " from behind," dala-thrd, " from under," and
thus hva-thrd,
some
is
nearly the
same, prepositions.
not from
dal,
"a
valley," but
the Sanskrit
aeresis
"srv^
adhara,
common exchange
of the r
is
with
so
I (. 20.).
named from
As
5BT
to the
ablative forms
(. 69.),
same
relation
to
that in
Greek
Note
* p. 20l).
Many
verbs in o,as
sinteind, "
a\way sr sniumundd,
an ablative meaning does not appear more plainly in them than in the Latin perp'^tuo, cito, subito, tertio, and others, be
rather considered as ablatives than as neuter accusatives of
indefinite
so that
thridt/6 yfOu\d
DEGREES OF COMrARISON.
answer
to the Sanskrit ablative iritiyit
385
while the
ecmmon
It
thus
THRJDY^N,
all
nom.
thridya.
must
ren-
an
is
that there-
especially
adjective,
an
old
which
where the
As
7.,
by
course andnneithd
is
ducement
article,
form
is
supplied by
dered.
The
case
may
where
as
[G. Ed.
p. 399.]
:
nominative, but
Grimm
it
would
else
In
my
Moreover,
also,
anda-
and andavairthd do not occur by themselves alone adAs, then, thro has
thrdt, it
is
verbially.
shewn
itself to
us to be an
abbreviation of
sion of the
<
in Greek, and
the Prakrit,
all
3'
into 2.
certain
sounds
(t,
th, d).
which, in
the
actual
condi-
we can
follow their
so that
386
they are
final
ADJECTIVES.
sounds of a second generation, comparable
(.
255.
/.).
tli,
d, in
the
= Sanskrit
th
fir ti,
^nT
anti,
^ tha
or
f{
ta
and
I explain the
or
d,
common
locative ad-
verbs in
sative
tra,
tas,
meaning,
e.
(see tatra in
my
Glossary).
The Sanskrit
suffix
V dha
is
appears,
in
common
found
base
i
and
I
tt^ sa-ha
which
ought,
according to
origin,
mean "here
or there":
it
become a
iha,
preposition, which
is,
The adverb
[G. Ed.
"here,"
in Zend,
p. 400.]
na,
"not";
j^y
so that xs(^\i^
ndit,
naMhat means
"not
*'
"neither"
(literally
it,"
From
AJAJ
* Vend. Sade,
p.
^^^
imah idha vacho framrava, " fuBC hie verba enuntia," which Anquetil
translates
by " en prononfant
occurs repeatedly aj(OAJ adha, with the same meaning, from the demonstrative base a, as in the Veda's
^U
;
perceptible meaning.
t a + makes ^, according to $.
naidha.
2.
is
formed, by
28.,
DEGREES OE COMPARISON.
387
To the avadha and Aj^^;rAj aeta-dha (Vend. S. p. 164). Zend-Vedic suffix dha corresponds most exactly the Greek
da, in evda
i-dlia,
aj(oj
iha,
identical
nda from
swers
the
completely
Zend
a}(2aja5
tracted in the
Greek
article),
more
form of
^^
ihatya,
^ iha
**
w tya,
kvdd<TiO,
the Latin
from
and, in
/ram shews
itself
an abbreviation offrama.
As
. 135.),
as
propinquus, or one
who
stands
* Before
my
I
beUeved I could make out the Greek base av to agree with the Sanskrit amu, " ilie," by casting oat the m (as Kovpos with kuthe Sclavonic,
vidra)
:
now, however,
<iS(^
ava and
OVO have
t Terms of
"a grandson,"
is,
who
is
In Latin
it
would be
difficult to find
may
without the
In the
is
fully preserved
C C 2
meaniig
388
ancient preposition
ADJECTIVES.
ni,
mentioned
at p. 382,
from which,
the
to
meaning
In consideration
Greek being
is
the Doric,
"OPNIX
said for
also
recognise in the syllable xi ^^ forms like -jravTa-'x^o-dev Ttavra-xp-tre, TToT^Kaxoo^e, and others, a cognate form of the
suffix 6a, dha,
or of the corrupted
lies,
^ ha (comp.
. 23.).
At
in
my
as iravra
first
members
of
compounds
ttavrd-ixop^o^).
Ti.avTa')(o
tity of its
suffix
mean
everywhere ";
"from everywhere,"
we combine our
which might
eKet is
locative adverbs
;
wo and da with
versus
illic,
and in Greek,
literally
as
local adverb.
mean in Forms in
illic,
ah
5^0,
however, are in
The
addition
of
new
suffixes
me assuredly more
natural
Buttmann
un-
meaning ax or even
to
sion
think
61,
recognise in the
fVf
Xt of
a corruption of the
suffix
from
fs
dhi
in
a sister form to
to the
negation, but not the father, but the root /a/, "to fall," and a
suffix
tri.
Un&di
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
^sf^ adhi, "to," "towards," with a nasal introduced.
third
389
As a
form
I
in
suffix
dha appears in
Greek,
notice
with
mrdhya, "midst,"
in the
tlie
form
is
fxeaa-o^,
cr for d, ^ dh, as /zeaof from mil y of which has assimilated itself, The suffix ce, however, in to the a:
that
rest
it
altered
from
its
original
intention to denote
in
whence we
iro-ae,
hvad
John
xiii. 3.
hvad
gagcjis, itov
imayeig
"whither?" also
yain-d, eKPi-ae,
alya-th, a\Ao-<re.
i-th;
To the Zend
mean
'
idha,
Greek
evda, corresponds
junction" but,"
also,
"
if,"
To
this class,
ath-than,
and it has
(.
[G. Ed.
p. 402.]
399.).
Thad, in comis
ei,
which
the
probably
c-on-
nected
with
ij
ya,
has
preserved
original
locative
cited as
meaning together with the accusative, and thad-ei may be "where" and "whither." The d in these forms, answering to the Greek 6, agrees with the rule for the transmutation of sounds
at the
(.
87.)
and
it is
to
compare bauth,
suffix
it.
bu-dum
so
sound of the
has, in
Remark
also,
2.
As
the expression of
3.
Luke
" whither.?"
35.
On
* Vide .991.
390
ADJECTIVES.
meaning;
fharei leik, yaindrS
gaUsand
Compare
these forms
as,
adhari, "in
197.).
That, how-
^d
(. 69.),
moreover
"i^fi
nanama
or *nnR nnndmn,
295.
bent myself.'
"
The
also in the
form of
TUMAN,
nominative tuma,
or,
with
for
comthus,
common
superlative suffix
ISTA
If
have
suffiired
one considers the Indian suffix ^t^ tama, to apocope of the a as in Latin, also, timus apviri-tim, caterva-tim,
which
p.
have already,
in
forms
like legi-iimua,
as
superlatives
one
may
hva-
-na=oF? ka-m,
Gothic af-tana,
ni-dana,
the pre-
behind
";
German
As,
"here below."
German
t
sound (Grimm
it is
"
abroad,"
heimina
"
or a d preceding the a;
or
if
merely of ana;
other principle.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
The
to
391
the
Sanskrit
TJTft upari,
Greek
tnrep,
has,
in
the
obanoy "above,*'
corresponding
296. In
the
of the heavens
come from
anch, " to
prepositions
;
in combination
is
^^
go"
denoted
'';
is
over against
it,"
by TTW^ praiyanch,
its
from
tifn prati,
ova,
"below"; and
called
opposite
^'^^ udanch,
from
Now it
is
remarkable that in
tar
German
and
ianui
The custom
of the language
disposes
na in such a manner,
(Grimm.
was
the
quarters
of
the
globe,
as,
p.
376,
t^cktlH
ikatama,
of
many
persons.**
satisfac-
torily explained,
and in
For
base
this object
wi,
we betake
at
p.
mentioned
whence
the
comparative
wi-dar.
We
* By writing
Grimm marks
i,
in
which
392
"towards
the
west,"
ADJECTIVES.
wes-iana,"
but
we may keep
in vowels
certain
combinations, and
to have
tishkasa
an
for
pratikasa
(. 96.).
and as in Latin
if it
from
then
the
ab,
ob
But
to
were preferred
widar,
to deduce
it
westar,
w'estana,
from
the
derivative
would
into
s.
be
base,
necessary
and,
force
to
the
.
d of derivation
102.,
according
difficult
change
than
it
into
The
east is
more
east,"
of
explanation
the west
6s-tano,
Old
It
is
High German
6s-tar,
"towards the
east,"
"from the
for
up
toge-
which the
a prepo-
east is
named
be received as a
German
sition
case, is
preposition;
in
this
itself,
appellation
German
language.
us,
may
of
all,
to turn to
language,
is
prefixed to
its
may have
as,
changed
always where
one stands, and the direction to which one is turned and one may, with perfect justice, turn that which is at the
bottom to the uppermost, or to the
which in Sanskrit
the Sclavonic
front.
In Zend, ava,
a pronoun,
proper to
this
pronoun
is also
{OVO, nom.
this
ov),
obsolete
east
is
remnant of
and occurs in Greek as av, need not surprise us to find an base in German, and that the
Here
s
it
may
Sanskrit the
;
pre-
from
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
avaa,
393
but one, would
therefore,
by suppressing the
Gothic
last a
arise (as in
(different
ilt,
from
our
aus,
Old
~),
High German
is
in Sanskrit g-w
vt, "
up
, 80., ds:
The Latin
aus-ter
might then
beside
to which
p.
Grimm
be
32)
placed
with
more confidence
and
led
the Old
High
German
as a sister form,
suffix
comparative
has given
its
to
the
preposition,
which in Sanskrit
as it at
name
the
first
we
+ anch),
haurio,
" southern,"
to
be related.
The
derivations
from
and
or
avo),
notice.
As,
Indian
preposition
ava,
avas,
is
most
suitable,
we
refrain
from
modes
in
German.
point
of departure,
we
cannot place
mark
it
out as
w'estar).
We
turn
"
now
to the south, in
man
sun-dar,
towards the
south," the
mentioned at
therefore,
not to be mistaken.
The
south,
tance,
a new
more
appellations.
We
cannot,
however, omit
calling
atten-
preposition
f^
nis,
394
in the form of
nir,
ADJECTIVES.
which
it is
In
the Old
Sclavonic
the
Indo-Greek compara-
tive
suffix
contained
(. 255. d.),
(p. 352)
viory-i, then,
formed
from
vtoro-i
is
in which
v,
the
cardi-
nal
this
number dwa
melted down to
corresponding in
years,"
v.
respect to the
singular, with 6
Zend
but
the
To
Sanskrit
"Sfiw^
katara,
"
"which of two
.^
and
iTfR ya-tara,
gically, the
Old Sclavonic
ye-ter,
ko-tery-i
ye~tero.
and
feminine
ye-tera
(ye-Tepa),
neuter
two pronouns is, however, forgotten, together with their comparative meaning for kotoryi means "who?" and yeter, " some one '' (compare
origin of these
;
The
p. 352),
Dobrowsky
p. 407.]
(p. 343),
however, in which he
divides
is
[G. Ed.
ot-or ;
clearly wrong,
the
suffix
into
for
although
the
interrogative
base
KO may
to
lay aside
(Mo,
*'
its o,
quis?"'
Dobr.
is
more
in accordance
quite isolated
and besides
and yet
this
the
pronoun
i,
" he,"
from
yo,
strative base
298.
ye-ter is said.
small
number
ishtha,
of comparatives
are formed in
Sanskrit by
f<tnr tyas,
ishthn, in
which
remarked
its
derivation from lyas in traction to ish (compare ish-ta, " offered," from
(p. 389.),
we recognise a
conso
tha,
yaj),
that the suffix of the highest degree througli which, also, the ordinal
(Terajo-To-j),
is
properly
numbers ^g^w
(e*c-Tor),
chotur-thas
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
numbers above two, as that
latives,
395
suflfix
jm tama occurs
in
ordinal
numbers
e.g. f^^lPririH^
vinsati-tama-s,
q^H^
may
ish,
To
the
form
euphonic
is,
is,
for is
in
Greek and
Zend
(comp.
in the superlatives in
is-simus,
which
.
101.);
is
simple
from Latin,
with
a contraction of
appears in the
be compared
(.
may
in fieyt(T-Tog.
129.) the
thus
(see
. 9.),
[G. Ed.
all
p. 408.]
ever,
mav
originally have
been current in
(. 129.),
the cases,
as
the
as is
probable
&c., if
idris,
iori,
in
. 22.,
The breadth of the sufiix, which is still remarkable in the more contracted from lyas, may be the cause why the form
forms
like J|0^iu*4
gar-iydhs-am (graviorem).
of the
it;
positive
is
before
so
that not
only
rally before
whole
suffixes,
are suppressed
(Gramm.
Crit.
252.)
e.
g.
from ^f^m^t
maC-tyds
from
with strength,"
* The Taddbita
which form
deriTatire
words not
396
from
the
bala
ADJECTIVES.
+ vat),
kship,
hal4yas;
from
kshipra,
"quick"
Cfrom
base
"to
throw"),
comes
;
ksMp-iyas;
tripra,
from
" satis-
hhudra,
fied,"
" insignificant,"
ksMd-iyas
from
trap-it/as;
Guna
the
dropping
the
of the
compensated by strengthening
appears to me,
radical
syllable
56\,
vidwas),
"knowing."
With respect
ar, as
to
trapiyas,
from
tripra, let it
be observed that
Guna
of
f ^, is easily transposed to ra
(Gramm.
;
Crit.
34\)
compare
explains
G.
ed.).
In a similar
I.
also
come from
tion
mus but
is
Greek
Re-
markable,
too, is
Sanskrit in this point, that the former, like the latter, before the gradation suffix under discussion, disburthens itself
of other
p.
more weighty
from e^dpo^,
;
suffixes
28)
thus,
a\yia-Tog,
&c., exactly as
above
and
and
I believe I
from
fiuKpog,
on which principle
also rests
the
Guna
in analogous Sanskrit
where Buttmann
(.
67.
Rem.
DEGREES OF COMPABISON.
the comparative the a (a)
;
397
while, in
my
is
to
be
The formation
similar to
bahuia, "
from /xeyaXo-^,
is
the
Sanskrit, of
much" Tff banhishtha, from comes bbuyhhtha and /xey/oroj, in relation to MEFAAO, has lost as much as banh'-ishtha, compared with bahuia, only that
much "; from
;
bahu., "
c.)
has
compensated for the loss of ul/i by which therefore, as Ag. Benary ; very correctly remarked, rests on the same
is
Guna
in kshepishtha, &c.*
Remark.
be necessary
[G. Ed.
p. 410.]
as
Burnouf (Ya^na,
(Vahista, p. 25), in
explain
the
coming
from the
sra
as
of
srt,
" fortune,"
common
view, in which
positive,
lyas, ishtha,
forming
rnat, "
srSyas. sreshtha.
From
I
m comes
deduce
fortunate,"
from which
sri-yas, ir^-shthn^
by
might
in the gradation
into con-
many
other Taddhita
patronymics, as
%^^iT
vaivasicata, from
f^^TT
vivasicat.
On
ixhtha,
raised
by
Be
that
how
it
in
assume an
fXTjKicrros,
historic con-
Gncian vowel-lengthening
it
in
Bacraovy
and
above gradations.
398
ADJECTIVES.
and on
may
" swollen,"
priy-a,
suffix a,
is
the
preceding
also,
must
retire,
only a
to the
Crit.
As
meanings
melior, optimus,
from
^'
" fortunate," it
may
be further
in
Sanskrit,
is
honourable,"
" the
man
gifted with
fortune
";
whence bhadra, "fortunate,"" "excellent'^), which Pott was acute enough first to remark (Etymol. Inquiries, p. 245), who
collates also bdtyan,
"to use."
t,
to
It
. 87.,
in the Gothic
we made an attempt
to refer
It is
very
common
for
to
become
(. 17.),
(comp.
. 63.).
If,
also,
should
wanting in
The
ideal positive
agddha
"
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
g6da)
is
399
to be compared, with
6,
^A
87.
(. 69.),
299.
.
From
t^ITO^ lydhs,
mentioned at
94.
298.,
lyan,
The
the Greek
Ztov,
To lyan answers a, and sounds iyan. and to the vocative lyan answers ~iov to
;
weak theme,
is
ius
(. 22.).
which
abandoned
declines
its
comparative as
with v\ hence
though
ioT-em
its
first
Latin
ior-is.
ids-em,
22.),
However, one might, as Pott has already, I believe, noticed somewhere, reduce the contracted forms like fieKrloi,
^eXriov^, to an original io<ra^to<reg, toa-a^, corresponding to
ttjahsam, iydnsi
which, as is so
rejected.*
vowels, would
[G. Ed.
be
On
except in
p. 412.]
have rejected an
isolated
others), which,
and not
a;
is
and a few
parative
We
would therefore
abandoned
still
v<r-,
latter,
as
perhaps one
may
that
were, pre-
^e\Ttovaa. other
It
is,
however,
lan-
while
European
sister
* Comp.
p.
325 G. ed.
400
guages have
comparative
only
ADJECTIVES.
preserved
the
last
element
of
the
ns the
the
the
and
the
while
more indulgence
alone has
it
diflPers
for the s
than
nasal;
n,
Greek
preserved
in
in
comparative
this
respect
from
Zend
it
adduce
from
the
European
languages a cognate
if ior
7wi/, lov
or
and
Jtxiv
should
Latin
r,
namely
a,
300.
are
more
numerous than the corresponding ones in Sanskrit, and require no authentication. With regard to their theory, Burnouf has rendered important service, by his excellent
[G. Ed,
p. 413.]
treatise
also useful to us in
ista
Sanskrit
Grammar.
In form
ajjoo-*
and
(.
ista,
nom,
ist'-s
135.), as the
Zend frequently
exhibits
aspirates.
much more
occasion for
handed down
An example
I
of the comparative
under discussion
is
drawn
attention.f
It
springs
from
the
positive
base
Comp.
(^.20.
I. o.
.'?7i2.
that
had disappeared, as
?
in the geni-
^sya
case,
which
is
also the
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
MAyUAi^ masas, " great " {maso, masah, masanh,
.
401
56
.
56
.),
and confirms,
like other
Zend forms, the theory which holds that other suffixes fall away before
compared with the Sanskrit
the
t
under discussion.
feminine base
If yehi is
shews
itself,
and then
(. 42.),
the a has, through the power of assimilation of the y become ^ and s has, according to . 53., become
the loss of the
like srS-yas,
t
h.
In
the
mentioned at
with which,
also, bliu-yas,
" more,"
Greek comparatives
?\^(r(TuiVf
with a doubled
before
;
tav,
as Kpeha-ojv, fipdaffuiv,
y to
p. 414.3
alya-, Latin
In Prakrit, in the
in this dialect,
common
itself to
the weaker
consonant assimilates
precedes
or
the
stronger,
whether
other,"
this
follows
it;
thus
anna, "the
;
the San"
bhavishyali,
he
will
be,"
becomes
from
is
shewn
to be
impossible
it
for
it is
would
fall to
to
become y.
* Comp.
taa-oficu,
from
It
(o-yofuu,
attributive verbs.
may
H ya m
contracted to
;
as,
sahihimi, "
will endure,"
saJtishye (Urvasi,
by Lenz.
D D
402
which
it
ADJECTIVES.
is
clear that
r;
t;
is
stronger than
y, as
it
also is
also of
tti,
ifi
hence,
the
which, in propreceding.
nunciation,
naturally leans
upon
also,
word
Jiav.
without presupposition of
from
As
o-
to the {Kpeur-
&c.), to
<r
which
need
the
t, 5, 6, into
99.);
Old Sclavonic
may
in . 255. (m.), ,
and
which latter
y,
and
frequently the
ye
y or produces
i
in Greek.
Before the
and before ye
in the dative
and
and ye of the imperative, ch becomes ; e.g. gryes-i hoiu. yryech, as <9a<r-<ra)v from daa-yuiv, from ray^; g becomes ^ e.g. prti^i from prAg, as fxeilQuiv, oKl^oiv, from fj-ei^yoiv, oTui^yoav,
from
fJ.ey-,
6\ty-;
k becomes
as
ch,
while in Greek k
is
modified
in the
same way
^^
of the C (^^f^) ^o assimilation takes place after it, but the y entirely disappears, or, in [Jiei^uiv, is pressed into the interior
of the
word (comp.
. 119.),
as in
d/ue/vioi/, 'xeipttiv,
which
lat-
ter
may
"
the under
.
a (comp.
401.).
With the superlative fxeyia-To^ compare the Zend A5^e;o^-w^ maz'ista, where j x, according to . 57., answers to the Sanskrit h oiw^mahat, "great"; while in the above ^wie^^MM^
maHy&hi, as in
the
positive
z,
mams
(euphonical ly mas6),
its
as if the Zend, by
permutation
Greek
but
DFREES OF COMPARISON.
we
find,
483
z,
Vend.
S. p. 214, ^'^^'^9
;
mazyo, with
thus,
which
hold
to be a neuter comparative
vidvdo, " the
^^9
"^-i-JJ-^^
mazyS
more
in the
3U1.
As
Latin comparative a
suffix
has raised
was,
perhaps,
originally,
;
so
more
short-
the
same
it
and Latin, in
(see
.
its
and
this
most plainly
p.
[G. Ed.
416.J
I first
pointed
divide,
p.
742).
We
must
and
in the termination,
fieyt<r-To^, p.
is identical
402)
whence
it is
form
has
lost
mikils,
a guttural (compare ma-jor and mag-ior), which, in "great" which has weakened the old a to i appears,
(. 87.),
as k.
as
it
seems
to
be
separated
from
in base and formation, related to the Zend maz-yS (from maz-yas), which we have become acquainted with above (p. 415 G. ed.) in the sense of " more."
"Remark.
in
is,
There
time
and
was
not
in
possession,
which
Grimm
has
since
He
has
however, afterwards,
c. p.
viewing
in
exactly the
same
to
relation to
hau-
mais
does
maiza,
" major."
Do2
-^4
ADJECTIVES.
'
Compared with the Zend maz-y6 and Greek /xe/^-wi', one might believe the z in maiza belonged to the positive base, particularly as the Old High German adds a second comparative suliix to its
{m^riro,
'
Raihtis,
which
Grimm
III. p. 88,
me
it,
properly to signify
therefore, as a
our
rechter
and
consider
com-
High German rehtes, examined the Old High German, can only
is
r'ehidr.
The
which
may
in
all
be cited in
may
in
use a raihfiza,
as
adjectives
may
just as
well be
expected as oza;
for,
together
first'
German language
;
has allowed
itself
suffix is
.obsolete comparatives,
[G. Ed.
p, 417.]
them the
s,
which, in
.
pejus.'
alles, 'omnino,''
exists
ul/es, Uiliier,'
its origin, is
an essentially
different
(p.
word
ed.)
through
414 G.
aKKo
be observed. The
eirteSt
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
temel* and anderes,
'
405
the
aliter,''
guise
of superlatives,
namely,
again.'
Grothic,
p. 329),
and anderesf,
sort
of this
*
omit,
in
of is;
thus
miu'S,
less'
raised
anew
into
vairsiza, 'pejor,
and
may
as above yeipoiv
'amplius* (from
*
was compared with ^nrc adhara seith-r, seifhu. Mate'); and probably, also, suns,
;
statini,*
and anaks,
"
suhito.^
is
302.
The comparative-suffix
s is
the consonant
as its
The language, however, preserved meaning was still too powerfully peran,
ceived,
nd
(.
289.).
p.
As,
comes
it
to be inserted
. 86. (5.),
between two
[G. Ed.
:
418.}
vowels,
must, by
be changed into z
hence the
On
the other hand the feminine base does not develope itself from the masculine and neuter base MAIZAN as in general
in
base in
" fall," for drus-9 from drusa-s, 5. 292. 1st Note). In the nominative and genitive singular, therefore, the form maiss must have become mais ;
ahman-s comes
the accusative,
The
dative singular
is,
;
and so
40d
no feminines
which
arise
ADJECTIVES.
but to
;
i,
and Zend, an n
is
i,
added, as in
. 70.), from mats + ein, answers to the Zend feminine base of the same
thus
MAIZEIN (ei =
gariyas-i,
import, ^>A)^^J4A)9 masyShh and Sanskrit forms like jiO<<m1 from gariyas. The nominative maizei may then,
according to . 142., be deduced from MAIZEIN, or may be viewed as a continuation of the form in Zend and Sanskrit which, in the
(. (.
nominative,
is
theme
137.);
290.) is
in
which respect again the participle present to be compared. These two kinds of feminines,
but the ground of their peculiarity,
566, calls
still
III.
undiscovered (comsaid, to
756), appears to
;
be
completely disclosed
[G. Ed.
p. 419.]
and
my opinion
two
Berl, Jahrb,
May
Perhaps
my
parts of his
Grammar
since he afterwards
with
my view of the
sible, as the
matter.
I find,
sh inadmis-
two
transitions rest
distinct; of
just
Gramm. Crit.
tlie
101".)
to the Gothic.
be observed,
tliat,
on account of the
superlative,
it
sfi
remains also in
st,
not
zt.
1.
In respect
c.
;
to
Greek,
may
Grimm,
admits an original
s in the
comparative
it
so that
he wishes
the f not as a corruption of the y, as Buttmann also assumes, but as a comparative character, as in the kindred Gothic ma-iza. The Greek
ew, ov, would, according to this, appear identical with the unorganic Gothic
an
in
MAIZAN;
by
while
it
we have
assigned
it,
in ^.299., a legitimate
foundation,
tracing
back
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
has brought
its
407
"the lesser"
sibilant,
(fem.),
The Gothic
German
r,
comparatives, in
more resemblance
suffix
The comparative
exhibits
also
in
6s,
is,
the form
dz-an
it
is,
however
in oro
more
rare;
that
German
has become so
in
it
current,
more comparatives
6ra
or
(nominative
neuter), than
(nominative
feminine
and
in
ero, era.
OZAN
in Gothic
svintkdzcL,
**fortior'"'
masculine),
frodoza,
usdavdozaf
" soUicitior,'*
" erepm^.**
How,
then,
is
the 6
in
i
these
forms
to
I
be
explained,
contrasted
with
the
of IS,
IZAN?
6,
believe
only
Wa
(. 69.).
If
one
from the
is
[G. Ed.
p. 420.]
be
in
the Gothic either the A or the y (=J), which, when the A is suppressed, must be changed into a vowel. The
Gothic
d,
6z,
and
still
more
is
the Old
High German
&r
dr^
correspond,
therefore,
in
minor,
There
the Gothic, originally y and d existed in juxta-position to one another and that for minniza, " the lesser," was used
;
" tlie
more
intelligeut,"/rdrfvdza
408
ADJECTIVES.
lost the
y are represented
in Latin
plus,
One
any superlatives
comparatives in
skrit,
OSTA, nom.
6z;
6s{-s,
ish.
It
is,
how-
not frumdsts.
To
is
the
remaining
more recent
dialects
6,
and thus,
Old High German, 6st usually stands in the superwhere the comparative has 6r the Gothic furnishes two examples of this confusion of the use of language, in lasivdsts, " infirmissimus " (1 Cor. xii. 22.), and armdsfs, " miser^
:
rimus"
German
from
cognate languages;
[G.Ed.
p. 421.]
hence
sut'-iza,
SUTU*,
"late";
hardUza, from
HARDU,
"hard";
{thana-seiihs, "amplius"),
from
SEITHU,
as in the
Greek
Yj^iutv
layhu, "light."
SPEDJA,
"late"
(see
p.
358,
Note
reik'-iza,
from
6,
in
it.
The
expla-
303.
remains therefore
* The positive does not occur, but the Sanskrit sicddu-s and Greek
)eftd
tjiv-t
us to expect a
final y.
DEGREES or COMPARISON.
409
By masculine
;7,
feminine
shi,
neuter yee;
(f.) ";
as, iJnii,
lost,
and
the
dfjLetvuu;
perhaps connected in
base with
/x,
latter, so that
u,
and
this u,
lesser,
MniU "the
Mshi, neuter
[G. Ed.
bolyee,
may
(p. 396),
bolii is
For
p.
422.]
and
all
which belong
to this class
form
and the
loss of the
is
explained by .255.
(/.)
the final
ofye-i,
however,
the
definitive
pronoun
(.
284.), for
in the masculine
In the
of lyas-i,
feminine in
oryas-i^
shi it is
The a in
ifitivrnv
appears to
me
to
be privative
so that fulvav
would
seem
to be a sister
more
for
trifling."
Perhaps
this
word
is
also inherent in
omnit ; so
;
o
it
in Latia, appears as in
where
form (Dobr.
320)
With
(.
weaker
in
letter e
manner
208.
which vowels
310
p. 4
ADJECTIVES.
is
18 G. ed.); that
corresponds to the Sanskrit ^grhral baliyasi, " the stronger (f.)," and menshi, " the lesser," to the Gothic minn-izei. While,
therefore, the Sclavonic masculine and neuter have lost the *
This
feminine
shi, also,
in departure
from
(2)
and
(3),
keeps free
from the
adverbs in
like
definite pronoun.
e,
as the abbreviation of ye
256.
w.),
;
which
in
thus, wn^,
better";
"greater"
in
Servian
MSS.
Anye, bolyef
so that
which
is
final
vowel of
pache for pach-ye, for reasons which have been given before,
is,
Greek ao
The eh
itself
as a modification of
as the first
<r
from
x-
Thus the C of
a,
doll^-vee, "
dolgo {longus,
in
/ne/^cdv,
um), answers remarkably to the Greek f oKli^civ, for fxetydov, oKtyav, That, however, the
Greek
SoXt-xp^
needs
scarce to be mentioned.
Somewhat more
distant is the
Sanskrit ^fHw dirgha-s, of the same meaning, in which the frequently-occurring interchange between r and I is
It
may
properly a participle, which in the strong cases vdns, nom. masc. van for
van*, fern, ushi, neuter vat (for vas), corresponds to the Sanskrit of the
letter,
/uW f'
also, in preference to
appears in the oblique cases, because there, in the Sanskrit, after the t
follow terminations beginning with a vowel
;
so in rek-sh,
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
to be noticed
kself,
(. 20.).
411
The
of Bo}nxoif however,
shews
an organic
Let garyee, " pejti.t,'"' be compared with the Sanskrit gariyas, " gravius,"' from guru, " heavy "
according to Burnoufs correct remark from garu, as this
adjective is pronounced in Pali
through
the assimilating
u, to
The
second,
by
far the
is
shit,
The
of shii
is
the definitive
e
is ya,
After the
she
;
loss, then,
of this pronoun,
there remains
shi, sha,
and
tiiese
are abbreviations of
we have
base
SINYO
i,
defining
contracted to sini
The
rests
definite
feminine of
SINYO
on
the
special
ground
that
sibilants
gladly free
p. 424.]
y, especially
[G. Ed.
&c
(Dobr.
p. 279).
The
to
is
relation
of the
ttR
the Sanskrit
and
Zend
o9A)^^
yas
(p. 40l)
the sibilant
shi;
but for
it,
the end,
to
is
which
corresponds
the
Gothic-Lithuanian
Y^
^^ ^he
naxxt,
themes NIUY-^,
NAUY^i
tn
NOW,
the
NEO,
the
Sclavonic
NOVO.
first
(7.)
-'
This adjunct
in
YO
has
preserved
comparative
sibilant
the
masculine
.255.
Examples
tlie
of
(m.),**
this
se-
better
feminine
; :
412
iin-shaya, neuter Hn-shee
*
ADJECTIVES.
;
jydst-shii
from
piist,
theme
PUSTOt
of the
desert."
Hence
difficult
it is
clear
however
whole
gluh-shii
with
sh.
.
Even
;
accordance with
298.
as,
from
ylUbok,
deep "
(definite, gluboky-i),
sladshii
from
(3)
Masculine
sch, sh,
yeishii,
ch, ai
but after
and
themselves
of
following
y:
hence
blasch-ai'ihn,
"
"the
BLAGO),
good,"t
way
so
to
sibilant,
which
has
subsequently absorbed
(p.
the y;
compare
oA/^-tov, for
tick
6\ty-iu)v, 6?uy-yuiv
402):
as
tish-aishu,
from
(theme TICHO),
"still,"t
in
the Greek
d&<y-(Titiv
from ra^vS'
As example
of the
form
hold ko, whence in the nom. masc. A, for the suffix of the positive
for the final
vowel of the
lost primitive
.
and
an
255. (a.), or to
u,
for
TANOKO,
raw; and
i,
according to 9. 20.
with
the Greek fjS-iav and Gothic sut-iza {. 304.), far as the external diffe-
rence
may
separate
them
and
Greek
transition of the
is
more
is
difficult to recognise.
t Dobrowsky says
it is,
$. 284.'^
however, evident that the comparative has not arisen from the adjec-
tive
X
compounded with a pronoun, but from the simple indefinite one. Compare the Sanskrit adverb t&shmm, *' still, silent," and refer
to
^.265. (m.).
DEGRBES OF COMPARISON.
"wdth
yei,
^4W
may
serve.
yun-ynshii,
"junior,"
from
yun,
Whence comes, then, the yei or at (for yai), which distinguishes this formation from the second ? It might be supposed that to the
also
first
formation in
yet,
yun-yet,
"the
second
has
also
been
parative degree
in
and
as, in
my
tive f^jTO
tydru,
In
Persian the comparative is formed through ter " the better," whence behterin, " the best." Now
as. behter,
it
deserves
remark, that in Old Sclavonic the formation before us frequently occurs with a superlative meaning, while in the
more modem
= Gothic mais,
mode
according to
225. L).
The
of explanation
[G. Ed.
p. 4-26.]
which
is
foreign
the comparative
said
There
is,
how-
ever, another way namely, as an exact transmission of the Sanskrit lyas or yas, from which the second formation has only presened the
sibilant
;
letter,
may have
method,
even in
this
of yei,
its
(i/)a", is
embarrassing,
if it
owes
306.
of iya.
remark made at p. 400, that among the European languages the Greek only has preserved the
As
nasal,
which the Sanskrit shews in the strong cases of the comparative suffix iydns, I must here admit a limitation iu
fl4
ADJECTIVES.
the Greek, continues not only the nasal,* but also the comparative sibilant through
geresnis,
all
the cases.
For an example,
"the better"
(m.),
may serve,
may
so that, as according to
in Lithuanian
Greek and Gothic goodness is measured by depth, The Sanskrit com* it is measured by weight.
also,
we must observe
is
clearly
;
GERESNIA;
as
gero,
hence genitive
dative geresniam
p. 427."]
[G. Ed.
The termination m,
for which
appears for
addi-
ya might
])e
expected, the
y of which, as
corresponds
to the unorganio
which we,
p. 411,
tives.
We
regard
as a metathesis from gerens,f through which we come But we come still very near the Sanskrit gariydns.
nearer to
is often
it
that, in Lithuanian, e
y or
i (.
We
we
may
Zend
^^;c^^j4a>^ magyihi
(. 300.).
regard the
dautjians,
by Grimm
(III. 636,
Note
),
who
which etni$
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
The emphasis upon
the e of geresnis
415
be attibutable
may
theme gariydns.
Hence the astonishing accuracy may justly be celebrated with which the Lithuanian, even to the present day, continues
to
its
use
suffix iyQ,ni,
or
more rare form preferred in Zend y&hs. 3ff7. The Lithuanian superlative suffix is only another The nasal, that is to modification of the comparative.
rather
say,
left
which in the
latter is transposed,
:
is,
in the superlative,
it is,
theme in
(. 128.),
is
not declinable
added ia
hence
GERAUSIA,
geresnis,
but the
in
which forms,
is
has exercised no
euphonic influence.
"
Remark.
With
respect to
the
Sanskrit gradation-
above
think,
(. 295.)
however,
Greek
with
0-
from t (compare
. 99.),
in which
it is
to be
remarked
to
Zend
us-tema,
might be expected.
which
* Corap.
255. (p.)
all
is
in addition to
it
may
be here further
remarked, that in
probability the
also in
haitau^ haiJiaityau,
of nasal origin.
ri^
.^;o':3:
416
NUMERALS.
CABDINAL NUMBERS.
308.
I.
number
is
ference
among
this,
the
Indo-European
languages,
by-
that this
number
expressed
of the
3d
person,
whose original
abundance
satisfactory explanation
The Sanskrit eka, whose comparative we have recognised in the Greek eKctrepoj, is, in
of expressions for one.
S,
ko'pi),
signifies
whoever";
this api, if
an in11.
terrogative expression
precedes, as Bhagavad-Gita,
21,
wit Ti ^n^ TT^ c|r3r tiirivrri ?f5iT 'W^ kaihan sa purushaH Partha kan ghatayati hanti kam, " How can this person, O Partha, cause one to be slain, (or) slay one ?" The Zend aj;oa5
[G. Ed.
p.
429.]
which the
latter is
guage
is
(.
158.).
The Gothic
ain-s,
^a
(.
72.)
whence,
among others, comes the accusative masculine To this pronominal base belongs, perhaps, also
oinos,
the
latter is
lengthened
make up
means
for the
suppressed.
perly
" less,"
and
is
in order to express
**
diminution by one;
"
Htnavinshali,
uufJeviyinti," Unatrinshat,
undetrujinia"
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
not liave appeared in Latin,
417
or,
Greek 'EN
is
founded,
it is
AINA,
On
the
from
/xe/^ova,
thong more
of
its
X[%j
truly,
and has
the
the
vowel
ena.
If ovog,
number one
of
unity,
name
word
the
from
to
idea
one
might
refer
this
the
demonstrative base
v^
ana, Sclavonic
ONO
in
where
be
ovt]
corresponds
to
the
Sanskrit suflBx
if
it
and
neuter ana),
" one,"
first,"
not to
referred
to
the
medial
participle in ana, as
is
/zoij;
to mdna.
The Old
Sclavonic, yedin,
255. (n.):
p.
[G. Ed.
430.]
AINA
and Sanskrit
In
^t\
ina,
an un organic
ie
has been
prefixed.
regard to
to the
for
compare,
knowledge," with
know."
"Remark.
sions, in
The
German
very
its
much
:
concealed
as to
its
idea
they are, in
halts,
Gothic,
hanfs,
"one-handed,"
these words the
"lame," and
ber one
is
halbs, "half."
;
In
all
numka for
rule
expressed by ha
and
" one,"
which
is
founded on the
(.
universal
It
for
the
mutiition
of consonants
87
).
would
bo
rw^^^^AiO*
thBtT
sakrit), as
the
Zend
418
NUMERALS.
the Sanskrit
J,
is
,
to
which
Grimm compares
haihs with c(Bcus (II. 316), not with the purpose of following
for the
aspiration
stands
in Gothic
are,
is
wanting.
These words
that, in
both, the
word eye
only the
if
the blind
(ccecus), in
regard to etymology,
This appears
to
has
not
preserved one
eye
left.
me
of
The theme
HAIHA
or into
one
may,
;
then,
divide
HAIHA
into
HA-IHA
H-AIHA
is
compound word
compounds
portion
like
^^
first
so that of the
compounded
..seyAs
y^
is left,
I
ashi,
"eye"
which, in
manner.
has
pre-
tive base ofoculus), preserves only the first like the Gothic.
in
of the
eye,
that the a
(. 82.),
is
and that
IHA, and
this for
"^^pancha ; fidv6r from ^rtlTT chaUvdr. But if the a of HAIHA is allotted to the numeral, which appears to me more correct,
then the h in this word has not introduced any euphonic
because, with the aid of the
first
a,
member
is
taken
may
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
disposition of the h to at
4i9
was already
to
satisfied.
We
in
must
further
recall
attention
the
is
Latin
codes,
which,
by the
c,
for the c
:
must be
left to
from oculus
caucus,
if
however,
if ce is
way
of
w riting, and
the
number one
i,
is
therefore, is weakis
the
Let us
Gothic,
now examine
skein,
lie
theme
;
in
so that here, as in a two bases and a pronominal remnant, as mark of case, together. The numeral is here the most palpable ele-
more
difficult
In the
isolated state
but in com-
of
in
reduplication,
a radical vowel
"wffrvmjagmima, "
left
;
is
often
rejected;
the
Sanskrit
we went,"
gm
is
tt/tttco
tnr pat,
"to
fall," is
abbreviated to
was an
NIFA
might pass
as a transposi-
pdwi, "hand,"
with/
ing to
87.
ha again
HA-LTA, " lame " nominative halts must pass for a numeral, and ha-Ita may originally signify
In
it is
for p, accord-
"one-footed," for
(Mark
ix. 45.)
two
where
it is
said
it is
better for thee to enter into life with one foot, than
feet to
having two
very
be cast into
hell.'
It is at least
certain,
have applied
it
in this passage.
foot,
element,
however, in
HA-LTA
means the
we must remember
member
are
id
mean
" to go."
Now, there
is,
E E 3
420
Gothic, a root
NUMERALS.
LITH,
/,
indeed;
e.g. the
of quatuor appears as
in
many
original
So, then,
HA-LTA may
that
stand for
HA-LITHA
comes, Before
and
it
may
"the
LIT
also, ^if/jus,
I
which
is
moveable.
I
pass on to
explanation of hulb,
must mention
it
that J.
Grimm
of
appears to
the
me
very prosi
two parts;
to
so
that
syllable
the
si-k).
Gothic
With respect
a verb kiban,
perhaps,
itself,
portion,
he betakes himself to
silba
" to
may,
which remains in
clear that halbs
enduring."
is
Be
and
this as it
may,
be,
it is
two parts
it
origin, this
than, per-
haps,
"containing a part";
and a
fart, remnant, or
may
be therein ex-
pressed, and,
must be
It
the
"having one
eye."
In
the
Gothic,
laiba
is
means
word
half
is
"
remnant."
for
which a
peculiar
it.
simple
might
be
ex-
pected,
framed
to express
The
The Latin
for halb,
dimidivs
is
named
went.
among
this is probably
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
the origiual.
If
it is so,
421
to
^ nema appears
half, for it is
me
a regular contrac-
and
^ ima,
by the negative
na.
In Sanskrit,
^rrf*!
halh is
termed,
among
other appellations,
sdmi, in
rffxt,
which one recognises both the Latin semi and the Greek
inflection at the
beginning of comas a
pounds.
As
to its origin,
Wi
" similar,"
final
by a
vowel, and
[G. Ed.
i.
e.
half.
^fjLi,
As
to
it
follows
that the
latter is not
is
an
a derivation
and indeed
meaning
these
"a
chathru-shva,
"a
fourth part."
. 42.,
In the
accusative
words, according to
9^ia)>^<3Ai^ chathru-shum, of
which the
part,"
last
member comes
"Hfn-o-us-
aw
of rj^iavv.
means
of "the
^*5^ sa-kala-s
422
NUMERALS.
which, as signifying that which joins the parts and unites them,
is
opposed to the
German
in a
correctness of
consists,
my view of the
" part,"
latter.
The word
the latter
^ERir^ salcala
though
^ sa,
is
" with,"
and
"Sft^ kald,
so that,
if
regarded
and
the last
member
of a
compound
Thus the
may
word WK^ sam-agra, " full,*" is used especially in regard to the moon, as a body with points, i. e. that in which the two
points touch one another.
but from this the present o\o^ has rejected the middle
in Kopos, Kovpo,
compared with
oPTT^ kumdra-s, "a boy." 309. II. The theme of the declension which
is
is,
in Sanskrit, dwa,
:
terminations
the
it,
according to
. 87.,
and
inflects
in
manner of pronouns:
;
nominative
The
tvo,
common declension
base
whence
TFA
was no longer
belongs to a theme
From
tvaddt/6,
the
d of
which one
besides,
superfluous
and
by by
we
arrive at the
zueio,
according to Isid. zueiy6, aafior from fidvor; also definite, zuei^o, which,
would be tvaddyaizL
Grimm
have
CA5J)INAL NUMBERS.
423
no difference between the pronominal declension and the ordinary one, and dwau is declined like vrikdu (p. 274), due feminine like dhdre (p. 2S5), and dwe neuter like ddne
(p. 276).
and as
^^
if
it
had a
plural,
would
correspond, which
is
not requisite
if
comlatter
pounded with a
cially as
definite
pronoun, espe-
[G. Ed.
p. 435.]
a genitive
tvaizS,
To
is
sative
be
deduced through
aphaeresis
OEO.
In
of the
number two
is
208.),
is identical,
while the
255.
e.).
feminine neuter
(.
is
(. 43.),
and the v
the
to
suppose a
The Old
found, in
is
Gothic, together with tvos also tveihnos, which presupposes a masculine and
neuter base
TVEIHNA.
fern.
TVEIUXO;
nexed
HNA
^ sma,
').
discussed
s into
at . 165. &c.,
h, has in Prakrit
169.)-
On
this
Gothic
TVEIHNA
German
free
in the nomt-
zua (comp.
^. 69.).
424
old V
is,
NUMERALS.
in the
not abandoned
(.
5ua)
answers
to the
208.);
is
surpassed
by the Latin
and
the
The Lithuanian
of
has du
feminine;
with
the
closer
explanation
which,
and
we
is,
will
dwa
weakened
(comp.
to
(compare
. 6.):
is
repre-
The Greek,
5/
;
in
which 8Ft
is
inadmissible,
gives in
stead
hence,
^i^jLrjriap
the V to b; hence
AsyAj^en^.^C^-'-^'^ hipaitistnna,
and
the
others.
From
dwis
viated
bif
"twice,"
S/j:
contrast
i,
to
Sanskrit
and
Greek
re-
the
Greek
garded as an abbreviation of
as is
wont
to be done.
The German
[G. Ed.
p.
dialects,
436.]
as the initial
member of compounds
ivi-hive,
this is furnished
by the
German
qui-falt,
956.).
The adverb
more
its
according to
but
it is clear,
from the by
Old Northern
tvis-var,
that
ro
perhaps more
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
anciently to
u,
425
and thence to
(.
"a servant," genitive diwe-s, from the base DIWA. Whence comes, however, the Old Northern svar, which
occurs also in thrisvar, "thrice," and with which the English
ce
in
twice,
ihrice
is
connected.
believe
that
the
s,
var, is
the
s of
%F
divis,
/?,
and
f^TT iris,
nexed var corresponds to the Sanskrit substantive vdra, which signifies period and time; hence ekaidra, "once"
(see
Haughton), and
varamvdram, "repeatedly."
^-d-
Hence
baVi
tliis
bdr-i,
is
"once";
and as the
meaning of
word
"time," and
we have b, we
ber
in
may
the
the
Latin
names of months
i.e.
is literally
the seven-time,
But
to return to the
Old Northern
tris-var, thris-var,
accord-
which
is
not surprising,
as in the Old
High German
suffix is
first
m^riro, also
mentioned above,
it is
the comparative
no
longer
felt
the
time,
As
then, in
the
r,
and more
from
of s-var has
p. 437.]
been dropped, we
see, in the
dris,
Middle High
[G. Ed.
German
drir,
is,
in
Sclavonic,
TMI, whence
exactly the
(.
in
the
Gothic, according to
. 87.,
THRI, and
is,
base
in
it
most
is
all
of the
only to be remarked
the cases cannot be
426
NUMERALS.
is
not
iy
suppressed
before vowel
.
terminations, but
becomes
thriy-e,
(compare the
Pali,
226.)
and nominative
neuter thriy-a
Besides
thri-ns
may
be
The Sanskrit forms the genitive from an extended theme traya, hence traya-n-dm ; while the Zend thry-anm or thray-anm comes from the original base. Both languages, however, agree in
according to
this, that f% only a theme of the masculine and neuter
its
tri,
;
jpQ> thri,
is
and although,
termination,
it
numrather
ber
has
an
appellation
iri,
peculiar to
it,
which
is
is
different
tisri,
from
the
thri,
of which the
theme
Sanskrit
timr {ffm
. 1.),
a of which, in the
nominative,
;
hence
for tisaras,
[G. Ed.
p. 438.]
311.
so great that
it
is
perhaps the
fact, that
the so
number
the
three
be a weakened
the
form of
tasr-as,
and
cha prefixed to
number four would be identical which means " and," and which, in other
end of the word.
If
one wished
to press
still
lations of
may compare
drio,
the Old
to a
High German
theme DlilA,
Isidor,
which belongs
The feminine
DRIO,
theme
DRIA.
tisras is
t In the accusative,
staad according to the
as
it
must
common
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
the syllables tasa io
the
427
might not be
any language
for
theme
cha-ta-sar,
same sound.
whatever
particular
do not think, at
special
least, that
has
produced
of
original
words
the
designation
such
;
compound
and
peculiar
numbers
explain
culties
resist all
means by which
will
to
diffi
the
that
numbers, we
of speech
express the
conjecture,
the operation
with regard to
the
this
numbers
might
&c.
originally be
expounded nearly in
"it, this, that,
manner
it,
that
this,"
lie
and
and
suffice
do
in
the forms of
numerals which
before us.
But
an
obscuration
of
owing also [G. Ed. p. 439.] compound word might undertake imit.
312.
of the
number
four have,
irregularly chatur-n-dm
for
Only
"
in three
w iri,
trans-ffredi"
To
129.
is
also the
kind forms the whole singular and dual from the weak theme.
428
is
NUMERALS.
(.
introduced
246.).
In the
is
7juj(i)doA}^
chathwdr, according to
<^7au(m5oa3^ chatftwdrd ;
by trans-
as,
p.
248.
chaturndm,
we
find
^'^f^M>/(3M^ chathrusnanm
pp. 204
and
nanm);
chathware
so that the
d,
and,
Vend.
S.
As
to
the European
to
.
sister languages,
c//,
one must
labials,
expect, according
14.,
for
gutturals and
according to
87.
This j^c/wlr
is
theme by an unorganic
adduceable case.
[G. Ed.
p. 440.]
i,
The
"
original
in the
four days,"
weak theme
said that the
chatur;
whence, however,
fidvdr to fidur
like
Ihiu-s
from
ihiva-s,
gen. thivi-s
as
in
lows
the
example
of abbreviation
interior,
is
but
kefuri,
KETURIA
is
theme good"
the
p. 251, Note
;):),
KETURIE,
genitive "-'
euphonic for
KETURIA,
The
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
accusative masculine
ketuTi-Ht, keturi-s,
429
KETURI. The
GOSTI, and
CHETYBT as
;
inflects the
masculine like
hence nom.
and
But the
collective chet-
cheiverty-X, stand in
closer
agreement with the Indian strong theme '^RTT chahcdr : the Latin guatuor, also, which, in disadvantageous comparison
with the cognate languages, has lost the capability of declension,
Teo-cra/o-er, re-rrap-eg,
rest
on the strong
-<<r<4K^
^WT^
chattdrd,
semi-vowel.
form by assimilatson of the The Prakrit form, also, which I am not able
so that re-nape^, just like the Pali
its last
t
has gained
300
414 G.
ed.).
With regard
by which
this
made to
. 14.,
accommo-
[G. Ed.
itself to
p. 441
irt'avpeg,
which refers
the weak
theme ^THT chatur. With the Zend transposition of the weak theme to chufhru(p. 439 G.ed.),atthe beginning of compounds,
agrees surprisingly the Latin quadru, in quadrupes and other
words.
fWR
in
tris,
The adverbial s, by which fs^ divh, " twice," and Zend thrvi, " ihrice,'' are formed, is, in the Sanby the rule of sound mentioned
" four times," for chaturs.
;
94.
hence chalur,
That
Zend
transposed form
in the
jjo>7oaj^ chatl.rus.
already,
number
by a compulsory
and hence
fer
Lithuanian
penki* Greek
-nivre,
iEolic
iteyi-ne,
Gothic
* This
is
is
the
430
NUMERALS
The Sanskri^
Zend panchan
I
is
the theme, and the genders are not dlstint^uished in this and the following
G. Ed. p. 442.J
;
num-
bers
139.)
tive
Mis||lR
panchdndm,
Zend
^-^yAi^^AJo)
panchananm
(Vend.
S. p. 52).
By
Greek and
Latin.
Moreover,
it is
remarkrecog-
all
nise
the
final
nasal, while,
is
nevertheless,
that
of saptan.
and
in
Lithuanian,
that
of ^tf^
ashtan,
"eight"
old
{aszld,ni).
the
same
relation to
it
numbers
6, 7, 8, 9,
of which
in the declined
must be expected,
as in
FIDVORT;
and as
is
also actually
for the
High German
in this
"seven," ahtau, "eight," and taihun, "ten," only uninflected, and therefrom nmn, " nine," comes the genitive
niwx-6y
also
NIUN or
348), and
NIUNA,
NIUNI.
t The theme
ral as
PYATI,
and
is
inflected like
KOSTJ
(p.
upon
this
nume-
The same obtains with the appellations for As to the formal relation of PYA TI
panchan,
we must
is
syllable
pa
represented
TI
is
a derivational
suffix, as in
SHESHTI,
DEVfATI,
ti
"nine," and
Z)5?4Tf,
numbers
"ten," and corresponds to tbe Sanskrit suffix vihaati, " twenty," ahashti, " sixty," &c.
in the multiplied
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
before
431
it
while
has
preferred
hence
;
ervyp-av,
but
but r&rv<pe{Tt
"nkvre.
It
might therefore well be assumed, that the nasal in IndoZend numerals is a later addition, but that cha is the particle
signifying
"
number
four,
we have
is,
in
regard to
its
akin
appears to be contained.
This
would prefer regarding pan in xj^ pancha as euphonic for pam, and the m as a neuter case-sign but the pa which remains over as a pronoun, and indeed as
the case,
;
Lemg
(.
308),
]
p.
443
Five would,
therefore, literally
mean "and ^m
shash,
which
anian
is to
be added to four.*
Sanskrit
314.
VI.
Zend
avajjiccJ^ csvas,
Lithup.
szpszi.
t),
SHESHTI,
Greek
e^.
430.
Note
Latin
sex,
One
the
"cju
may
justly suppose
the guttural
which begins
also
"and,"
"hand"
(Berl. Jahrb-
five,
of the fingers
as one
and baKTvKos with the number "ten," and our "finger," Gothic /^yr so that in this word no ( =f.ngrs), theme FJGGRA, mth.Junf {fimf)
;
transition of the guttural organ into the labial has taken place.
do not
also, as
think
it
probable
iha.tjinffer in
Greek and
more
likely to be derived
from the
number
tlian
from pointing
(dcucw/u).
432
ks'hnsh, for sh is
NUMERALS.
otherwise not an
initial syllable in Sanskrit,
sibilant
which
is
only
(. 21.).
In Latin, Greek,
VII. Sanskrit
^httT sojstan,
Zend
yA5^Q>A5'
Greek
eTrra,
sedmy (theme
me
is,
to
in Sanskrit, saptama,
vonic sedmyL
osmy^
" eight,"
p.
The same
[G. Ed.
IS
444.]
number
has become
in
is
necessary
\'hile
the re-
m scarcely
occurs anywhere.
VIII. Sanskrit
from the
latter
asta,
octo.
from the
Latin
Zend
fxs^j^xs astan,
nominative m^x^m
The Sanskrit
in
ashtdu
206.)
nevertheless, ashtdu
my
opinion, just as
much
from the
resolution of the n to u, which is so common (comp. p. 415, Note ), and the lengthening of the a if it is not preferred
;
to
.
develope
206.
it
from
oshtas,
From
^'ti ashtdu
thing,"
" riches,"
while ashtdu,
ashto.'
regularly ashtabhh,
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
bhyas. ashtAsu (comp. p. 304).
433
The strength
of the du
German forms as ahtoice-n, dative, according to Notker the cardinal number from ahtowi-rriy from the theme
AHTO WL
But
if
its
base with
would be
which made
Sanskrit
its
appearance in
the
earliest
grown up with
TT'I
the theme.
IX.
navan, Zend
[G. Ed.
p.
445.3
ac<,'usative nava),
Gothic niun
i,
by contracting
so
as is
evveoc,
common,
last
66.
Latin
novem (see
315.),
Greek
DEVY^TI)
system of
I
The
to the
facile
among
between
and
As regards
the origin
acutely conjec-
50),
appears to
me
likewise
recognisng a dual in
a^htAu,
and
and
434
NUMERALS.
all
just as
as that which
new
itself
is
As a case in poiut, observe One must also admit that it would not be surprising if any former number whatever, excluding one, were named after the idea of that
sponding to the old
the Latin secundus from sequor.
which
is
this origin is
446.]
318.
X.
Sanskrit
^^^
dasan,
Zend
dasan (nominative and accusative dam), Greek ^e/ca Latin decern, Lithuanian deszimt, deszimt'-s and deszimtis (the
313.
Note
f),
Gothic taihun.
82.
:
Concerning the
ai
and u of
and
of removal
(. 87.).
therefore serves
to
as
the Gothic
regard
in
the
second
consonant
and we
have
laid
down
then, in this
may
be so explained, that
feeling,
an old guttural
to a sibilant;* in
Sanskrit (comp.
p.
415 G.
ed.).
If,
on
skrit and Zend in the case before us, and some others, we must arrive at this through the assumption that the Li^
thuanian
when corruption
But not
is
found
for
aiman
"a
in Lithuanian,
AKMEN,nova. akmu
(. 264.).
(^. 189.)
KAMEN,
nom. kamy
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
43S
had already entered into the language, which did not exist at the time when the Greeks and Romans transplanted the
Asiatic original language to Europe.
319.
XI XX. The
ITK^R
&c.
;
^^^m^
trayddaiian,
chaturdasan,
Zend yAj3A5^^AjA>A5 aevandasan (?), yAjj3Ai^^ dvadasan ;* Greek evJexa, So^eKO, rpia-KaideKa, reaaapea- [G. Ed. p. 447.]
Kai^eKa; Latin undecim, duodecim, tredecim, quatuordecim
irylika,
keturdlika;
";
Gothic
"fifteen
Old Sclavonic
&c
Remark.
Before the
These
S. p. 120).
panchadagan, "fifteen,"
The nasal
m, and
to be
an accusative
whole stands
1. c.
By this
doubt
or,
thrown on the a&vandasan given above, and perhaps aSvodagan, according to the original principle of the compound, aevadasan might
is
be expected.
ordinal aivandaio
p.
230)
it
is,
however, clearly a
false
reading
atteint ; thus,
'*
^?ojaj4^A5A5a
attingit
decimum
" ; and ia
also
number
stands
is
is
not governed
I
Grimm
tvai.
Tva may
also
and
this appears
me more
be
froci ika.
F F 2
436
comparatively recent
NUMERALS,
law for
the
alceration
that,
of sounds
(compare
. 82.),
it
may
have happened
through the
very widely-diffused disposition for exchanging the d with the not less common permutation between /, and through
gutturals and
labials
through
damn
"
which,
among
in
others, the
becomes explicable
" eleven,"
the
contained
ekd-dasan
and dwd-damn,
may
have
LIBI.
is
Through
is
genitive tva-Ub'-S,
LIBI
weakened
to
i.
The /of
and
if
explained according to
the
but according to
93".;
theme
libi
sounds,
the
objection,
which
has
been
raised
by Graff
High German Thesaurus, p. 317) against my explanation, is removed by what has been remarked in
(Old
. 99.,
for
we
refer
to fidv6r,
not
fithvdr,-
The Latin
for
Greek oydoos
that
for
eTiTOfxos,
may be
nume-
noticed,
in
support
of the
the
mary more
path;
and in cumbrous compounds the medials are admissible than the smooth letters and aspi-
rates.*
To remove
ground
of
that
taihuti,
the
objection which
is
may
be
taken
on the
the
LIBI
so
very different
that,
from
form
we may remark,
in
French
and
tvelf,
should not
make
us doubt, since
t
To
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
also,
437
like on-zey
the
is
number
ten,
in
compounds
dou-ze,
trei-ze,
one would hardly venture to pronounce the syllable ze to be akin, or originally identical with dix^ if it were not historically certain that onze, douze, &c., have
ten, that
is
is
compounded words through the great alteration of the expression for the number ten contained in them, the same holds good
with regard to our
ei/f
and
ztcolf,
in which,
perhaps, as in
may be
to
one
is
entirely obliterated.
But with
dreilf,
or similar forms in
is
If,
in which zehn
this arises
and
vier,
European compounds
as they exist
uncom pounded.
Nay, even
[G. Ed.
it
p. 449.]
could, its
must
say, in a clumsy,
awkward
fashion,
by which the
move more
compounds.
rpt^cKa)
is
freely,
The
meaning,
too, of rpia-KaiBeKa
(for
rp/V,
here just as
much
a mistake
is
On
the
number
438
thirteen,
NUMERALS.
commits a similar
error,
iri*
euphonic
is
for irayas-daaan
adapted for
is
genders,
Tlie
Latin tre-decim
therefore a
as it
member
all
of the
compound
This
lika,
Lithuanian
partly,
as the second
so that lika
The Lithuanian
libi
de-
onze, douze
and cannot,
ment with
the
simple
number
ten:
it is
car-
number.
number
feeling
compounds is still living, so that in the of the speaker the numbers wieno-lika, dwy-lika, &c.
in these
as,
perhaps, septyni
is felt to
be independent of each of
in these
the earlier
first
it
numbers
so, naturally,
compounds the
shews
is
its initial
member, a renovation
to the
Greek evScKu,
one.
member according
number
form which
is
On
dwd'dam
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
(b)
i;
439
it
for A, according to
. 4.),
and
is
as similar to
as possible, as
(f)
in
after consonants,
and iu
the
ding consonant (compare Terrapes from rerFape^), for 5td5e/ca could not be uttered. In Latin, duodecim has formed its first
member
the French has paid no regard to the form in which the prece-
the
composition entirely in the old form, only with the abbreviations which time has by degrees introduced.
With
it
refe-
would
have been, perhaps, necessary in French to have said uvze, After what has been stated, I think no deuze, iroize, &c.
one can any longer doubt, that in our
strange as
it
eilf {elf)
and
zw'dlf,
is
may
appear, a word
its
con-
number
ten,
If,
and identical in
origin
and Lithuanian
lika,
arising, that in
tations of sounds
may have
lik,
in Lithuanian a root
and in Gothic
lif
or
lib
(Gothic
which both
recog-
signify " to remain," and are also connected with each other
\ei7:o)
(Ain).
anian
lika,
Ruhig
latter
in the
meaning of these
from
^^manere."
to
number present
one, two, &c.
simple number,
e.g.
noun of
also, the
preceding
440
[G. Ed.
p. 451.]
NUMERALS.
simple number must be regulated."*
;
The
if
and
no longer
intelligible
compounds,
e.g. in
Old
numbers
The
ordi-
numbers
In the
same manner proceeds the twin sister of the Lithuanian accompanying it, but corrupted the Lettish, in which
signifies " eleven," as it appears to
d{e)!t
weenpazmit
traction of the
z,
tlie
Hka being no longer intelligible. If it was to be so Ruhig has taken it, its form would be palpable, and the Lettians might have been satisfied with it. With reunderstood, as
ference to the composition of the numerals under discussion,
Lithuanian
dialect,
formerly touched
upon
this
Grimm's view is certainly much more natural, "ten and one over, Only it would be to he expected, if the language wished to designate the numbers eleven and twelve as that which they coBtain more
two over."
than
ten, that
"and
over, or more,"
It
forget the
number
J.
and
Sclrtvonic.
Grimm,
in his
p. 246, agrees
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
subject,*
441
to
by Lenz in
closely
number
to
pronounced simply
^ dahaapproaching
at the end of the
hut
/,
r and
and
"^r^SJJ^
can be
cited,
from them
fall
it is
numerals
too,
which
d,
under
this cate-
by the prefixing of
that
if
lesser
a weak semi-vowel.
Now
a remarkable coincidence
seeing a mutation of
we were
which
is
desirous
of not
letters in this
leave,"
sponding
thought
I
Lithuanian and
had exhausted
forms.f
-vas led
I
by was
the
by perceiving
that here,
also,
number
which
has
simple
state, in
pronounced dm.%
this
But
in the
compounds under
example,
p.
discussion
for
bdrah,
27; and
Academy
Greek
for the
likit,
XetVta (cXittoj'),
Gothic
:
af-lif-na.
we
remark,
"
I
I lick,"
root
" to lick."
it is
have come
sion that
Greek XeiVw. Gothic qf-lif-nu, to the Skr. root rich, from rik, "to leave." des and reh but as these sounds are incorrect, I have J The text has altered them, a.s well as some other inaccuracies in the Hindustani numerals
which
follow.
Translator.
442
**'twelve,"
NUMERALS.
answers to the abovementioned
like
this,
Prakrit
inrtf
bdraha,
and,
has
proceeded
directly
from the
Sanskrit
original
form
?rT^ dwddasa, without heeding do, " two," and das, " ten." It
all
may
the Hindustani
compounds
which
belong to
this
subject,
We
annex,
is
also,
the
it
nineas
teen which
related to
HINDUSTANI.
ik
1.
iyd-rah,
11,
12, 13,
Skddasa
dwada'sa
frayOdasa
chaturdasa
11.
12.
13.
14.
do
2,
3,
hd-rah
H
chdr
Urah
pand-rah
s6-lah
4,
5, 6,
chau-dah 14,*
15.
pdnch
chhah
panchddasa
shodasa
snptadasa
aj}tddas'a
tinav'insati
15.
1 6.
1 7.
I6,t
17, 18,
sU
dth
7,
8,
sat-rah
athd-rah
18.
nau
das
320.
9,
10,
unnis
bis
19,
20,
vinsati
<
XX--C. The
Z(riT^
idea
ten is
expressed in Sanskrit
saiti,
by
^H sati,
or j^
sat or
fiT ti ;
in
Zend by J^J^^M
m^mm
sata,
ti
substantives
Sanskrit, the
position, or is
corruption this
is
number ends with r, althongh in the Hindttstdn! no longer present.' The Bengali has assimilated the r
chduddo ; but, as a general
rule, the Bengali in
these
compounds changes the d into r, and in all cases suppresses the Hindustani A ; as &gdro, " eleven," bdro, " twelve," th-o, " thirteen."
+ This form merits particular notice,
as,
through
its / for
the r found
lif.
elsewhere,
it
comes
and German
lika^
The
Bengali
is
sholo.
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
dependent upon
numerals
it.
443
finds
these
Compare,
SANSERTT.
20, fij^ifH vihsali,
[G. Ed.
ZEND.
p.
454.]
LATIlf.
GREEK.
visaiti,
j^jasjj^
eiKari,
vigind,
tr'ig'mta.
30,
N^nr
trin'sat,
TpiaKovra,
panchdsata,
csvasti,
TtevTrjKovra,
quinquaginta.
sexaginta.
e^rjKovra,
haptditi.
e^^oyJiKOiTa,\ spptuaginta.
oySojJKovTO,
octoginta.
80, asitU
....
navaiti.
iate-nif
90, navatU
100, sata-m.
"
evev^Kovra,
e-KaTo-v,
ti,
nonaginta.
centu-m,
Remark.
to
be abbreviations
derivations
therefore
ta,
from
is
by a
suffix
ti,
or
t:
the
former
The numerals
neuters, and occur, like the fonns in H, very frequently in the 6th and 12th Fargard of the Vendidad, but only in the accusative singular, in
also belong to a
is
theme
clear
sai.
is
from Vend. S. p. 230. (in the 7th Fargard}, where pncAa satem (panchdiatem), " fifty," stands as nominative. Fromc*ffl*/i, " sixty," haptditi, " seventy," and navaiti, "ninety,"
the theme and the neuter form
we
in the 12th Fargard, occurs several times visaiti (also written visati and
viiati) as accusative of vtsaiti,
which perhaps
form
i,
is
But
if
is
retained in
its
original
it is
a singular neuter.
is
It
final
and no other,
again found
number
member
We might
In
have expected
ivfvrjKovra the
Kovra
is
more genuine.
444
in Lithuanian and
NUMERALS.
Sclavonic, already
contained
in
the*
With
without
however,
to
the
ten
being
expressed
as
in
Lithuanian
dwideszimii
(or
tis),
"twenty,"
do not consider
more true retention of the original form, but as a new formation. The Lithuanian, too, from forty upwards, separates the two numbers, and puts the
this as a
in
which
it
is
surprising that
the plural.
is
The Gothic
comparatively
the ancient
method
in
this
it
numeral
has
lost,
category
as in
of
recent date:
thirteen, &c.,
compound,
for ten,
and
gives,
in
the
and declines
also,
this,
and in twenty,
number
genitive thriyHigvL
The
substantive
tigus,
however,
it is
is
LIBI
a,
related
medial (see
is
. 89.),
which, in taihun,
.
82.,
superfluous.
ginli,
Greek
kuti, kovtu,
which answer
better to Ssko.
Tigu-s
may
nominative
masculine
dasa-s,
which
To
its
this
M,
dasa-s,
therefore,
to pdda-St
is
related
foot."
is
tiyu-s in
regard to
as fdtu-s
"a
In
the
numbers
Twenty and
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
substantive t&iund (theme
445
TEHUNDA,
i
genitive tikundis)
" eighty,"
hence
sibun-tehund,
" seventy,"
ahtau-tihund,
niun-tehund, "ninety."
The
of this
TEHUNDA
I
stands
hold
DA to
be the ordinal
suffix,
mon
Grimm,
still
follows the
weak declension
that
hence
TAIHUNDAN, nomiit
Hereby, then,
becomes
tigus
more
probable
the
abovementioned
In our
zig
also
is
originally an ordinal
number.
itself to
New German
{dreissig),
this
or ssig
and
found
also
in
siehenzig,
achtzig,
neunzig,
Old High
zehanzog
Sanskrit-
German
{zoc\
or ~zoc, and
The
Zeud
its
is
a neuter substantive
in
my
opinion owes
number
ten (dasan),
whence
it
is
formed by the
is
the
to
suppression of the
final nasal
regular
so that
it is
be regarded as an abbreviation
of da'sata, as alx)ve,
^rftT sati,
sat,
This
abbreviation,
has given to the word the stamp of a primitive expression specially created for the idea
"a hundred," is
testimony of
all
is,
verbatim,
only in
driu-kunt,
compounds, as tva-hunda, thria-hunda, zuei-hunt, where the lesser number is likewise inflected.
sati,
jjTiT
That
also ^rfn
sat,
446
NUMERALS.
the
number
viginti,
ten,
and with
it
the lingual
would
not,
loss of the
of
the
number two
falls
it
and that
may
become weary of the initial double consonant in a word already encumbered by composition, may have disburthened
itself of the initial sound, as
we have above
as,
seen
bi
in
agreement with
in the
the abbreviation of
tioned at
p.
f^^lfff vinsati,
mennumber
much
of the
number ten
;
as the
French in the
is
and
the ze of douze
fei^ifrf
vinsati.
The Sanskrit and Zend, however, in a later corruption which is unsupported by the Greek and Latin, have caused the word dasati to be melted down to the derivation suffix
of Ircnte,
fi,
and this
ti
te
quarante, &c.
euphonic for
To
the
the Doric
Kan
of
e^iKart,
letter has
sunk
In
to a medial, as in
gintaKovTa
of the higher
numbers.
Sanskrit
the n of vimcUU
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
trinsat, chaticdrinsaf, is
447
might imagine
ginti,
HUN DA,
"one hundred,"
rest,
would stand in
proper place.
For the
chatwd.
rimat shews
its relation to
312.);
my
ened in
Tpta,
and originally,
also, in
that,
in
Sanskrit, the
that, in
Greek, the
number, wliich
is
also percep-
of the
Zend
visaiti, as in
the long a of
panchdsaU ^^^^i-UMi^^J^ii panchdsatem from panchan 319.), and to which again the length of TrevTr^Kovra,
runs
parallel.
guinquaginta,
The
"^
Zend
chathirare,
iu
(Vend.
S. p. 3So), is
likewise
stronger
than
.
cha-thru-sata,
312.
As as^mm
a neuter, to
more
authenticated.
An
merely
facilitated
might be
assumed in
the theme
is
i^y]KovTa,
;
would at
least
be very superfluous in
TPI
and
it is
a lengthened plural
much more probable that e^rj, too, neuter. Compare e^a-K/j, e|a7rXoGc,
7ro7\Xd, p.
401, G. ed.
The
manner
IP
for a is
explained
by
$. 4.
As
vowel
448
NUMERALS.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
321. While, in designating the
number
Sanskrit Tniin^^
Zend
FRUMAN,
140.), or,
frumisf-s. Old
High Ger^r,
man SristSr,
fore")*
usually indefinite
" be-
Greek TTjooTOf, Old Sclavonic pervyi. TT^ff prathama, from the preposition pra, has been already discussed (p. 393
G.
ed.)
;
so the
Greek
irpo,
-npoiTOi is
ing preposition
accords
with the Sanskrit prd in prdtar, "in the morning" (see p. 392
G.
ed.).
The
suffix
TO
is
tarna or thama,
W^
and as also in Latin in the form of TU in quartus, quintus, Kcxlust while in Greek this abbreviation extends to all the
ordinal numbers, exclusive of Sevrepog, e^Bofxog, and oy$oog.
TA
which kind of
division,
also,
yt^^IT
pancham^-s,
RTTT
navama-s, and 55R*{[ damma-s, partake, which therefore complete, by their suffix, the iha of chaturtha, so tliat both united
present
tlie
perfect word.
its
Tiie
Sanskrit,
only that
i^Gaj^q)ajv haptatli6
and
ORDINAL ^^JMBERS.
that
also
4'(o^><^ pug-dho, "
449
belongs
it
the
fifth,"
more
to
comes nearest
is
more
sister,
[G. Ed.
the
last,
from bandh),
corre-
as in
"ONYX,
" a nail."
In the
numbers from eleven to twenty the superlative suffix, in Sanskrit and Zend, is abbreviated still more than in the
simple
^^
all
the deri-
fall
the
derivation
as,
^TT^ dwd-
^R^^f chaturdasa^
MMXi^>?<3M^
chathrudasa,
*'
the
fourteenth."
is
The Latin
comparatively of
were, exhausted
the
effiart
these heavier forms has cost it; and has given up the ana-
German
hence,
numbers have
compound
in
lif:
An
imitation,
how-
in the
Sanskrit-Zend dasa
is
forms
vowel
is left
the Latin
is
much
;
truer colleague to
Asiatic sisters
and
it
superlative suffix
G G
NUMERALS.
450
[G. Ed.
p. 460.]
trinsattama-s.*
ceding vowel
is
e.
Compare, in
.
298.
more rare
i^Tj
superlative
suffix,
correspond-
ishtha, in
of icrroq, as in sKuaTog,
Here
the
t/, at,
and vra
number are rejected. The German languages employ in like manner the superlative suffix in numbers from twenty upwards hence, Old High German dri-zugCsto, " the
of the cardinal
:
thirtieth,^ fior-zugdsto,
TuiN or DAN,
in Gothic, corresponds,
(. 91.),
to
285.),
which
1
is
New German
FIMFTAN,
322.
tri,
the
iiya;
hence dwi'
ter-
suffix is easily
this and the higher numbers may follow the analogy of In Zend "the eleventh"; hence, also, vinsa, trihs-a, &c. I am unable to quote the ordinal numbers from twenty upwards, t In compounds like/m/?atoi^wn</a, "the fifteenth," the lesser number has either preserved the original theme while still free from the n, which
* However,
ekuda'sa-s,
lately,
for
the lesser
number
in these
compounds does
remarked
oxjiwfta
is
FIMFTAN^
May
since,
(Borl. Ann.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
fius,
all
451
ireViya,
as also in the
which, like
however, the particular cAse occurs, that the defining element is brought with it direct from the East, while the iyi of
cheiicerfyi
and others, in
wliich, in like
manner, a connection
with ttH tiya might be easily conjectured, is, in fact, conof ^w^ chaturtha, reraprog, nected with the -^I tha, TO,
TU
.
quartus,
TO
according to
255. {d.\
no longer exists. The same relation, then, that chetiertyt, shesfyl, have to chaturtha-s, shashtha-Sf sedmyt, osmyt, have to "mm saptama, ^TPH ashtama ; and
under
this category
pertn/h " the first," to
pressions, in
Sclavonic,
purva, ^ remain
(.
" the
former
which exrejected
;
Y^
282.).
hence
M^i^jl bitya, xi^^^J)<^thriiya^ in which it is to be remarked that the y, which is thus by syncope united with the < at a
comparatively later period, has gained no aspirating influence To this Zend tya corresponds, by similar suppression (. 47.).
of the middle
i,
the Gothic
DJAN
(from dya,
285.) in
THRIDYAN,
Hit'h
nom.
dritto,
of
German
Kpetnuv, mentioned at
the
402.
Still
however,
lies
comparison with
Sittos, Tpirros
(5<(ro-of, Tp/o-o-oj),
[G. E<L
p. 462.]
their origin,
one with the corresponding Sanskrit-Zend ordinal and, in respect of their reduplicated consonant, have numbers; the same relation thereto that the Old High German dritto has
to
the Gothic
thriyda.
Regarding
(see p.
"duorum* number is supplied 377), Old High German andar. Our zweiter, however, is a new
tvaddyi,
ttoryi (see
.
297.J
452
answers, in respect to
NUMERALS.
its
derivation, to the
Greek
SevTcpo^,
to
which we have, in
b ydre*,
323.
"two
years."
We
agreement of
not occur
all
we
NOMINATIVE FEMININE.
OR. DOR. LATIN.
TTpOiTa,
ZEND.
GOTHIC.
LITHTJANIAIf.
OLD SCLAVONIC.
perva-pa.
vtora-ya.
treti-ya.
prathama.
dwitiya.
trittyd.
frathema.
bitya.
prima.
fruma.
anthara. thridy6\
pirmuf
anlrd.
irechii.
^evTtpa, altera.
Tpira,
tertia.
thritya.
chaturtha^
tuirya.
Ttrapra, quarta.
TTfuirra,
ifidvdrdff). hetunrtcLt
cheiverta-ya.
panchama.
shashtha.
pugdha.
cstvd*
haptatha.
quintOf
$exta.
fimfio\
saihttff.
penkth.
sziszta.
pyala-ya.s
sitesla-ya.
KTa,
e/3$o/xa.
taptamd.
Mshlamdy
septima.
octava.
(^sibund6*)f sekma.
sedma-ya.
asiema.
oySod,
evvdra.
ahtudo.
aszma.
dewinta.
deszimth.
toienolikta.
osma-ya.
devyata-ya.^
desyata-ya*
navamaf
dasamd.
ikadasa.
vintati tamd.
nduma.
das6ma.
nana.
decima.
,
niund6\
taihund6\
SfKora,
yedina-ya-naderyat
vtoraya-na-desyaty
et/coora.
vtcesima.
dwideszimti.
We should
'
read thus
Sclavonic jjctt?^,
pervaya,
*
as
it
were, prepared.
masc. turiya-s, on which
is
Also turiydf
tiiirya,
masc. tuiryo.
The
same with the remaining portion of the word, and thereby support the conjecture expressed at $.311. The t ofpyataya, vas&c. pyatyiy has nothing in common with the t of the cardinal numberpi/a^i/; the proper primitive \ipya (see p. 430 Note f), whence FYATI by the suffix TI, and PfATO, fem. PYATA, by the The same holds good with regard to uffix TO, fem. TA (see $. 322.).
'^
By
MiMMi^
cuvas.
n, see . 317.
See
p.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
" Remark.
453
been weakened to
the
pro,
is,
As the as
i
old
a of the preposition
U pra has
to
in quinque,
answering
pavchan
but
and
it
Roman
soil,
as
similar weakening of
irpi'v,
which
is
hereby, in like
preposition
tt/do.
as the
be-
suffix.
In Lithuanian the
itself
of
also
into
before
'
To
the
same
by,
the
same
and Lithuanian do
from, and in
tive
'
&c, the
original vowel
has remained,
this form,
m is
contained.
On Upra
is
'
before,'
82.
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
324,
The adverbs
"four
ed.).
:
which
express
the
ideas
"twice,'
discussed
"thrice,"
(p.
times,"
have
been
already
435 G.
Let
iew of them
SAXSKRIT.
XXSD.
bis,
GSEEE.
Or?*
lATtW.
his.
ier.
OLD KORTHERir.
ivis-var (p.
ihris-var.
dwis.
tris.
436 G. ed.l
thris.
To/f,
chatur,*
chaihrus.
quater.
Acawding
45l
The Greek forms
gard to their
to the
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
in k/j like rerpaKis, irevraKt^, &c., in re-
suffix,
class,
but
Ktq
answers
a being weakened to i ; this sas, however, forms adverbs from words which express a great number, multitude or number, as katasast
Sanskrit sas
the
"by hundreds," sahasrasas, "by thousands," bahusast "of many kinds," ganasas, " in swarms." The original idea of
the suffix in both languages
satasas is
is that of repetition,
but
e.g,
an
by the numeral.
like quinquies,
How
sexies,
stands
it,
forms
&c. ?
nor with
of the
those in Ktg
toties, quofies,
(sas),
by suppression
guttural
but as
probably
Tideig
(.
138.),
therefore
es,
into conjunction
with
the Sanskrit
signifies,
'*
vant (in
the weak
cases vat),
which
where,
in
gifted with,"
is,
in
"how much,"
for
chivans,
Thi3
tive base
ki,
weak
;
form
kiyat, iyat
nominae.g. in
answers theree/y),
fore to the
/ueA/Toe/f,
Greek
ENT
(nominative masculine
which
the
its
way
Now
quot,
comes
the question
tot-tens,
quoti-ens,
or
quot-iens?
would have
preserved, in
combination, the
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
which
skrit
455
?ffTf
kati,
**
how much
and the
however,
and
ioti,
" so much."
In
the division
tens,
toi-iens,
we
the abovementioned
is
so much,''
contained, but in
suffix is still
per-
Under
case,
[G. Ed.
p. 466.]
former
however, the
i,
as quinqxii-es,
ocii-es,
would have
and that of
sexies as
from
as,
^^ch^KI
krit,
"making,** which in
the annexed vas,
for s (compare
.
sakrit,
sufficient of itself:
t
vat,
which
should be given above as the weak theme for vant ; as, idvatf
"so
kart
much," ydvat,
(. 1.)
"how much"
connected
(rel.)*
With
krit
from
is
clearly
number,
is
make up
for
du
is
kartu,
"twice"
(accusative
du),
kartus,
"three
times."
common with
the nnmerals
l|<di
(5. 313.),
;
while
Latin quot,
tot,
like quinque,
&c.,
clinable.
456
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
it
krit
on account of .
255. (L):
however,
is to
V.
be deduced from
"^f^
krUwas, by sup-
pression of the
.271.
325.
With regard
suffix VT
to the
y for as compare
Through the
sound of the
suflix into
of organ in aspirates, as in
OPNIX
for
OPNI0, and
in the
forms mentioned at
[G. Ed,
p. 467.]
p.
401 G. ed.
Compare,
^''"XO.
flW
dwi-dhd,*
ftnn iri-dhd,
^iT^T chatur-dhd,
t/oZ-^o.
rerpa-xo^
aevra-^a.
XRWT pancha-dhd,
SN1> OF VOIb
1.
14,
Hkkriktta Street, Covent Garden, London 20, South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.
;
)ATALOGUE
OF
SOME WORKS
NORGATE.
to the
PUBLISHED BY
WILLIAMS AND
gnostic's Progress,
Unknown.
268 pp.
^s
Crown
tlantis,
8vo. cloth
Emanating from the or. Ideals Old and New. ; belonging to the Great Races, who conducted the past Course By a Disciple of of the Civilization, Culture and Education of Humanity.
the
Masters of
Buckle.
New
Man
Crown
8vo. cloth
4s 6d
First
from the
German
Edition.
Work,
Menzies.
an
Library,
eard (Rev. Chas.) Lectures on the Reformation of the Sixteenth Century in its Relation to Modem Thought and Knowledge. Hibbert (Cheap Edition, 4? 6rf) 8 vo. cloth. Lectures, 1883. 10 s 6d
sard
(Rev. Chas.)
Port Royal, a Contribution to the History of Cheaper Edition. 2 vols. Crown Svo. i2s
2ard
(Rev. Dr.
J.
R.)
The Autobiography
of Satan.
Crown
cloth
ible for
75
Svo. 6d
to the
People. Critical, Historical, and Moral Hand-book Old and New Testaments. By Dr. H. Oort and Dr. J, Hooykaas, with the assistance of Dr. Kuenen. Translated from the Dutch by the Rev. Vols. L to IV., Old Testament, igs; V. VI., New P. H. Wicksteed. Testament, 1 2.y. Maps. 6 vols. Crown Svo. cloth 31J
Young
Edited leek (F.) Lectures on the Apocalypse. Svo. cloth Edited by the Rev. Dr. S. Davidson. Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
by T. Hossbach.
los 6d
Cobbe
(Miss F. P.)
The Hopes
of the
Human
With
a
Here. Essays on the Life after Death. reference to Mr. Mills' Essay on Religion.
cloth
Second Edition.
Cobbe
(Miss F. P.)
Darwinism
in
Dreams, the
Cobbe (Miss
delivered in
F. P.)
The
Duties of
Clifton.
Women.
London and
Second Edition.
in
Cobbe (Miss
and Death.
F. P.)
The Peak
Svo. cloth
Crown
F. P.)
Cobbe (Miss
Svo. cloth
Broken Lights.
An
Crown
e^s
Cobbe (Miss
F. P.)
Dawning
New
Lights. Reformation.
An
Svo. cloth
Cobbe (Miss
F. P.)
Alone
to the Alone.
several Contributors.
'Ihird Edition.
Crown
^s
Corvichen (R.)
Svo. cloth
The Philosophy
of
all
Post
7o
6d
Davids (T.
W.
Buddhism.
Hibbert 10s 6d
arranged as Private Meditations before a Echoes of Holy Thoughts First Communion. Second Edition, with a Preface by the Rev. J. Hamilton Thom, of Liverpool. Printed with red lines. Crown Svo. cloth 2s 6d
Evolution of Christianity, The.
with Dissertations
in
By Charles
Gill.
Second Edition,
12s
answer
to Criticism.
Svo. cloth
Ewald (Professor H.) Commentary on the Prophets of the Old TesTranslated by the Rev. J. Fred. Smith. Vol. L Yoel, Amos, Hozea, and Zakharya, 9-11. Vol. IL Yesayah, Obadya, Micha. Vol. IIL Nahum, Sephanya, Habaqquq, Zakharya, (12-14) Yeremiah. Vol. IV. Hezekiel, Yesaya (40-46) with Translation. Vol. V. Haggai, Zakharya, Malaki, Jona, Baruch, Appendix and Index. Complete in 5 vols. Svo. each 10s 6d cloth Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
tament.
(Poetical
Books
Old Testament.
Svo. cloth
Part
i.)
2 vols.
(Poetical
8vo. 10s 6d
Part
2.)
Translated
by the Rev,
J,
Frederick Smith.
An
Account of the
Toledoth Jesher, tvvo Hebrew Gospels circulating in the Middle Ages, and extant fragments of the Gospels of the first three Centuries of Petrine and Pauline origin. By the Rev. S. Baring Gould. Crown 8vo. cloth. 7^ 6d
Hanson
(Sir
Richard)
The
Apostle Paul
Church.
and
the
Preaching of
Sir Richard Davis Hanson, Chief Justice of South Australia, Author of " The Jesus of History," " Letters to and from Rome," etc. 8vo. cloth (pub. at 12^) ys 6d
Christianit)^ in the Primitive
By
Hausrath.
History of the
New
Testament Times.
The Time
of
Jesus, by Dr. A. Hausr.\th, Professor of Theology, Heidelberg. Translated, with the Author's sanction, from the second German edition by the Revs. C. T. PoYNTiNG and P. Quexzer. 2 vols. Svo. cloth 21* Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
Home
(Rev. W.) Religious Life and Thought. By William Horne, ^LA., Dundee, Examiner in Philosophy in the University of St. Andrews Author of " Reason and Revelation." Crown Svo. cloth 35 6d
i8mo. cloth
to the Music.
i^
5^ ^d 6d 6d
oj
i8mo. cloth
is
2s
Book
of Prayer in 30 orders of
Worship,
i2mo. cloth
2s
the Chants.
i8mo. cloth
in its
connection with
the National Life of Israel, and related in detail. Translated from the German by A. Ransom and the Rev. E. M. Geldart. In 6 vols. Svo. cloth each los 6d Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
) The Religion of Israel to the Fall of the Jewish Dr. A. Kuenen, Professor of Theology at the University, Leyden. Translated from the Dutch by A. H. May. 3 vols. Svo. cloth 31s 6d Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
State.
Kuenen (Dr.
By
Delivered in Oxford and London. By A. Kuenen, LL.D., D.D. 6' Professor of Theology at Leyden. Hibbert Lectures, 1882 loj
An
Essay
i,s
Three Chapters.
(R.
8vo. cloth
Mackay
W.)
8vo. cloth
Martineau (Rev. Dr. James) Religion as Affected by Modern Materialism and Modern Materialism its Attitude towards Theology. A Critique
;
:
and Defence.
8vo.
is
6d
15 i*
The
Svo.
God
considered.
Svo.
Mind
a Quarterly
Contri-
butions by Mr. Herbert Spencer, Professor Bain, Mr. Henry Sidgwick, Mr. Shadworth H. Hodgson, Professor Flint, Mr. James Sully^ the Rev. John Venn, the Editor (Professor Croom Robertson), and others. Vols. I. to X., 1876-85, each 125. Cloth, 135 6d 12s per annum, post free
Miiller (Professor Max) Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Religion, as illustrated by the Religions of India. Hibbert Lectures, 1878. Svo. cloth 10s 6d
Order.
Asiatic Cloth,
i8s
Peill
(Rev.
G.)
The
Three-fold
Svo. cloth
Basis
Restitution.
3*
Second Edition.
Crown
Religion of Philosophy ; or. The Unification of A Comparison of the Chief Philosophical and Religious Systems of the World, made with a view to reducing the Categories of Thought, or the most general terms of existence, to a single principle, thereby establishing i6s a true conception of God. Svo. cloth
The
Pfleiderer (O.) Paulinism. Essay towards the History of the Theology of Primitive Christianity. Translated by E. Peters, Esq. 2 vols.
Svo. cloth
An
21*
Paul on the Development of Christianity. Translated by the Rev. J. Smith. Hibbert Lectures, 1885. Svo. cloth
Frederick
10* 6d
Medieval Thought,
10* 6d
Protestant
Commentary,
Short,
on
the
New
Testament, with
From the German of Hilgenfeld, HoltzGeneral and Special Introductions. mann, Lang, Pfleiderer, Lipsius, and others. Translated by the Rev. F. H. each 10^ 6d Jones, of Oldham. 3 vols. Svo. cloth Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
Renan
of
the Influence ot the Institutions, Christianity, and the Development Translated by the Rev. C. Bearx>, of Liverpool. (Cheap Edition, 25 6d) 8vo. cloth
(E.)
On
Rome on
6d
Religion,
10s
6d
Reville
(Prof. Albert) Prolegomena of the History of Religions. By Albert Reville, D.D., Professor in the College de France, and Hibbert Lecturer, 1884. Translated from the French. With an Introduclos 6d 8vo. cloth tion by Professor F. Max Muller.
Samuelson
(Jas.) Views of the Deity, Traditional and Scientific ; a By James Samuelson, Contribution to the Study of Theological Science. Esq., of the Middle Temple, Barrister-at-Law, Founder and Former Editor of 4s 6d Crown 8vo. cloth the Quarterly Journal of Science.
Savage (Rev.
M. J.) Beliefs about the Bible. By the Rev. M. J. Savage, of the IJnity Church, Boston, Mass., Author of " Belief in God," " Beliefs about Man," &c., &c. 8vo. cloth 7* 6d
The Cuneiform
Inscriptions
Translated with Additions by the Author, by the Rev. O. C. house. Vol. I. with a Map. 8vo. cloth
6d
Schurman
Kantian Ethics and the Ethics of Evolution. by J. Gould Schurman, M.A., D.Sc, Professor of Logic and Metaphysics in Acadia CoUege, Nova Scotia. Published by the Hibbert
(J. G.) Critical Study,
Trustees.
8vo. cloth
jS
Seth (A.)
The
By Andrew Seth, Assistant to the Professor and Metaphysics, Edinburgh University. Published by the Hibbert
8vo. cloth
Trustees.
55
Sharpe
its
Literature, with
Fourth Edition.
487 pp.
8vo.
ys
6d
Sharpe
(S.) Bible.
The Holy
;
Bible, translated
by Samuel Sharpe,
Fourth Edition of the being a Revision of the Authorized English Version. 4J 6d Old Testament Eighth Edition of the New Testament. 8vo. roan
Sharpe
New
Translated
from Griesbach's
is
6d
Smith (Rev.
J.
Fred.)
German
By
Masters.
<^s
the Rev. J.
Frederick Smith,
of Mansfield.
Crown
8 vo. cloth
Spencer (Herbert) Works. The Doctrine of Evolution. First Principles. Sixth Thousand
Principles of Biology.
Principles of Sociology. 2 vols,
Principles of Psychology.
8vo. cloth
i6s
vols.
Principles of Sociology. Vol. II. Part r Principles of Sociology. Part 2 Vol. II, Ecclesiastical Institutions. Principles of Sociology. Vol. II. Part 3 The Data of Ethics. Principles of Morality. Fourth Thousand. Part
Political Institutions.
Ceremonial Institutions.
Spencer (Herbert)
The Study
of Sociology.
the Ninth), with a Postscript. 8vo. cloth Education (Cheap Edition, Seventh Thousand, 2s 6d) Third Edition Essays. 2 vols. Essays (Third Series). Third Edition
Spencer (Herbert)
paper, in cloth
The Man
versus
the State,
Spencer
Dissenting
(Herbert) from
The Philosophy
it.
(Republished
of from
M. Comte
" The
Reasons
or on better 25 6d
for
the
of
Classification
Spinoza.
6d Essays, by Professors J. Land, Kuno Fischer, Van Vloten, and Ernest Renan. Edited, with an Introduction, by 8vo. cloth Professor W. Knight, of St. Andrews. 55
Sciences," &c., 1864)
Four
The
Objectivity of Truth.
By George
J.
Stokes,
;
late B. A., Senior Moderator and Gold Medallist, Trinity College, Dublin Hibbert Travelling Scholar. Published by the Hibbert Trustees. 8vo. cloth ^s
Strauss
(Dr.
D. F.)
New
Life of Jesus,
2 vols. 8vo. cloth
for
the
People.
The
24J
Taine
(H.)
English Positivism.
Translated by T, D. Haye.'
Second Edition.
Mill.
35
Talmud of Jerusalem.
Dr. Moses Schwab, of the Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris. Foolscap 4to. Treatise of Berakhoth (Blessings).
The
gs
Tayler (Rev.
8vo, cloth
An
Attempt
its
relation to
three.
New
Edition.
55
Ten
Services of Public Prayer, taken in Substance from the " Common Prayer for Christian Worship," with a few additional Prayers for particular Days. Crown 8vo. cloth, 2s 6d; with Special Collects 3s 32mo. IS; with Special Collects i* 6d Psalms and Canticles. (To accompany the same.) Crown 8vo. is 6d With Anthems 2d
Thoughts
for every
day
in
the Year.
By the author of Spiritually-minded Persons. Crown 8vo. cloth Printed within red lines.
Theological Translation Fund.
my
Relations."
2s
6d
Series of Translations,
by which
the best results of recent Theological investigations on the Continent, conducted without reference to doctrinal considerations, and with the sole purpose of arriving at truth, will be placed within reach of English readers. literature which is represented by such works as those of Ewald, F. C. y Baur, Zeller, Roth, Keim, Noldeke, &c. in Germany, and by those of Kuenen, Scholten, and others in Holland.
The Prospectus, Three Volumes annually, for a Guinea Subscription. bearing the signatures of Principal Tulloch, Dean Stanley, Professors Jowett, H. J. Smith, Henry Sidgwick, the Rev. Dr. Martineau, Mr. W. G. Clark, the Rev. T. K. Cheyne, Principal Caird, and others, may be had.
23 Volumes published (1873 to 1%%^) for ii. lis. Protestant Commentary, a Short, on the New Testament. 3 vols. Keim's History of Jesus of Nazara. 6 vols. 2 vols. Baur's Paul, his Life and Work. 2 vols. Baur's Church History of the First Three Centuries. Kuenen. The Religion of Israel. 3 vols. Ewald. Prophets of the Old Testament. 5 vols. Ewald's Commentary on the Psalms. 2 vols. Book of Job. Ewald. Bleek, on the Apocalypse. Zeller, on the Acts of the Apostles. 2 vols. Hausrath's History of the New Testament Times. 2 vols.
Pfleiderer's Paulinism.
2 vols.
2 vols.
Reville's
Prolegomena of the History of Religions. Schrader's The Cuneiform Inscriptions and the Old Testament.-
[n the Press.
Pfleiderer's Philosophy of Religion. 2 vols. All new Subscribers may purchase any of the previous volumes at "js instead of selection of six or more volumes from the list may also be 10s 6d per volume. had at the Subscribers' price, or 7^ per volume.
Vickers (J.) The History of Herod or, Anothef- Look at a Emerging from Twenty Centuries of Calumny. Crown 8vo. cloth
;
Man
6s
Translated afresh
cloth
22s 6d
Wright (Rev.
cloth
J.)
Crown
Svo.
3s
Preceded by Dr. Fr. Overbeck's Introduction to the Acts of the Apostles from De Wette's Handbook. Translated by Joseph Dare. 2 vols. Svo. cloth 21s Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
critically investigated.
and Norgate.
PAMPHLETS.
Athanasian Creed. Two Prize Essays. By C. Peabody and C. S. Kenny Bastard (T. H.) Scepticism and Social Justice Beaumont (Rev. G.) Science and Faith. Discourse Beard (C.) William Ellery Channing. In Memoriam. Sermon. i2mo.
\s
is is
Beard (C.) The Kingdom of God. A Sermon Beard (C.) The House of God, and two Sermons by Rev. R. A. Armstrong i^ Bennett (W.) Popular Contributions towards a Rational Theology is 6d Butler's Analogy A Lay Argument. By a Lancashire Manufacturer is Carpenter (Prof. J. Estlin) The Church of England during the Middle Ages i^ Drummond (Prof. J.) Philo and the Principles of the Jewish- Alexandrine Philosophy i^ Drummond (Prof. J.) Religion and Liberty is Gordon (Rev. A.) Gospel Freedom. A Sermon 6d Hopgood (Jas.) Disestablishment and Disendowment of the Church of
:
6d 6d
England
Hopgood
(Jas.)
An
Attempt
6d 6d
is is
is
Infinite Love.
Howe
(Rev. C.)
The Athanasian
Journey to Emmaus.
Lisle (L.)
of
its
By
a
:
Modern
2*
two
6d 6d
i^ is
i^
Marriage of Cana, as read by a Layman Martineau (Rev. Dr. James) New Affinities of Faith Union. 1 2mo.
Must God
Annihilate the
Wicked
A
:
Reply
Odgers (J. Edwin) Our Church Life its Significance and Value Reasonable Faith, A, the Want of our Age Sharpe (S.) Journeys and Epistles of the Apostle Paul Sidgwick (H.) The Ethics of Conformity and Subscription Tayler (Rev. J. J.) Christianity: What is it? and What has it done? The Recent Prosecutions for Blasphemy Who was Jesus Christ ? 8vo. sewed Wicksteed (Rev. P. H.) The Ecclesiastical Institutions of Holland. 8vo.
6d
i.y
is
6d
i^
is
is
6d
i*
HENRIETTA STREET, CO VENT GARDEN, LONDON; AND 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.
Oniversity of Toronto
Library
POCKET
Acme Library Card Pocket
Under Pat. "Ref. Index FOe"